T53-L-703 MM

HoneyweII
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GAS TURBINE ENGINE
MODEL NO.
T53-L-703
PARI NO.
1-000-060-23
MARCH 30,1990
REVISION 2, SEPTEMBER 30, 2002
DlQltil^sign
ed bvJ3ite
Muñes M
C^N: ehfeJaito Muñoz
ernát^taatin£e4nsz
M, REPORT NO. 290.2
HoneyweII HoneyweII Engínes
Phoenix, Arizona
TO; HOLDERS OF GAS TURBiNE ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL REPORT NO. 290.2 DATED
September 30, 2002
THiS REVtSED PUBLICATION IS ISSUED FOR USE IN SUPPORT OF THE FOLLOWING AIRCRAFT.
ENGINE PART NO ENGINE MODELNQ. AIRCRAFT APPLICATION
1-000-060-23 T53-L-703 Bell AH-1 Series

Bell UH-1 Series
REVtSION NO. 2 DATED SEPTEMBER 30. 2002
This is a COMPLETE reissue. Due to the extent of the changes involved in this revisión, this publication has
been repnnted in its entirety. Piease remove and discard all pages of prior issues and replace with this issue.
Temporary Revlsions 2 through 70 are incorporaled in this issue.
Inquires regarding distribution of this publication should be directed to:

HoneyweII Aerospace Services
Data Distribution, M/S 26-08/2101-201
P.O. Box 52170, Phoenix. AZ 85072-2170
Teiephone: (602) 365-2493, FAX: (602) 365-5577 or (602) 365-2832
Inquires of a technical nature regarding this publication should be directed to:

HoneyweII Engines, Systems & Services
Customer Information Center
Attn: Dept 66-20/503-218
P.O. Box 52181, Phoenix, AZ 85072-2181
Teiephone: 1-800-338-3378, FAX: (602) 231-2481
HIGHLIGHTS
All references to AlliedSignal Engines were changed to HoneyweII Engines, Systems & Services.
All table of contents revised to reflect changed pages and to incorpórate TR 30 through 43.
All figure keys revised from single column to double column.
All list of effective pages revised to reflect changed pages.
All consumables were checked and updated as required.
Chaoter/Section/Pages Descriotion of Chanae
Record of Revisions Updated to reflect current revisión.
Record of Temporary Revisions Updated to reflect current temporary revisions.
Page 1 of 9
REPORT NO. 290.2-HIGHLIGHTS Sept 30/02
HoneyweII Engines
HoneyweII Phoeníx, Arizona
Chaoter/Section/Panes Descriníion nf Ohanae
Service Bulletin List Updated to reflect current builetins.

70-45-01
All Pages
Deleted all data and placed in Standard Practices
Manual.
71-00-00
Page 1 Incorporaled TR 8 to revise paragraph 2.A.(1) WARN-
ING and NOTE.
Page 5 Incorporaled TR 65.
Pages 7 and 8 incorporated TR 19 and 20.
Page 10 Incorporated TR 61.

Page 11
Changed 75-10-2 to 75-10-02 and 73-20-1 to
73-20-01 in steps (4) and (5). Added chip detector
to step C.(2).
Page 12
Revised steps D.(4), (5) and (6). Changed tool kit
part numbers step E.
Added NOTE, changed tool kit part number and con-

Page 13
tents and deleted steps (a), (b) and (c).
Page 15
Deleted steps (1)(d) and (i). Deleted filter inspection
part numbers steps (2) and (3). Deleted step (4) en-
tirely.
Page 16 Revised step (5).
Pages 26 through 40 Added new procedures.
72-00-00
Page 1
Incorporated editorial notes.
Page 3 Revised table for fuel and oil type.
Page 18 Revised Figure 8.
Page 117 Editorial changeto step D.(2)(b).
Page 201 Deleted tool number in Table 201.
Pages 209 through 218 Incorporated TRs 50, 56, 58, 66, 67 and 68.
Page 217 Incorporated TR 26 altérnate cleaning Solutions.
Page 305 Revised part number is step (3)(a)-
REPORT NO. 290.2-HIGHLIGHTS

HoneyweII Engínes
HoneyweII Phoenix, Arízona
Chanter/Sfirtinn/PaoRs Descriotion of Channe
Editorial changes to step l.(1)(e) and added altérnate

Pages 312 and 313
method.
Page 401 Revised Item reference in NOTE.
Page 405 Editorial changes to steps (15) and (19).

Page 410
Revised paragraph 6.A.(3)(e) reference to paragraph.
Editorial changes to paragraph 7.B.{4) and (5).
Page 411 Revised torque valué in step (12).
Pages 601 through 614 and 616 Incorporated TR 3.
Pages 618, 619 and 620 Incorporated TR 9.
Page 621 Added reference to step (6)(a).
Pages 623 and 624 Incorporated TR 44,
Pages 629 and 630 Incorporated TR 63.
72-10-01
Page 208
Added seáis into torquemeter cylinder.
Revised step (7)(b). Incorporated correct type of

Page 219
gloves tn WARNING.
72-30-01
Page 203
Revised step procedures for step B-(3).
Page 204 Revised procedures for steps B.(4) and (5).
Page 208 Incorporated 3.A-(1)(d) revised step procedures.
Page 211 Deleted CAUTION and steps A.{2). (3) and (4).
72-30-02
Page 201 Incorporated editorial revisions in paragraph 1.A.(4)
and NOTE.
Page 203 Deleted step B,(4).
Page 3 of 9
HoneyweII Engines
HoneyweII Phoenix, Arizona
Chaoter/Sertinn/Paofis Desr.rinlinn of Channe
Page 211 Incorporated TR 59 and revised step (e).
Page 222 Revised step (c)4.
Page 224 Revised step (4),
Page 227 Revised blade limits in Figure 213.
72-40-00
Page 1/2
Revised Description and Operation procedure.
Pages 207 and 209 Incorporated TR 23 and deleted associated figures.

Page 209
Revised reference to Figure 207 in step (3) and de-
leted Figure 207.
Page 211 Revised text within first and third CAUTION.

Page 212
Incorporated TR 27 to add steps (22), (27) and NOTE
Revised step (23).
Page 213 Revised step B.(28).

Page 215
Incorporated TR 6 to add steps (1) and (6). Revised
Ítem reference in step (5).
Page 217 Incorporated TR 5 to reflect changes to Figure 209.
Page 220 Revised step (I0)(f).
Page 226 Revised text in CAUTION.
Page 227 Deleted steps (49) and (50). Incorporated TR 7.
72-40-01
Page 203
Deleted steps (1) through (4).
72-40-02
Page 201 Added paragraph 1.B.(6)-
Page 4 of 9
HoneyweII Engines
HoneyweII Phoenix, Arízona
Chaoter/Section/Panes Descriotion of Chanae
Page 202 Revised Fjgure 201.
72-40-03
Page 201
Deleted CAUTION folíowing step B.(1).
72-40-04
Page 203
Incorporated TR 13 deleting Figure 202, Sheet 1.
Page 207 Deleted steps (8) and (9).
Page 208 Deleted Figure 204.
Page 209 Revised Figure 205 tille part number.
72-40-05
Pages 201/202
Deleted Figures 201, 202, 203 and step (3).
72-40-06
Page 201
Incorporated TR 16.
Page 204 Deleted Figure 203 and paragraph 3.A.

72-40-07
Page 201
Revised paragraph 1.A.{1) and deleted Figure 201.
Deleted paragraph 3.A and Table 201.
72-40-08
Page 201
Added Fahrenheit temperatura to step B.(1) and
B(1)(a). Changed step in B.(1){b) from 50VDC to
250VDC.
72-50-03
Page 201
Incorporated TR 51.
72-50-04
Page 208 Deleted NOTE prior to step (17).
REPORT NO. 290.2-HIGHLIGHTS ÍSS

HoneyweII Engínes
HoneyweII Phoeníx, Arizona
Chanfer/SRCtion/Panfts Descrinfinn nf Channe
72-51-00
Page 201
Revisad measurement in step (3).
Page 207 Revised material reference in step (21).
Page 208 Changed part number in step (a).

72-51 -01
Page 201
Revised step A.(3) to add fluorescent penetran! in-
spection reference.
Page 206 Added part number to step (2).
Page 207 Deleted part number from figure title.

Page 210
Deleted steps (5), (6) and (11) Revised steps (7), (9)
and (10).
Page 211 Revised NOTE following paragraph 3.A.(1).
72-51-02
Page 201
Revised paragraph l.A.(6).
72-51-04
Page 201
Revised third bullet in NOTE following step A.

Page 209
Revised steps A.(7), (11). (12) and (13) to nozzle curl.
Deleted paragraph 3 entirely and associated figures.
Page 210 Revised figure title.

72-51-05
Page 201
Deleted steps A.(2), (3), (4), entire step (6) and Figure
201. Revised step (5) (e).
72-60-01
Pages 201 and 203 Revised step A.{2). Corrected nomenclatura of ítem
(14) in steps A.(11), B.(1), (2) and Key to Figure.
Page 6 of 9
HoneyweII HoneyweII Engines
Phoenix, Arizona
ChaDTfir/Section/Panfts Deserintinn of Channe
Page 207 Revised NOTE following step (4)(a).
Added NOTE tollowing step (5)(b). Revised step

Page 209
(6)(b).
Page 210 Revised step (k).
Page 214 Revised steps (ab) and (ad).
Page 215 Added new step (ap).
73-10-01
Page 204
Revised text to paragraph 3.
73-10-02
Page 204
Deleted NOTE following steps A and (3)(d).
73-10-05
Page 202
Revised text to paragraph 3 and deleted paragraph
4,A.(1),
73-10-07
Page 201
Revised step A. (6).
Page 204 Added new step B.(4).
Revised consumable in paragraph 3.A.(1) and de-

Page 205/206
leted paragraph 4.A.(4).
73-20-01
Page 201
Incorporated TR 64.
Page 208 Revised paragraph 3.A.(1). and deleted step (2)(b).
73-20-03
Page 205/206
Revised consumable in paragraph 3.A-(1).
74-20-01
Page 201 Revised text in paragraph i.A.(l) and B.í3).
Page7 of 9
HoneyweII Engines
HoneyweII Phoenix, Arizona
Chantfir/SfiCfinn/PanRS Descriotion nf Chanoe
75-30-01
Page 204
Corrected misspelled word in step C.(4).
Pages 207 and 209 Editorial change to step (8).
75-30-02
Page 201
Added text to step (7).
75-30-03
Page 1
75-30-03
Page 203
Revised text in step A.(1} and NOTE prior to step
77-20-01
Page 1
77-20-01
Page 201
Deleted paragraph 4 and associated figures.
Page 203
Added paragraph 5 title and revised steps (2), (3) and
(4).
79-20-01
Page 201
Added text to steps A.(2) and (6). Added step B.(2A).
79-20-02
Page 201
Revised step B.(2).
79-20-03
Page 205 Added address to NOTE following step (7). Added
vendor address to NOTE following paragraph 4-A.(1).
79-20-04
Page 201 Revised part number in NOTE following paragraph
2.B.
79-20-07
Page 201
Revised text in steps (3), (4), (6), (7) and (11).
Page 204 Revised text in step A.(12).
Page 206 Revised consumable in text following paragraph 3.A.
Page 8 of 9
HoneyweII HoneyweII Engines
Phoenix, Arizona
Chantar/ñartinn/Panas Dasnrintion nf Ohanne
79-30-02
Page 201
Revised text following paragraph 3.A,
80-00-00
Page 1 Added paragraph 1 and revised NOTE following com-
ponent listing.
80-00-01
Page 401
Revised work stand part number in step (1).
80-00-02
Page 401
Revised work stand part number in step (1).
Page 402 Deleted CAUTION preceding step B.(2).
80-00-03
Page 401
Revised work stand part number in step A.(1).
80-00-04
Page 401
Revised work stand part number in step A.(1).
Page 408 Revised NOTE following step D.{9).
Page 412 Editorial change to steps (4) and (7).
Pages 417 through 420 Revised Figure 6 and key to figure.
Pages 424, 425 and 426 Replaced steps M and N and added Figure 7A.
Deleted CAUTION following step (5) and incorporated

Page 432
TR 57.
Page 436 Incorporated TR 57 and 62 and added step (27).
Page 437 Revised NOTE prior to step (29).
Page 9 of 9
HoneyweII MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
SAFETY ADVISORY
WARNING: BEFORE USING ANY OF THE MATERIALS CALLEO OUT iN THIS PUBLICATION,
BE AWARE OF ALL HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER. FAILURE TO
COMPLY
WITH THE MANUFACTURERS OR SUPPLIER RECOMMENDATIONS MAY
RESULT
This publicatfon!Ndescribes
PERSONAL physica)
INJURYandOR
Chemical processes which may require the use of Chemicals, solvents,
DISEASE.
paints ands other commercially available materials. The user of this publication shouid obtain the Material
Safety Data Sheets {OSHA Form 20 or equivalent) from the manufacturers or suppliers of the materials to be
used. the user must become completeiy familiar with the manufacturer/suppliers information and adhere to the
procedures, recommendations. warnings and cautions set forth for the safe use, handiing, storage and
disposal of the materials.
WARRANTY/LIABILITY ADVISORY
WARNING: HONEYWELL ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY HONEYWELL

EQUIPMENT WHICH iS NOT MAINTAINED AND/OR REPAIR IN ACCORDANCE
WITH HONEYWELL’S PUBLISHED INSTRUCTiONS AND/OR HONEYWELL’S
FAA/SFAR 36 REPAIR AUTHORIZATION, NEITHER DOES HONEYWELL ASSUME
RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT FABRICATED
BY
COMPANIES OTHER THAN HONEYWELL.
IMPROPERLY REPAIRED OOMPONENTS MAY BE INFERIOR AND MAY AFFECT

AIRWORTHINESS OR REDUCE THE USEFUL LIFE OF THE COMPONENTS.
IMPROPERLY FABRICATED SPECIAL TOOLING OR TEST EQUIPMENT MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO PRODUCT COMPONENTS OR PROVIDE ERRONEOUS
RESULTE. WHEN USED, EQUIPMENT OR PARTS THAT HAVE BEEN REPAIRED
OR FABRICATED BY OTHER THAN HONEYWELL AUTHORIZED FACILITES MAY
INCREASE RISKS OF DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY. COMPONENT FAILURES
AND SECONDARY DAMAGE AND MAY VOID ANY WARRANTIES
UNDERWRITTEN
BY HONEYWELL.
THIS MANUAL APPLIES ONLY TO ENGINE AND COMPONENTS MAINTAINED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH HONEYWELL ENGINES, SYSTEMS & SERVICES
APPROVED
PROCEDURES USING HONEYWELL APPROVED PARTS.
ALL INSPECTION, REPAIR AND OVERHAUL PROCEDURES PUBLISHED BY

HONEYWELL, INCLUDING PART RETIREMENT UFE, ARE BASED SOLELY ON
THE
USE OF HONEYWELL PARTS THAT HAVE BEEN MAINTAINED USING
HONEYWELL APPROVED DATA. THE DATA PUBLISHED HEREIN OR
OTHERWISE
SUPPLIED BY HONEYWELL IS NOT APPLICABLE TO NON-HONEYWELL PARTS
OR PARTS THAT HAVE BEEN REPAIRED USING DATA AND/OR PROCESSES
NOT
APPROVED BY HONEYWELL.
SAFETY WARRANTY/LIABILITY
HONEYWELL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY PARTADVISORY
THAT
290.2
OTHER THAN THOSE
Page 1
Sept 30/02
IT HAS APPROVED.
T53-L-703
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL YOU

MUSI INSPECT THE AFFECTED PARTS AND RECORDS FOR EVIDENCE OF
ANY
MANUFACTURE, REPAIR, REWORK OR USE OF A PROCESS NOT APPROVED
BY
HONEYWELL,
IF YOU IDENTIFY OR SUSPECT THE USE OF PARTS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

HONEYWELL, EITHER REMOVE THE AFFECTED ITEM FROM THE ENGINE OR
OBTAIN INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS FROM THE
MANUFACTURER OR THE ORGANiZATION THAT APPROVED THE REPAIR.
FAILURE TO USE THIS MANUAL AS DESCRIBED ABOVE MAY ALSO VOID

HONEYWELL'S WARRANTY COVERAGE.
SAFETY WARRANTY/LtABILlTY ADVISORY

Page 2
290.2 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENAN™UAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
RFCTinN PAGE DATE RFCTinN PAGE DATE
Tille Page - Sept 30/02
Safety/
Warranty/
Liability 1 Sept 30/02
Advisory 2 Sept 30/02
List o(
Effective
Pages
_ Sept 30/02
Record oí
-
Revisions
Sept 30/02
Record oí 1 Sept 30/02
Temporary 2 Sept 30/02
Revisions 3 Sept 30/02
4 Sept 30/02
Service
Bulletin
List
Sept 30/02
List oí
Chapter/
Section/
Subjects
Sept 30/02
INTR0DUCT10N - Tab
Table oí
-
Contents
Sept 30/02
Introduction 1 Sept 30/02
2 Sept 30/02
EFF
290.2 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
RECORD OF REVISIONS
REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE

NO. DATE INSERTED BY NO. DATE INSERTED BY
^
REV-REC
290.2 Sept 30/02
I
HoneyweII MA,NTENANCE^MANUAL
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS (CONT)
tNCORPO-
RATED INTO
CHAP/SEC MANUAL BY
REV DATE DATE DATE
PAGE NO. REV NO.
NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY REMOVED BY
1
73-20-01
2 213 Jul 17/91 2
72-00-00
3 605 Auq 28/91 2
72-40-00
4 219 Oct 29/91 2
72-40-00
5 220 Oct 29/91 2
72-40-00
6 218 Oct 29/91 2
72-40-00
7 232 Oct 29/91 2
71-00-00
8 1 Dec 13/91 2
72-00-00
9 613 Feb 19/93 2
80-00-01
10 411 Feb 19/93 2
80-00-01
11 414 Feb 19/93 2
80-00-01
12 416 Feb 19/93 2
72-40-04
13 203 Feb 12/93 2
72-51 -00
14 206 Feb 24/93 2
72-51-00
15 217 May 24/93 2
72-40-06
16 201 May 24/93 2
72-40-06
17 203 May 24/93 2
72-51-00
18 202 Jun 25/93 2
71-00-00
19 9 Jan 31/94 2
Page 1
290.2- T-R-REC Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVtSIONS (CONT)
INCORPO-
RATED INTO
CHAP/SEC MANUAL BY
REV DATE DATE DATE
PAGE NO. REV NO.
NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY REMOVED BY
71 -00-00
20 8 Jan 31/94 2
21 Replaced by TR 61
73-20-01
22 215 Jan 31/94 2
72-40-00
23 207 Jan 31/94 2
72-30-02
24 216 Feb 1/94 2
72-40-00
25 204 Feb 14/94 2
72-00-00
26 219 Feb 14/94 2
72-40-00
27 215 Nov 20/95 2
73-20-01
28 210 June 18/97 2
73-20-01
29 211 June 18/97 2
Contents
30 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
31 2 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
32 3 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
33 4 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
34 5 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
35 6 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
36 7 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
37 8 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
38 9 Oct 20/97 2
Page 2
290.2- T-R-REC Sept 30/02
Honeyi/vell MA,NTENANCE^MANUAL
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REV/SIONS (CONT)
INCORPO-
RATED INTO
CHAP/SEC MANUAL BY
REV DATE DATE DATE
NO. PAGE NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY REMOVED BY REV NO.
Contents
39 11 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
40 12 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
41 13 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
42 14 Oct 20/97 2
Contents
43 16 Oct 20/97 2
72-00-00
44 619 Feb 24/00 2
72-00-00
45 701 Oct 29/99 2
72-00-00
46 702 Oct 29/99 2
72-00-00
47 703 Oct 29/99 2
72-00-00
48 705 Oct 29/99 2
49 Reptaced by TR 50
72-00-00
50 211 May 1/00 2
72-50-03
51 201 June 19/00 2
72-50-03
52 203 June 19/00 2
72-50-03
53 204 June 19/00 2
72-50-03
54 205 June 19/00 2
72-50-03
55 206 June 19/00 2
C\I
o
o
o
o
1
56 201 Oct 20/00 2

o
co
¿
o
o
1
57 429 Nov 9/00 2
Page 3
290.2- T-R-REC Sept 30/02
Honeywell
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS (CONT)
INCORPO-
RATED INTO
CHAP/SEC MANUAL BY
REV DATE DATE DATE
PAGE NO. REV NO.
NO. ISSUED tNSERTED BY REMOVED BY
72-10-01
58 209 Dec 15/00 2
72-30-02
59 211 Dec 15/00 2
80-00-04
60 413 Dec 15/00 2
71-00-00
61 10 Feb 15/01 2
80-00-04
62 433 Mar 28/01 2
72-00-00
63 623 Apr 5/01 2
73-20-01
64 201 Apr 5/01 2
71 -00-00
65 5 Auq 9/01 2
72-00-00
66 214 Auq 9/01 2
72-00-00
67 215 Aug 9/01 2
72-00-00
68 216 Auq 9/01 2
73-20-01
69 213 July 26/02 2
73-20-01
70 213 Julv 26/02 2
Page 4
290.2- T-R-REC Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST
NOTE: A date listed in the “Incorp.” column is ihe latest date this report was revised to
inelude changes to text/illustrations caused by the Service Bulletin or its revisión
When the words "No Effect” are listed, the Service Bulletin caused no changes
within this report.
SERVICE SERVICE
BULLETIN INCORP RUI i FTiN INCORP
T53-L-703- No Effect 0094, Rev 1 No Effect
0001, Rev 13
0020, Rev 1 No Effect 0096, Rev 1 No Effect
0024 No Effect 0097 No Effect
0029 No Effect 0099, Rev 1 No Effect
0032 No Effect 0102, Rev 1 No Effect
0043. Rev 1 No Effect 0108, Rev 1 No Effect
0053 No Effect 0113. Rev 3 No Effect
0054, Rev 1 No Effect 0114 No Effect
0060 No Effect 0119 Sept 30/02
0062, Rev 1 No Effect A0121 No Effect
0063 Sept 30/02 0123 No Effect
A0092, Rev 1 No Effect 0133 No Effect
0093, Rev 2 No Effect
S-B-LIST
290.2 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
LIST OF CHAPTER/SECTION/SUBJECTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
RURJECT
SliaiFCT
INTRODUCTION
STANDARD PRACTICES 70-00-00

POWER PLANT 71-00-00
ENGINE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 72-00-00
REDUCTION GEAR 72-10-00

COMPRESSOR SECTION 72-30-00
COMBUSTION SECTION 72-40-00
TURBINE SECTION 72-50-00
GAS PRODUCER SYSTEM COMPONENTS 72-51-00
ACCESSORY ORIVE SECTION 72-60-00

ENGINE FUEL & CONTROL 73-00-00
IGNITION 74 - 00 - 00
AIR 75-00-00
ENGINE CONTROLS 76-00-00
ENGINE INDICATING 77-00-00
OIL 79-00-00
HEAVY MAINTENANCE 80-00-00
CHAPTER/SECTION/SUBJECT
290.2 S
Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUBJECT SUBJECT PAGE
INTRODUCTION
General 1
Logbook Use 1
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings 1
Supplementary Publications for T53-L-703 Gas Turbine Engines 2
Parts and Service 2
CONTENTS
290.2 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
INTRODUCTION
1. General
A. This publication provides mamtenance instructions for support of T53-L-703 engines manutactured
by HoneyweII Engines, Systems & Services. Phoenix, AZ.
B. This manual, as it may be supplemented by HoneyweII Engines, Systems & Services Service Bulletins,
constitutes the authoritative statement of HoneyweII Engines, Systems & Services’ approved and rec-
ommended maintenance procedures.
C. Unusual problems concermng engine maintenance should be presented to the Customer Support De-
partment either through its field Service representativas or by direct contact. All possible assistance will
be provided toward solution of these problems.
D- Requests for Information not presently covered by this publication and suggestions for modification or
amplification of these instructions so as to increase their usefulness are weicomed by the HoneyweII
Engines, Systems & Services Military Customer Support Center. inquires of a technical nature regard-
ing this publication should be directed to;
Military Customer Support

HoneyweII Engines, Systems 8> Services
111 South 34th Street
RO. Box 52181
Phoenix, Arizona 85072-2181
Attention: Manager, Customer Support Engineering
E. HoneyweII Engines, Systems & Services has a continumg program to develop retine assemblyinspec-
tion and test techniques, etc, which will be issued as regular revisions to the manual. Data of a more
urgent nature is supplied by Temporary Revisions and keyed to the appropriate sections of the manual.
Significant engine modifications are covered by issuance of Service Bulletins.
2. Loqbook Use
A logbook is packaged with each engine and is issued to provide a document for recording maintenance
actions, operating time, and cycles, and to provide immediate summary of operating history. Instructions for
using the logbooks are located on the first page.
3. Notes. Cautions and Warninos
A. Notes, cautions and warnings are found throughout the manual. Notes, cautions and warnings pre-
cede the text to which each applies. Conditions for use are as follows;
WARNING: TO HIGHLIGHT PROCEDURES, ETC, WHICH SHOULD RESULT IN PER-

SONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE, iF NOT CORRECTLY FOLLOWED.
CAtJTION: TO HIGHLIGHT PROCEDURES. PRACTICES, ETC, WHICH IF NOT STRICT-

LY OBSERVED, WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO OR DESTRUCTION
OF
EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: To highiight essential procedure, conditions, Information, etc.
Page 1
290.2- INTRO Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
4. Supplementary Publications for T53-L-7Q3 Gas Turbine Engines
A. Engine Overhaul Manual Report No. 290.3
B. Illustrated Parts Catalog Report No. 290.4
C. Engine Repair Manual Report No. 72-09-30
D. Standard Practices Manual Report No. 286.2
E. Sen/ice Bultetin
Service Bulletins are issued as required to provide Information or instructlons for special inspections or
modifying engines or parts. Service Bulletins appiicable to the engine modeis covered by this manual
are reflected in the List of Service Bulletins in the front of this manual.
F. Publications Index
The Publications Index is issued quarterly to provide a status list which operators can use to evalúate all
technical support data (i.e. manuals, catalogs, Service letters, Service bulletins, etc).
G. Service Letters
Service Letters are issued as required to advise operators of changes to maintenance procedures or to
highiight Information which will enhance engine maintenance or operation.
5. Parts and Service
Refer to Illustrated Parts Catalog, Report No. 290.4, Introduction for Information on ordering of parts.
Page 2
290.2- INTRO Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
^^TANDARD
PRACTICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER/

SECTION/
RLJBJECT IBJECT PAGE
STANDARD PRACTICES 70- 00-00

Deleted 1
70- CONTENTS
Sept 30/02
Honeywell
LiST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
RÜBJECT SUBJECT PAGE DATE
PAGE DATE
70 STANDARD
PRACTICES - Tab
Tabie of
Contents — Sept 30/02
List of
Effective
Pages
Sept 30/02
70-00-00 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
70-EFF
Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
STANDARD PRACTICFS
I Standard Practices section has been deleted. Refer to Standard Practicas Manual, Report No. 286.2
Page 1/2
70- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
POWER PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
POWER PU\NT 71-00-00

General 1
Fuel Requirements 1
Lubricating Oil Requirements 5
Engine Inspection Before Operation 5
Prestar! Checks 6
Engine Motoring 6
Fuel Control Priming 6
Engine Starting 6
Engine Pires 6
Operating Limits 7
Engine Operation Checks 10
Extreme Weather Operation 40
71- CONTENTS
Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
SUB.ÍECT PAGE DATE SIJRJECT PAGE DATE
71 POWER 36 Sept 30/02

PLANT - Tab 37 Sept 30/02
38 Sept 30/02
Table of 39 Sept 30/02
—
Contents Sept 30/02 40 Sept 30/02
41 Sept 30/02
42 Blank
List of
Effective
Pages — Sept 30/02
71-00-00 1 Sept 30/02

2 Sept 30/02
3 Sept 30/02
4 Sept 30/02
5 Sept 30/02
6 Sept 30/02
7 Sept 30/02
8 Sept 30/02
9 Sept 30/02
10 Sept 30/02
11 Sept 30/02
12 Sept 30/02
13 Sept 30/02
14 Sept 30/02
15 Sept 30/02
16 Sept 30/02
17 Sept 30/02
18 Sept 30/02
19 Sept 30/02
20 Sept 30/02
21 Sept 30/02
22 Sept 30/02
23 Sept 30/02
24 Sept 30/02
25 Sept 30/02
26 Sept 30/02
27 Sept 30/02
28 Sept 30/02
29 Sept 30/02
30 Sept 30/02
31 Sept 30/02
32 Sept 30/02
33 Sept 30/02
34 Sept 30/02
35 Sept 30/02
71- EFF
Sept 30/02
Honeyi/vell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
POWER PLANT
1. General
This chapter contains instructions for normal ground operation of engine installed In aircratt to determine
flight readiness. AIso Included are fuel data, oil data, preoperational engine inspection requirements, engine
operation and limits data, operational checks and e)ftreme weather precautions.
2. Fuel Requirements
A. Specitied Fueis
WARNING: WHEN USING KEROSENE FUELS {JP-5 OR JP-8). RESTARTING

ENGINE DURING FLIGHT IS POSSIBLE UP TO AN ALTITUDE OF
8000
FEET MAXIMUM. USE OF THESE FUELS SHOULD BE AVOIDED
WHEN
STARTINGATAMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW 10’F (-12’C).
NOTE: There are no special restrictions or instructions for use of JP-4 fuels. with the
exception of restarting engine during flight being hmited to altitudes up to
15,000 feet máximum.
The fuels specified for use in these engines conform to Military Specification MIL- DTL-5624 and are
either wide-cut type fuels. Grade JP-4, or kerosene type fuels. Grade JP-5. Equivalent fuels, MIL-
DTL-83133. Grade JP-8, may be used. (See paragraph B.)
B. Acceptable Wide Cut and Kerosene Type Engine Fuels and Freezing Points
(1) All engine fuels Usted are fully approved for flight operation. In cases where fuels approved by
HoneyweII are not available and other fuels musí be substituted, consult with:

HoneyweII Engines, Systems & Services
RO. Box 52181
Attention; Manager. Customer Support Engineering
Page 1
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
NOTE: Variations in wide cut fuei quality or the use of kerosene type fueis can
increase the rale of carbón deposif on hot end parts, especially during
long periods of steady State operation. Accumulation of deposits can be
minimized by changing power leveis periodically during operation.
(2) Wide cut type equivalen! fuels. The following wide cut fueis may be used.
(a) Commercial wide cut type fuels, freezing point -56°F (-49°C).
CAUTION: COMMERCIAL FUELS ARE COMMONLY MADE TO CONFORM

TO AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
(ASTM) SPECIFICATION D 1655. ASTM SPECIFICATION
FUEL
DOES NOT CONTAIN ANTI-ICING ADDITIVES UNLESS
SPECIFIED BY BULK PURCHASER. THEREFORE, MORE
CARE THAN USUAL MUST BE TAKEN WITH RESPECT TO
WATER CONTAMINATION AND FLIGHT CONDITIONS WHEN
ACCEPTING SUCH A FUEL D 1655 TypeA
ASTM Specification
American American JP-4
Arco Arcojet B
B. P Trading BP A.TG.
Cal-Tex Caltex Jet B
Chevron Chevron B
Continental Conoco JP-4
Exxon Exxon Turbo Fuel B
Gulf Gulf Jet B
Mobil Mobil Jet B
Philhps Philjet JP-4
Shell Aeroshell JP-4
Texaco Texaco JP-4
Union
Union JP-4
(b) Military wide cut type fuels, freezing point -72°F (-58°C).
NATO F-40
Belgium BA-PF-2B
Britain D. Eng. R.D. 2486
Cañada 3-GP-22f
Denmark MIL-DTL-5624, GR JP-4
Federal Republic of Germany VTL 9130-006
France AIR 3407/A
Greece MIL-DTL-5624, GRJP-4
AA-M-C-1421
Italy
MIL-DTL-6624, GR JP-4
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
MlL-DTL-5624, GR JP-4
Turkey D. Eng. R.D. 2454
United Kingdom MIL-DTL-5624, GR JP-4
United States
Page 2
71 00-00- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(3) Kerosene type equivalen! fuels. The following kerosene type fueis may be used.
(a) Commercial kerosene type fuels, freezing point (-38’C).
CALJTinN: COMMERCIAL FUELS ARE COMMONLY MADE TO CONFORM

TO AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
(ASTM) SPECIFICATION D 1655. ASTM SPECIFICATION
FUEL
DOES NOT CONTAIN ANTI-ICING ADDITtVES UNLESS
SPECIFIED BY BULK PURCHASER. THEREFORE, MORE
CARE THAN USUAL MUST BE TAKEN WITH RESPECT TO
WATER CONTAMINATION AND FLIGHT CONDITIONS WHEN
ACCEPTING SUCH A FUEL.
ASTM Specification D1655 Type A
American American Jet Fuel Type A
Arco Arcojet A
British American B-AJet Fuel JP-4
Chevron Chevron A-50
Cities Service Citgo A
Continental Conoco Jet 50
Exxon Exxon A
Gulf Gulf Jet A
Mobil Mobil Jet A
Phillips Philjet A-50
Puré Purejet Turbine Fuel Type A
Shell Aeroshell Turbine Fuel 640
Standard Jet A Kerosene
Texaco Texaco Avjet A
Union 76 Turbine Fuel
Commercial kerosene type fuels, freezing point -55°F (-48°C).

ASTM Specification D-1655Type A-1
Arco Arcojet A-1
BP Trading BP A.T.K.
Cal-Tex Caltex Jet A-1
Chevron Chevron A-1
Continental Conoco Jet-60
Exxon Exxon A-1
Gulf Gulf JetA-1
Mobil Mobil JetA-1
Puré Purejet Turbine Fuel Type A
Shell Aeroshell Turbine Fuel 650
Sinclair Super Jet A-1
Standard JetA-1 Kerosene
Texaco Avjet A-1
Union 76 Turbine Fuel
Page 3
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(c) Military kerosene type fueis, freezing point -40°F (-40’C).
NATO F-42
France Air 3404
(d) Military kerosene type fueis, freezing point -58°F (-50“C).
NATO F-34
Denmark D. Eng. R.D. 2453
France Air 3405/B
United Kingdom D. Eng. R.D. 2453
NATO F-35
Federal Republic of Germany D. Eng. R.D. 2494
{e>
Military kerosene type fuels, freezing point -51 °F {-46°C).
NATO F-44
Australia DEF 207
Belgium BA-PF-6
Ganada 3-GP-24
Federal Republic of Germany D. Eng. R.D. 2452
Italy AER-M-C-143
Netherlands D. Eng. R.D. 2498
United States MIL-DTL-5624, GR JP-5
C. Additives
(1) The following additives, singly or in any combination, additional to those included in the fuel
specification, are approved subject to limitation stated.
NOTE: The following additives should not be added to fuel MIL-DTL-5624,

Grades JP-4, JP-5, or MIL-DTL-83133 JP-8 since they are already
present in these fuels.
(2) Antl-corrosion additive {DERD2461 and APL2461). Additive may be added in quantities not
exceeding 4.0 pound per 1000 barréis and phosphorus contení of 0.006 parts per million.
CAUTIQN: ANTI-ICING ADDITIVE IS REQUIRED AT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

OF32'‘F(0°C).
NOTE: Biocidal additive (methyl cellosolve) should not be added in combination

with anti-icing additive.
(3) Anti-icing and biocidal additives (D. Eng. R.D. 2451). Additive {MIL-l-27696 or any direct
equivalent) may be added in concentrations not exceeding 0.15 percent by volume.
(4) Biocidal additive (methyl cellosolve). Additive may be added to fuel in concentrations of 0.15 to
0.25 percent by volume. The lower concentrations being used on a continuous usage or inter-
mittent basis to prevent contamination and the higher concentrations are intended to be used for
shock treatment.
Page 4
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
CAUTIQN: MAKE SURE THAT BIOBOR JF IS THE ONLY BIOBOR PRODUCT
USED.
(5) Biocidal additive (Biobor JF). Additive may be used for shock treatment at a concentration not
exceeding 270 parts per million (ppm) (20 ppm Boron) or preventive treatment at a concentration
of 135 ppm (10 ppm Boron).
(6) Anti-static additive (Shell or Royal lubricants A.S.A,3). Additive may be added to fuel in con-
centrations as required to bring conductivity within 200 to 600 pico Siemens per meter at point
and time of deiivery into the aircraft as measured with a conductivity meter.
3. Lubricatino Oil Reguirements
CAUTIQN: INTERMIXING OF OILS OF DIFFERENT BRANDS SHOULD BE AVOIDED IF

POSSIBLE. INTERMIXING OF OILS OF DIFFERENT TYPES IS NOT
PERMITTED EXCEPT IN AN EMERGENCY. IF INTERMIXING OF OIL
TYPES
BECOMES NECESSARY. THE OIL SYSTEM MUST BE FLUSHED WITHIN
6
HOURS OF ENGINE OPERATION. (SEE 72-00-00, ENGINE -
SERVICING.)
A. The Engine Lubrication System Oiis Specified for Use in These Engines Conform To Or Are Similar to
Military Specifications MIL-PRF-7808 or MIL-PRF-23699 The oiIs listed in the following paragraphs
are approved for engine fhght operation
(1) The following oiis areType ((MIL-PRF-7808) and are satisfactory for engine starting at ambient
temperaturas down to -65°F (-54°C).
BP Turbo Oil 2369

Brayco 880H
Exxon 2389
Mobil Jet 184A/201A
Royco 808GF
Stauffer Jet l
(2) The following oils are Type II (MIL-PRF-23699) and are satisfactory for engine starting at ambi-
ent temperaturas down to -40°F (-40°C).
BP Turbo Oil 2380

Castrol 205
Exxon 2380
Mobil Jet Oil I!
Shell 500
Stauffer Jet II
Page 5
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: When oiis approved by HoneyweII Engmes, Systems & Services

are not available and other oiis must be substituted, consult with:

HoneyweII Engines. Systems S Services
PO. Box 52181
Phoenix. Arizona 85072-2181
Attention: Manager, Customer Support Engineenng
4. Engine Inspection Before Operation
See 72-00-00, Engine - Inspection, paragraph I.A.
5. Prestan Checks
Perlorm Prestad CheCks In Accordance With Instructions in Aircraft Manual
6. Engine Moloring
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary for normal starting.
A. Motor Engine During Fue! Control Unit Priming or Other Operations
(1) Disconnect electrical power input from ignition unit.
(2) Check that throttie is in OFF position.

CAUTIQN: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STARTER, DO NOT EXCEED STARTER
LIMITATIONS.
(3) Motor engíne with starter.
7. Fuel Control Priming
Prime Fuel Control Assembly (See 72-00-00, Engine - Servicing, paragraph 3.)
8. Engine Starting and Operation
Engine Shall Be Started and Operated tn Accordance With Instructions in the Aircraft Manual
9. Engine Fires
A. Engine onFire
(1) Cióse throttie (N,).
(2) Cióse main fuel vaive.
(3) Motor engine until fire Is extinguished.
Page 6
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -ÊMANUAL
WARNING: AVOID INHALATION OF CB FUMES. IF CB CONTACTS SKIN OR
EYES, IMMEDIATELY FLUSH WITH RUNNING WATER; THEN
WASH
THOROUGHLY W!TH SOAP AND WATER.
CAUTION: IF CO2 AGENT WAS APPLIED TO ENGINE AIR INLET WITH ENGINE
ROTATING, A HOT END INSPECTION MUST BE PERFORMED.
BROMOCHLOROMETHANE (CB) IS A TOXIC, CORROSIVE

AGENT.
DILUTION WITH WATER INCREASES ITS CORROSIVE EFFECT
NOTE: If burning
ON in the tailpipe is minor and presenta no danger to aircraft, it is
permissible
METALS. to allow flames to consume all residual fuel without using fire
extinguisher. Danger to aircraft is greater than danger to interna! parts of
engine.
If fire extinguishing agent Bromochioromethane (CB) was used, immedi-

ately purge exposed engine and aircraft surfaces with deán, dry air and
wash with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203). Clean en-
gine compressor using dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to SPM,
70-15-03. SP C203.)
If fire extinguishing agent other than CO2 or Bromochioromethane (CB)

was used, remove residue from engine by washing exterior and cleaning
compressor using water wash procedure.
(4) If fire persiste, extinguish it with suitable fire extinguisher applied to engine air inlet if engine is still
rotating or directly to base of flames if rotation has stopped.
10. Qoerating Limits (See Table 1 and Figure 1)
A. Deleted
B. Engine Overíorque Limits
Output shaft torque shall not exceed following valúes:

NOTE: If limits are exceeded, an engine overtorque inspection must be per-
formed. (See 72-00-00, Engine - Inspection, paragraph 1.F.(6}-)
(1) Military (30 minutes) 1175 foot pounds (64 psi).
(2) Máximum continuous 1110 foot pounds (60 psi).
Page 7
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
■ ■OílCywwdl T53-L-703
Table 1. Engine Steady State Operating Limits Under AH Ambient Conditions
Max.
Oil Max.
Power
Pressure Shaft
Turbine
Max. Max. Max. Max. Limits NRP Horse-
Speed
Mechanical Compressor Turbine Torque Inlet and Above power
(N2)
Power Rotor Speed Gas Indicated Oil (PSIG) (SHP)
(RPM)
Rating (Ni) (Percent) Temp (PSI) Temp
1616’F
Military 21,300 200“F
105.8 (880 64 80 tolOO 1485
(30 Minutes) (101%) (93°C)
°C)
1508’F
Normal 21,300 200''F
101 (820 60 80 to 100 1350
(Continuous) (101%) (93°C)
°C)
NOTE: 100% Ni
100% N2 = 25,150 RPM
= 6,564 Output Shaft RPM
21,075 Turbine RPM
C. Overtemperature Limits
NOTE: If limtt is exceeded, an internal (hot end) inspection must be performed.

(See 72-00-00, Engine - Inspection, paragraph I.D.)
(1) An overtemperature condition exists. During starts or accelerations when MGT exceeds 1742°F
(950°C).
NOTE: It the engine cannot be operated without exceeding military power or

máximum continuous rated power MGT limits, this is an indication of
operation in excess of normal capabilities, engine malfunctlon or
instrument error.
(2) An overtemperature condition exists. At military power when MGT exceeds 1616°F {880°C).
(3) An overtemperature condition exists. At máximum continuous rated power when MGT ex-
ceeds 1508°F (820'’C).
D. Overspeed Limits
An engine overspeed exists under the following conditions;
(1) When Ni speed exceeds 105.8 percent (26,600 rpm} at any time.
(2) In transient Ns speed Table 1 limits maybe exceeded to 109 percent (23,000 power turbine rpm
for a máximum of two seconds, output shaft - 7163 rpm) at any power lever position.
Page 8
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
COMPENSATED SHAFT HORSEPOWER - SHP/A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
Compensated Shaft Hofsepower Versus Ambient Temperature

Figure 1
71- 00-00 SeSo2

HoneyweII —
E- Olí Overtemperature Limits
An engme oil overtemperature condition exists when the following limits are exceeOed:
(1) Oil temperature limits for normal operating conditions:
(a) The máximum (red line) OIL IN temperature is 210^ (99°C).

(b) A steady State engine OIL IN temperature of 212°F (100°C) is acceptable provided an oil
overtemperature inspection is performed. (See 72-00-00, Engine - Inspection, para-
graph 1.R(7)-)
CAUTION: IT MUST BE CLEARLY UNDERSTOOD THAT THERE IS A

POSSIBILITY THAT MECHANICAL COMPONENTS MAY
SUFFER
DAMAGE IF ENGINE OPERATING CONDITIONS ARE
EXTENDED
BEYOND THESE RECOMMENDED LIMITS.
(2) Oil temperatures exceed the above limits, the following procedures apply.
(a) Oil temperature of 201 to 266°F (94 to 130°C) for 10 minutes or less is acceptable provided
an oil overtemperature inspection is performed. (See 72-00-00, Engine - Inspection,
paragraph 1 .F.(7).)
(b) Oil temperature of 201 to 266°F (94 to 130°C) for more than 10 minutes, but no more than
30 minutes, is acceptable provided an oil overtemperature inspection is performed. (See
72-00-00, Engine - Inspection, paragraph 1.F.(7).)
(c) When oil temperature has reached 268 to 300°F (131 to 149°C) for any time period, per-
form an oil overtemperature inspection. (See 72-00-00, Engine - inspection, paragraph
1. F.(7).)
(d) When oil temperature has reached 302°F (150°C) or above. engine must be returned to
Overhaul.
F. Engine G-Loading
NOTE: If it is suspected that limits have been exceeded, an excessive G-load

inspection must be performed after flight concerned. (See 72-00-00, Engine
- Inspection, paragraph 1.F.(8).)
The máximum G-loads of the specified forces are as follows:
Vertical 10G
Side 4G
Forward 3G
Aft 4G
n. Engine Qoeration Checks
A. Check Run After Initial Installation or Repair/Replacement of Major Components
(1) Perform vibration check as requtred. (See paragraph 10.E.)
(2) Start engine (paragraph 8) and stabilize at flight idie.
Page 10
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(3) Check for 70 to 72 percent N1 speed. Check for oil pressure indication. Shut down engine and
if required, adjust idie rpm. (See 73-20-01. Fuei Control - Adjustment/TesL)
(4) Check operation of hot air solenoid valve. (See 75-10-02.)
(5) Perform power check and trim adjustment. (See 73-20-01.)
(6) Check operation of emergency (manual) fuel System. (See paragraph 10.D.)
(7) Shut down engine. (See paragraph 10.F.)
B. Initial Check Run

(1) Remove the main oil filter cover assembiy. Clean the cover assembly in dry cleanmg solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and reinstall.
NOTE: tt is not advisable to mix M1L-PRF-23699 type oil with MlL-PRF-7808

type oil except in case of emergency. tf this becomes necessary, it is
required that the system be flushed within 6 hours.
(2) Pili aircraft 0(1 tank wtth 0(1.
(3) Start engine. (See paragraph 8.)
(4) Opérate engine for several minutes at flight idie and then shut down.
(5) Inspect engine for leaks and security of mounting of hoses and accessories.
(6) Start engine and run at flight idie for 3 minutes, accelerate gradually until highest power, without
gaining flight attitude, is obtained and temperatures have stabilized.
(7) Decelérate engine to flight idie and run for 2 minutes to allow MGT to stabilize, shut down engine.
Inspect engine. (See paragraph 10.0.)
C. Inspection After Initial Check Run
(1) Inspect engine for leaks and security of mounting provisions, hoses and accessories.
(2) Inspect engine main oil filter and chip detector for accumulation of metal chips, lint or other
foreign material in oil filter.
(3) If there is no accumulation of metal chips, lint or other foreign material, continué with engine
operation checks.
(4) If there is a slight accumulation of metal chips, lint or other foreign material, clean and reinstall
the chJp detector and oil filter, Restart engine and perform a second run for several minutes at
highest power obtainable without gairiing flight attitude. If further accumulation is found, proceed
to step (5).
(5) If there is an excessive accumulation of metal chips, lint, or other foreign material, further
in\/est/gation is required. (See 72-00 -00, Engine - Trouble Shooting, paragraph 1 .C.)
(6) Remove, inspect, clean and reinstall fuel control filters.
Page 11
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
noncyi/vdi T53-L-703
NOTE: After installing an engine or a fuel control dunng the sen/ice inspection or when
a special verification of the proper operation o< the luel control emergency
(manual) system is required, perform the tollowing check.
D. Operational Check of Emergency (Manual) Fuel System
(1) Start engine. (See paragraph 8.)
CAUTIQN: SELECT MAXIMUM Ng SPEED WITH THE GOV RPM INCR-DECR

BEEP SWITCH BEFORE STABILIZING ENGINE AI 70 TO
72
PERCENTNi SPEED,
(2) With the fuel control selector switch in the AUTO position, stabilize engine at 70 to 72 percent NI
speed.
(3) Move the fuel control selector switch to the EMER position.
NOTE: Ni speed in EMER position is governed directly by throttie position and

may change 2 to 5 percent mínimum.
(4) Note Ni speed, it should drop 2 to 5 percent mínimum.
(5) Return fuel selector to AUTO position within 5 seconds of moving to EMER position.
(6) The regulator should respond with a rise in Ni speed.
E. Engine Vibratíon Test

An engine vibratíon test is required after initia! installation of engine to aircraft, after combustor turbine
assembly (hot end) is removed and reinstalied, after repair of certain engine components, after removal
or adjustment of any engine mounts. mount shims, mount bearings, when excessive engine vibration is
suspected and to complete a dropped engine inspection. An inspection vibration test, using vibratíon
check tool kit LTCT14664-02 or LTCT28430-01, measures vibration at specified NI and N2 operating
speeds.
Vibration pickups, attached to adapters mounted on engine. transmit electrical impulses through cables
to a vibration meter. The vibration meter indicates total amount of engine movement (peak to peak dis-
placement) in mils. (See Figures 2 and 3.) Meter indications are recordad on an Engine Vibration Test
Data Sheet. The recorded figures are compared with figures given on data sheet for máximum permis-
sible engine vibration. If these máximum figures are exceeded, the cause of the excessive vibration
must be found and corrected before engine can be accepted for unrestncted flight.
Page 12
71 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Vibration Meter
Figure 2
NOTE: Acceplable atternative vibration measurement equipment inciudes the

Chadwtck Helmuth (CH) 192 analyzer with the 7460A high low filter
using the CEC 4-118-0107 or 4-128-0101 pickups for normal
vibration checks. Follow CH operating instructions and engine vibration
limite and testing parameters.
(1) Vibration test preparations. Each of the following procedural steps, including checks and
adjustments of vibration equipment, must be repeated each time equipment is assembled for ar
engine vibration test. AH equipment required, with the exception of mount assembly LTCT6756,
IS included in vibration check tool kit LTCTt4664-07. Thís set contains a vibration meter
LTCT23844-01. Proceed with following vibration test using applicable procedures in
accordance with the specific vibration meter being used.
(a) Deleted
(b) Deleted
(c) Deleted
Page
71 00-00
- 1.'
Sept 30/0;
T53-L-703
R£4R VIEW
Vibration Meter
Figure 3
Page 14
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(d) Deleled.
(e) Operationai check of vibration pickups. (See step (6).)
(f) Installation of vibration equipment. {See step (7).)
(g) Adjustment of vibration meter. (See step (8) or (9).)
(h) Vibration test- (See step (10).)
(i) Deleted.
(j) Evaluationof vibration test data. (See step (12).)
(k) Correcting vibration. (See step (13).).
(2) If it is not certam that proper filters are at the proper locations, they must be installed as follows:
(a) Remove meter housing.
(b) Plug 70 Hz high pass filter CEC1 -003-0070 into INPUT NETWORK Socket No. 1.
(c) Plug 200 Hz high pass filter CEC1 -003-0200 into INPUT NETWORK Socket No. 2.
(d) Secure filters with screws provided.
(e) Instan meter housing.

(3) Filter inspection LTCT14664-07. Vibration meter LTCT22031-01 has filters (LTCT20596-01)
installed. Install filters LTCT14664-07 in vibration meter LTCT23844 - 01 as
follows:
(a) Remove meter housing.
(b) Plug 70 Hz high pass filter LTCT23842-01 or CEC1 -003-0070 into filter Socket No. 2.
(c) Plug 200 Hz high pass filter LTCT23843-01 or CECI -003-0200 into filter Socket No. 3.
(d) Secure filters with screws provided.
(e) Instan meter housing.
(4) Deleted.
WARNING: DELETED.
(a) Deleted.
(b) Deleted.
Page 15
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII >Â,NTENANCEMANUAL
(5) Preliminat7 warmup.
WARNING: TO PREVEN! A POSSIBLE HAZARD JO PERSONNEL AND

DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT, SET POWER SWITCH TO
OFF
WHILE CONNECTING TO A POWER SOURCE.
NOTE: With AC power, use connector adapter LTCT9280, supplied with

kit, if necessary.
(a) Connect power lead to suitable source of electncal power (105 to 125 volts, 50/60/400
Hertz) or use 18 vdc battery power suppiy.
(b) With power switch on, allow approximately 10 minutes for temperatura to stabilize within
the meter.
CAUTION: HANDLE VIBRATiON PICKUPS WITH CARE. IFAPlCKUPIS

DROPPED OR STRUCK WITH FORCE. ITS ACCURACY MAY
BE
IMPAIRED.
(6) Operational check of vibration pickups as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT INTERMIX PICKUPS. USE EITHER THREE EACH

CEC4-118-0107, LTCT9282. OR THREE CEC4-128-0101
PICKUPS. SENSITIVITY SETTINGS DIFFER WITH EACH
TYPE
AND THEREFORE, CANNOT BE INTERMIXED.
(a) While meter is warming up. lay out three cable assemblies CEC49657-0300 or
LTCT9283-02 and three vibration pickups CEC4-118-0107, LTCT9282 or
CEC4-128-0101.
(b) Connect cables to pickups and to proper CHANNEL receptacle in vibration meter.
(c) Apply to meter LTCT9281 as follows:
1 Set INPUT NETWORK selectors to OUT.
2 Set OPERATION selector to Dxl. 0.
3 Set CHANNEL selector to 1.
4 Set RANGE selector to 5.

NOTE: If indicator does not move, check condition of pickup,
connectors, cable, and vibration meter receptacle.
Interchange components until detective unit is found.
Replace detective component.
5 Slowly move No. 1 pickup by hand, while obsen/ing vibration meter. Indicator should
jog or show a slight movement.
£ Set CHANNEL selector to 2, then to 3 and using same procedures. check operation ot
remaining pickups.
Page 16
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ‘--NTENANCBMA.UAL
(d) Apply to meter LTCT22031-01 or LTCT23844-01 asfollows:
NOTE: Vibration meter contains an infernal plug in power supply

(AC). AC power supply may be wired for high or low voltage
by changing transformer strapping from 115 V range to 230 V
range. A battery (18 DC) power supply is aiso included in
LTCT20596-01 or LTCT14664-07.
1 Connect vibration meter to power source to be used. (If batteries are not to be used.)
2 Make sure connector plug at rear of vibratron meter chassis is inserted into external
tilter receptacle.
3 Set SELECTOR switch to OUT position.
4 Depress CHANNEL selector 1.
5 Set MODE switch (inner parí of RANGE switch) to D (disp)acement) posilion.
6 Set RANGE switch to 5.

7 Slowly move No. 1 pickup by hand while observmg meter indication. (ndicator should
jog or show slight movement.
NOTE: !f the indicator does not move, check position of pickup,

connectors, cable and meter receptacle. Interchange
components until detective unit is found. Replace detective
component.
S Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the remaining CHANNELS 2 and 3 in use.
(7) Installation of vibration equipment as follows:
NOTE: In following step (a), cable and pickup to CHANNEL 1 will connect
to front lifting eye adapter. Cable and pickup to CHANNEL 2 will
connect to diffuser ílange adapter. Cable and pickup to CHANNEL
3 will connect to oil scavenge line adapter or to No. 3 and 4 bear-
ing vibration pickup mount assembly LTCT6756, used as an altér-
nate to oiJ scavenge line adapter on cerlain aircraft applications.
(a) Secure pickup mounting adapters to required engine mounting locations. (See Figure 4.)
(b) Secure each pickup to its adapter with three 4-40 screws and suitable lockwashers.
Page 17
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
K 7« «2C
Location of Vibration Pickup Adapters

Figure 4
Page 18
71 00-00 - Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
CAUTIQN: LEAVE ENOUGH SIJ\CK IN CABLE TO PREVEN!
UNNECESSARY STRAIN ON PICKUPS AND CONNECTORS.
AVOID CONDITIONS THAT WOULD CAUSE CABLES TO
DETERIORATE FROM HEAT OR ABRASION.
NOTE: Identify adapter and cable connections with numbers or colors to

make certain that pickups will be connected to proper meter
CHANNEL receptacles.
(c) Connecí proper cable to each pickup.
(d) Secure cable assemblies to engine and aircraft with tape or cord.
WARNING: TO PREVEN! A POSSIBLE HAZARD TO PERSONNEL AND

DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. SET METER POWER SWITCH
TO
OFF, WHILE BREAKING OR MAKING CONNECTION TO A
SOURCE OF ELECTRICAL POWER.
NOTE: To prevent cooling off of vibration meter, it must not be without a

source of power for more than a few minutes.
(e) Disconnect meter from source of power used for preliminary warmup and immediately
connect it to aircraft electrical power (105 to 125 volts, 50/60/400 Hertz, 30 watts).
(f) Secure vibration meter with bungee cord (shock cord) or other suitable means, to a
cushioned, protected location in aircraft cabin.
(g) Connect cable assemblies to proper CHANNEL receptacles.
(8) Adjustment of vibration meter LTCT9281 asfollows:
NOTE: With OPERATION selector set at C, the INPUT NETWORK selector

and RANGE selector may be in any position.
(a) Set OPERATION selector to C. tndicator should swing toward right hand side of scale.
(b) Set CHANNEL selector to 1.
(c) Push in CALIBRATE SIGNAL control. Turn until indication is 10.5 for the CEC4-118-0107
(LTCT9282) or 6.0 for the CEC4-128-0101 pickups. Read on the 0 to 15 scale.
(d) Release CALIBRATE SIGNAL control carefully without turning.
(e) Open panel below CALIBRATE SIGNAL control to expose SENSITIVITY Controls.
(f) Turn SENSITIVITY control for CHANNEL 1 to obtain analyzer indication of 15.0.
Page 19
71 00-00
- Sepí 30/02
HoneyweII
NOTE: It an indication of 10.5 or 15 0 cannot be oblained, vibration
anaiyzer must be recalibrated internally by quaiified personnel.
(g) Confirm proper adjustment of CHANNEL 1 by pushing in and releasing CALIBRATE

SIGNAL control, while obseiving for consistent Indications of 10.5 (CEC4-118-0107) or
6.0 (CEC4-128-0101) and 15.0.
NOTE: Oniy one setting of 10.5 (or 6.0) made at CHANNEL 1 is necessary
for use with all channels.
(h) Obtain indication of 15.0 for remaining channels by setting CHANNEL selector to proper
number and turning SENSITIVITY control for that channel.
CAUTION: TO MAKE SURE ACCURACY OF VIBRATION TEST. ADJUST

VIBRAT10N METER USING SAME POWER SOURCE THAT IS TO
BE
USED DURING VIBRATION TEST.
NOTE: If using battery power suppiy. set SELECTOR switch in OFF position.
Battery voltage is sufficient when meter reading on 0 to 5 scale is one
vo¡t or greater. Set SELECTOR switch in íhe BATT posilion. Again,
battery voltage must be one volt or greater.
(9) Adjustment of vibration meter LTCT22031 -Oí or LTCT23844-01 as follows:
(a) Connect power source to be used (if batteries are not to be used).
(b) Check continuity of transducer circuits by placing RANGE switch to 500, setting
SELECTOR switch to CONT position and depressing selected channels on CHANNEL
SELECTOR. If Circuit is satisfactory, meter will read within the green 2one. If channel is
open, indicator will deflect full scale. When Circuit is shorted, indication will be ZERO.
(c) Place SELECTOR switch to CALIB and adjust OSC LEVEL for full scale meter deflection.
(d) Place SELECTOR switch to SENS ADJ.
NOTE: It is necessary to adjust the SENSITIVITY control on CHANNEL 1

oniy, to the correct setting for type of pickups in use. This will
suffice for remainder of channels in use. However, CHANNEL
GAIN, located above the CHANNEL SELECTOR buttons, must be
individually adjusted for each channel in úse-
le) Depress CHANNEL SELECTOR 1 and set the SENSITIVITY control to correct transducer
sensitivity for type of pickup in use. Either 10.5 or 6.0 for CEC4-118-0107 or
CEC4-128-0101 pickups, respectively. Set 10 or 6 into window of control and 5 or 0 on
the inside vernier.
(f) Adjust channel gain potentiometer (smailest set screw immediately ahove the CHANNEL
SELECTOR) for CHANNEL 1 to obtain a full scale deflection indication.
(g) Repeat above step (e) for remaining CHANNELS 2 and 3.
Page 20
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENANCEMAN.AL
NOTE: Check aircraft engine mounts for looseness, wear, or insutficient torque
before attempting vibration test. Ensure that Marman clamps, inlet
screens, exhaust pipe and a)) damps, ¡ines and hoses are secura
(10) Vibration test as follows;
(a) Prepare Engine Vibration Test Data Sheet for engine to be tested by suppiying applicable
information at top of data sheet. (See Figure 5.)
(b) Following steps (c) through (g) apply to vibration meter LTCT22031-01 or LTCT23844 -01.
(c) If not using batteries, make sure that vibration meter power source is on.
(d) Set SELECTOR switch to proper number for filter to be used as required by data sheet.
(e) Set MODE switch to D position.
(f) Bótate RANGE switch for máximum on scale meter tíeflection (usually 5.0).
(g) Depress CHANNEL SELECTOR to CHANNEL 1.
(h) Following step (i) applies to vibration meter LTCT9281.
(i) Set meter for the test as follows:

1 Set INPUT NETWORK selector to proper number for fitterto be used, as required by
data sheet.
2 Set OPERATION selector to Dxl .0.
2 Set CHANNEL SELECTOR t o l .
4 Set range selector to 5.

NOTE: Ground operation at high power seftings may not be possible.
Aircraft must be hovered or flown to accomplish a complete
vibration test.
(j) Opérate engine at Ni and N2 speeds shown on data sheet.
NOTE: Stabilize engine conditions by maintainlng each required engine

speed for at least 30 seconds before meter indications are
recorded.
(k) At each speed setting, record meter indications on data sheet as follows;
1 Set INPUT NETWORK selector to proper number for meter network and filter to be
used, as required by data sheet.
2 Set CHANNEL selector to proper number for meter channel and pickup to be used, as
required by data sheet.
2 Record meter indications in proper space on Engine Vibration Test Data Sheet.
Page 2i
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
T53-L-703
TURBOSHAFT ENGINE VIBRATION TEST DATA SHEET
Engine Seriol No.. í TSN).
Lojt Ovefl^QuI f TSLOj.
LoctJtiort A/C Time.
Aircroft Serial No. _ Dote _

Tesi I o»-arion Observer .
TEensgf iende BPyo_s_s_e_o_ T

__est • Accepted Engine Foiled Test
No. 1 Pickup No. 2 P ickop No. 3

S/N Fickup
N '1 S p e e d S/N
N“ Speed S/N
REM ARKS
• n
1 n ( 70 cp s ( 200 cps í 200 ops
Pe<ceni (200 cps
P ercen t Filler) Fil'ef) F.lteO
Filier)
ii 0.5%) (• 0.5%)
92 90 (2,5) (2.5) (2.5) ( 3.7)
97 90 (2.5) (2.5) (2.5) (3.7)
97 95 (2.5) (2.5) ^ (2.5) (3.7)
97 MAX. (2.5) ( 3.7)
(2.5)
------ --------------
100 90 (2.5) ( 2.5) (2,5) { 3.7)
Mote: The figjres given ir> porentheses ore the moximum permissible engine vibronon.
X>'730- I Í 2C
Engine Vibration Test Data Sheet (Sample)

Figure 5
71- 00-00 Ss^góa

HoneyweII MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
T53-L-703
(11) Check oí vibration meter LTCT9281 as follows:
(a) Immediateíy after last entry is made on the data sheet, set CHANNEL selector to 1.
NOTE: With the OPERATION selector set at C. INPUT NETWORK selector

and RANGE selector may be in any position.
(b) Set OPERATION selector to C. Meter indication should be 15.0 on lower scale.
(c) Push in CALIBRATE SIGNAL control. Meter indications should be 10.5 (or 6.0) depending
on type oí pickup being used.
(d) 11 meter indications oí 15.0 and 10.5 (or 6.0) are not obtained. push in CALIBRATE
SIGNAL
control, and turn to obtain indication oí 10.5 (or 6.0).
(e) Pelease CALIBRATE SIGNAL control carelully, without turning. Meter indications, on lower
scale, should be approximateiy 15.0.
NOTE: II check after

indícate testing
tess than disclosed
14.0 or morethat
thanadjustment oí meter
1/16 inch higher hasfull
than changed to
scale read-
Ings, it must be assumed that some meter indications recorded during
test were inaccurate. In this case, entire vibration test must be con-
ducted again. 11 delective pickups are suspected of producing incorrect
meter indications, interchange pickups and check their operation with a
trial vibration test, conducted at only one combination of Ni and N2
speeds. If comparison with recordad indications on data sheet discloses
a detective pickup, entire test must be conducted again, with pickups
that are known to be good.
(12) Evaluation oí vibration test data as follows:
(a) Compare indications recorded on Engine Vibration Test Data Sheet with figures given in
parentheses lor máximum permissible engme vibration. 11 all recorded figures are below
máximum permissible vibration, engine, as installed, has passed the vibration test.
(b) Vibration measured with 70 cps lilter will mclude installation or alrcratt vibration. If recorded
indication, using 70 cps lilter exceeds máximum permissible engine vibration figures, but
using 200 cps lilter is within permissible figures, excessive vibration is caused by the
aircraft. Corrective action must be taken before aircraft is again tested for vibration, prior to
acceptance for unrestricted flight.
(o) Vibration measured with the 200 cps lilter represente engine vibration only. If recorded
indication exceeds the máximum permissible engine vibration figures, corrective action
must be taken before engine is again tested for vibration, prior to acceptance for
unrestricted flight.
71- 00-00 SS?S02

Honeywell —ENANCEMANUAL
NOTE: If any vibration reading exceeds the engine operatmg limits, this
operational point should be repeated. Running at this point. vary N,
while holding a constant N2- Then vary N2 while holdtng a constant Ni.
This procedure witi isolate the vibration source.
(13) Correcting vibration. SeeTable 2 for vibration sources. See steps (14) and (15) for corrective
action.
(14) Correcting gas producer (Ni) vibration as lollows;
(a) Remove upper half of compressor and impeller housing.
(b) Using a dial indicator, check concentricity of all spacer lands and OD of centrifugal impeller.
1 Máximum allowable runout of each spacer land is 0.003 inch TIR. However, any two
lands may have a runout up to 0.0033 inch TIR.
2 Máximum allowable runout on centrifugal impeller OD is 0.0035 inch TIR.
(c) If compressor runouts are exceeded, ship engine to Overhaul for corrective action.
(d) If compressor runouts are within limits, remove combustor turbine assembiy and check
second stage gas producer turbine hub and face runouts and check first stage turbine hub
and face runouts. Compare runouts with those obtained during engine buildup.
(e) If runouts have been exceeded, reseat turbine rotor and recheck runouts.
(f) Reinstall combustor turbine assembiy and repeat vibration test.
(15) Correcting power turbine (N2) vibration asfollows:

NOTE: Do not remove combustor turbine assembiy completely. Raise it
only enough to allow rotation of power turbine rotors without dis-
turbing position of power shaft.
(a) Remove combustor turbine assembiy. (See 72-40-00.)
CAUTIDN- DO NOT USE LEAD PENCIL WHEN MARKING POWER SHAFT

AND TURBINE ROTOR. MARKINGS ON HIGH
TEMPERATURE
MATERIALS SHALL ONLY BE DONE WITH APPROVED
MARK-
ER.
(b) Before disengaging power turbine rotors from power shaft, mark power shaft splme and
turbine rotor Journal to provide an indication for turbine rotor relocation.
(c) Roíate power turbine rotors 90 degrees.
(d) Instan combustor turbine assembiy. (See 72-40-00.)
(e) Start engine and repeat test at point where vibration was discovered.
Page 24
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NT™ANCEM^
Table 2. Vibration Sources and Corrective Action
Possible Source of Excessive Vibration Corrective Action
GENFRAL.
Inlet Inspect for foreign object damage.
Aircraft engine mounts, inlet screens, Check for proper installation and torque. If necessary, reinstali
clamps and hoses properly and tighten as required.
Exhausi and power turbine
Inspect for metal chips or signs of damage incurred while
running engine.
GAS PROni ir.FR ÍN. 1 VIBRATION

Retorque bolts or reposition rotor in relation to first stage rotor.
Second stage gas producer rotor not within
runout limits
First stage gas producer rotor not within Reposition rotor; deán, reposition, or replace fonward and aft
runout limits cones.
Check that all are of the same weight.
Second stage gas producer bolts and
tabwashers
Reposition turbinas diametrically in relation to compressor

Gas producer turbine rotors out of balance
rotor or reposition second rotor in relation to first rotor.
No. 1 and 2 bearings Replace detective No. 2 bearing or forward to Overhaul.
Inspect inlet gulde vane assembly and compressor rotor. If

Foreign object damage in compressor
damage exceeds limits, replace rotor blades as required.
Forward to Overhaul.
Compressor rotor assembly not within
runout limits
POWFR TDRRINF íNot ViRRATION

Check for proper installation and tighten as required.
Loose V-band assembly clamp. Exhaust
pipe
Reposition rotor in relation to second stage power turbine.
First stage power turbine rotor not within
runout limits or out of balance
Second stage power turbine rotor not within

Replace rotor.
runout limits or out of balance
First stage power turbine bolts and

Check that all are of the same weight.
tabwashers
No. 3 and 4 bearings Check for wear and replace.
Page 25
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,.TENANCEMANUAL
Table 2. Vibration Sources and Corrective Action (Conl)
Possible Source of Excessive Vibration Corrective Action
Power shaft bolt bent or shims not properly Check that power shaft bolt is not bent and shims are properly
installed seated.
Forward engine to Overhaul.

Damaged rear ¡nternal threads of power
shaft
Replace cylinder.
Power turbine rotor to power turbine
cylinder clearance is low, causing rub
Replace parts.
Combustión chamber to support cone pilot
diameters out of squareness or concentric-
ity
Power turbine rotor location Relocate in relation to power shaft.
Power shaft out of balance Forward engine to Overhaul.
Unbalanced power turbine rotor Replace rotor.
NOTE: Vibration meter indications will either be within specified limits or

will greatly exceed the original readings. If meter indications are
still in excess of specified limits, a second relocation must be ac-
complished. Perform procedures following in steps (f) thru (h).
(f) Repeat preceding steps (a) and (b).
(g) Rotate power turbine rotors 90 degrees.
(h) Repeat preceding steps (d) and (e).

NOTE: If engine does not opérate within specified vibration limits following
second relocation, relocate power turbine rotors another 90 de-
grees. If engine fails to check out following third relocation, ship
engine to Overhaul.
F. LTCT28430-01 Vibration Analysis Kit Procedures (See Figure 6)
This kit incorporates the Chadwick Helmuth model 8500C vibration analyzer, for use in vibration analyz-
er testing of T53 series engines. Through proper use of this equipment, on wing, finite frequency analy-
sis can be made to determine the cause of high vibration conditions. For warranty problems concern-
ing this equipment, contact:
Page 26
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
Honeyi/vell -«-—MANUAL
HoneyweII International Inc.
Aerospace Sen/ices
Ground Support Equipment
717 N. Bentíix Orive
South Bend, IN 46620-1000
(219) 231-3987
For Service or repair out of warranty, the customer can use Honeywell’s Services or the Services of the
original equipment manufacturers.
NOTE: Due to application differences, the installation and operation instructions in this
manual are of general nature and are provided for reference oniy and may dif-
ferfrom the instruotions provided in the engine speciftc maintenance manuals.
In ihese cases, the engine maintenance manual instructions shall govern over
the instructions provided- Refer to the T53 Maintenance Manual for operations
peculiar to your specifio application.
(1) Parameter backup disk.
Newly received units require storage of the exisfing sefup parameters lo a floppy disk. Backup
parameters as follows:
(a) Instan a blank floppy disk into the disk drive.
(b) Press SPECTRUM soft key.
(c) Press Setup soft key.
(d) Press MORE KEYS soft key.
(e) Press fhe STORE ALL option.

(f) Remove the floppy disk and label it ‘'LTCT28430-01 Vibration Analyzer Setup Parameters"
and store in secure location in accordance with local procedure.
G. Installation and Operation
(1) Installation of Vibration Signatura Recordar (LTCT26442-03).
(a) Gain access to the core engine.
CAUTION: MANOLE VIBRATION PICKUPS WITH CARE. IFAPICKUPIS

DROPPED OR STRUCK WITH FORCE, ITS ACCURACY
MAY
BE IMPAIRED.
(b) Instan the appiicable adapters on the engine to be testad, removing engine boits as
necessary. {See Figure 7.)
Page 27
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA.™™
MODEL 7460B
MODEL 8500C
LTCT28715-01
VIBRATION PICKUP
LTCT29281-01 CABLE
T53L703149
Vibration Analysis Kit - LTCT28430-02 (Components)

Figure 6
71-00-00 sepr§002
HoneyweII WAINTÉNANCE
MANUAL
T53-L-703
'Lie: 525)
Location ot Vjbration Ptckup Adapters

Figute 7
Pape 29
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -NTENANCEMANUAL
(c) Secure each transducer, LTCT28715-01, to its adaptar with appropriate number of screws
and suitable lockwashers. Tighten the screws securely.
CAUTION: AVOID KINKS AND SHARP BENDING OF CABLE ASSEMBLIES AND

CONDITIONS WHICH WOULD CAUSE CABLE ASSEMBLIES
TO
DETERIORATE FROM HEAT OR ABRASION,
(d) Connect the cable assembly, LTCT29281 -01, to each transducer. (See Figure 7.)
NOTE: Identify adapters and cable connections with numbers or colors to

make certain the transducers will be connected to the proper
Model 7460B high iow tilter CHANNEL receptacles.
(e) Secure cable assemblies to the engine and airframe with tape or cord. Allow for slack in
the cables to prevent undue strain on the transducers and connections.
NOTE: When testing engines installed in fixed wmg aircratt, the Model
8500C Spectrum Analyzer may be placed on a secure stand on
the
ground i1 desired.
(f) Secure the Model 8500C Spectrum Analyzer and Model 7460B high low tilter with bungee
cord or other suitable means, to a cushioned, protected location in the airframe.
(g) Connect the free end of each cable assembly, LTCT29281 -01, to an input channel jack of
the Model 7460B high low filter (see Figure 8). Note which engine location goes to which
of the four input channels.
(h) Connect the Model 7460B high low filter to the Model 8500C using the setup in Figure 8.
(2) Operation
The Model 8500C Spectrum Analyzer and Model 7460B high low filter are very versatile and ca-
padle instruments; their basic operation is very simple and involves oniy a few of their Controls.
Page 30
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
LTCT29281-01 LTCT26442-03
I SPECTRUM ANALYZEB KIT
#12'563'-í .'íi;
LTCT28715-01 .
TRANSDUCERS /
#3140-2
: T53 ENGINE |
I UNDERTEST !
■ I
TO 28 VDC
POWER SOURCE
SETUP USING MODEL 85000

T53L703150
LTCT28430-01 Vibration Analysis Kit Interconnect Diagram

Figure 8
71-00-00 Sepf3002
HoneyweII
(a) Setup Model 7460B high lowfilter as follows. (See Figure 9.)
NOTE: There are two versions of the Model 7460B high low filter. The
newest versión. Model 7460B. requires 28 vdc power and operales
independent of the Spectrum Analyzer. The Model 7460A operates
on a 15 vdc power supplied by the Spectrum Analyzer.
1 Set OUTPUT UNITS knob (1) to “VEL (IPSAVG.)”.
2 Set TRANSDUCER SELECT knob (2) to "VELOCiTY TRANSDUCER (SENSITIVITY

VARIABLE)".
2 Unlock CHANNEL SENSITIVITY knob (3) by sliding the locking lever counter dock-
wise. Set CHANNEL SENSITIVITV to the transducer calibration sheet valué for each
input used.
NOTE: Fora typical LTCT28715-01 sensitivity of 105 mV/lPS, the

numeral "lO" would be in the knob window and the dial would
be at "50".
Lock know (3) by sliding the locking lever ciockwise.
4 Turn CHANNEL SELECT knob (4) to the desired channel.
5 Set HIGH PASS FILTER SELECT knob (5) to "70 Hz".
6 Set LOW PASS FILTER SELECT knob (6) to "1000 Hz".
71-00-00 SBpfôo^
HoneyweII -'—-MANUAL
TR181
Setup Sequence for Model 7460B high low filler

Figure 9
Page 33
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -'—---AL
THERMAL PRINTEH CONNECTOR FOR DC

PAPER EXITS REAR LCD DISPLAY POWER, SIGNALS.AND
\ COMMUNICATIONS UNES
\
\
CONNECTOR FOR
BALANCER/ANAI/YZER STROBEX13SM-12
;>
k.
\
\
DISK ORIVE DOOR
PRINTER ACCESS DOOR ON BOTTOM
T53L703146
Model 8500C Spectrum Analyzer

Figure 10
Page 34
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
{b) Refer to the Model 8500C Operator's Manual (#9449-5) for the setup and operation of the
Modei 8500C Spectrum Analyzer (see Figure 10). Most displays will be setup as Spectrum
analyzer using freguency (Hz) instead of RPM indications. The primary chapter for this type
of test is Chapter 4 in the 8500C Operator’s Manual.
(3) Analysis of vibration signatura.
interpretation of the vibration displays are relatively straight forward. A typical signatura card or
spectrum display from the Model 192A is shown for demonstration and training purposes in Fig-
ure 12.
The horizontal axis of the card indicates the speed associated with the vibration signal. The bot-
tom horizontal scale in Revolutions per Minute (RPM) and the upper horizontal scale gives the
corresponding freguency Hertz (cycle per second). Since the power turbine and the compressor
generally are running at different speeds (RPM or Hertz). determining the "speed" of the vibratory
peak indicates which rotor is responsible.
The 100 percent operating speeds for each engine rotor are:
NI speed at 100% = 25,141 rpm or (419 Hz)
N2 speed at 100% = 21,100 rpm or (352 Hz)
(a) An example signatura card Model 192A is shown in Figure 12 for an engine that is operat-
ing with 95 percent Ni (compressor speed) and a 97 percent N2 (power turbine speed).
The vibration meter was indicating 0.8 inches/second (IPS/avg) average velocity. Although
the engine is within the 1.7 IPSavg limit, we wish to determine which components in the
engine are the major contributors to the 0.8 IPSavg vibration.
(b) Based on the 100 percent operating speeds (specified above) for each engine rotor, the
actual rotor speeds of interest are:
NI = 0.95X25,141 = 23.884 rpm or (23,884/60 = 398 Hz)
N2 = 0.97X21,100 = 20,467 rpm or (20,467/60 = 341 Hz)
(c) Looking at Figure 12, we conclude that the left peak near 20,000 rpm is due to unbalance
in the power turbine and the right peak near 25,000 rpm is due to compressor rotor unbal-
ance.
(d) The power turbine is producing 0.6 IPSavg of vibration and the compressor rotor is produc-
ing 0.2 IPSavg of vibration. So the major contributor to the vibration is the power turbine.
AIso visible in Figure 12 is some vibration at twice the speed of each of the two rotors, near
41,000 and near 48,000 rpm, A small amount of either is normal.
Page 35
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
J 5.8K IPS. 3839 RPh

3.88-I
3.40'
í 11 . .í. ^ 1
asee 4888 enm ftm
NOTES.
DO NOTTRYTO ADD AMPLITUDES AT EACH FREQUENCY ON THE VIBRATION PLOTS.
THEY WILLALWAYS TOTAL MORE THAN THE READING ON THE METER.
IF A STRONG PEAK EXISTS AT OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (6600 RPM OR110 HZ
AT
100% N11), VERIFY FILTER SETTINGS ARE CORRECTAND RECHECK PRIOR TO
CORRECTING ENGINE ROTOR VIBRATION.
T53L703151
Exampie Spectrum Display

Figure 11
Page 36
71 00-00
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
FREQUENCY - Hz. O C o
100 150 250 500 1000 5
2
<o m m
O
I
q
Z
D
( io
O <
VELOCITY - INGRES PER SECOND -
i* u
^
(I.P.S.)
FREQUENCY - REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE - (R.P.M.)
T53L703147
Example Spectrum Display

Figure 12
Page 37
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
TURBOSHAFT ENGINE VIBRATION TEST DATA SHEET
ENGINE SERIAL NO. (TSN) --------------------------------
LAST OVERHAUL LOCATION (TSLO)
AIRCRAFT SERIAL NO. A/C TME ---------------------------
TEST LOCATION DATE
TESTED BY OBSERVER
ENGINE PASSED TEST-ACCEPTEO i FNGINE FAILED TEST
N0.1 PICKUP N0.2 PICKUP N0.3 PICKUP

No SPEED Ni SPEED S/N S/N S/N
ÍN IN (200 CPS (200 CPS (200 CPS REMARKS
PERCENT PERCENT FILTER) FILTER) FILTER)
(±0.5%) (±0.5%) IPS AVERAGE IPS AVERAGE IPS AVERAGE
92 90 (1.3) (1.7) (2.3)
97 90 (1-3) (1.7) (2.3)
97 95 (1.3) (1.7) (2.3)
97 "MAX. (1.3) (1.7) (2.3)
100 90 (1.3) (1.7) (2.3)
‘NOTE. ACHIEVE MAXIMUM NI SPEED FOR ALTITUDE AND

AMBIENT CONDITIONS WHERE VIBE TEST IS BEING PERFORMED.
THE FIGURES GIVEN IN PARENTHESlS ARE THE MAXIMUM
PERMISSIBLE VIBRATION.
T53L703153RO
Engine Vibration Test Data Sheet (Sampie) {Inches Per Seconds)

Figure 13
Page 38
71-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
H. Calibration and Test
(1) Consult testing section for Information on calibration and test
(2) Installation oí T53 setup parameters. Three parameter settings are required.
(3) Parameter 1.
(a) Power unit up.
(b) Press SPECTRUM soft key,
(c) Press SETUP soft key.
(d) Press LOAD soft key.
(e) Enter the valué “20,000" for máximum frequency.
(f) Enter the valué “0.63“ for the IPS valué.
(g) Set the repetition mode to MULTIPLE.
(h) Set the seek function to ON.
(i) Press the STORE soft key.
(j) Label this setup as "TSS Front Vertical <V1 H4>”.

(k) If a message appears on the 8500C Indlcating this file already exists, select “Overwrite" soft
key to store.
(4) Parameter 2.
(a) Press SPECTRUM soft key.
(b) Press SETUP soft key.
(c) Press LOAD soft key.
(d) Enter the valué “20,000" for máximum frequency.
(e) Enter the valué “0.84" for the IPS valué.
(f) Set the repetition mode to MULTIPLE.
(g) Set the seek function to ON.
(h) Press the STORE soft key.
(i) Label this setup as “T53 Rear Vertical <VCDR>’’.

(j) If a message appears on the 8500C indicating this file already exists, select "Overwrite” soft
key to store.
Page 39
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(5) Parameter 3.
(a) Press SPECTRUM soft key.

(b) Press SETUP soft key.
(c) Press LOAD soft key.
(d) Enter the valué "20,000" for máximum frequeney.
fe) Enter the valué “0.94" for the IPS valué.
(f) Set the repetition mode to MULTIPLE.
(g) Set the seek functlon to ON.

(h) Press the STORE soft key.
(0 Label this setup as "T53 Axial <VPTA>”.
(J) If a message appears on the 8500C indicating this file already exists, select "Overwrite" soft
key to store.
I- Engine Shutdown
Engine shall be shut down in accordance with Aircraft Manual.
12. Extreme Weather Qoeratton
A. Abnormal Weather
(1) Maintenance procedures inelude operation during icing and precipitation, coid weather and
arctic operation and hot weather and desert operation.
(2) Engines are designed to opérate at outside air temperaturas trom -65 to 130°F (-54 to 54°C)
and up to an altitude of 25,000 feet.
(3) When engine is operated under conditions of extreme coid or heat, following operatmg precau-
tions shali be observed.
B. Coid Weather and Arctic Operation
(1) Coid weather operation of engine presenta no unusual problems if operator is alert to changmg
temperatura and precipitation conditions.
(2) Use of anti-icing System will provide protection against icing at power leveis above 50 percent
máximum continuous power.
(3) There is no anti-icing protection below 50 percent máximum continuous power. Operation in
icing conditions below this power should be avoided.
(4) Anti-icing system must be placed in operation when both following conditions exist; ambient
temperature is 40 to -35’F (4 to -37°C) and it is raining or free water exists in the air, such as
visible fog. (Refer to Aircraft Manufaclurer’s Handbook for operating instructions.)
Page 40
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ^Â,.TENA.CEMANUAL
(5) Before starting engine, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove accumulation of snow and ice from air inlet area.
(b) Manually rotate the compressor rotor to make sure that engine is not frozen.
CAIJTIQN: DO NOT USE STARTER TO FREE A FROZEN ENGINE.
(o) Use ground heater units to preheat the engine when the engine is frozen.
(d) Inspect drains to make sure normal drainage.
(e) Observe fuel limitations.
(f) Use normal starting procedures. (See paragraph 8.)
{6} Affer engine shutdown, proceed as follows;
(a) Do not install engine inlet and exhaust covers until after engine has cooled.
(b) During outside storage, make sure that engine inlet and exhaust covers are mstalled to
protect against rain, sieet, snow or other foreign matter.
C. Hot Weather and Desert Operation
(1) Hot weather operation of the engine presents no unusual problems. The following maintenance
precautions shall be observed. Before starting engine, proceed as follows;
(a) Check that the engine inlet is free of sand, heavy dust accumulation and other foreign
matter.
(b) Check aíl filters more frequently than during normal operation.
(c) Use normal starting procedures. (See paragraph 8.)
(2) After engine shutdown, proceed as follows:
(a) Instan engine inlet and exhaust protective covers immediately after engine cools.
(b) Park aircraft facing into the wind or in sheltered area if possible.
Page 41/42
71- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUB.IECT SURTECT PAGE
DESCRIPTION ANO OPERATION 72-00-00

Description of Engine 1
Direclional References 1
Specifications 1
Description of Engine Systems 4
TROURI F RHOOTING
Trouble Shooting 101
TEST EOUlPMFNT SPECIAL TOOl R AND CONSUMARLE MATERIALS

Test Équipment 201
Special Tools 201
Consumable Materials 201
SFRVICINO
Setvicing - IntroOuction 301
Sen/icing the Lubricating Oii System 301
Sen/icing Fuel Control Assemply 304
Servicing Interstage Air-Bleed Actuator Assembly 305
Preservation and Storage of Engine and Components 307
Activating Engine After Storage 313
REMOVAL AND INSTAI 1 ATION

Removal of Engine From Aircraft 401
Shipping Container 401
Preservation and Installalion of Engine in Meta) Shipping Container 401
Marking all Shipping Containers for Shipment 406
Preservation Maintenance 406
Inspection of Pressurized Containers 406
Removal of Engine From Shipping Container 410
Installing Engine on Aircraft 411
fNSPFCTION
Engine - Inspection 601
Cl PANINO
Cleaning - introduction 701
Cleaning and Preservation of Compressor 701
72- CONTENTS sepr^»^

T53-L-703
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
RUBJECT SUBJECT
PAGE
72-10-01
QUTPUT REDUGTinN CARRIPR AND GEAR ARSEMBLY AND
SUN 1
GEARSHAFT 201
Description and Operation 203
Replacement of Output Gearshaft Seal 209
Removal/Installation 212
Inspection/Check 212
Inspection and Repair Torquemeter Cylinder and Valve
Approved
TORQUE Repairs
METER CYLINDER AND TORQUEMFTER VALVE ASSEMBLY 72-10-02
COMPRESSQR AND IMPELLER HOUSING ASSEMBLIES 72-30-01

Desoríption and Operation ^
Disassembiy/Reassembly Compressor Housing Assembly 204
inspection/Check 208
Approved Repair 211
COMPRESSQR ROTOR AND IMPELLER ASSEMBLY 72-30-02

Description and Operation
Inspection/Check
Approved Repairs
CQMBUSTOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY 72-40-00

Disassembiy/Reassembly 215
C/eaning/Painting 231
p^G0 2
72- CONTENTS
Honeywell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUBJECT SUBJECT PACE
V-BAND COUPLING ASSEMBLY. Qll. STRAINER HOUSING ADAPTER.

CONNECTOR POWER TURBINF TUBES AND FIRESHIELD ASSEMBLY 72-40-01
Cteaning/Painting 201
Approved Repairs 203
EXHAUST DIFFUSER SUPPQRT CONE ASSEMBLY 72-40-02

Cleaning/Painting 204
COMBUSTION CHAMBER ASSEMBLY 72-40-03

COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER ASSEMBLY 72-40-04

COMBUSTION CHAMBER HOUSING ASSEMBLY 72-40-05

Inspection/Check 20i
EXHAUST DIFFUSER 72-40-06

COMBUSTION CHAMBER DEFI ECTOR ASSEMBLY 72-40-07

EXHAUST THFRMOCQUPLE HARNESS 72-40-08

Repair 204
72- CONTENTS
T53-L-703
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
FIRST STAGE POWER TURBINE NQZZLE 72-50-01

FIRST STAGE POWER TURBINE ROTOR. SEALING FLANGE

AND 72-50-02
SPACER 201
Approved Repairs
72-50-03
SECOND STAGF POWER TURBINE NQZZLE 201
Approved Repairs
72-50-04
PnWFR TURBINF ROTOR AND BFARING HOUSING ASSEMBLY 201
Approved Repairs
72-51-00
201
GAS PRODUCER SYSTEM COMPQNENTS
Disassembiy/Reassembly
SFCOND STAGE GAS PRODUCER TURBINE ROTOR 72-51-01

ASSEMBLY. 201
SPACER. CYLINDFR AND NQZZLE ASSEMBLY 211
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repairs 72-51-02
201
FIRST STAGE GAS PRODUCER TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY 201
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repairs 72-51-03
201
AFT niL RING. SFAÜNG RING. FQRWARD AND REAR CQNES 201
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repairs
P3G0 4
72- CONTENTS
T53-L-703
TABLE OF CONTENTS {CONT)
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
FIRST STAGE GAS PRODUCER NQZ2LE 72-51-04

ASSEMBLY 201
Delatad
AIR DIFFUSER. REAR CQMPRESSQR BEARING OiL SEAL RETAINE.B.
AFT SEAL. REAR BEARING HOUSING ASSEMBLY. ROLLER BEARING.
FORWARD OIL RING AND FORWARD SEAL 72-51-05
ACCESSQRY PRIVE GEARBOX ASSEMBLY 72-60-01

OVERSPEED GOVERNQR AND TACHOMETER PRIVE ASSEMBLY 72-60-02

Disassembly/Reassembly 206
Page 5/6
72-CONTENTS Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTEFV CHAPTER/
SECTiON/ SECTION/
SUB,IFCT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
72 ENGINE Tab 25 Sept 30/02

26 Sept 30/02
Table of 1 Sept 30/02 27 Sept 30/02
Contents 2 Sept 30/02 28 Blank
3 Sept 30/02 101 Sept 30/02
4 Sept 30/02 102 Sept 30/02
5 Sept 30/02 103 Sept 30/02
6 Blank 104 Sept 30/02
105 Sept 30/02
List of 1 Sept 30/02 106 Sept 30/02
Effective 2 Sept 30/02 107 Sept 30/02
Pages 3 Sept 30/02 108 Sept 30/02
4 Sept 30/02 109 Sept 30/02
5 Sept 30/02 110 Sept 30/02
6 Sept 30/02 111 Sept 30/02
112 Sept 30/02
72-00-00 113 Sept 30/02
DESCRIPTION 114 Sept 30/02
AND 115 Sept 30/02
OPERATION —
Tab 116 Sept 30/02
117 Sept 30/02
72-00-00 1 Sept 30/02 118 Sept 30/02
2 Sept 30/02 119 Sept 30/02
3 Sept 30/02 120 Sept 30/02
4 Sept 30/02 201 Sept 30/02
5 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
6 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
7 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
8 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
9 Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
10 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
11 Sept 30/02 208 Sept 30/02
12 Sept 30/02 209 Sept 30/02
13 Sept 30/02 210 Sept 30/02
14 Sept 30/02 211 Sept 30/02
15 Sept 30/02 212 Sept 30/02
16 Sept 30/02 213 Sept 30/02
17 Sept 30/02 214 Sept 30/02
18 Sept 30/02 215 Sept 30/02
19 Sept 30/02 216 Sept 30/02
20 Sept 30/02 217 Sept 30/02
21 Sept 30/02 218 Sept 30/02
22 Sept 30/02 301 Sept 30/02
23 Sept 30/02 302 Sept 30/02
24 Sept 30/02 303 Sept 30/02
304 Sept 30/02
Page 1
Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
ñl)R.iFCT PAGE DATE SUR.IFCT PAGE DATE
305 Sept 30/02 623 Sept 30/02

306 Sept 30/02 624 Sept 30/02
307 Sept 30/02 625 Sept 30/02
308 Sept 30/02 626 Sept 30/02
309 Sept 30/02 627 Sept 30/02
310 Sept 30/02 628 Sept 30/02
311 Sept 30/02 629 Sept 30/02
312 Sept 30/02 630 Sept 30/02
313 Sept 30/02 631 Sept 30/02
314 Sept 30/02 632 Biank
315 Sept 30/02 701 Sept 30/02
316 Biank 702 Sept 30/02
401 Sept 30/02 703 Sept 30/02
402 Sept 30/02 704 Sept 30/02
403 Sept 30/02 705 Sept 30/02
404 Sept 30/02 706 Sept 30/02
405 Sept 30/02
406 Sept 30/02 72-10-00
407 Sept 30/02 REDUCTION
408 Sept 30/02 GEAR - Tab
409 Sept 30/02
410 Sept 30/02 72-10-01 1 Sept 30/02
411 Sept 30/02 2 Biank
412 Biank 201 Sept 30/02
601 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
602 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
603 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
604 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
605 Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
606 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
607 Sept 30/02 208 Sept 30/02
608 Sept 30/02 209 Sept 30/02
609 Sept 30/02 210 Sept 30/02
610 Sept 30/02 211 Sept 30/02
611 Sept 30/02 212 Sept 30/02
612 Sept 30/02 213 Sept 30/02
613 Sept 30/02 214 Sept 30/02
614 Sept 30/02 215 Sept 30/02
615 Sept 30/02 216 Sept 30/02
616 Sept 30/02 217 Sept 30/02
617 Date xx/02 218 Sept 30/02
618 Date xx/02 219 Sept 30/02
619 Date xx/02 220 Sept 30/02
620 Date xx/02 221 Sept 30/02
621 Sept 30/02 222 Biank
622 Sept 30/02
7 0 — F F F Page2
t ^ CI r Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeyi/vell T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
RUR-IFCT PAGE DATE SURJFCT PACE DATE
227 Sept 30/02 72-50-00

228 Sept 30/02 TURBINE
229 Sept 30/02 SECTION - Tab
230 Sept 30/02
231 Sept 30/02 72-50-01 201 Sept 30/02
232 Blank 202 Sept 30/02
72-40-01 201 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
204 Blank 206 Sept 30/02
72-40-02 201 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 208 Blank
203 Sept 30/02 72-50-02 201 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
72-40-03 201 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
72-40-04 201 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 208 Blank
205 Sept 30/02 72-50-03 201 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
207 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
208 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
209 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
210 Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
72-40-05 201 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
202 Blank 208 Sept 30/02
72-40-06 201 Sept 30/02 72-50-04 201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
72-40-07 201 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
202 Blank 206 Sept 30/02
72-40-08 1 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
201 Sept 30/02 209 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 210 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 211 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 212 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02 213 Sept 30/02
206 Blank 214 Blank
70 —PPP
i ^ C. r I Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
RUROFCT PAGE DATE Sl)B,IFCT PACE DATE
72-10-02 1 Sept 30/02 217 Sept 30/02

201 Sept 30/02 219 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 220 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 221 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 222 Sept 30/02
223 Sept 30/02
72-30-00 224 Sept 30/02
COMPRESSOR 225 Sept 30/02
SECTION Tab 226 Sept 30/02
227 Sept 30/02
72-30-01 1 Sept 30/02 228 Blank
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02 72-40-00
202 Sept 30/02 COMBUSTION
204 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02 72-40-00 1 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02 2 Blank
207 Sept 30/02 201 Sept 30/02
208 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
209 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
210 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
211 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
212 Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
213 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
214 Sept 30/02 208 Sept 30/02
72-30-02 1 Sept 30/02 209 Sept 30/02
201 Sept 30/02 211 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 212 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 213 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 214 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02 215 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02 216 Sept 30/02
207 Sept 30/02 217 Sept 30/02
208 Sept 30/02 218 Sept 30/02
209 Sept 30/02 219 Sept 30/02
210 Sept 30/02 220 Sept 30/02
211 Sept 30/02 221 Sept 30/02
212 Sept 30/02 222 Sept 30/02
213 Sept 30/02 223 Sept 30/02
214 Sept 30/02 224 Sept 30/02
215 Sept 30/02 225 Sept 30/02
216 Sept 30/02 226 Sept 30/02
72 — EFF Sept 30/02

T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTiON/ SECTION/
SUBJECT PAGF DATE RUR.1ECT PAGE DATE
72-51-00 202 Blank

GAS 72-51-04 201 Sept 30/02
PRODUCER 202 Sept 30/02
SYSTEM 203 Sept 30/02
COMPONENTS Tab 204 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02
72-51-00 201 Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 208 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 209 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02 210 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02 72-51-05 201 Sept 30/02
207 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
208 Sept 30/02
209 Sept 30/02 72-60-00
210 Sept 30/02 ACCESSORY
211 Sept 30/02 DR1VE
213 Sept 30/02
214 Sept 30/02 72-60-01 1 Sept 30/02
216 Sept 30/02 201 Sept 30/02
217 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
218 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
219 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
220 Blank 205 Sept 30/02
72-51-01 201 Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 207 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 208 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 209 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02 210 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02 211 Sept 30/02
207 Sept 30/02 212 Sept 30/02
208 Sept 30/02 213 Sept 30/02
209 Sept 30/02 214 Sept 30/02
210 Sept 30/02 215 Sept 30/02
211 Sept 30/02 216 Sept 30/02
212 Sept 30/02 217 Sept 30/02
213 Sept 30/02 218 Sept 30/02
214 Sept 30/02 72-60-02 1 Sept 30/02
216 Blank 201 Sept 30/02
72-51-02 201 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
72-51-03 201 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
Page 5
Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTiON/ SECTION/
RDR.IFCT PAGE DATE SUB.IECT PAGE DATE
205 Sept 30/02

206 Sept 30/02
207 Sept 30/02
208 Sept 30/02
209 Sept 30/02
210 Blank
Page 6
Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ENGINE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description of Engine
A. HoneyweII engines gas turbme engines are free turbine power plants.
B. Engines are shaft turbine engines with a two stage. free type power turbine and a two stage gas pro-
ducer turbine that drives a combination axial centrilugal compressor. Combustor is an external annu-
lar type. Five major sections of the engine are air mlet, compressor, diffuser, combustor and exhaust.
C. The T53-L-703 engine has combustor turbine parts of improved material as well as improved cool-
ing of the gas producer nozzles and rotors.
2. Directional References
A. The following directional references (Figure 1) are used in this manual:
(1) Front: End of engine from which output power is extracted.
(2) Rear: End of engine from which exhaust gases are expelled.
(3) Lett and hght: Determinad by observing engine from exhaust end.
(4) Bottom: Determined by location of accessory drive gearbox.

(5) Top: Directly opposite, or 180 degrees from, the accessory drive gearbox. (Hot air solenoid
valve is at the top of the engine.)
(6) Rotation of direction: Determined as viewed from rear of engine. Direction of rotation of com-
pressor rotor and gas producer turbines is counterclockwise. Power turbinas and power output
gearshaft rotate clockwise.
(7) O’clock: Position expressed as viewed from rear of engine.
3. Specifications
See Table 1.
Page 1
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
SECTION GEARBOX SECTION XA 1333 101
Major Sections of Engine and Directionat References

Figure 1
Page 2
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Table 1. Specifications
MODEL
Honeyweill Engines T53-L-703
TYPE
Application Heücopter Powerplant

Mounting Points Required Mínimum of Three
Required for
Installation
DIMENSIONS
Overall Length 47.602 inches

Nominal Diameter 23.01 inches
Máximum Radius 13.550 inches
WEIGHT
Specification Weight (Dry)

545 pounds
Residual Fluids (Estimated)
Oií. 3 pounds
Fue!, 2
ROTATIONAL DIRECTIONS pounds
Compressor Rotor
Gas Producer Turbines Counterclockwise
Counterclockwise
Power Turbines
Power Output Gearshaft Ciockwise
Clockwise
TYPE FUEL Refer to 71 -00-00
TYPE OlL Refer to 71 -00-00
MISCELLANEOUS
Combustión Chamber
Externa! annular
Compressor Ratio
7 to 1
OPERATING TEMPERATURE
Range
Altitude -65 to 130“F (-54 to 54“C)
25,000 feet mínimum
Page 3
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
IJ ^ ^■ MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Horio^ywoll T53-L-703
4. Descríptíon of Engine Systems
The engine Systems are as follows: lubrication, internal cooling, pressurization and anti-icing, fuel, fuel
control, electrical, inierstage air bleed and variable inlet guide vane. The Systems and their components
are described and illustrated separately.
A. Lubrication System
The engine lubrication system (Figures 2 and 3) consista of main oil pressure supply system and the
oil scavenge system. Principal components of lubrication system are lube oil filter assembly, power
driven rotary (oil) pump, power driven rotary (booster) pump and associated external hose assemblies
and internal passages.
(1) Main oíl pressure supply system. Engine (ubhcatíng oil ís supplied from an aircrafí mounted oil
tank. Oil entera power driven rotary (otl) pump mounted on accessory drive gearbox and is
discharged through internal passages to lube oil filter assembly. Rttered oil is directed into two
mam flow paths. One oil path passes through internal passages in inlet housing to supply
(ubrícatíng oii to íront section of engine including reductron gearing, forquemeter, accessory
drive gearing, No. 1 main bearmg and power shatt forward bearing. The second oil flow path is
through external oil pressure hose assemblies to rear section of engine for lubrication of No. 2,
3 and 4 main bearings and seáis at bearing positions.
(a) In inlet housing section, oil is directed through accessory drive carrier flanges into annular
passage located in rear support flange of carrier. Oil from this passage is directed to oil
transfer assembly for torced feed spray lubrication of reduction gears through three oil
transfer tubes. Passages in housing provide lubrication to output shatt bearings. No. 1
main bearing and accessory drive pinion gear and power shaft fon/vard bearing are
lubricated by a transfer tube from accessory drive carrier assembly. Oil under constant
pressure lubricates support bearing. Oil passes through oi! transfer tube in oil nozzle
located on rear face of front cover housing. Oil flows through two jets in nozzle to
lubrícate output gearshaft support bearings.
Page 4
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Lubrication System Diagram

Figure 2
Page 5
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Lubrication System External Components

Figure 3
Page 6
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
I
HoneyweII MAtNTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 3
1. OILPRESSUREHOSEASSEMBLYTO 6, OIL SCAVENGE HOSE ASSEMBLY

NO. 3 AND 4 BEARINGS FROM
2. OIL PRESSURE HOSE ASSEMBLY TO 7. NO. 3 AND 4 BEARING
LUBE PRESSURE MANIFOLD NO. 3 AND 4 BEARING OIL STRAINER
3. OIL SCAVENGE HOSE ASSEMBLY FROM 8. HOUSING CONNECTOR
NO. 2 BEARING POWER DRIVEN ROTARY (BOOSTER)
4. OILPRESSUREHOSEASSEMBLYTO 9. PUMP
NO. 2 BEARING FILTER 10. LUBE OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY
5. LUBE PRESSURE MANIFOLD POWER DRIVEN ROTARY (OIL) PUMP
(b) A third transfer passage from accessory drive carrier is directed up through an inlet hous-
ing strut to power dhven rotary (booster) pump, which is mounted on and driven by the
overspeed govemor and tachometer drive assembly. This assembly ;ncludes a pressure
regulating valve that governs output pressure of power driven rotary (booster) pump by
circulating excess pressurized oil back to inlet housing. Pressurized oil from power driven
rotary (booster) pump is directed back through an inlet housing strut and a strainer to tor-
quemeter valve located on torquemeter cylinder.
(c) An offset passage in overspeed governor mounting flange supplies oil to strainer and me-
tering cartridge in overspeed governor which directs metered oil to overspeed governor
and tachometer drive gear irain. An additional transfer passage from mam transfer sup-
port assembly directs oil through infernal passages in inlet housing to power takeoff
mounting flange. This oil, as required, passes through a strainer and metehng orífice to
lubrícate engine driven accessories on power takeoff mounting flange.
(d) Oil flow to rear section of engine is supplied from an oil pressure port at 5 o’clock position
on inlet housing through an external flexible oil hose assembly to lube pressure manifoid
mounted on forward face of diffuser housing. Oil is directed from bottom of diffuser hous-
ing to No. 2 main bearíng and forward and aft seáis. Oil is directed from top of manifoid
through a hose assembly and strainer through upper strut in exhaust diffuser to lubrícate
No, 3 and 4 main bearings.
(2) Oil scavenge system,
(a) AH internal scavenge oil from inlet housing section drains through hollow support struts to
bottom strut in inlet housing, through a screen and transfer tube and into accessory drive
gearbox. Scavenge oil from output reduction carrier and gear assembly flows by gravity
into hbllow inlet housing struts.
(b) Scavenge oil from No. 1 main bearíng is pumped to inlet housing struts. Scavenge oil
from No. 2 main bearing flows through a scavenge oil tube in diffuser housing and is di-
rected to accessory drive gearbox by an external scavenge oil hose assembly. Scavenge
oil from No, 3 and 4 bearings. aided by two impeliere located in bearing housing. flows
through oil tube that extends through bottom of exhaust diffuser and is directed to acces-
sory drive gearbox by an external scavenge oil hose assembly. Scavenge portlon of the
power driven rotary (oil) pump returns scavenge oil from accessory drive gearbox through
aircraft oil cooler and back to oil storage tank.
Page 7
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
(3) Torquemeter. The torquemeter is a hydromechanical torque measuring device located in re-
duclion gearing section of jnlet housing. The lorquemeler uses lubricating oil boosted to a high
pressure by power driven rotary (booster) pump. It consists of a stationary píate, a movable
píate attached to planet gear carrier, and 18 Steel balls positioned in conical pockets located in
both plates. Resistance to rotation of planetary gears, due to load on output shaft, causes car-
rier mounted píate to roíate slighfiy. Torquemeter balls are displaced from their individual pock-
ets, forcing rear torquemeter píate to move rearward. Rearvi/ard motion of torquemeter píate
unseats a spring loaded poppet valve, permitting high pressure oil to enter torquemeter cylin-
der chamber and equalize forcé tending to cause rearward movement of torquemeter píate.
Torquemeter oil pressure from cylinder and gearbox air pressure is directed to aircraft torque-
meter gage which indícales ditferential torque oil pressure in psi. Differential torque oil pressure
is proportionai to torque deiivered to output gearbox.
B. Fueí System
The fuel System (Figures 4 and 5) consists of the fuel control, starting fuel solenoid valve, main and
starting fuel manifoids and hoses, fiow divider assembly, starting fuel nozzles, check filter valve
(purge) and fuel atomizers. A pressure operated drain valve, at the bottom of the combustión cham-
ber housing, automatically drains unburned fuel from the combustión chamber when the engine is
shut down.
NOTE: At low ambient temperaturas. JP-5 and JP-8 fuel may cause slow
engine starts.
(1) Starting fuel system. During engine start, the starting fuel system delivers starting fuel to the
combustión chamber. Energizíng the primer fuel switch opens the starting fuel solenoid valve,
allowing scheduled fuel from the fuel regulator to flow through the starting fuel manifoid, four
starting fuel nozzles and into the combustión chamber where it is ignited by four igniter plugs.
At 40 percent Ni speed, the ignition, starting fuel solenoid valve and starter are de-energized
to cióse and stop the flow of starting fuel. The check filter valve opens and bleeds pressurized
air from combustor to purge fuel from starting fuel lines and nozzles.
(2) Mam fuel system. The main fue! system delivers metered fuel from the fuel regulator to the
main fuel manifoid where it is discharged through 22 fuel nozzles into the combustión chamber.
Mam fuel is ignited by the burning starting fuel.
Page 8
72 —00 —00 Sept 30/02

HoneyweII
Figure 4
Page 9
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Page 10
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAÍNTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
Fuel System External Components

Figure 5 {Sheet 2)
Page 11
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 5
1, AIR PRESSURE SENSING HOSE 8. FLOW DIVIDER DRAIN HOSE

ASSEMBLY 9. ASSEMBLY
COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN
2. STARTING FUEL HOSE ASSEMBLY 10. VALVE
MAIN FUEL HOSE ASSEMBLY
3, STARTING FUEL SOLENOID VALVE 11. OVERSPEED GOVERNOR
4. STARTING FUEL HOSE ASSEMBLY 12. FUEL REGULATOR
5. MAIN FUEL MANIFOLD 13. TEMPERATURE SENSING ELEMENT
6. STARTING FUEL MANIFOLD 14. STARTING FUEL CHECK FILTER
7, FLOW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVE VALVE
ASSEMBLY
(3) Fue) contro) system (see Figure 4). The fue) control System consists of a primary control lor the
gas producer section and an overspeed governor lor the power turbina section. An integral
dual fue) pump and emergency (manual) control system are incorporated in the primary control
unit. The fue) control incorporates acceleraíion and deceleration controla and a droop type
governor (or steady State speed control, The matn metering valve oí the fuel regulator is the
controlling unit by which the main fuel fiow is metered to the engine. Its position is determined
by the acíion of the gas producer speed governor, the power turbine overspeed governor or the
acceleration and deceleration control, depending upon engine requirements. In regulatmg the
mam metering valve, the governor or control that demands the least fuel tlow overrides all oth-
ers, except the deceleration control, to make sure a minlmum fuel flow rafe,
(a) Functions of gas producer speed control are to govern ground and flight operations, to
limit máximum power of engine and to maintain steady State conditions through all power
ranges- Gas producer governor is driven through gearing at a speed proportional to gas
producer rotor speed, It regúlales gas producer rotor speed to valué selected by power
lever.
(b) Power turbine rotor speed is regulated by power turbine overspeed governor at rpm se-
lected. Power turbine overspeed governor is driven through gearing at a speed progor-
tional to power turbine rotor speed. Limits for power turbine overspeed governor are set
by adjustable stops.
(4) Fuel flow. Fuel enters fuel regulator through inlet screen and flows to dual element fuel pump.
It is then pumped through check valves and outlet screen to transfer valve. With iransfer valve
in normal position for automatic operation. fuel flows to main metering valve at a pressure regu-
lating valve. Position of main metering valve and flow of fuel is automatically controlled by Com-
puter section of fuel regulator. Metered fuel flows through open shutoff valve and discharge
port to engine flow divider, main fuel manifoid and atomizing nozzies in combustión chamber.
When transfer valve is in EMERGENCY position, fuel flows through and is metered by the
EMERGENCY (manual) metering valve. Fuel pressure is controlled by emergency pressure
regulatmg valve. Fuel is delivered through the open shutoff valve to fuel discharge port and to
engine flow divider, main fuel manifoid and atomizers in combustión chamber. Area of valve
opening and resulting flow of fuel are determined by position of power lever controlled from
cockpit.
Page 12
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
I
NOTE: When the engine is started. using the emergency fuel system, the fuel
control does not govern fuel flow. Fuel Ilow is controlled by the pilot.
(5) Emergency (manual) fuel system. If the automatic fuel system fails, the emergency fuel system
may be selected to sustain engine operation. When the emergency system is in operation, the
main metering valve is bypassed. Fuel is metered to the engine by the manual system meter-
ing valve, which is positioned from the pilot's compartment by the power lever. Acceieration
and decelerafion control is not provided in emergency position.
C. Electrical System
The electrical system provides circuitry for starting, ignition and for all electrical accessories. (See Fig-
ures 6 and 7.)
(1) Main wiring harness. The main wiring harness incorporales quick disconnect type connectors
for aircraft electrical input (main connector) and for engine ignition unit, hot air solenoid valve.
starting fuel solenoid valve. inlet oil temperature bulb, emergency fuel transfer solenoid valve,
power turbine (N^) and gas producer (Nj) tachometer generators.
(2) Ignition system. The high energy, médium voltage ignition system consists of an ignition unit,
an ignition lead, coil assembly and igniter plugs. The system requires 24 vdc minimum input at
3.0 amperes.
(3) Exhaust thermocouple assembly. The engine ¡s provided with a thermocouple harness assem-
bly consisting of an electrical connector, shielded manifoid and chromel alumel thermocouples
contained in probes inserted through first power turbine nozzle into path of exhaust gas and
transmits exhaust gas temperaturas to cockpit indicator.
D. Internal Cooling, Pressurization and Anti-icmg Systems
The internal cooling system provides cooling air to internal engine components and pressurizes the
No. 1,2 and 3 main bearing and intershaft oil seáis. The anti-icing system supplies hot air under
pressure to prevent icing of the inlet housing areas and inlet guide vanes when the engine is operat-
ing under ícíng conditions.
(1) Internal cooling and pressurization. (See Figure 8.) Internal cooling and pressurization air is
obtained from five supplies; (1) through fourth stage disc (2) from tip of centrifugal compressor
impeller (3) from edge of combustión chamber deflector, (4) through first and second stage gas
producer nozzfe assembiies and (5) from externa! air through hotlow struts of exhaust diffuser
Page 13
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
' ' ’l'C

i lüM TOB F ’. uas
Electrical System Schematic

Figure 6
Page 14
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
Electrical System External Components

Figure 7 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 15
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
133
104
3
Electrical System External Components

Figure 7 {Sheet 2)
Page 16
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 7
1. EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY 10. IGNITION UNIT

2. IGNITER PLUG 11. IGNITER PLUG
3. HOT AIR SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR 12. LEFT IGNITION LEAD
4. GAS PRODUCER TACHOMETER 13. IGNITION LEAD AND COIL
GENERATOR CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
5. RIGHT IGNiTlON LEAD 14. POWER TURBiNE TACHOMETER
6. AIRCRAFT MAIN CONNECTOR GENERATOR CONNECTOR
7. MAIN WIRING HARNESS 15. EMERGENCY FUEL TRANSFER
8. STARTING FUEL SOLENOID VALVE SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR 16. OIL TEMPERATURE BULB AND
9. IGNITION UNiTINPUT CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Page 17
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Internal Cooling and Pressurization System

Figure 8
Page 18
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(a) Compressed air bled from tip of centrifugal compressor impeller cools forward face of the
diffuser housing and pressurizes No. 2 beanng forward seal. It then passes through a
series of boles through the rear compressor shaft into space between the compressor
rotor assembíy and power shaft where it spiíts into three sepárate flow paths as íodows:
1 Compressed air flows forward over the power shaft to the intershaft seal, located for-
ward of No. 1 bearing.
2 Some of the compressed air flows aft over the power shaft and emerges at the back
end of the rear compressor shaft to cool the rear face of the second stage gas pro-
ducer rotor, the forward face of the first stage power turbine rotor and first stage pow-
er turbine nozzle. The air then passes into the exhaust System.
3 The remainder of compressed air flows through a series of holes into power shaft.
This air flows aft. through a hole drilled in the power shaft through bolt, and into hoi-
(ow interior of second stage power turbine rotor assembíy. Air then passes through a
series of holes in the rotor assembíy to cool rear surface of first stage power turbine
rotor assembíy, forward surface of second stage power turbine rotor assembíy and
both faces of second stage gas producer nozzle. The air then passes into the ex-
haust stream.
(b) Compressed air bled from edge of combustión chamber deflector cools forward face of
the deflector, passes through and cools the No. 2 bearing housing. The air spiits into two
flow paths as follows:
1 Some of the compressed air cools the forward face and blade roots of first stage gas
producer rotor assembíy, the forward face of first stage gas producer rotor sealing
disc and then passes into the exhaust stream.
2 The remainder of compressed air flows through the first stage gas producer rotor
assembíy to cool lower parts of the rear face of the first stage gas producer rotor as-
sembly, (ower forward face of second stage gas producer rotor and out into the ex-
haust stream through the inner diameter of the second stage gas producer rotor.
(c) The first stage gas producer nozzle assembíy has an internal baffie which diverts cooler
air to vane (eading edge around inserís and exits at the aft edge.
(d) Compressed air passes through holes in the second stage gas producer nozzle assembíy
and between two inner deflectors, then out to cool the rear face of the first stage gas pro-
ducer rotor assembíy, front face of the second stage gas producer rotor assembíy and oul
into the exhaust stream.
(e) Ambient air enters the exhaust diffuser struts and passes through the exhaust diffuser
support cone into the area around the No. 3 and 4 bearing housing. The cooling air
moves forward over No. 3 and 4 bearing housing and past the rear face of second stage
power turbine rotor assembíy and into the exhaust stream.
Page 19
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
MAtNTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
(2) Anti-icíng system. (See Figures 9 and 10.) Pressurized hot air from (he air diffuser flows
through holes in the aft face of the diffuser vanes and collects in (he air diffuser infernal bieed
air manifoid, where it passes to an external manifoid located atihe 1 o’clock position on the
diffuser housing. A connecting manifoid, consisting of an external elbow and tubing, is at-
tached to the external bieed air manifoid and to an adapter located on top of the impeller hous-
ing. The connecting manifoid passes air to the hot air solenoid valve.
(a) The hot air solenoid valve is mounted on top of the compressor and impeller housing as-
sembly. The solenoid operated valve Controls the flow of anti-icing hot air from the diffus-
er housing to the inlet housing to prevent the formation of ice. During engine operation,
the hot air solenoid valve is normally energized in the CLOSED position by manually actu-
ating a switch in the cockpit. In the event of electrical power failure, the fail safe, spring
loaded valve returns to the OPEN position to provide continuous anti-icing air.
(b) After leaving the hot air solenoid valve, anti-icing air flows forward through a regulator
tube into a hollow annulus (port) on top of the inlet housing. This hot air is then circulated
through five of the six hollow inlet housing support struts to prevent ice formation in the
inlet housing area. Hot air also flows into an annulus in the rear of the inlet housing where
it passes through the hollow inlet gutde vanes to prevent icing. After passing through the
inlet guide vanes, the air flows into the compressor area. In the event of electrical power
failure, anti-icing becomes continuous. Hot scavenge oil, draining through the lower
struí into the accessory drive gearbox, prevenís ice formation in the bottom of the inlet
housing area. The anti-icing system is designed to accommodate air at static pressure
and to reduce the possibility of the entrapment of solid or liquid partióles.
Page 20
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
LEGEND
Anti-lcing System Airflow

Figure 9
Page 21
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
2 3 4
1. AIR DIFFUSER EXTERNAL BLEED AIR HOT AIR SOLENOID VALVE

5. ANTI-ICING AIR REGULATOR TUBE
MANIFOLD 6. iNLET HOUSING FORT
3. TUBE
2. ELBOW 7.
4. CUSTOMER BLEED AIR
ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY
Anti-lcing System External Components

Figure 10
72-00-00 SepÛO»
HoneyweII MA,NTENANCEMANUAL
E. Interstage Air Bleed System
An interstage air bleed System (Figures 11 and 12) is provided to facilitate acceleration of the com-
pressor rotor assembiy. Principal components of the System are an air bleed actuator and a bleed
band assembiy. The actuator Controls operation of the compressor bleed air by tightening or loosen-
ing the bleed bands that encircle a nng of bleed air boles in the compressor housmgs ai the exii guide
vane location. The air bleed system incorporates a transient control feature. The bleed band will be
closed at ali steady state Ni speeds above 80 percent (approximately) and open during all transients
and at N1 speeds below 80 percent at standard day sea level static conditions as directed by the sen-
sors in the fuel control.
F. Variable Inlet Guide Vane System
The variable inlet guide vanes (Figures 13 and 14) change the angle of incidence between inlet air
and compressor rotor blades to maintain the air flow requirements of the compressor rotor assembiy.
At low Ni speeds (0 to 80 percent NI speed) at standard day sea level static conditions, vanes are in
closed (low angle) position. The vanes start to open at 80 percent NI speed and are fuífy open (hígh
angle) at 93 to 95 percent Ni speed. The NI speed at which the inlet guide vanes are fully open
(high angle) varies with ambient temperaturas. The inlet guide vanes are positioned by the inlet guide
vane actuator ihrough a synchronizing ring. The inlet guide vane actuator is positioned by the inlet
guide vane actuator pilot valve located in the fuel control as function of N1 speed and compressor
inlet temperature (TI). While positioning the guide vanes, the actuator relays changes in its position
back to the fuel control through an external feedback rod. This acts to nullity the fuel out pressure
signal so that at any steady state NI speed between 80 to 95 percent the inlet guide vanes wí¡( as-
sume a constant position.
Page 23
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Interstage Bleed System Diagram

Figure 11
Page 24
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. BLEED BAND ASSEMBLY 3. INTERSTAGE BLEED ACTUATOR

2. FUEL CONTROL TO INTERSTAGE 4. AIR DIFFUSER TO INTERSTAGE
BLEED BLEED
ACTUATOR AIR PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER AIR PRESSURE HOSE
Interstage Air Bleed System External Components

Figure 12
Page 25
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. CONTROL ROD INDEX PLATE 5. VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE

2. INLET GUIDE VANE ACTUATOR 6. ACTUATOR
FEEDBACK CONTROL ROD
CONTROL ROD 7. FUEL CONTROL TO INLET GUIDE VANE
3. INLET GUIDE VANE SEAL DRAIN ACTUATOR OPENING HOSE
CONNECTOR 8. FUEL CONTROL TO INLET GUIDE VANE
4. SEAL DRAIN HOSE ACTUATOR CLOSING HOSE
Inlet Guide Vane Externa! Components

Figure 13
Page 26
72- 00-00 Sepí 30/02
T53-L-703
ACTUATOR ORAIN
Inlet Guide Vane Control System Diagram

Figure 14
Page 27/28
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ENGINE - TROUBLE SHOOTlN^
1. Trouble Shooting
Table 101 provides temperature data that will aid in discovering, isoiating and correcting various troubles
that may arise in the basic engine or any of its systems during the Service period oí the engine.
A. Discovering the Trouble
Engine trouble can be either obvious or hidden. If hidden troubles are not detected, serious and con-
siderable damage may occur to the engine. Therefore, it is essential to have a thorough knowledge
of the correct turbine gas temperature, fuel flow, lubrication oii pressure and other important details of
normal engine operation.
B. Isoiating the Trouble
To properly isolate trouble, it is necessary to have Information of previous trouble and work performed
on the engine, Check each possibie source of trouble until the trouble has been isolated by a pro-
cesa of elimination. Systematic checking is essential for thorough trouble shooting and wii! save time
and promote accuracy.
72- 00-00 seS

T53-L-703
TablelOI. Trouble Shooting
Trouble Probable Cause Correctiva Action
1. Failure to crank a. Low available voltage Charge or replace battery.
Refer to Aircraft Manual.

b. Faulty aircraft electrical system
or starter
a. Faulty starter Replace starter.
2. Failure to crank or
difficulty encoun-
tered in cranking
b. Power driven oil pump seized Replace oii pump. {See 79-20-01.)
c. Gas producer turbinas seized
Remove combustor turbine assembiy.
Inspect gas producer turbinas for foreign
object damage, seizure or rubbing.
Repair or replace as necessary.
d. Compressor rotor frozen Duct hot alr into inlet housir?g.

e. Compressor rotor seized
Remove one half of compressor housing
and inspect to determine cause. Repair
as necessary.
3. Failure to stad
a. igniter plugs not firing (no crack-
ling sound heard when starting
System is energized)
(1) Faulty aircraft electrical
System
NOTF- 14 vric ts mínimum

voltage when
cranking through 10
percent Ni speed.
Check voltage at connector.
(2) Low input voltage to ignition
unit
(3) Faulty igniter plugs
Check igniter plugs as follows:
Disconnect leads from igniter plugs.
Remove plugs and install into lead

assembiy. Allow lead assembiy and
plugs to hang free.
Energize system and check for spark.
If spark is evident on some plugs and not

others, the nonsparking plugs are faulty.
Instan new plugs. (See 74-20-03.)
Page 102
72- 00-00 Sepl 30/02
T53-L-703
TablelOI. Trouble Shooting (Cont)
Trouble Probable Cause Correcííve Action
Instan ignition unit that is known to be

3. Failure to start (4) Fautty ignition unit good onto engine. Energize Systems and
(Cont) listen for cracking sound. If sound is not
heard, proceed to foiiowing step.
(5) Faulty coil and lead If no sound is heard in preceding step,

assembiy replace coil and lead assembiy
(74-20-02) and reinstall oíd ignition
unit.
b. No starting fuel (no drainage

from combustión chamber drain
valve)
(1) No electrical power to
starting fuel solenoid vaive
Replace nozzles. (See 73-10-03.)
(2) Starting fuel nozzles
clogged or damaged
(3) Faulty starting solenoid Check starting fuel solenoid valve as

valve follows:
Disconnect hose assembiy between

solenoid valve and starting fuel manifoid
at íhe starting fuel manifoid.
Position fuel valve ON.
Turn on aircraft fuel boost pump.
CAIITION- niSCONNECT INPUT LEAD

TO IGNITION UNIT TO
PREVENT FIRING OF
ENGINE.
Motor engine- (See 71-00-00,

paragraph 5.)
If fuel does not flow, replace solenoid

valve. (See 73-10-08.)
Reconnect hose assembiy to starting fuel

manifoid and connect ignition mput lead.
(4) Starting fuel filter or hose Clean or replace clogged starting fuel
assemblies clogged filter or hose assemblies.
(5) Faulty fuel control Check fuel control as follows;
Page 103
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
TablelOl- Trouble Shooting (Cont)
Trouble Probable Cause Corrective Action

3. Failure to síart
(Cont) Disconnecl hose assembly between luel
cbntrol and startmg fuel solenoid valve at
the valve.
Turn on aircratt fuel boost pump.
CAIITION- DISCONNFCT INPlJT LEAD

TO IGNITION UNIT TO
PREVENT FlRtNG OF
ENGINE.
Motor Engine. (See 71-00-00,

paragraph 5.)
If fuel does not flow, replace solenoid

valve. (See 73-10-08.)
Reconnect hose assembly to starting fuel

solenoid valve and connect inpuí lead lo
ignition.
c. Low fuel pressure (fuel control Check fuel control pumps as follows:
pumps worn)
Attach two 0 to 200 psi gages to pump

pressure lap ports. Disconnect fuel
control discharge hose and extend into
container.
CAIITION- niSCONNFCT INPUT LEAD

TO IGNITION UNITTO
PREVENT FIRING OF
ENGINE.
Position power lever to Idle and motor

engine to 10 to 12 percent Ni speed.
If pressure gages do not read 40 psi
minimum and are within 15 psig of each
other. Replace fuel control.
Position power lever to off and reconnect

hoses.
72 00-00 sZflZ
-
T53-L-703
Trouble Probable Cause Correciive Action
3. Failure to start d. No main fuel (measured gas

(Cont) temperature stabilizing at
approximately 212^F (100°C)
and Ni stabilizing at approxi-
mately 15 percent, indícales ab-
sence of main fuel
(1) Main fuel hose assembly Ciean or replace main fuel hose
clogged assembly.
(2) Check flow divider assembly as follows:
Flow divider assembly
inoperative
Instan flow divider assembly that is known

to be good and connect ignition input
lead.
Attempt to start engine.
(3) Faulty fuel control If engine still does not start, reinstall oíd
flow divider assembly and proceed to
following step.
Check fuel control assembly as follows:
Disconnect hose assembly between fuel

control and flow divider assembly at flow
divider assembly
Turn on aircraft fuel boost pump.
Open throttie.
CAUTION: DISCONNECT INPUT LEAD
TO IGNITION UNIT TO
PREVENT FIRING OF
ENGINE.
Motor engine at 12 to 16 percent Ni

(See 71-00-00, paragraph 5,j
If fuel does not flow, replace fuel control.

(See 73-20-01.)
Reconnect electrical input to ignition unit.
Page 105
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Hung start; Ni a. Excessive fuel used for start Perform proper starting procedure.
speed fails to b. Insufficient assist from starter Check proper voltage, replace starter if
accelerate beyond voltage is sutficient.
approximately 30 c. Ni System binding Remove combustor turbine assembly
percent and (72-40-00). Inspect gas producer
exhaust gas turbines (first stage turbine) for foreign
temperature rapidiy object damage, seizure or rubbing.
approaches Repair or replace if necessary.
overtemperature
(Imít
Hot start (exhaust a. Weak battery
gas temperature Charge or replace battery.
b. Improper starting procedures
limits have been Perform proper starting procedures.
exceeded) c. Starting fuel solenoid valve fails
to shut off Check solenoid valve as follows:
Disconnect electrical input from igmtion
unit-
Motor engine with aircraft fuel valve open,
aircraft boost pump ON and solenoid
switch OFF.
Check to see that fuel does not flow
through valve. If fuel flows through valve
when shut off, replace valve. (See
73-10-07.)
Reconnect electrical input to ignition unit.
Check air inlet and remove any obstruc-
d. Air inlet obstructed
tions.
e. Faulty fuel Control Replace fuel control. (See 73-20-01.)

f. Accumulation of oil, dust, dirt, Clean temperature sensing element fins.
grass, etc on temperature
sensing elemenl fins
a. Improper starting procedure Use proper starting procedure.
Torching start
(llames shoot
from exhaust)
b. Accumulation of fuel insideíail-
Check aircraft quick disconnect from tail-
pipe of combustión chamber
pipe drain for proper seating. Remove
and inspect combustión chamber drain
valve for obstructions and operation.
(See 73-10-06.)
c. Starting fuel check filter valve Remove and install check filter valve
installed backwards properly, (See 73-10-07.)
Page 106
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
6. Remove, disassemble and deán check

Torching start filter valve. (See 73-10-07.)
d- Starting fuel check filter valve not
(llames shoot
seated, contaminated with
from exhaust)
foreign matter
(Cont)
7. Refer to Aircraft Manual.

Speed low with
a. Aircraft linkage improperly
throttie in flight idie
ngged
posítion
Switch to AUTOMATIC position.
b. Selector switch in EMERGENCY
position
c. Aircraft selector switch Refer to Aircraft Manual for proper wiring.

improperly wired or faulty Replace selector switch if necessary.
transfer solenoid valve.
d. Fuel flow restncted Remove and deán fuel strainers.
8. Aircraft linkage improperly rigged Refer to Aircraft Manual.
Speed high with
throttie in flight idie
position
9. Jorque above or a. Error in computations
Recompute.
below engine b. Fuel control trim improperly ad-
specified torque Trim fuel control assembly as necessary.
justed
valué (See 73-20-01.)
c. Faulty torquemeter system
d. Faulty fuel control
If fuel control assembly does not respond
to adjustments, replace. (See
73-20-01.)
10 Check aircraft rigging. Refer to Aircraft

Low N2 speed a. Governor arm travel restricted
. Manual.
Replace overspeed governor. (See

b- Faulty overspeed governor
72-60-02.)
11 Excessive droop of Perform bleed band closure check. (See

a. Bleed band improper operation
, N2 speed 75-30-05.)
b- Droop compensator out of ad-
justment
c. Excessive play in linkage Refer to Aircraft Manual.
d. Throttie not fuíly open Refer to Aircraft Manual.

e. Incorrect droop cam Replace with correct parí. Refer to
Aircraft Manual.
Page 107
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Trouble Probable Cause Correctiva AcJion
11. Excessive droop of f- Sheared pin in droop

Refer to Aircrafl Manual.
N2 speed (Cont) compensator
g. Low N) speed See Ítem 9.
h. Low N2 speed See Ítem 10.
i. Faulty overspeed governor Replace. (See 72-60-02.)
j. Faulty fuel cpntrol Replace. (See 73-20-01.)

12. N2 overspeed See Item 7.b
a. Selector speed in EMERGENCY
position
b. Faulty fuel control Replace fuel control.
NOTE: Malee Sijre Nn drive is

operational by turning
power turbine and
checking for Input to
overspeed governor.
"Beep” to recommended operatíng

c. N2 speed set too high
speed.
Replace overspeed governor. (See

d. Faulty overspeed governor
72-60-02.)
Check main rotor biabe for proper angle.
e. Main rotor blade angla set im-
properly
13. High measured gas With engine operatíng, check for flow of
a. External loss of air because hot
temperature during hot alrfrom vent holes located In forward
air solenoid valve being open
steady state opera- engine mounting pads. If alr is evident,
(engine de-lcing)
tion valve is open. Check for following;
Make sure that Circuit breaker is in.
Make sure hot air solenoid valve swltch Is

In CLOSED position.
Make sure proper voltage is avaííable at

eléctrica! connector of hot air solenoid
valve. Refer to Aircraft Manual.
If preceding Ítems have been checked

and valve remains open, replace hot air
solenoid valve. (See 75-10-02.)
Page 108
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
noricywVdi T53-L-703

b. Dirty or eroded compressor or Inspect. (See 72-30-01.)
13- High measured gas FOD
temperatura during
steady State opera-
tiori (Cont)
C- Exiernal loss of air due to inter-

stage bieed band not sealing Check bieed band as follows:
Visually inspect band for severe bending.
Repface band. (See 75-30- 05.)
Check bieed band for proper closure.
(See 75-30-05.)
d. E>cternai loss of air because of If air leaks from drain valve port virith
combustión chamber drain valve engine operating, repair or replace drain
failing to Glose valve. (See 73-10-06.)
e. Faulty measured gas Check out system for continuity and

temperatura measuring system resistance. (See 77-20-01)
f. Interna! loss of air because of

Remove combustor turbine assembly and
ieaking seáis seal rings between
inspect seáis (72-40-01). Replace seal
gas producer cylinder and pow-
er turbine nozzle ring if necessary.
g. Air inlet obstructed Check for and remove all obstnjctions.
h- Starting fuel solenoid fails to Remove and replace starting fuel valve
Glose solenoid assembly.
i. High setting oí Ni speed Adjust. (See ítem l.b.)
j. Air ínlet obstructed Check for and remove al( obstructions.
k. Starting fuel solenoid fails to Remove and replace starting fuel valve
Glose solenoid assembly. (See 73-10-07.)
14- High measured gas
a. Probable causes wiil be similar Corrective action will be similar as for
temperatura during precedíng item 13.
as lor Ítem 13
acceleration
b. Selector switch in EMERGENCY See item 7.b.
position
c. Dirty compressor rotor blades See item 18.
Faulty indicating system Perform Jet Cal Test and check out
15. Fluctuations or no system for continuity and resistance
indication of (77-20-01). Refer to Aircraft Manual.
measured gas
temperatura
Page 109
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAINTENANCEMANUAL
Trouble Probable Cause Correclive Action

a, Faulty overspeed governor Replace overspeed governor. (See
16. Fluctuation in 73-20-01.)
measured gas
b. Faulty fuel control Replace fuel control. (See 73-20-01.)
temperatura, Ni
and Na speeds and
torquemeter
pressure
Replace fuel control assembly. (See

17. Slow acceleration Faulty fuel control assembly
73-20-01.)
18. Engine surge
See Ítem 7.b.
during acceleration a. Selector switch in EMERGENCY
or bleed band position
cycDng (rapid See Item 30.
b. Bleed band not opening during
opening and speed transienís
closing) at high Ni Check rigging. Adjust if required. (See
speeds c. Improper inlet guide vane
75-30-02.)
operation
Replace fuel control assembly. (See
d. Faulty fuel control
73-20-01.)
Investígate. Perform compressor surge

e. Dirty or eroded compressor or
(stall) inspection. (See 72-00-00,
foreign object damage
Engine - Inspection.)
19- Low torquemeter a. Faulty torquemeter pressure Check torquemeter pressure transmitter
indicatíon transmitíer or indicator and indicator as foDows:
Remove torquemeter and accessory drive

gearbox pressure Unes from transmitter.
Attach a direct reading pressure gage to

each Une.
Opérate engine and note pressures.
Subtract accessory drive gearbox

pressure from torquemeter pressure and
compare result w/th pressure indicaíed
on cockpit gage. 11 direct gage reading is
higher than cockpit gage reading, fault is
in transmitter or cockpit gage. Replace
as necessary. Refer to Aircraft Manual.
b. Low torquemeter booster pres- Check torquemeter booster pressure as

sure follows:
Attach a direct reading gage to pressure

port at forward side of overspeed gover-
nor and tachometer drive assembly.
Page 110
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Trouble Probable Cause Correctivo Action
19. Low torquemeter Opérate engine and note pressure.

indication (Cont)
If pressure is less than 120 psi minimum

at 92 percent N, and aOove, aújust pres-
sure reiief valve. (See 79-20-02.)
If pressure is still not within limits, replace

torquemeter booster pump. (See
79-20-02.)
If replacement of torquemeter booster

pump does not correct torquemeter
pressure, replace accessory drive gear-
box. (See 72-60-02.)
NOTE: This damage may

occur u[Xtn reasembly
after front end inspec-
tion. It is recognized at
initial run of engine.
c. Damaged torquemeter seating Remove and inspect output reduction

ring carrier and gear assembly (72-10-01).
Replace damaged parts.
d. Packings on torquemeter reiief Inspect packings for proper installation or
valve assembly improperly damage. (See 72-60-02.)
installed or damaged (located on
overspeed governor and
tachometer drive assembly)
20. High torquemeter a. Faulty torquemeter pressure See Item I9.a.

indication transmitter or indicator
b. Torquemeter valve faíls to cióse Check torquemeter valve as fodows:
Remove plug at front of overspeed

governor and torquemeter drive gearbox.
Instalí fftting, AN919-4D into torquemeíer

booster pressure port.
Disconnect pressure line at torquemeter

transmitter.
Apply 100 psi air pressure to installed

fitting.
Page 111
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ►ÂINTENANC^MANUAL
TablelOI. Trouble Shooling (Cont)
20. High torquemeter No airílow will indícate that valve is

indication (Cont) functioning properly.
If flow is observad, apply 100 psi air

pressure to fitting at torquemeter
transmitter port on inlet housing. This
should tree any foreign object and permit
valve to cióse. Apply air pressure
alternately to torquemeter booster pump
port and torquemeter transmitter pori
until valve seats properly.
21. Torquemeter Clogged torquemeter lllter
Remove and deán, and reinstall filter
response slow assembly
assembly located on overspeed governor
and tachometer drive assembly. (See
72-00-02.)
22- No engine oil
CAUTION- DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE
pressure
UNTIL IT IS DETERMINED
THAT OIL PUMP FAILURE OR
OIL STARVATION HAS NOT
OCCURRED.
a. Loose or clogged hose or con- Inspect entire lubrication sysiem for leaks
nections and obstruction.
b. Aircraft oil tank empty or oil shut- Fill tank or open valve. Refer to Aircraft
off valve dosed Manual.
c. Faulty oil pressure transmitting Check System using pressure source to

System pressure tap.
d. Oil pump coupling sheared or
if pressure transmitting system check is
worn female spiine on oil pump
satisfactory, oil pump coupling may be
drive shaftgear
sheared or spiine on oil pump drive shatt
gear may be worn. Replace oil pump for
sheared coupling (79-20-01) and in-
spect for worn spiine on shaftgear. (See
72-60-01.)
if oil pump failure or oil starvation has
occurred, check No. 2, 3 and 4 bearing
scavenge (ines for evídence of metal
chips. Replace parts as required and
perform oil contamination inspectlon.
(See 72-00-00. Engine - Inspection,
paragraph I.G.)
23. Low oil pressure a. Low oil leve/ Fill to proper leve!.
Page 172
72- 00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “,NTENA_™NUAL
Trouble Probable Cause Correctivo Action
b. Faulty oil pressure transmitting

See Ítem 22-c.
System
c. Clogged oil filter Clean filter. (See 79-20-03.)

d. Oil pump improperly adjusted
Adjusf pump (79-20-01). If oil pump
does not respond to adjustment, replace.
(See 79-20-01.)
e. Oil pump does nol pr;me Replace pump. (See 79-20-01.)
1. Pressure reliel valve will not

Replace oil pump. (See 79-20-01.)
cióse
a. Coid olí on slart
Allow engine to reach operating
24. High engine oil
temperature by operatmg engine at flight
pressure
idie.
b. Clogged oil filter Clean filter element. (See 79-20-03.)

c. Oil pump improperly adjusted
Adjust (79-20-01). If oil pump does not
respond to adjustment, replace. (See
79-20-01.)
Check hose assemblies for restrictions.
d. Oil pressure hose assemblles
restricted
See Ítem 22.c.
e. Faulty olí pressure transmitting
System
a, Low oil level Fill to proper leve!.
25. High engine oit
temperature
b. Clogged oil filter Clean filter. (See 79-20-03.)

c. Faulty oil cooler or transmitting
System
d. Oil hose assemblies restricted Check hose assemblies for restriotions.
26. Excessive engine Drain to proper level. Refer to Aircraft

a. Excessive oil in aircraft oit tank
oit consumption Manual.
b. Leakage at fittings and hose as- Tighten or replace fittings or hose

semblles assemblies.
Replace output shaft seal. (See

c. Output shaft Seal damaged
72-10-01.)
Page 113
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
Hone^êll MA,NTENANCEMANUAL
d. No. 3 main bearing seal leaking

Check for smoke from lailpipe and oil
26. Excessive engine
stains on rear face of power turbine disc.
oil consumption
Replacement of seal is necessary if such
(Cont)
indications are evident.
e. No. 2 bearing att seal leaking

Check tor smoke from tailpipe and oil
stains on the forward face of the first gas
producer rotor and curi, Replacement of
seal is necessary if such indications are
evident.
f. No. 2 bearing forward seal
Check for indications of oil leakage onto
leaking
mating flanges of the diffuser housing
and combustión chamber housing
assemblies. Replacement of seal is
necessary if such indications are evident.
g. No. 1 main bearing sea) leaking
Check for indications of oil leakage onto
variable inlet guide vanes, compressor
bleed band holes. or mating surfaces of
compressor housings. If evident, engine
shall be forwarded to Overhaul for seal
replacement.
h. Cracked pressure or scavenge Indications are same as preceding step.

oil tubes in air diffuser Brazing of tubes will be required.
a. Faulty linkage Refer to Aircraft Manual.
27. Engine lails to shut
down or Ni throttie
stiff
Turn ground idie trimmer screw counter-
b. Binding within íuel regulator; clockwise in one eighth turn incremente
with airframe linkage dis- untll binding is reíieved. (See 73-20-01,
connected Ni lever Jorque
Figure 202.)
exceeds 15 pound inches from 0
degrees to 100 degrees or 25
pound inches from 100 degrees
back to 0 degrees (cutoff)
Motor engine and check for noise and

28. Coast down noisy a. Interna! binding
binding. (See ítem 2.)
29. Excessive vibration Perform vibration test. (See 71 -00-00.)

30. Erratic bleed band a. Improperíy adjusted
Adjusf (75-30-05). If bleed band does
operation
not respond to adjustments, refer to fol-
lowing steps.
b. Clogged strainer element Clean strainer. (See 75-30-03.)
Page
72-00-00 114
Sepf 30/02
T53-L-703
30. Erratic bleed band c. Sticking actuator pistón Replace actuator. (See 75-30-03.)
operation (Cont)
d. Ruptured diaphragm Replace diaphragm. (See 75-30-03.)
e. Faulty fuel control Replace fuel control assembiy. (See

73-20-01.)
C. Lubrication System Contamination Troubie Shooting Procedure
WARNING: PROLONGED CONTACT W)TH LUBRICATING OlL MAY CAUSE A SKIN

RASH. THOSE AREAS OF SKIN AND CLOTHING THAT MAY COME IN
CONTACT WITH LUBRICATING OlL SHOULD BE THOROUGHLY
WASHED
IMMEDIATELY. SATURATED CLOTHING SHOULD BE REMOVED
IMMEDi-
ATELY AREAS IN WHICH LUBRICATING OlL IS USED SHOULD BE AD-
EQUATELY VENTILATED TO KEEP MIST AND FUMES TO A MINIMUM.
CAUTION: LUBRICATING OlL MAY SOFTEN PAINT UPON CONTACT. IF

LUBRICATING OlL IS SPILLED ON PAINTED SURFACES.
THESE
SURFACES SHOULD BE THOROUGHLY WASHED.
NOTE: It is not unusual for a new engine to generate some small chips during the
first 5 to 10 hours of operation. Fine partióles generally indícate even,
although possibly excessive wear. (See 72-00-00, Engine - Inspection,
paragraph I.A.}
Whenever an oil System inspection has revealed a continuance or an increase of chips in the oil filter
or on the chip detector, proceed as follows:
(1) Check main oil filter elements for chip accumuiation which could have placed the filter into by-
pass. Remove chips and retain for analysis. (See 72-00-00, Engine - Inspection, paragraph
I.G.) Clean with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and reinstall. Send oil sam-
pie and chips for analysis. Lab analysis will give assistance in determiníng the cause of metal
contamination.
(2) Remove and inspect No. 2 bearing strainer (72-40-00) and No. 3 and 4 bearing strainer bore
for meta) chips. )f chips are present, remove and inspect three reductipn gear oil transfer tube
strainers (72-10-01) and overspeed governor and tachometer drive oil throttie strainer
(72-60-02). FonA/ard engine to Overhaul if metal chips have clogged more than one third of
flow area of any one of previously mentioned strainers. If amount of chips is not excessive,
clean and reinstall strainers and proceed to step (3).
(3) Presence of chips in previously mentioned strainers indicates that bypass of oil filter has occur-
red, Repiace oil filter.
Page 115
(4)
72-00-00
Oraín a(l oil from accessory gearbox, aircraft. oil tank and oil cooler.
Sept 30/02
(5) Remove metal chips from chip detector. Clean with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62,
Tabie 203).
(6) Check No. 2 bearing scavenge line for metal contamination. If chips are evident, inspect all oil
wetted components for wear; replace parts as needed (72-51 -00). Flush components with
dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and reinstall.
(7) Check No. 3 and 4 bearing scavenge line for metal contamination. If chips are evident, remove
combustor turbine assembly, disassemble power turbine and bearing housing assembly and
inspect bearings and other oil wetted components for wear. Replace if required (72-50-04).
Flush components with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and reinstall.
(8) If chips are suspected to come from reduction gearing, remove reduction gearing and inspect
its condition and replace, if required (72-10-01). Flush components with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and reassemble.
(9) Remove accessory drive gearbox (72-60-01), Remove and inspect shaftgear assembly. Par-
ticularly note condition of upper and lower bearings on this shaft. Inspect and clean scavenge
strainer. Bush shaftgear assembly and internal components of gearbox with dry cleaning sol-
vent (72-00-00, 62. Table 203) and reassemble.
(10) Flush aircraft oil system and replace oil cooler on aircraft not equipped with auxiliary external oil
filter.
(11) Service oil System with lubricating oil (72-00-00, 41 or 42, Table 203). Opérate engine at 70
to 80 percent Ni for 5 minutes. Shut down engine and allow to cool.
CAUTIQN: ANY FLUCTUATION IN OIL PRESSURE IN EXCESS OF ±5 PSI OR

RAPIO RISE IN OIL TEMPERATURE AT ANY PRESET
POWER
SETTING, IS CAUSE FOR IMMEDIATE ENGINE
SHUTDOWN.
(12) Shut down engine and check oil filter elemente, chip detector and strainers.
NOTE: Chips in oil filter may origínate in oil supply tank, chips on chip detector
originate in engine.
(13) Inspect chip detector and oil filter strainers for chips. Amount of chips noted should be less
than original amount. If so. repeat preceding steps (10) and (11), increasing engine operating
time to 10 minutes.
(14) Repeat inspection, servicing and operating cycle, increasing engine operating time to 30 minu-
tes. If no appreciable amount of chips or other contaminants is noted, engine may be returned
lo Service. If amount of chips or other contaminants remains the same or increases, forward
engine to Overhaul Center for repair.
(15) If the amount of carbón particles found on the engine oil filter element covers 15 percent or
more of the surface area, proceed as follows:
(a) Clean and reinstall oil filter assembly.
(b) Drain all oil from accessory drive gearbox. oil tank and oil cooler.
Page 116
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
Honeywell
(c) Remove and inspect No. 2 strainer and No. 3 and 4 bearing strainers. If carbón partióles
are presen!, oit filter has bypassed. Remove, olean and reinstall reduction gear olí transfer
tube strainers and overspeed governor and tachometer drive oil throttie strainer. Clean
and reinstall No. 2 bearing strainer and No. 3 and 4 bearing strainers.
(d) Retill oil tank to capacity with new oil.
(e) Star! engine and run at 70 to 80 percent Ni rpm tor 15 minutes.
(f) Shut down engine, then remove, inspect and clean olí filter and strainers. Reinstall otl
filter and strainers.
(g) If contamination is excessive, repeat procedure until filter is clean after engine run.
D. Measured Gas Temperature Trouble Shooting Procedure
(1) Perform a cockpit TGT indicator check. Refer to Aircraft Manual.
(2) Perform thermocouple harness assembly resistance check (Figures 101 and 102) as foilows:
(a) Dísconnect thermocouple lead at aircraft inferface connector and check for tota) system
resistance between Pin A and Pin B to Cun/e A.
1 If resistance is within specification limits, system is OK.
2 If resistance is out of limits. proceed to step (b).
(b) Disconnect lead connector from junction box and check s¡x (6) individual circuits at
junction box connector to Curve B.
Pin Ato D
Pin B to
E
Pin C to
F
1 if resistance is within specification limits, then check lead resistance.
g Connect Pins A and B at iead interface connector with a short jumper wire and check
resistance of lead at input connector to Curve D.
Pin A to D, E and F
Pin B to D, E and F
Pin C to D, E and F
3 If lead resistance is out of specification limits. replace lead.
4 If one or more of the circuits indicates an open Circuit, open junction box and mea-
sure harness circuits at harness connector. (Rings) Use Curve C the first two rings,
the middie two rings and the last two rings comprise the three circuits to be checked.
§ If individual Circuit resistance is within limits, clean ring contacte on harness connec-
tor and V contacte in junction box with fine emery paper then recheck per step (b).
Page 117
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Thermocouple Harness Assembly

Figure 101
Page 118
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
T53-L-103 TEMPERATURE MEASURING SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE VS SOAK TEMP.
HARNESS P/N 1-300 563-01 (TH40513X)
JUNCTION BOX P/N 1-300-564-01 (TLM40510)
LEAD P/N 1-300-499-01 (TLM41089)
A • TOTAL SYSTEM RESISTANCE MEASURED AT AtRFRAME INTERFACE CONNECTOR

B INDIVIDUAL T/C CIRCUIT RESISTANCE MEASURED AT JUNCTION BOX CONNECTOR
C - INDIVIDUAL T/C CIRCUIT RESISTANCE MEASURED AT T/C HARNESS CONNECTOR (RINGS)
O LEAD RESISTANCE (TOTAL BOTH CONDUCTORS)
Harness Soak Temperature/Resistance

Figure 102
Page 119
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: The engine can be run with one oí the three circuits out of
the System. However, the accuracy of the System is some-
what impaired and repiacemenl of the harness is mandatoty
at the next engine teardown.
6 11 one individual Circuit indicates an open Circuit, reassemble System and replace
harness at ne)ft engine teardown. 11 one Circuit is out of limits or indicates a short
Circuit, isolate this Circuit by installing insulator, small piece of match cover will do,
between rings and "V" contacta for that Circuit and reassemble System. Replace
harness at ne>ct engine teardown.
7 !f still out of limits, replace junction box.
(c) Reconnect thermocouple harness assembly to aircraft leads at engine aircraft firewail or
harness junction box.
(d) Perform a resistance check of the complete MGT Circuit and adjust aircraft variable
resistance spool as required. Refer to Aircraft Manual.
MAtNTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
ENGINE - TEST EQUIPMENT. SPECIAL TOQLS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
1. Test EauÍDment
Table 201 contains a list of all test and ground support equipment required to perform the tasks specified
in this manual.
Usage oí the following test equipment is not mandatory. Modilied standard test equipment or fabncated
test equipment that is equivalent to the recommended test equipment may be used. Experience and ex-
tent of maintenance performed will dictate customer’s test equipment requirements.
2 Special Tools
Table 202 contains a list of all special tools required to perform the tasks specified in this manual.
Usage cf these special tools is not mandatory. Modified standard tools or fabricated hardware that is
equivalent to the recommended special tools may be used. Experience and extent of maintenance per-
formed will dictate customer’s special tools requirements.
3. Consumable Materials
Table 203 contains a list of all consumable materials required to perform the tasks specified in this manual.
Table 201. Test Equipment
Part or Model No. Nomenclature Technical Description
AN/PSM 6B Multimeter To check exhaust thermocouple harness.
LTCT14664 or Vibration Check Tool Kit To measure engine vibration at critical points to
LTCT28430-01 determine engine acceptability.
LTCT13726 replaces Switch and Coupling Kit To perform operational check of inlet guide vane
LTCT6807 actuator.
TL410 Genn Turbo-Lube Test Kit To analyze viscosity of oit.
Page 201
72-00-00
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Table 202. Special Tools
Part or Modal No. Nomenclature
LTCT44 replaced by
Fixture, Holding
LTCT4904
LTCT68 Bushing, SIeeve
LTCT100 Installing Tool, Oil Seal
LTCT107 Wrench, Spanner, Access Gear
LTCT108 Tool, Installing
LTCT109 Bolt, Machine
LTCT115 Holding Fixture, Gear Orive Assembly
LTCT142 Pulier, Mechanical
LTCT153 Bar Locating Button
LTCT205 replaced by
Gage. Backiash
LTCT2099
LTCT207 Fixture, Test
LTCT215 Socket Wrench, Face Spanner
LTCT256 Installer, Pin
LTCT258 Wrench, Driver
LTCT270 Seal Installer, Accessory Gearbox

Gage, Backiash
LTCT311 replaced by
LTCT2099
LTCT393 Wrench, Socket
LTCT483 Pulier, Mechanical
LTCT484 Tool Kit. Vibration Check
LTCT487 Wrench
LTCT488 Tool, Backup
Page 202
72 00-00
- SepXWI02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Table 202. Special Tools (Cont)
Part or Model No. Nomenciature
LTCTSOI (nstaííing Tool, Seal
LTCT504 Tool, Remova)
LTCT509 Tool Set
LTCT511 Installation Tool, Seal
LTCT519 Installer and Remover
LTCT526 Allgnment FIxture Assembly
LTCT552 Punch and Drift Kit
LTCT675 PuHer. Mechanical. Bearing Accessory Gearbox
LTCT691 Puller, Mechanical
LTCT773 Sling, Hoisting Beam
LTCT791 Installing Tool
ÍJC7Q62 Protector, Engine intake
LTCT910, replaced by
Bracket
LTCT3955
LTCT911 Support Assembly, Socket Wrench
LTCT912 Flow Fixture, Oil
LTCT915 Wrench Assembly
LTCT962 Fixture, Torque Adjustment
LTCT1409 Wrench
Page 203
72-00-00
T53-L-703
TaWe202. Special Tools (Cont)
Part or Model No. Nomenclature
LTCT1429 Bott, Tee Mead
LTCT1643 Drift Assembly
LTCT1644 Drift
LTCT2021 Pufier, Mechanical
LTCT2027 Puller, Manual Pinion Gear
LTCT2039 Holder Assembly, Gearshaft
LTCT2048 Holder, Pinion Gear
LTCT2072 Staking Fixture Assembly
LTCT2075 Fixture, Holding
LTCT2099 Gage, Backlash
LTCT2133 Wrench
LTCT3038 Fixture Assembly VIGV
Measuring Tool
LTCT6124
LTCT3493 Bushing, Sleeve
LTCT3638 Installation and Removal Tool
LTCT3639 Installation and Removal Tool
LTCT3646 Tool, Installing
LTCT3648 Removal Tool, Seal
Page 204
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeywell T53-L-703
LTCT3654 Bushmg, SIeeve
LTCT3685 Adapter and Guide
LTCT3706 Driver, Bearing No. 1
LTCT3738 Staking Tool Assembly
LTCT3825 Installation Tool, Seal
LTCT3833 Holder Assembly, Gearshaft
LTCT3938 Wrench
Bracket
LTCT3955, replaces
LTCT910
LTCT4013 Installing Tool
LTCT4044 Installing Tool, Seal
LTCT4155 Compressor
LTCT4174 Alignment Fixture, Combustión Chamber
LTCT4179 Installation Tool
LTCT4181. replaced by
Wrench. Socket
LTCT13175
LTCT4182 Fixture, Lifting
Fixture, Holding
LTCT13175
LTCT4558 Adapter, Lifting
Page 205
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeywell T53-L-703
Tabie 202. Special Toots {Cont)
Part or Modal No. Nomenclature
LTCT4568 Puller
LTCT4571 Arbor
Installation Tool
LTCT4572. replaced by
LTCT13070
LTCT4576 Installation Tool, Drive Gear
LTCT4602 Guide
LTCT4650 Hand Crank

Removal Kit, Nut and Cone
LTCT6465
LTCT4692 Removal Tool
LTCT4698 Tool, Removal and Installation

Puller, Mechanical
LTCT4846
LTCT4750 Protractor Assembly, VIGV
LTCT4800 Puller. Mechanical

Puller, Mechanical
LTCT4846, replaces
LTCT4700
LTCT4895 Tool, Removal
LTCT4904 Fi>cture, Holding
LTCT4947 Base and Bushing Assembly
Page 206
72-00-00 Sept30;02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
LTCT6000 Tool, Installation
LTCT6124, replaces
Measuring Tool
LTCT3039
LTCT6465, replaces
Tool, Removal, Rear Core
LTCT4676
LTCT6740 Removal Tool
LTCT6756 Mount Assembly, Vibration Pick Up, Power Turbine
LTCT6940 Special Wrench
LTCT13001 Holding Fixture, Horizontal Rotor Assembly
LTCT13020 Gapping and Inspection Tool
LTCT13070, replaces
Installing Tool
LTCT4572
LTCT13175, replaces
Fixture. Torque
LTCT4533 and LTCT4181
LTCT13456 Socket Wrench, Face Spanner
TCT13725 Switch and Coupling Assembly
LTCT13726 Kit, Switch and Coupling
LTCT14503 Clamp Gage
LTCT14664-07 Vibration Test Set
LTCT14668-01 Combustor Lifting Sling
LTCT14773 Power Shaft Bearing Retainer Installation Tool
LTCT14807 Wire Gages
Page 207
72-00—00
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Tabla 202. Spacial Tools (Conl)
Part or Modal No. Nomenclatura
LTCT20596 Vibration Test Kit, Battery Operated
PD2501 Wrench, Torque
LTCT7298-07 Stand, Engine Work
Page 208
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Tabie 203. Consumabie Materials
Manulacturer's
ttem No. Description Specification Manufacturer
Designation
Guard All Chemical Co.

1 Acetona ASTM D329
South Norwaik, CT
2 Deleted
Adhesive EA907 Miller Stephenson Chemical
3 Co. Danbury, CT
/I
4
Aluminum Oxide No. 400

5 Carborundum Co.
Niagara Faüs, NY
6 Deleted
7 Assembly Fluid Ultrachem Inc.
Ultrachem Wilmington, DE
Assembly Fluid
#1
Syntech Ltd.
Acryloid HF86e
Itasca, IL
8 Bag, Transparent MIL-B-22020

9 Barrier Material Polap 121B1
Weyerhauser Co.
MiL-PRF-121
Paper División
(Grade A}
Fitchburg. MA
Super Penguin H.P Smith Paper Co.

Pak B-1 Chicago, IL
Barrler Material
MIL-PRF-121 Military Barrier Guardian Paper Co.
(Grade A) Paper No. 1 Newark, CA
Guardian Paper Co.

Milgard II
Newark, CA
Green Core Midstates Gummed Paper

Cloth Wrap 510 Co. Bedford Park, IL
10 Castor Oil ASTM D960

11 Chafing Sleeve Titeflex Co., Inc.
94835-1 Springfieid, MA
94835-2
94835-3
Page 209
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Table 203- Consumable Materials (Con!)
Manufacturer's
Item No. Description Specification Designation Manufacturar
12 Cleaner Type SKC-2

Magnaflux Corp,
Chicago, IL
13 Cloth, Abrasive Crocos A-A-1206 Crocus Cloth
Carborundum Co.
Miagara Falls, NY
14 Compound
Turco
Turco Products, Inc.
Compound
Los Angelas, CA
No. 17
Compound, Anti-seize Alpha-Molykote Corp.

15 Molykote Type Z
Thread Stamford, CT
Product No. 767
Loctite Corp.
Newington, CT
Fel-Pro Inc.
Nickel Ease
Skokie, IL
Bostik Div.
Never Seez Middieton, MA
Puré Nickel
Special
or Bostik Div.
Never Seez Middieton, MA
General
Purpose Grade
Compound, Carbón SAE B&B Chemical Co., Inc.

16 B&B 120S
Removal AMS-C-19853 Hialeah, FL
F2033
Octagon Process, Inc.
Edgewater, NJ
Brulin 1208B
SAE Brulin and Co.. Inc.
AMS-C-19853 Indlanapolis, IN
Turco Products, Inc.

T-5006
División of Purex Corp.
Concéntrate
Carson, CA
17 Compound, Cleaning Turco 5884
Turco Products Inc.
División of Purex Corp.
Carson, CA
Page 210
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Table 203. Consumable Materials (Cont)
Manufacturer's
Item No. Description Specification Manufacturar
Designation
Castrol, Inc-
Compound, Corrosión
18 MIL-C-6529 Braycote Bray Products Div.
Preventative
Irvine, CA
Vapor Blast Mfg. Co.

19 Compound, Vapor Blast Novahone 325
Milwaukee, W1
Corrosión Preventative, Bray Oil Co.

20 MIL-C-15074 Braycote 120
Fingerprint Remover Los Angelas, CA
NoxRust 314
Daubert Chemical Co.
Nox Rust División
Chicago, IL
Convoy Oil Corp.

Convoy FPR
Philadelphia, PÁ
Corrosión Preventative Esso Turbo Oil Exon Co.

21 MlL-PRF-8188
Oil P-16 U.S.A.
Quaker Chemical Corp

22 Cutting Oil Kut-45
Conshohocken, PA
Acheson Colloids Co.

23 “dag" Dispersión No. 154
Port Hurón, MI
24 Desiccant Bag MIL-D-3464 Ahzona Minarais Corp
(Type 1) Humi-Sorb Elgin, IL
Lantuck (Heat
Sealed) Unit
wt. 32 gms
MIL-D-3464 Eagie Gel A Eagle Chemical Co., Inc.

{Type 1) Unit wt. 26 gms Mobile, AL
W. R. Grace & Co.
Protek-Sorb Davíson Chemical Div.
121 Lantuck
Baltimore, MD
(Sewn) Unit
wt. 23.5 gms
Type II Arizona Minerals Corp
Hui-Sorb Elgin, IL
3H495 Lantuck
(Sewn) Unit
wt. 32 gms
Page 211
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Manufacturer’s
Item No. Description Specification Manufacturer
Designation
24 Desiccant Bag (Cont) N.T. Gates Co.
Sorb-lt Pennsauken, NJ
16-2-G
Lantuck &
Reemay (Sewn)
Unií wt. 26 gms
Arizona Minarais Corp

Eagle Gel Elgin, IL
Promset
(Heat Sealed)
Unit wt- 23 gms
Type III
Eagle Gel
Arizona Minerals Corp
Lantuck (Sewn)
Elgin, IL
Unit wt. 23 gms
W.R. Grace & Co.
Protek-Sorb Davison Chemical Div.
121 Lantuck Baltimore, MD
(Sewn) Unit
wt. 23.5 gms
Tracer-Tecb X-Ray Industrial Distribulors

25 Developer
D495A Clifton, NJ
Developer Typer SKD-4
Magnallux Corp.
26
Chicago, IL
27-34 Deleted
34A Gear Marking #89
Organic Products Co.
In/ing, TX
35 Deleted
36 Grease SAE Molykote 55M
AMS-G-4343 Dow Corning Corp.
Lubricants Plant
Greensboro, NC
Cosmolube 615
E.F. Houghton & Co.
Valley Forge, PA
Royco 43 or Royal Lubricants Co.. Inc.

43C Roseland, NJ
Royal Lubricants Co., Inc.
Aeroshel! Roseland, NJ
Grease 43 or
43C
Page 212
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeywell T53-L-703
Table 203. Consumable Materials {Cont}
Manufacturer's
Designation
Royal Lubricants Co., Inc.

36 Grease (Cont) Castrolease PS
Roseland, NJ
37 Gun Blueing Sears Roebuck Co.

No. 10793
Catalog No.
6G-10793
38 A-A-20100
Hydrogenated Vegetable
Shortening
39 Liquid Abras/ve
Novaculite No.
200 or
equivalent
NASM20995C20
40 Lockwire
NASM20995C32
41 Lubricating Oit MIL-PRF-23699 American Oil & Suppiy Co.
PQ Turbina Newark, NJ
Lubricant
6423, 6700.
3889, 3893,
C-3788, 9598
Brayco 899, Bray Oil Co.

899G, 899M El Monte, CA
MlL-PRF-23699 Castrol 5000
Burmah-Castrol Corp.
Swindon, Wiltshire SN3 1NE
United Kingdom
Emery Industries, Inc.
EMGARD Cincinnati, OH
Synthesized
Turbina
Lubricant (2952)
(2949)
Esso/Exxon Exxon Co. USA

Turbo Oil 2380 Houston, TX
Hateo Chemical Corp.
HATCOL 3211, Fords, NJ
3611, 1639,
1680
Mobil Oil Corp.

Mobil Jet Oil II
New York, NY
Page2l3
72-00-00
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Manufacturer's
Designation
Lubricating Oil Nyco 599A, Nyco International

41
(Cont) 599B Houston, TX
PVO International, Inc.

STO-5700
Boonton, NJ
Roya! Lubricants Co., Inc.
Royco 899 Hanover, NJ
(C-915) 899B
(D-759-3)
899C {D-758)
899HC 899E-1
899E-2
Aerosheil Royal Lubricants Co., Inc.

Turbine Oil 500 Hanover, NJ
Stauffer Jet II
Stauffer Chemical Co.
(9624) Stauffer
Gallipolls Serry, WV
STL (E-7306)
42 Lubricating Oii MIL-PRF-7808 American Oil & Supply Co.
PQ Turbine Oil
Newark, NJ
8365, 9900,
4236
Castrol Oiis Inc.

Castrol 399
Newark. NJ
Brayco OiIs Co.

Brayco 880H
Los Angelas, CA
Esso/Exxon Exxon Co. USA

Turbo Oil 2389 Houston, TX
BP Turbo Oil
Air BP. Parsippany, NJ
2380
HATCOL 1278, Hateo Chemical Corp.

1280 Fords, NJ
Mobile Jet Mobil Oil Corp.

184A/201A New York, NY
Níl 160
NYCO International, Inc,
Houston, TX
Page 214
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAiNTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Manufacturer's
Designation
TURBONYCOIL NYCO S.A.

42 Lubricating Oil (Cont)
160 Paris, France
fíoyal iubricants Co., Inc.

Royco 808GF
East Hanover, NJ
Aeroshell Royal Lubricants Co., Inc.

Turbine Oil 308 East Hanover, NJ
Technolube
Technolube Products Co.
SYN TURBO
Los Angeles, CA
Number 3
MIL-PRF-6081
43 Lubricating Oil
Grade 1010
Exxon Co.. USA

44 Lubricating Oil Univolt 60
Houston, TX
Code 1515
Texaco Inc.
White Plains, NY
Moly Lubricants Corp.

45 Lubricant, Spiine ML7 plus 2
Harahan, LA
Warren Refining Div.

Plastilube
Parr. Inc.
Moly No. 3
Cleveland, OH
46 Lubripiate Fiske Brothers Refining Co.

47 Marking Pencil Eberhard Faber Incorp.
Color Brite No.
401,2127, 2147
or4127
48 Methanol O-M-232
49 Deleted
SAE
50 Molybdenum Disuifide
AMS-M-7866
51 Penetrant SLK3
Magnaflux Corp.
Chicago, IL
Page 215
72-00-00 Sept30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Manufacturer’s
Item No. Description Speeifieation Manufacturar
Designation
52 Penetrant
Visible Red,
Group VI X-Ray Industrial Distributors
Tracer-Tech Clifton, NJ
P-301
Humble Oil and Refining Co.

53 Petrolatum W-P-236 Amber Parmo
Houston, TX
54 Deieted
55 Poiyurethane MIL-C-83466
55A Potting Compound RTV106
General Electric
Silicon Products División
Wateriord, NY
57 Deieted
58 Deieted
59 LPS-2
LPS Research
Rust Inhibitor and
Laboratories Inc.
Preservative
Los Angeles, CA
C.P.S.
Casella Póstale
1020 (Vomero),
Naples 80100
WD40
WD40 Co.
San Diego, CA
Cadulec Chemicals LTD

Oíd Boston Trading Estate
Penny Lañe, Haydock St.

Helens, Lancashire England
60 Deieted
Page 216
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Manufacturer's
Designation
61 Solvent, Concentrated B&B 3100 B&B Chemical Co., (nc.

Hialeah, FL
Rochem U.S. Inc.
Krankwash
Ridgewood, NJ
John B. Moore Corp.

Megapower
South Amboy, NJ
Pentone Corp
Penair M5704
Tenafly, NJ
Penetone 19
Penetone Corp.
Tenafly, NJ
TURCO Products Div.

Turco 5884
Carson, CA
Turboclean 2
Trafficair Inc.
Alpharetta, GA
Mineral Spints Shell Oil Co.

62 Solvent, Dry Cleaning MlL-PRF-680
135 New York, NY
Varsol 1,2,3, Humóle Oil and Relining Co.

and 5 Houston, TX
Mobil Oil Co-

Solvasol No. 5
New York, NY
63 Deleted
Technical Tape Corp.

64 Tape A-A-113 Tuck # 205B
Beacon, NY
3M Co.
650
St. Paul, MN
Le Page’s Inc.
2046
Gloucester, MA
Hampton Mfg, Co.

65 Tape ASTM D5486 901
New Rochelle, NY
Johns-Manville Sales Corp.

354
Chicago, IL
Page 217
72-00-00 Sept 30/02

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Table 203. Consumabie Materials (Cont)
Manufacturer’s
Item No, Description Specification Manufacturer
Designation
Tape Permacel Tape Corp.

65 ASTM D5486 Permacel 69
(Cont) New Brunswick, NJ
66 Deleted
67 Deleted
68 Deleted
69 SAE AMS3132 or
Varnish, Corrosión MIL-PRF-3043
Preventive Synthetic
Resin
70 Deleted
71 Deleted
72 Deleted
73 Deleted
Phillips Process Co.

73A White Opaque Ink TT-l-1795 No. 9
Rochester, NY
74 Deleted
75 Deleted
Page 218
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ENGINE - SERVICING
1- Servicing and Cleanina - Introduction
A. General
(1) This section contains procedures for servicing and cleaning the engine or its components as it
is installed on ihe aircraft. Procedures ineludes servicing the lubrication oil System, priming the
fue! control assembiy. Cleaning and preservation of compressor, and presen/ation and storage
of an engine.
2. Servicing the Lubricating Oil System
A. Lubricating Oiis
(1) The engine lubrication system oiIs (see 71-00-00, paragraph 3) specified for use in HoneyweII
T53 engines conform to or are similar to Military Specifications MIL-PRF-7808 or MiL-
PRF-23699.
B. Servicing Engine Oil System
NOTE: If the engine has not Peen operated in the preceding 24 hours, it
should be run before the oil leve! is checked; otherwise, an inaccurate
oil ievel may be indicated.
(1) Check oil Ievel indicator.
CAUTION: THERE IS NO EASILY RECOGNIZED DIFFERENCE IN

APPEARANCE BETWEEN THE TWO TYPES OF OIL. THE ONLY
WAY OF DETERMINING WHICH TYPE OF OIL IS IN AN ENGINE
IS
BY CAREFUL MAINTENANCE OF SERVICING RECORDS. TO
PREVENT OfL CONTAMINATION USE UNOPENED CANS ONLY.
NOTE: Intermixing of oiis of different brands should be avoided if possible.

Intermixing of oiis of different types {MlL-PRF-7808 or MIL-
PRF-23699) may cause coking in the oil system and is not
recommended except in an emergeney. If intermixing otoil types
becomes necessary, the oil system must be flushed as soon as
possibie using the desired type of oil (72-00-00, 41 or 42, Table 203.)
(2) Service with type of oil currently in the engine; do not overfill. Type 1 MIL-PRF-7806 oil is
satisfactory for engine starting at ambient temperaturas down to -40=’F (-40°C).
(3) Shelf life of approved oiis is 3 years. Oiis over 3 years oíd are not recommended for use in
HoneyweII T53 engines.
Page 301
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
C. Olí Change Interval
(1) Because of variations in environmental and operatmg conditions. each operator shall establish
his own oil change interval, based on an oil analysis program. (See 72-00-00, ENGINE -
INSPECTiON, Page Block 600, paragraph NO TAGH.) If the oil analysis program is not useo,
oil must be changed every lOO hours. Engines which opérate less than 100 hours in a calen-
dar year are recommended lo have oil changed every 6 months to elimínate accumulated wa-
ter, contaminants, and oil degradation producís.
NOTE: Intermixing of oils of different brands should be avoided if possible.

Intermixing of oils of different types (MIL-PRF-7808 or MIL-
PRF-23699j may cause coking in the oil System and is not
recommended except in an emergency. if intermixing of oil types
becomes necessary, the oíl System musf be flushed as soon as
possible using the desired type of oil (72-00-00, 41 or 42. Table
203).
(a) Opérate the engme on the brand and type of oil selected with cióse monitoring of aircraft
and engine oil system maintenance.
D. Draining and Replenishing Engine Oil
WARNING: PROLONGED CONTACT WITH LUBRICATING OIL MAY CAUSE SKIN

RASH. THOSE AREAS OF SKIN AND CLOTHING WHICH COME IN
CONTACT WITH LUBRICATING OIL SHOULD BE THOROUGHLY
WASHED
IMMEDIATELY SATURATED CLOTHING SHOULD BE REMOVED
IMMEDIATELY AREAS IN WHICH LUBRICATING OIL IS USED SHOULD
BE ADEQUATELY VENTILATED TO KEEP MIST AND FUMES TO A
MINIMUM.
CAUTION: LUBRICATING OIL MAY SOFTEN PAINT UPON CONTACT. IF
LUBRICATING OIL IS SPILLED ON PAINTED SURFACES,
THESE
SURFACES SHOULD BE THOROUGHLY WASHED
(1) Place aIMMEDIATELY.
sultable container under accessory drive gearbox.
(2) Remove magnetic chip detector from accessory drive gearbox (see 79-20-01) and allow oil to
drain from accessory drive gearbox.
HoneyweII MA,NTENANCEMAN.AL
(3) Remove lube oil filler element from filter assembiy. Ciean and inspect filter elements. Reinstall
cleaned or repíacement element. (See 79-20-03.)
(4) Inspect magnetic chip detector, deán and instan. Lockwire. (See 73-30-01.)
CAUTÍON: THERE (S NO EASILY RECOGNIZED D/FFERENCE IN

APPEARANCE BETWEEN TYPE I AND TYPE II OILS. THE ONLY
WAY OF DETERMINING WHICH TYPE OF OIL IN AN ENGINE IS BY
CAREFUL MAINTENANCE OF SERVICING RECORDS.
INTERMIXING OF OILS OF DIFFERENT TYPES IS NOT

PERMITTED
EXCEPT IN AN EMERGENCY IF INTERMIXING OF OIL TYPES BE-
COMES NECESSARY, THE OIL SYSTEM MUST BE FLUSHED
WITH-
IN 6 HOURS OF ENGINE OPERATION USING THE DESIRED OIL
TYPE.
TO PREVENT OIL CONTAMINATION, USE ONLY UNOPENED

CANS.
NOTE: On a new engine or when an oil change has been completad, the
engine shall be run for a mínimum of 15 minutes and an oil sample
taken for analysis. Analysis results will be the basis for oil sample
anaiysis program in preceding step B.
(5) Fill engine oil system to capacity with the brand and type of lubricating oil selected and noted
on aircraft and engine oil system, maintenance records. (72-00-00, 41,42, Table 203.).
E. tntermixing of Oiis
(1) Intermixing of ditferent types of oiIs (Type I and Type II) is not permitted. If necessary to change
from one type to another, adhere to following procedure.
(a) Drain engine oil completeiy.
Page 303
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(b) Refill with desired oil.
(c) Start and idie engtne for 30 minutes.
(d) Drain oil again.
(e) Refill to proper level with desired lype and brand of oil. Mark engine indicating oil used.
(f) Inspect main oil filter for deposita at 5 and 15 hours atter oil change.
3. Fuel Control Assemblv Primino
A. Prime Fuel Control Assembly

(1) Disconnect starting fuel hose assembly downstream from solenoid valve and disconnect main
fuel hose assembly downstream from fuel control. Conneot drain lines to ends of disconnected
hoses and plaoe ends in suitable containers.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL FIRING, DISCONNECT 28 VDC POWER

SUPPLY FROM IGNITION UNIT,
(2) Disconnect electrical input cable assembly from ignition unit.
(3) Set throttie (Ni) to flight idle.
(4) Turn fuel boost pump ON.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STARTER, DO NOT EXCEED STARTER
LIMITATIONS.
(5) Motor engine with starter. (See Chapter 71 -00.)
(6) Energize starting fuel solenoid valve and hold.
(7) Cycle throttie (N-,) from flight idle to máximum and back a number of times and continué until
clear fuel is flowing from main and starting fuel hose assemblies.
(8) Engine speed should be at least 12 percent Ni rpm. De-energize starter engine should coast
down with no indication of rubbing or unusual noises.
(9) Turn off starting fuel solenoid valve, move throttie (Ni) to OFF position, and turn fuel boost
pump OFF.
(10) Connect 28 vdc power source to ignition unit and lockwire.
Page 304
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
A / ^ vl l MAiNTENANCE MANUAL
liOriCyiWdl T53-L-703
(11) Remove ürain Unes and connect the main fuel and stariing fue) hoses.
(12) Visualiy inspect engine lor leaks at next start.
4. Servicing Interstage Air Bleed Actuator Assemblv Strainer

NOTE: The interstage air bleed actuator strainer must be cleaned and inspected after
each 100 hours of engine operation or sooner if operating in e>ctremely dusty
areas.
A. Service Interstage Air bleed Actuator Strainer
(1) Disconnect hose assembly from ditfuser housing to actuator assembly at the actuator assembiy
reducer fitting. (See 72-00-00, 5, Figure 301.)
(2) Remove reducer fitting (5), packing (4), strainer assembly (3) and spring (2) from actuator as-
sembly (1),
(3) Inspect strainer assembly (3) for foreign matter or damage.
(a) If foreign matter cannot be removed or if damage exists, replace with new strainer assem-
bly 2-300-361.
(b) If foreign matter exists, deán strainer in dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203).
(4) Reinstall strainer assembly as follows:
(a) Position smaller end of spring (2) onto flange of strainer assembly (3).
(b) Instan spring and strainer assembly into actuator (1).

(c) Lightly coat new packing (4) with grease (72-00-00, 36, Table 203) and install on reduc-
er fitting (5).
(d) Install reducer fitting (5) onto actuator assembly making sure that strainer and spring are
properly seated.
(5) Install hose assembly from air diffuser housing to reducer fitting (5).
Page 305
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53--^
S.BWNEHASSEWIBL'Í
.-73» .306
3.
BLEED ACTUMOB 3.
5-
;S5CBBB-
iNTEBSTAGe WR
V ^SSEWSUV TT>*^<=
SPR'í^*^ A» Bleed
2.
ffgute
301
■72^00
HoneyweII MA,N™ANCEMANUAL
5- Preserv3?ion of Enoine and Comoonents
NOTE: All preservation procedures require that accumulation of dirt be removed from
engine with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203) (refer fo SPM,
70-15-03, SP C203). Under normal conditions, it will not be necessary to
deán the entire eJdernal surface of the engtne.
A. Preserving Accident Involved Engines
(1) Engines removed from an aircraft that has been involved in an accident in which engine failure
or malfunction is known or suspecíed to have been a factor should not be treated for corrosión
protection. No attempt should be made to opérate, motor or disassemble an accident involved
engine.
(a) Without disconnecting lines or fittings, make every effort to prevent remaining fuel and oil
in engine from leaking out.
(b) Plug all ports and cap all fittings and lines. Seal all openings with covers or barher
material (72-00-00, 9, Table 203) and secure with tape (72-00-00, 65, Table 203).
B. Preserving Damaged, Cannibalized or Failed Engines
(1) inoperable engines that are idie because they require parís, maintenance or overhaul, shall be
preservad as required (depending on storage time) and stored in a shipping container or in a
deán, dry area adequately protected from dirt and physical damage.
C. Preserving Engines in FIyable Storage
(1) Preservation of operable engines to be inactive 14 days or less is as foliows;
(a) Perform a regular preflight inspection of engine.
(b) Run engine at flight idie and check all Instruments for normal engine operation.
(c) Opérate engine for 10 minutes at approximately 75 percent Ni speed or at highest power
possible without gaining flight attitude. Make certain that engine temperatura stabilizes.
(d) Shut down engine.
Page 307
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(e) Perform regular post flight inspection of engine.
NOTE: When covers are not available, an altérnate method of protecting

installed engines is to cover all openings in the engine cowling
with suitable covers or greaseproof barrier material (72-00-00,
9, Table 203) and secure with tape (72-00-00, 65, Table 203).
(f) Insta)) engine intake protector LTCT862 and exhaust cover,
D. Preserving Inoperable Engines
(1) Preservation of inoperable engine that can be motored ¡s as follows;
(a) Checl< oil level; Service, if necessary.
(b) Disconnect 28 vdc power supply from ignition unit to prevent accidental firing of engme.
CAUTfON: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STARTER, DO NOT EXCEED
STARTER LIMITATiONS.
(c) Motor engine to initiate oil flow.
(d) Connect 28 vdc power supply to ignition unit. Lockwire connector.
NOTE: When protector and cover are not available, an altérnate method
of protecting installed engines is to cover all openings in the
engine cowling with suitable covers or greaseproof barrier
material (72-00-00, 9. Table 203) and secure with tape
(72-00-00, Table 65, 203).
(e) Instan engine intake protector LTCT862 and exhaust cover.
(2) Preservation of inoperable engine that cannot be motored is as follows:
(a) Check oil leve!; Service, if necessary.

NOTE: When protector and cover are not available. an altérnate method
of protecting installed engines is to cover all openings in the
engine cowling with suitable covers or grease proof barrier
material (72-00-00, 9, Table 203) and secure with tape
(72-00-00, 65, Table 203),
(b) Instan engine intake protector LTCT862 and exhaust cover.
Page 308
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
I
T53-L-703
E. Preserving Engine for Temporary and Extended Storage
(1) Preservation of engine that can be motored to be inactive 15 to 180 days is as follows:
(a) Check oil level; Service, i1 necessary.
(b) Disconnect 28 vdc power supply from ignilion unit to prevent accidental firing of engine.
(c) Remove fue! inlet strainer, pump discharge strainer, and servo supply filter from fuel regu-
lator. Clean with dry cleanmg solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and remstall. (See
73-20-03.)
(d) Disconnect main fuel hose from main fuel manifoid, and starting fuel hose from starting
fuel solenoid valve. Install temporary lines on end of hoses to allow drainage into suitable
container.
(e) Disconnect fuel inlet line from fuel control and connect hose to a source of lubricating oil
Grade 1010 (72-00-00, 43, Table 203) to fuel control.
(f) Check that engine has cooled enough to prevent auto igmtion.
(g) Set throttle arm lo flight idie.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STARTER. DO NOT EXCEED

STARTER LIMITATIONS.
(h) Motor engine with starter, to pump lubricating oil into fuel System.
(i) Open and cióse throttle and actúate starting fuel solenoid valve to make sure flushing of
the fuel control.
(j) Continué motoring until oil is observed draining from hose assemblies into container.
(k) Preserve compressor blades with rust inhibitor and preservative (72-00-00, 59, Table
203). Using 7 or 16 ounce aerosol can with snorkel tube, spray compressor blades as
follows:
1 Using starter, motor engine to starting rpm. With throttle closed, apply material as
engine coasts down.
Page 309
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
2 Hold aerosol can and snorkel tube so that is projects into areas between inlet
housing síruls. Direct jet síream between any íwo inlet guide vanes onto rotating
compressor blades. Move jet stream from base to tip of blades, which wtll make sure
that material covers as much of the blades as possible.
3 Apply jet stream for 30 seconds.
(l) With engine stopped and throttie closed, spray turbina wheel with sufficient amount of
lubhcating oil (72-00-00, 41 or 42, Table 203) to cover blades.
(m) Disconnect lubhcating hose assembly from fuel control and connect fuel inlet line.
(n) Remove temporary hose assemblies from main and starting fuel hose assemblies and
connect main fue) hose assemblies to main fuel mamfold. Connect starting fuel hose to
starting fuel solenoid vaive.
(o) Connect 28 vdc power supply to ignition unit. Lockwire connector.
of protecting installed engines is to cover all openings in the en-
gine cowling with suitable covers or greaseproof barrier material
(72-00-00, 9, Table 203) and secure with tape (72-00-00, 65,
Table 203).
(p) Instan engine intake protector LTCT862 and exhaust cover.
(q) Visually check entire engine. Plug all holes, cap all ports, and check that external parts
are complete and secure. Bare metal, including internal and external threads, should be
covered with a film of lubricating oil (72-00-00, 41 or 42, Table 203). Record date of
preservation and maintenance during preservation on engine histórica! form.
F. Preserving Engine That Cannol Be Motored
(1) Presen/ation of engine that cannot be motored is as follows:
(a) Disconnect cable connector, disconnect fuel inlet and outlet hoses and remove dram plug
from fuel control.
(b) Drain all fuel from fuel control and fuel hose assemblies.
Page 310
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(c) Remove fuel inlet strainer, pump discharge strainers and servo supply lilter from luel con-
trol. Clean with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and remstalL (See
73-20-03.)
(d) Remove overspeed governor (see 72-60-02). Drain fuel.
(e) Replace drain plugs and connect electrical cable and fuel hose assemblies.
(f) Lockwire throtfie arm into closed positlon.

Pour lubricatlng oil, Grade 1010 (72-00-00, 43, Table 203) into openings made
(g)
accessible by removal of overspeed governor until tuel regulator is filled.
Pour lubricatlng oil into overspeed governor while rotating the drive shaft by hand.
(h)
Reinstall overspeed governor. (See 72-60-02.)

(d)
Preserve compressor blades with rust inhibitor and preservative (72-00-00, 59, Table
(i) 203) using 7 or 16 ounce aerosol can with snorkel tube.
Spray the materials in the area between the inlet housing struts and direct the jet stream
(k) eveníy on ail the compressor blades.
Apply jet stream for 30 seconds.

(L)
Spray turbine rotors through exhaust with sufficient amount of lubhcating oil (72-00-00,
(m) 41 or 42, Table 203) to cover blades.
of protecting installed engines is to cover all openings in the en-
gine cowfing with suitable covers or greaseproof barrier material
(72-00-00, 9, Table 203) and secure with tape (72-00-00, 65,
Table 203).
Instan engine intake protector LTCT862 and exhaust cover.

(n)
Visually check entire engine. Plug all holes, cap all ports and check that external parís
are complete and secure. Bare metal, including internal and external threads, should be
(o)
covered with a film of lubricatlng oil (72-00-00 41 or 42, Table 203).
Record date of preservation and maintenance during presen/ation on engine historical

form.
(P)
72-00-00 sítloia
T53-L-703
G. Preserving Engines in Permanent Storage
(1) Permanent storage of engine to be inactive more than 180 days: Preservation of any engine for
permanent storage requires that the engine be installed in a shipping container. Presen/ation of
such engine is the same as for extended storage. (See paragraph 5-E.)
H. RenewaI of Preservation
(1) Preservation may be repeated as otten as necessary, but, when conditions warrant it, a perma-
nent preservation should be considered for a fiyable or an extended storage engine. Proceed
as fotlows:
(a) Remove inlet and exhaust covers or barher material.
(b) Inspect openings for foreign material and corrosión. Wipe olean with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(c) Repeat presen/ation procedure for fiyable or extended storage as applicable. (See para-
graph 5.E.)
I. Preserving Fuel Control Assembly Removed From Engine
(1) When a fuel control has been removed from an engine and is not to be reinstalled within 48
hours, flush with oil before removing and cap ports (see paragraph 5.E.), or preserve as fol-
lows:
(a) Remove servo supply fílter and pump Oischarge stramer (see 73 - 20 - 03). AKow fuel to
drain from fuel control.
(b) Reinstall sen/o supply filter and pump discharge strainer, (See 73-20-03.)
(c) Instan high pressure caps on the main and starting fuel outlet and mlet fittings and on
pump discharge pressure ports.
(d) Preserve fuel control using procedure in following step (e).
NOTE: Procedure in step (e) is the preferred method for preserving fuel
control.
(e) Preferred method of fuel control presen/ation.
1 Connect a 1 to 5 foot pressure head source of deán, unused lubhcating oil

(72-00-00, 43 or 44, Table 203) to fuel inlet.
2 Position the fuel control in operating attitude.
3 Using a rotary air gun and a spline adapter which will not damage the fuel control Ni
drive, motor the fuel control at 100 to 150 rpm.
4 Continué procedure until fuel is flushed out by the oil.
Page 312
72-00-00 Sepf 30/02
HoneyweII “«NTENANCEMANUAL
NOTE: Orive fuel control in proper direction of rotation. Orive
adapter can be made of heavy rubber hose or a spiine
welded to a square drive Socket or adapten
(f) Altérnate method of fuel control preservation.
1 Pour lubricating oil (72-00-00, 43 or 44, Table 203) into fuel control through pump
discharge straíner port.
2 Rotate fuel control pump drive by hand.
3 Turn fuel control over several times to aliow lubricating oil to penétrate all sections.
J. Packing Fuel Control or Governor for Shipment

(1) Cap and plug openings, place fuel control and/or governor in shipping container and properiy
idenlify for shipment.
6. Activating Engine after Storaae
A. Engines Instailed in Aircraft
(1) The following procedures apply to engines instailed in aircraft. The particular procedure cho-
sen depends on length of time that the engine has been inactive. Examine the preservation
record tags and historical records of the engine to determine period of inactivity.
(a) Activating engine in aircraft stored for 14 days or less. Remove covers or barrier material
from inlet and exhaust housings and remove any tape residue with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203). Engine is ready for ground test.
72-00-00 sS
T53-L-703
(b) Activating engine in aircraft stored íor 15 to 180 days. Proceed as follows:
1 Remove inlet and exhaust covers and barrier material.
2 Inspect openings for foreign material and corrosión, Wipe olean with dry cleaning
solvent (72-00-00, 62. Table 203).
3 Remove chip detector from accessory drive gearbox (see 79-30-01). Drain plugs
from fuel control. Allow oil to drain.
4 Clean and reinstall chip detector (see 79-30-01). Replace all plugs.
5 Disconnect 28 vdc power supply Irom ignition unit to prevent accidental firing of
engine.
6 Set throítie to idie position.
7 Disconnect main fuel hose from main fuel manifold and starting fuel hose from start-
ing fuel solenoid valve. Install temporary hoses and place ends into a container of
approximately 2 gallón capacity.
8 Check oil level; Service, if necessary.
CAUTIQN: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STARTER, DO NOT EXCEED

STARTER LIMITATIONS.
NOTE: Engine lubrication system is fully primed when oil pressure

gage shows a steady positive inOication.
9 Opérate aircraft boost pump to prime fuel system, and motor engine with starter.
10 Move throttie arm to máximum and actúate starting fuel solenoid valve until a solid
stream of fuel with no air bubbles is observad flowing from temporary hoses into con-
tainer.
1_L Connect main fuel hose to main fuel manifold and starting fuel hose to starting fuel
solenoid valve. Inspect engine for leakage.
12 Connect 28 vdc power supply to ignition unit. Lockwire connector.
13 Start engine and opérate for 5 minutes at approximately 75 percent N, speed.
14 Inspect engine for fuel and oil leaks.
15 Shut down engine.

16 Remove oil filter cover assembiy. Check for excessive contamination and replace.
(See 79-20-03.)
17 Remove chip detector. Check for excessive contamination. olean and reinstall- (See
79-30-01.)
Page 314
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,NT„MA.UAL
18 Remove fuel inlet and pump discharge strainers and servo supply filter from fuel
control. Check for contamination, olean and replace. (See 73-20-03.)
19 If no contamination is evident, the engine is ready for operation.
20 If oil System contaminant accumulation is slight, drain oil and refill System with new
oil-
21 Repeat steps 13 through 17. Evidence of continuad contamination in oil system

requires a thorough investigation.
(c) Activating new, overhauled or permanent storage engine. A new overhauled or

permanent storage engine is preservad in a shipping container. It will be removed from
the container and installed on an aircraft with proper fuel and oil supplied. Actívate engine
in the same manner as outlined for an extended storage engine. (See paragraph 6.A.(b).)
Page 315/316
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ENGINE - REMOVAI ANO INSTALLATION
1. Remova) of Enoine from Aircraft
A. Remove Engine
NOTE: Upon removal of engine from the aircraft, ít must be properly installed in
shipping container if engine is to be retumed.
The thermocouple connector {77-20-01,2, Figure 201) should always

remain with the engine. It should not remain connected to the firewail
cannon plug when the engine is removed.
(1) Using engine lifting sling LTCT773 and a suitaPle hoist, remove engine from aircraft. (Refer to
Aircraft Manual.)
2- ShioDina Container
Overall dimenslons of the metal shipping container are: iength, 74-5/8 inches; height, 43-1/8 inches;
width, 39-3/4 inches. Total weight of engine and container is 1207 pounds. Container is pressurized with
4 to 6 psi of dehydrated air. (See Figure 401.)
3. Preservation and Installation of Engine in Metal Shipping Container
A. Presen/ation and Installation
(1) Preserve engine for e>ctended storage. (See 72-00-00.)
(2) Using wrench LTCT3938, remove starter unit.
(3) Remove engine mounted aircraft accessories. (Refer to Aircraft Manual.)
(4) Remove exhaust cone if installed.

NOTE: Prior to installation of starter drive spiine cover in following step (5)
lubricate starter drive spiine socket with a liberal amount of spiine
lubricant (72-00-00. 45, Table 203.) Do not pack Socket.
(5) Spray exposed power turbine wheel and surrounding area with corrosión preveníive oil
(72-00-00, 21. Table 203). Inspect engine to make sure that all drain plugs are installed and
lockwire, all lines in place and connected and all attaching parts tightened to required torque
valúes. Cióse all openings with proper shipping covers, caps and plugs. Spray all drives with
corrosión preventiva oil (72-00-00, 21, Table 203) before covering. (See Figure 402.)
Page 401
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
■ ■Oncyi/Vdl T53-L-703
Shipping and Packing Components

Figure 402
Page 403
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 402
1. PLUG NAS816-11 25. PLUGNAS817-4

2. PROTECTIVE COVER 1-010-021-02 26. WASHER AN960-816
3. PLUG NAS818-12 27. BOLTAN1O4012
4. PACKING M83248/1-912 28. PLUGNAS817-4
5. PLUG NAS818-4 29. PLUGNAS818-3
6. PLUGNAS818-4 30. PACKING M83248/1 -903
7. CAPNAS816-17 31. CAPNAS817-10
8. PLUG NAS818-12 32. PACKING MS29512-10
9. PACKING M83248/1 -912 33. PACKING MS9015-04
10. PLUG STD 3021-03 34. PACKING M83248/1 -904
11. PACKING NAS617-03 35. PLUG NAS818-4
12. NUT MS20365-624
36. PACKING M83248/1-904
13. WASHER AN960-616L
37. WASHER AN960-616
14. COVER AN100041
38. BOLT MS9534-16
15. GASKET 1-080-026-01
39. FORWARD MOUNTING PAD
16. CAP MS25177-12
GASKET
17. CAP MS25177-12
1- 010-092-01
18. SHIPPING CONTAINER ASSEMBLY
416B1 40. PLUG NAS818-2
19. CAP MS25178-22 41. PACKING NAS617-2
20. NUTMS21042-4 42. PLUG NAS816-23
21. COVER AN100043 43. PLUG NAS818-10
22. GASKET AN4045-1 44. PACKING MS29512-10
23. CAP MS25177-12 45. DESICCANT, BAGGED
24. PROTECTIVE COVER 1-010-021-02 (72-00-00, 21, TABLE 203)
Page 404
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAÍNTENANCEMANUAL
(6) Pelease aír pressure in container.
(7} Remove container flange bolts and nuts,
(8) Remove shipping container top half with suitable lifting sling. Remove sealing gasket trom ship-
ping container flange.
(9) Clean mating flange surfaces and inside of shipping container with a wire brush and broom or a
vacuum cieaner.
(fO] Ffle smooth any rough projections found on llange. Examine cJosure gasket; discard and re-
place it. if badly cracked. Clean and dry gasket; give it a light coating of glycerol (72-00-00,
35, Table 203).
(11) Inspect container side rail assembly rubber shock mounts for cure date, cracks, tears, bond
separation and splits. Replace shock mount if oider íhan four years or if shock mount shows
evidence of damage.
(12) Position gasket around flange of bottom half of shipping container. Make certam that it does
not twist lengthwise. Check all bolts and nuts on shock mounts for tightness.
(13) Remove íorward and aft pairs of engine mounting brackets.
NOTE: Prior to installation of mounting brackets on iniet housing in following

step (14) inspect inserts in iniet housing mounting pads to make sure
that tangs of inserí are broken off. If tangs are not broken, use tang
breakoff tool 3581-8 (FSN 5120-793-1086) to break tang and retrieve
with a magnet.
(14) Bolt engine mounting brackets to engine pads and lockwire.
(15) Instan gaskets on container mounting brackets to prevent contad between engine mounting
brackets.
(16) Cover air iniet and exhaust diffuser openings with covers or grease proof barner material
(72-00-00, 9. Table 203). If grease proof barrier material is used, secure with tape
(72-00-00, 65. Table 203).
(17) Check humidity indicator. Replace if necessary.
(18) Place 48 units of desiccant (72-00-00, 24, Table 203) in desiccant basket In bottom of
container.
(19) Carefully guide engine into place. Bott engine mounting brackets to corresponding container
brackets.
(20) Using a suitable chain and alignment pins, lower the top half of shipping container onto bottom
half. Instan four bolts and nuts, one at each córner and finger tighten. Check alignment of top
and bottom halves of shipping container and alignment of upper and lower flange bolt holes.
Page 405
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
(21) Instan bolts and nuts at midpoints of sides and ends of shipping container flanges, bolts and
nuts at the midpoint between them; then instan all remaining bolts and nuts. Tighten in order of
installation with 500 to 640 inch pounds torque.
(22) Pressurize container with 4 to 6 psi using deán dehydrated air. Check container seáis to en-
sure that they are airtight by appiying liquid soap and observmg for bubbles.
(23) Place completad engine records in record receptada. Replace cover.
(24) Pasten a bonding seal through the record holder cover píate wingnuts and two seáis through
the shipping container fiange.
4. Marking all ShioDing Containers tor Shioment
Shipping Containers Shall be Marked as Shown (See Figure 403.)
5. Preservation Maintenance
PreservatiOn Maintenance is Not Representation, But is the Regular Inspection and Replacement of the
Dehydrating Agent Ailow engine awaiting installation to remain in dehumidified shipping container as long
as possible.
6. Inspection oí Pressurized Containers
A. Inspect Pressurized Containers

NOTE: (mmediately upon receipt of engine and every 90 days (or more frequently)
thereafter, check the reíative humidity indicator and the internal pressure of
the container.
(1) If reíative humidity is less than 40 percent and internal pressure is more than 1 psi. no further
maintenance is necessary until the next regular inspection.
72-00-00 sS
T53-L-703
RECORD
STENCIL " AIRCRAFT RECEPTACLE
GAS TURBINE ENGINE STENCIL " ENGI NE
ASSEMBL Y
MOOEL NO. RECORDS"HERE
ENGINE SERI AL NO. IN 1/2 INCH HIGH
CONTRACT NO. LETTERS
TEXTRON LTCO MING
DIVISI ON,
STRATFORO, CO NN. U S A
DATE PACKAGED
CURE DATE" HERE IN
1/2 INCH HIG H LETTERS
STENCIL " HUMIDITY

INDICATO R"HERE IN
1/2-INCH HIGH LETTERS.
STENCIL " AIR VAL VE FILL

TO 5 ROUND PRESSURE"
HERE IN 1/2 INCH HIG H
LETTERS
STENCIL - DO NOT
BREAK SEALSON
THIS CONTAINER
UNTIL READY FOfl
STENCIL " HELI EF VAL VE USE UNLESS INSPEC
DO NOT OISTURB" HERE TION OF THE HUMIDIT Y
IN 1/2 INCH HIGH L ETTERS INDICATO R SHOW S
RELIEF VAL VE RENEW ALS OF DE
AND FILLER HYORATING AG ENT
VAL VE ÜNIT OR PRESERVATlON TO
BE NECESSARY" HERE
IN 1/2.INCH HIGH L ETTERS
'SKIDS'
« 738 156A
FRONT VIEW
Marking Shipping Container

72-00-00 SZ<IO72
T53-L-703
STENCtL
-LIFTHERE" STENCIL
COHE IS OR IS NOT
INCLUDED HEREIN" SIDEVIEW
HERE IN 1/2-mCH
HIGH LETTERS
>- 738- 159

Figure 403 (Sheet 2)
Page 408
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
STrNClL "PRESERVATION ANO
STENCIL " DO NOT OESTRO Y" TEXTRON L YCO MING DIVI SION
HESE IN 1-1/2 INCH HI GH LETTERS STRATFORD, CONN. U S. A.
MERE I N 1/2 INCH HIGH L ETTERS
REAR VI EW

Page 409
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
(2) If internal pressure is less than 1 psi and relative humidity is less than 40 percent, container
shall be checked for leakage, using soap solution at alt closures. When leakage has been
corrected, container shall be repressurized to 4 to 6 psi, using deán dehydrated air. Record
date of repressurization in appropriate section of engine historical record.
(3) If inspection reveáis internal relativa humidity to be 40 percent or more, an unsafe or corrosiva
condition exists. Correct as follows:
(a) Depressurize shipping container by opening air valve at front of container.
(b) Ailow air pressure to return to zero.
(c) Remove 30 bolts and nuts that secure container halves together.
(d) Remove cover from container and inspect engine to determine its serviceability.
(e) If engine is found to be serviceable, remove it from container, preserve it for extended
storage (see 72-00-00, ENGINE - SERVICING, paragraph 5.E.) and reinstall in contain-
er or place it in service.
7. Removal of Engine from Shiopina Container
A. Depressunzing Shipping Container
(1) Open air valve at front of shipping container. Ailow air pressure to decrease to zero
{atmospheric pressure). {See Figure 401.)
B. Removal
{1) Remove engine records from envelope compartment on container.
WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN THAT ALL AIR PRESSURE HAS BEEN RELEASED
BEFORE LOOSENiNG NUTS. IF NUTS ARE REMOVED BEFORE
PRESSURE IS RELEASED. INTERNAL PRESSURE COULD BLOW
OFF COVER.
(2) Remove 30 nuts and bolts that secure upper and lower halves of shipping container.
(3) Attach a suitable chain to lifting eyes on upper hall of shipping container. Using a suitable hoist
attached to chain, life upper half of shipping container from lower half and set to one side. (See
Figure 401)
(4) Inserí 7/16 inch diameter by 6 1/2 inch long stud through diffuser housing lifting boss. Install
engine lifting sling LTCT773 on each end of stud. Secure engine siing with 1 1/2 inch diameter
washers and nuts. Tighten nuts.
(5) Inserí a 7/16 inch diameter by 5 inch long stud through inlet housing lifting boss. Install engine
sling on each end of stud. Secure engine sling cables with 1 1/2 inch diameter washers and
nuts. Tighten nuts.
(6) Attach engine sling to suitable hoist.
Page 410
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENA_™NUAL
(7) Remove nuts and washers that secura iour shipping trunnions to four shock resistant mounts in
lower half of shipping container.
(8) Remove engine from shipping container.
CAUTION: TRUNNION BOLTS USED iN SHIPPING ARE NOT TO BE USED

FOR INSTALLING ENGINE INTO AIRCRAFT.
(9) Remove shipping trunnions from engine mounting pads.
(10) Reinstall shipping trunnions in bottom half of shipping container.
(11) Lower top half of shipping container onto bottom half. Install four bolts and nuts, one at each
comer and fínger tighten. Check alignment on top and bottom halves of shipping container
and alignment of upper and lower flange bolt holes.
(12) Install bolts and nuts at midpoints of sides and ends of shipping container flanges and bolts
and nuts at midpoints between them, then install all remaining bolts and nuts. Tighten in order
of installation, 500 to 640 inch-pounds torque.
(13) Using olean dehydrated air, pressurize shipping container 4 to 6 psi. Check container seáis to
ensure they are airtight by applying liquid soap and observing for bubbles.
(14) Remove engine inlet and exhaust covers.
8. Installing Engine on Aircrañ
A. Install
(1) Install engine mounted aircraft accessories and using wrench LTCT3938 install starter unit.
(2) Using engine lifting sling LTCT773 and a suitable hoist, install engine on aircraft. (Refer to
Aircraft Manual.)
72 UU — UU Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ENGINE - INSPFCTION
1. Engine Insoection
A. Preflight Maintenance Inspection
NOTE: The preflight tnspection is performed prior to the first flight of the day. It
consiste of a visual inspection and operational checks.
(1) Remove inlet and exhaust covers. Inspect engine air inlet areas for presence of foreign matter.
(2) Inspect accessible turbine components for burnt or missing material.
(3) Inspect for fuel or oil leaks.
(4) Check that fuel and oil tanks are filled to proper level.
(5) Visually inspect engine for leaks.
(6) Rotate throttie to full open, check that fuel control stop has full contact.
(7) Move collective to full up position, check that N2 governor stop makes full contact.
CAUTfON: ONLY A RATEO PILOT OR MECHANIC WITH COMPANY AUTHORIZATION
SHALL PERFORM OPERATIONAL CHECKS. SERIOUS DAMAGE
TO
EQUIPMENT OR PERSONNEL INJURY COULD OCCUR.
(8) Position engine Controls for prestad checks and proceed with engine ground operation checks
in accordance with current flight manual.
B. Postfiight Maintenance Inspection
NOTE: The postfiight inspection is performed after the final flight of the day It
consiste of a visual inspection to detect any malfunctions or defects resultmg
from engine operation. Correct discrepancias prior to the next flight.
(1) Monitor engine coast down as engine is being shut down and listen for noises, which may indi-
cate interference between moving and stationary parts.
(2) Check combustión chamber drain valve for proper operation (fluid drain on shutdown, no fluid
drain during engine operation).
(3) Inspect the following Ítems for foreign object damage (FOD) and partial or complete blockage
by rags, paper or accumulation of other foreign materials. Evidence of blockage reguires a inlet
blockage inspection. (See 72-00-00.)
NOTE: For engines using air filter, sand and dust separator and FOD screen,
see step (b).
(a) Inlet housing air ducts, variable inlet guide vanes, and compressor rotor biades and stator
vanes (as visible through inlet air ducts) for FOD, partial or complete blockage and salt.
dirt, oil or varnish deposits.
Page 601
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(b) Inspect FOD screen and separator (for engines using these ítems) as follows:
1 FOD screen for damage which would permii foreign object entry. If screen is
damaged, inspect compressor for damage.
2 FOD screen exterior for presence of foreign material. If present, perform a inlet
blockage inspection. (See 72-00-00.)
3 Separator (Self Purging Part No. 1 -010-500-07./-08). Presence of dirt or sand

near ejector indicates ejector is operating satisfactoriiy.
4 At 25 hour intervals, remove upper half of purging separator and perform inspection
specified in preceding step (a).
5 Visually inspect seáis and gaskets for tears, lack of adhesión, rips, cracks on metal
surfaces or other damage. If damage is evident, disassemble separator and inspect.
Removal, repair or replacement of seáis, gaskets or other parts shall be accom-
plished in accordance with instructions in the Particle Separator Maintenance
Manual.
NOTE: If pin extensión (actuation) recurs during engine run, perform oil
contamination inspection (72-00-00). Actuation beiow52°F (11 °C)
with no associated oil contamination is generally caused by a
malfunction of indicator’s thermal lockout device.
(4) Inspect oil filter bypass indicator for pin extensión. If pin is extended, remove filter and deán
elements (see 79-20-03). !f unable to deán, replace filter. Reset pin by manually depressing
plástic cover.
NOTE: If continuity exists, remove the chip detector. If the accumulation ts

greater than fu2Z, oil contamination trouble shooting process is re-
quired. (See 72-00-00, Engine - Trouble Shooting.)
(5) Check for continuity at the chip detector.
(6) Inspect power turbine btades (visible through exhaust diffuser) for cracks, burns and nicked or
missing blades.
(7) Inspect exhaust area for presence of foreign matter. Inspect turbine blade trailing edges for
evidence of burning, FOD and tip rub. Inspect exhaust pipe for evidence of burning or
buckiing.
(8) Check tailpipe for presence of fuel, oil or foreign objects.
(9) Instan engine inlet and exhaust covers.
(10) Check engine Controls for freedom of movement, full travel, from stop to stop.
(11) Check for loose electrical connectors.
(12) Check wire bundles for chafing against fluid lines.
(13) Check fuel and oil leveis, Service as necessary.
Page 602
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NT«MANUAL
(14} II engine is to be inactive, for a period of 14 days or longer, make sure proper preservation
procedures are lollowed. (See 72-00-00, Engine - Servicing.)
C- Service Inspection Requirement
NOTE: Inspection is conducted at intervals specified in Service Bulletin T53-L-70 ^SB

Time Between Overhau! (TBO)rnme Between inspections (TBI) Intervals. T53-L-703-0001
If engine is to be inactive, for a pertod of 14 days or longer, make sure proper

preservation procedures are followed. (See 72-00-00.)
(1) Perform postflight maintenance inspection with the Service inspection.
(2) Inspect inlet housing,
(a) Visually inspect inlet housing filiets, exterior air passages, support pads, siruts, visible
portions of fon«ard and rear flanges for cracks, corrosión and missing protective coating.
Check ail engine mounts for cracks, security and damage. No cracks allowed. If cracks
are found, repiace inleí housing. No loss of protective coating is allowed. Repair to
instructions in SPM, 70-30-00, P517, P524 and P525. No corrosión except for under the
V-band fíange is aflowed. Replace inlet housing, if corrosión is found.
(b) Visually inspect Inlet housing V-band flange for corrosión, whenever access is gained
(with clamp removed). If limits are exceeded, replace Inlet housing. Limits are as follows:
1 Cumulative total of 11 inches (27.94 cm) in length and 0.125 inch (0.3175 cm) depth
is allowed.
2 Corrosión areas in 2.5 inches (6.35 cm) in length and 0.312 inch (0.7925 cm) depth
are allowed.
2 Individual defects shall be separated by mínimum of 1 inch (2.54 cm) of unaffected

material.
(c) Inspect housing for evidence of fuel in the P1 fitting area.
1 Inspect the inside of the inlet housing at and around the port that connects to the P1
fitting.
2 If the area appears to be wet or discolored, perform a check of the silicone oil level to
the fue) control in accordance with the instructions found in 73-20-01, paragraph
I.B.
2 If this check reveáis that the silicone oil level has increased, remove the fue! control
for repair.
(3) Inspect compressor housing for damage corrosión and security.
(4) Inspect air diffuser mounts and flanges for cracks, security and damage.
Page 603
72-00-00 Sepí 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: If a crack is found. measure and record length and location of

crack. Contact T53 Customer Support Engineering to determine
it continued use oí the air diffuser is possible. Fax (602)
231-3800.
(a) Inspect external vane brazement for cracks. Cracks in the vane brazement that do not
etfect engine performance are acceptable. lí cracks in the vane brazement or other
damage in vane brazement effect engine performance, replace air diffuser.
(b) Inspect brazed joint of air outlet pan assembly boss (P3) fitting for cracks. Replace air
diffuser.
(5) Inspect upper and lower bíeed bands for distortion and cracks.
(6) Inspect combustión chamber housing, support cone, fireshieid, and exhaust diffuser for cracks,
hot spots, burned areas and buckiing. (See 72-40-00.)
(7) Inspect overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly tncluding torquemeter boost pump
for leaks, loose fittings and mounting hardware. No leaks allowed.
(8) If Olí filter does not have an impending bypass button, oil filter must be cleaned every Service
inspection. (See 79-20-03.)
(9) Inspect fuel control for fuel leaks, damage, loose fittings and mounting hardware. No leaks
allowed.
(10) For all fuel Controls (except Pan No. 1-170-240-91/93), perform the following.
(a) Inspect fuel control inlet strainers and deán. (See 73-20-03.)
(b) Inspect fuel control servo strainers. Replace filter. (See 73-20-03.)
NOTE: On Fuel Controls Part No. 1-170-240-91/-93 the wash flow filter is
disassembled and cleaned at fuel control overhaul.
(11) For Fuel Controls Part No. 1 -170-240-91/-93. perform the following.
(a) Inspect fuel control inlet strainers and deán. (See 73-20-03.)
(b) Remove the wash flow filter and strainer assembly. Inspect the strainer assembly for
contamination.
(12) Check fuel control power lever for freedom of movement through full range to each stop.
(13) Inspect engine wiring harness for chafing and loose or damaged connections and loose
damps.
(14) Inspect ignition excitar and leads for cracks, chafing and secure connections. No cracks or
chafing allowed.
(15) Inspect oil lines and hoses for damage, chafing, leakage and secure connections. No leaks
allowed.
Page 604
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENA™^.m
(16) Inspect fuel lines and hoses for damage, chafing, leakage and secura connections. No leaks
allowed.
(17) Inspect air line from engine to blower for chafing and secure connections. No chafing allowed.
(18) On engines with measured gas temperature (MGT) Systems, perform the following inspections:
(a) Inspect turbine gas temperature connector for security in the mounting bracket.
(b) Inspect thermocouple harness rings for corrosión. Remove corrosión. (See 77-20-01.)
(c) Inspect lead assembly for cracks, wear, fraying and loose connections. Replace, if any of
the preceding conditions are found.
(19) Inspect engine bleed actuator strainer for condition and cleanliness. (See 75-30-03.)
(20) Inspect engine bleed actuator for condition and secure mounting hardware. (See 75-30-03.)
(21) Inspect bleed air tubing for chafing, loose connections and missing or broken lockwire. Corred
all discrepancies.
(22) Inspect accessory drive gearbox for leakage and secure mounting boits and check that alí
other accessories mounted on AGB are in good condition with no leaks or loose mounting
hardware.
(23) Inspect variable Inlet guide vane (VIGV) actuator and feedback rod for security and clearance of
feedback rod. Inspect for fuel leaks at actuator fittings. None allowed.
CAUTION: ONLY A RATEO PILOT OR MECHANIC WITH COMPANY

AUTHOR12ATION SHALL PERFORM OPERATIONAL CHECKS.
SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR PERSONNEL
¡NJURY
COULD OCCUR.
(24) Perform engine preoperational checks in accordance with engine inspection before operation.
(See 71-00-00.)
Page 605
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAiNTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
D. Internal Hot End Inspection
NOTE: An interna! hot end inspection is to be performed when the EGT/MGT limit is
exceeded or when the engine operating hour limits specified in applicable
Service bulletins are reached. In addition to the internal inspection Ítems, a
complete Service inspection is to be performed (step C).
A 600 hour inspection interval is recommended. When operation in a sand

and dust environment. In severe sand and dust conditions, the intervai
should be further reduced.
(1) Engine disassembly.
(a) Remove power turbine bearing housing heaf deflector. (nspect for cracks at bolt hoíe and
for carbón dust on the forward side. No cracks allowed.
(b) Using suitable tapered feeter gages, measure gap between rear bearing cover and ex-
haust diffuser in eight equatly spaced places. The optimum gap would be 0.005 inch
(0.127 mm) at all locations. Up to 0.007 inch (0.1778 mm) is aliowabte at any point, i1 the
direct opposite measurement does not exceed 0.003 inch (0.0762 mm). If limit is exceed-
ed, proceed asfollows:
1 Inspect ID of exhaust diffuser. If average diameter in eight places exceeds 6.066

inches (15.408 cm), remove and replace exhaust diffuser.
2 Inspect OD of rear beañrrg cover. \f average diameter at eight equalJy spaced loca-
tions is less than 6.056 inches (15.382 cm), reptace the cover.
(c) Remove combustor turbine assembly in accordance with maintenance manual directions.
Insure that the position of the air diffuser to combustión housing is marked with an ap-
proved marker. Mark relationship of power shaft to second power turbine rotor for reas-
sembly.
(d) Record power shaft bolt flange depth measurement, dimensión A. Subtract dimensión B,
the distance from top of the iocating bar to flange. The resulting distance plus length oí
LTCT3039 is flange depth, dimensión C.
(e) Record thickness of power turbine bolt shims.
Page 606
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
NOTE: If nozzle modified by Service Bulletin T53-703-0130 is insialled
in this engine, than removai of the Second Stage PT nozzle for
inspection is not required unless inspection while the nozzle is
installed indicates the need lor more stringent inspection.
(f) Disassemble combustor turbine assembly until the second power turbine nozzle is
removed. Do not continué disassembly unless inspection of the exhaust diffuser,
combustión chamber and second power turbine rotor indícate additionai disassembly for
inspection or repair is necessary.
(g) Remove second gas producer rotor and nozzle from engine to allow inspection of the first
gas producer rotor and nozzle.
(h) During disassembly record the following dimensions.
1 Thickness of first power turbine nozzle spacer.
2 Thickness of second power turbine nozzle.
3 Second stage gas producer tip clearance.
4 First stage gas producer tip clearance.
(2) Engine inspection.

(a) Inspect all hot section parís in accordance with the applicable section of the maintenance
manual. Repair/replace any components that do not meet the inspection limits of the
maintenance manual.
(b) Fuel manifolds and start nozzles shall be flow checked at a calibrated test bench to check
for spray pattern and correct flows. Functional test procedure and limits are in the over-
haul manual. Repair as necessary.
(c) Examine the rear second power turbine rotor face for indications of the power turbine
bearing housing seal leakage. If this evidence is presení. continué disassembly to re-
place that seal.
(d) Inspect the first gas producer nozzle by inspecting the vanes through the rotor. If neces-
sary, remove the rotor for additionai inspection of the nozzle (see limits 72-51 -02).
(e) Inspect to determine that there are no oil leaks from the No. 2 seáis. If evidence of an oil
leak is present, disassemble to repair.
(f) Visually inspect power shaft splines for wear. (See Figure 601.)
NOTE: If wear or fretting is evident, the following limits appiy. If limits are
exceeded, replace power shaft.
1 Light to médium wear (conditions A and B) is acceptable.
Page 607
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
^ywell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
NOTE: Do not lubricate power shaft spiines.
2 Heavy wear (condition C) is acceptable up to 0.007 inch (0.0178 cm) depth stepped
wear, provided heavy metatlic pickup on mating power turbine internal spiines is
cleaned using a stiff brush and dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(g) Conduct a visual inspection, in accordance with maintenance manual requirements, of the
combustión liner and housing, exhaust diífuser and power turbine bearing housing with-
out removing trom the combustión turbine assembly. If defects appear to exceed iimits,
remove the components for (urther inspection.
(h) If removed, measure the second power turbine rotor using the following procedure.
1 Place a No. 35 drill rod 0.108 inch (0.274 cm) diameter into wear step of two spiines
directly opposite each other. Hold rods in place using petroleum jelly or vegetable
shortening.
2 Using 0 to 2 inch inside micrometer, measure diameter at three different locations

approximately 120 degrees apart.
3 Average the three dimensions, máximum diameter is 1.360 inches (3.454 cm). Re-
cord all dimensions.
Ist ______ 2nd _____ 3rd _____ Average ______ 1.360 inches (3.454 cm) máximum
(i) Visually inspect third row vanes in air diffuser for nicks, burrs and dents. These conditions
are acceptable provided vane mutilation has not occurred and there is no evidence of
material cracks or developing cracks. Blend repair surface defects. (Refer to SPM,
70- 25-01, SP R401.) Punctures in vanes are acceptable provided engine performance
has not been affected and there is no evidence of cracks forming in the punctures.
(j) Visually inspect third vane brazements for minor cracks and voids. Minor cracks and
voids are acceptable provided all other inspection requirements are met. Blend repair
surface defects and remove Sharp projections on vane, where access permite. (Refer to
SPM. 70-25-01, SP R401.)
(k) Inspect V-band coupling bolts for proper torque, 200 inch-pounds.
(l) Inspect for an even gap of 0.281 to 0.469 inch (0.714 to 1.191 mm) between ends of V-
band coupling.
(m) Perform visual inspection of MGT harnesses in accordance with 77-20-01 of the
maintenance manual.
For MGT harness, test the resistance of the thermocouple lead assembly. (See
77-20-01, paragraph G.)
(n) Clean and repack the starter gear spiines. (See Starter Drive Spiine Inspection,
72-00-00).
Page 608
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAINTENANCE^MANUAL
(3} Engine assembiy.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO COMBUSTOR INSTALLATION, REMOVE N2

TACHOMETER GENERATOR (SEE 72-40-00). OBSERVE
CAUTION IN MAINTENANCE MANUAL CONCERNING
HOT
GEAR ENGAGEMENT OF N2 SPUR GEAR.
{a) Reassemble engine in accordance with assembty instructions in the maintenance manual.
1 Record dimensions taken during assembiy using dimensional checkhst.
NOTE: Component part number and serial number shall be entered

into the engine logbook,
2 Record all components replaced during this inspection on the component replace-
ment record.
Page 609
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Dimensional Checkiist
Dimensión Reauired Actual Measurement
1. Axial clearance between first gas producer nozzle lo first gas producer rotor. _______________________
2. Tip clearance between first gas producer rotor to cylinder.
3. First gas producer rotor axial runout. ________________
4. First gas producer rotor radial runout. _______________
5. Axial clearance between second gas producer nozzle and first gas producer
rotor. ________________
6. Radial clearance between second gas producer nozzle and gas producer
spacer. ________________
7. Axial clearance between second gas producer rotor and second gas producer
nozzle. ________________
8. Tip clearance, second gas producer rotor. ________________
9. Second gas producer rotor axial runout. ________________
10. Second gas producer rotor radial runout. ________________
11. Clearance between second power turbine rotor and exhaust ditfuser. ________________
12. New through bolt measurement must be within 0.010 inch (0.025 cm) of original
measurement. Máximum of three shims.
Total Shim Thickness _____________________
13. Axial clearance between first power turbine rotor and second power turbine
nozzle. ________________
14. Radial clearance between second power turbine nozzle and power turbine
spacer. ________________
15. Tip clearance, second power turbine rotor. (Required. if second power turbine
nozzle was removed.) ________________
16. Axial clearance between first power turbine nozzle and power turbine rotor
shroud tips. ________________
17. Tip clearance, first power turbine rotor. ________________
18. Bumper clearance. ________________
19. Face runout, first power turbine rotor. ________________
20. Períorm rear bearing cover clearance check, record average of eight location
checks. ______
HoneyweII MA,NTEN™ANUAL
Component Replacement Record
Nomenclature Parí No. Serial No.
PageSil
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CAUTION: ONLY A RATEO PILOT OR MECHANIC WITH COMPANY

AUTHORIZATION SHALL PERFORM OPERATIONAL
CHECKS.
SERIOUS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR PERSONNEL
INJURY
COULD OCCUR.
(b) Perform engine inspection and run checks as required in 71 -00-00.
(c) Check and record bleed band closing point.
(d) Check and record VIGV start to open point using LTCT13726 switch and coupling kit.
E. 2500 Hour Inspection
(e) Perform and record a vibration survey.
(1) Perform hot section inspection.
(2) Disassemble to remove and replace the No. 2 aft seal.
(3) Perform sen/ice inspection.
(4) Engine disassembiy.
NOTE: Disassemble engine in accordance with applicable section of

maintenance manual.
(a) Remove the reduction gearbox from the engine.
(b) Remove the engine accessories and NI and N2 gearboxes.
(c) Remove the oil supporl and accessory drive carrier.
(d) Disassemble to remove and replace the No. 1 seal.
(e) Remove the electrical harnees, hot air valve, and hot air tube from the engine.
(f) Remove the bleed valve and bleed band from the engine.
(g) Remove the top hall of the axial compressor housing and top half of the centnfugal
compressor housing.
(5) Compressor section.
NOTE: This inspection shall be in accordance with the applicable section of the
maintenance manual.
(a) Inspect ali biades for FOD and erosión, repair or replace as necessary.
(b) Inspect the stators for erosión or FOD, repair or replace as necessary.
(c) Inspect the area under the stators for signs of corrosión, if corrosión is present, repair.
(d) Inspect for signs of an impeller rub. Repair if required.

T53-L-703
NOTE: Reíer to maintenance manual for clearances.
(e) Measure and record the impeller clearances.
Mínimum Clearance Actual Clearance

A-Front
B-Midpoint
C-Rear
Record all inspection results. Repair as necessary.
(6) Front section.
(a) Inspect the oil transfer fiiters and olean prior to reinstallation.
(b) Reduction gearbox.

1 Inspect the reduction gearbox without furíher disassembly unless cause is found.
Inspect the exposed gear teeth for spalling, frosting or other signs of wear (refer to
SPM, 70- 20- 00, 1308).
2 Record all inspection results and repair as necessary.
(c) Accessory drive carrier.
1 Inspect the accessory drive carrier for condition. Visually inspect the gear teeth for
proper pattern. (See 72-60-01.)
2 Spin the N2 drive gear, listen to the bearings for roughness or other signs of distress.
If there is any concern for the condition of the bearings, replace bearings,
3 Inspect NI bevel gear installed on compressor rotor for pattern and backiash.
4 Visually inspect the remainder of the front section of the engine.
5 Record all inspection results and repair as necessary.
(7) Power shaft.

(a) Using a 2 inch micrometer, No. 31 drill rod 0.120 inch (0.305 cm) diameter and masking
tape, inspect power shaft rear spiines.
(b) Axtally position rod(s) into wear step. Measure outside diameter over wire. Take readings
in at least three circumferential locations (120 degrees apart) and average.
Ist 2nd _____ 3rd _____ Average ______ 1.660 inches (4.216 cm) mínimum
(c) Record all inspection resufts and repair as necessary.

HoneyweII MA,NTENA_N™
(8) Accessory gearbox.
NOTE: If debris is presen!, determine ils origin and correct during this
inspection.
(a¡ Inspect the oil filter and chip detector for metal debris.
{b) Inspect the starter drive gear spiines for wear. Replace gear, if worn beyond mamtenance
manual limit.
(c) Inspect accessories mounted on gearbox and gearbox for security, leaks, loose or miss-
ing fasteners and hardware. Correct all discrepancies.
(d) Inspect inserts for security.
(e) Record all inspection results and repair as necessary.
(9) Inlet housing.
(a) Inspect the inlet housing for loose inserts.
(b) Record all inspection results and repair as necessary.
(10) Engine assembiy.

CAUTION: PRIOR TO COMBUSTOR INSTALLATION, REMOVE N2
TACHOMETER GENERATOR. OBSERVE CAUTION
IN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL CONCERNING HOT GEAR
ENGAGEMENT OF N2 SPUR GEAR (SEE 72-40-00).
(a) Reassemble engine in accordance with assembiy instructions in the maintenance manual.
1 Record dimensions taken during assembiy using dimensional cheokiist.
NOTE: Componen! part number and serial number shall be entered

into the engine logbook.
2 Record all components replaced during this inspection on the Componen! Replace-
ment Record.
(b) Make all required engine logbook entries.
CAUTIQN: ONLY A RATEO PILOT OR MECHANIC WITH COMPANY

AUTHORIZATION SHALL PERFORM OPERATIONAL CHECKS.
SERIOOS DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR PERSONNEL
INJURY
COULD OCCUR.
(11) Engine operational checks.
(a) Perform engine inspection and run checks as required. Adjust as necessary. (See
71- 00-00.)
(b) Check and record bieed band closing point. Adjust as necessary. (See 73-20-01.)
Page 614
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Power Shaft Wear Limits

Figure 601
Page 615
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(c) Check and record VIGV start to open point and full open point. Adjust as necessary.
(See 75-30-01.)
(d) Perlorm and record a vibration survey. (See 71 -00-00.)
(e) Perlorm and record a topping check. (See 73-20-01.)
F. Special Inspection
NOTE: A special inspection is performed when foreign object damage is noted,
suspected engine compressor stall occurs. engine is dropped during
handiing, sudden stoppage of engine occurs, following extended use of
emergency tuel or when overlimit conditions occur. Overiimit conditions
inelude over temperatura, overspeed, overtorque, oil overtemperature and
G-Load. There are no prescribed inten/als for special inspections.
(1) Inspect for foreign object damage (FOD). Open mlet guide vanes manually and conduct a visu-
al inspection of the inlet housmg (inlet guide vane and first stage compressor rotor through the
inlet ducks).
(a) if damage exceeds limits or appears to extend beyond the first stage compressor rotor,
remove the upper compressor housing half and inspect compressor blades, vanes, cen-
trifuga! impellers and compressor housings. (See 72-30-01,72-30-02 and
75-30-01.)
(b) If centrifugal compressor impeller is damaged beyond limits, return engine to Overhaul.
(c) Inspect all visible air diffuser vanes for minor nicks, dents and burrs. Minor nicks, dents
and burrs are acceptabie provided that mutilation has not oceurred.
NOTE. Compressor surge (stall) is charactehzed by sharp rumbles or reports,

severe engine vibration and a rapid rise in exhaust gas temperature,
depending on the severity of the surge.
(2) If it is suspected that compressor surge has oceurred, perform the following:
(a) Inspect aircraft and engine logs to determine any history pertinent to the suspected com-
pressor surge condition; discuss discrepaney with pilot concerned or maintenance chief
to further evalúate surge circumstances.
(b) Check the following Ítems:
1 Inspect inlet housing and compressor inlet for obstruction or accumulation of dirt or
other foreign matter.
2 Determine that improper operation of the interstage airbieed band and actuator, fuel
control and hot air solenoid valve are not causing the surge.
3 Inspect the variable inlet guide vane system for proper rigging and operation.
4 Inspect inlet guide vanes and compressor rotor blades for evidence of foreign object
damage. (See paragraph l.F.{1).)
Page 616
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
Honeywell MA,NTENANCE^MANUAL
5 Remove upper compressor housing and inspect leading edges and tip areas of
compressor rotor blades and stators for cutback due to erosión.
6 If the above checks reveal no defects or if delects cannot be correcled, fonvard

engine to Overhaui facility.
(3) If engine is dropped dunng handling, proceed as follows:
NOTE: If engine is in shipping container, inspect container and container

engine mounts for damage.
In the event íhat the severify of drop is such that items as called out m
steps (a) thru (f) are discrepant, it is recommended that engine be for-
warded to a designated Overhaui facility for further corrective action.
(a) Check accessory drive gearbox for cracked mount flanges or loose bolts.
(b) Check overspeed governor and tachometer drive for cracks, distortion and bent shafts.
(c) Check oil filter for loose bolts and damaged filter elements.
(d) Check power driven rotary (oil) pump for loose bolts and cracked flanges.
(e) Check fuel control for cracked flanges.
(f) Check engine mounting pads fcr cracks.
(g) Check all hose connections for security.
(h) Check all accessories for loose bolts, nuts, connections and cracked mount flanges.
(i) Check inlet, compressor and combustor housings for cracks or loose bolts.
(j) Engines must be returned to Overhaui for inspection of all main bearings if any of the
foltowing damage is noted:
1 Extensive damage to shipping container or shipping container engine mounting

system.
(k) Inspect for cracks or loose bolts in any of the following engine areas:
1 Engine mounts.
2 Accessory drive gearbox mount flanges.
3 Accessory mount flanges.
4 Inlet, compressor or combustor housings.
(l) Check all accessories for loose bolts. nuts and connections.
Page 617
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
(m) If no visual Oamage is appareni, accomplish the following inspections:
NOTE: The minimum test time is 30 minutes. Vibration leveis musí

be within established limits. If no defects are noted, engine
is considered serviceable. (See 71 -00-00, paragraph
10. E.)
1 Perform a complete engine ground operational test (with engines on aircratt) and
inelude vibration and coastdown checks.
(n) Perform inspection of oil Mter, screens, and chip detector for chips, lint or other foretgn
material.
(4) Sudden stoppage inspection.
NOTE: The following engine inspection must be completed in the event of air-
craft drive system stopping, even momentarüy. Sudden stoppage is
interpretad to inelude the shock feit by the drive system when the air-
craft rotor blades come in contact with the ground, water, trees or other
obstacles that would cause damage requiring aircraft rotor blade
change.
It is advised that engines subjected to sudden stoppage be forwarded

to a designated Overhaul facility for the following inspection, as failure
to do so may atfect airworthiness. Detailed disassembly, inspection,
and assembly instructions are provided in the Overhaul Manual, No.
290.3.
(a) Inspect output reduction carrier and gear assembly (1 -030-350-12) and sun gearshaft
(1-030-192-04). (Referto Overhaul Manual, No, 290.3.)
NOTE: Cracking may oceur longitudinally along gear íeeth. Cracks

can be considered partial separation of metal resulting from
undue stresses. Chipping and flaking represent various
forms of cracking.
1 Visually inspect all parts for cracks or distortion. Repair or replace if detective.
2 Visually inspect gears and spiined parts. Repair or replace if visually detective.
3 Perform a magnetic particle or íluorescent penetran! inspection on all parts included

in the reduction gearing system.
4 Inspect reduction gear strainers for foreign matehals, cuts and dents. Inspect filter
body. Clean as outlined below.
a Clean reduction gear strainers and filter body.
• Immerse reduction gear strainers or filter body in tank containing dry cleaning
solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) and clean with soft bristied brush.
HoneyweII MA,NTENA™NUAL
• Remove reduction gear strainer or filter body from tank and pressure liush
with dry cleaning solvent {72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
b Remove foreign material from oil transfer tube by pressure flushing with dry
cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
c Clean all other parts by vapor degreasing (refer to SPM, 70-15-01, SP

C201) or dry cleaning solvent (refer to SPM, 70-15-03, SP C203) method.
5 Inspect torquemeter balls for scratches, dents, etc. Rework or replace.
6 Inspect ball sockets on rear torquemeter píate for scratches or dents. Rework or
replace.
(b) Bearing Inspection. (Refer to Overhaul Manual, 290.3.)
NOTE: The No. 3 and 4 power turbine bearings are located in the
center of the exhaust diffuser section and support the power
turbine rear shaft. The No. 40 bearing (three each) and No.
43 bearing (three each) support both ends of the planet
gears in the reduction gearing section and No. 44 and No. 45
bearings support the output gearshaft of the output reduction
carner and gear assembiy.
1 Inspect the No. 3, 4, 40, 43, 44, 45 bearings. (Refer to SPM, 70-20-07, SP 1307.)
(c) Power turbine. (Refer to Overhaul Manual, 330.3.)
1 Remove the power turbine assembiy from the exhaust diffuser.

2 Disassemble the power turbine assembiy for bearing inspection which will isolate the
power turbine for inspection.
3 Perform a fluorescenl penetrant inspection on power turbine rotors and check plat-
form area and blade root area for cracks and drubs. Replace turbine rotor if defects
exceed limits.
4 Inspect splrned area. Replace turbine rotor if detective.
(d) Exhaust diffuser and rear bearing housing inspection. (Refer to Overhaul Manual, 330.3.)
1 Perform fluorescení penetrant (refer lo SPM, 72-20-05, SP 1305) or magnetic par-

tióle inspection (refer to SPM. 72-20-03, SP 1303) for cracks on exhaust diffuser
and rear bearing housing.
2 Inspect exhaust diûser for distortion and out of round condiíion. Diameters that are
out of round and eccentric are unacceptable and must be repaired.
2 Repair if defects are found. Check diameters to determine concentricity and square-
ness with face of mounting flange.
(e) Power shaft inspection
Page 619
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Removal oí the power shaft from the compressor rotor is not
required for the following inspection.
1 Inspect forward and rear spiined areas for cracks, using dye penetrant method.
2 Inspect power shaft bolt to determine if it is broken off within the power shaft.
Remove broken bolt and deán threads within shaft.
(f) Oil System contamination inspection,
1 After initial engine checkrun, inspect chip detector and main oil filter.
2 If an excessive accumulation of metallic particles is observed, perform oil contamina-
tion trouble shooting procedure. (See 72-00-00, ENGINE - TROUBLE SHOOT-
ING, paragraph I.C.)
(5) Overspeed inspection,
(a) If engine has been subjected to an overspeed condition, proceed as follows:
NOTE: If chips are found in oil filter or chip detector, perform an oil
contamination inspection. {See 72-00-00, ENGINE -
TROUBLESHOOTiNG, paragraph I.C.)
1 Remove and check oil filter for metal chips or other foreign matter.
2 Remove and check chip detector for metal chips.
(b) II gas producer (Ni) overspeed limits are exceeded, proceed as follows:
1 Perform an INTERNAL (HOT END) INSPECTION. (See paragraph 1 .C.)

2 Check compressor rotor assembly by mechanically rotating and listening for
indications of rubbing.
(c) If output shaft (N2) overspeed limits are exceeded, proceed as follows:
1 Visually inspect power turbine rotor assembly for damaged or missing blades (view
through tailpipe).
NOTE: If discrepancies are noted, perform an INTERNAL (HOT END)

INSPECTION. (See paragraph 1 .D.)
2 Perform tip clearance inspection on second stage power turbine blades through
exhaust diffuser (0.025 inch minimum.)
(d) Determine and correct cause of overspeed.
(e) Perform engine operation check. If no discrepancies are noted, the engine is serviceable.
Page 620
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
(6) Overtorque inspection.
(a) When an engine has been subjected to an overtorque condition exceeding the limits in
71 -00-00, perform the tollowing:
1 Check chip detector for metal chips.
2 Check oil filter for metal chips or other foreign matter.
3 If slight accumulation of foreign matter is observed, deán chip detector and oil filter;
opérate engine for 10 minutes; then repeat steps 1 and 2 above.
4 If excessive accumulation of metal or foreign matter is observed, accomplish the

following;
a Perform an oil contamination inspection. (See 72 -00-00, ENGINE -

TROUBLESHOOTING. paragraph I.C.)
b Inspect output reduction carrier and gear assembiy.
5 Repeat step 3 above, increasing engine operating time to 30 minutes.
6 Perform flight test and repeat steps 1 and 2 above. If no excessive accumulation of
metal or foreign matter is noted, engine may be released for normal operation.
(7} Oil overtemperature inspection.
(a) Inspect engines which have been subjected to an oil overtemperature condition as
follows;
X At ambient temperaturas of 86°F (SO^C) and above, steady State engine OIL IN
temperature of 212°F (100“C) is acceptable, provided inspection of the oil filter for
excessive accumulation of carbón partióles is accomplished every 50 hours of
operation with this elevated oil temperature,
CAUTION: IT MUST BE CLEARLY UNDERSTOOD THAT THERE iS A

POSSIBILiry THAT MECHANICAL COMPONENTS MAY
SUFFER DAMAGE IF ENGINE OPERATING CONDITIONS
ARE EXTENDED BEYOND THESE LIMITS.
2 Under abnormal (emergency) conditions, such as an oil cooling system malfunction

or failure, the following procedures and engine OIL IN temperature limits will minimiza
the risk involved in operating an engine which has exceeded temperature limits.
3 At ambient temperature of 86^F (30°C) or below, if the oil temperature exceeds 201-F
(94°C) to 266®F (130°C) for 10 minutes or less, check main oil filter. If metal contami-
nation is found, refer to oil system contamination inspection. (See 72-00-00.)
4 At temperaturas from 201 to 266°F (94 to 130"C) for more than 10 minutes, but no
more than 30 minutes, proceed as follows; Changa oil, deán all screens and main oil
filter. Ground run engine for 30 minutes and recheck main oil filter for carbón and
Page 621
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
metal particles. If contamination is found, deán oil screens and oil filter. Repeat oil
change and ground run engine.
5 Al temperaturas írom 201 to 266‘F (94 to 130°C) for time greater than 30 minutes,
perform following inspection:
a Remove combustor turbina assembiy. (See 72-40-00.)
b Disassemble combustor turbina assembiy to permit removal of power turbina

rotor and bearing housing assembiy.
c Disassembie power turbina rotor and bearing housing assembiy to permit

removal of No. 3 and 4 position main bearings. Determine parí numbers of
bearings and:
• Replace bearings 1 -300-015-02 and 1-300-584-02.
• Inspect bearing 1 -300-584-01 for coke/general condition.
• Inspect No. 2 main bearing seáis for coke/general condition. Replace if

necessary.
• Inspect No. 3 main bearing seáis for coke/general condition. Replace if

necessary.
d Disassembie gas producer system components to permit removal of No. 2

position main bearing and No. 2 main bearing seáis. Determine part numbers of
bearings and:
• Inspect bearing 1-300-584-01 for coke/general condition. Replace if

necessary. Repiace bearing 1-300-584-02.
e Reassemble gas producer System components, power turbine rotor and bearing
housing assembiy, and combustor turbine assembiy. Reinstall combustor tur-
bine assembiy.
f Remove accessory drive gearbox.
g Disassembie gearbox to permit removal of bearings 1 -300-002-01/02 and

1 -300-006-01/02 from pinion gearshaft and bearing assembiy, bearings
1 -300-006-01/02 from thrust bearing liner assembiy and bearings
1 -300-012-01/02 from starter generator drive gearshaft assembiy. (See
72- 60-01.) Determine part number of bearings and:
• Replace bearing 1-300-007-01/02, 1-300-006-01/02 and

1- 300-012-01.
• Inspect all remaining installed bearings, for coking and heat disc
discoloration. Replace if necessary.
• Inspect all gears and splined parts for coking and heat discoloration. Replace
if necessary.
Page 622
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTEnANCE^M^
h Remove output reduction carrier and gear assembiy.
i Inspect accessible gears and splined parts for coking and heat discoloration. If
conditions are found, return carrier assembiy to authorized Overhaul center for
repair.
g At oil temperaturas from 268 to SOO'^F (131 to 149’C) for any time period, perform
same inspection outlined in preceding step (a).
7 If oil temperatura reaches 302°F (150°C), the engine must be returned to Overhaul.
(8) Excessive G-(oads (hard landings and severe maneuvers). proceed as follows;
(a) If it is suspected that excessive G-loads have been imposed on an engine, conduct the
following inspections immediately after the flight durtng which the excessive loads oc-
curred.
1 Inspect accessory drive gearbox for cracked mount flanges or ioose bolts.
2 inspect overspend governor and tachometer drive for cracks, distortion and bent
shafts,
2 Inspect oii filter for Ioose bolts and damaged filter elements.
4 Inspect oil pump for Ioose bolts and cracked flanges.
5 Inspect fue! control assembiy for cracked flanges and Ioose nuts,
6 Inspect engine and aircraft mounts for cracks, bending or distortion.
7 Inspect air, oil and fuel hose connections for tightness.
8 Inspect ali accessories for Ioose bolts, nuts and connections.
a Damage to aircraft engine mounts.
(b) Inspect for cracks or Ioose bolts in any of the following areas:
NOTE: If the aircraft furnished engine mount legs exhibit any cracks,
bending or distortion, it is recommended that the engine be
returned to Overhaul as extremely high G-toads have been
imposed. It is further recommended that HoneyweII be
contacted to provide additional direction,
1 Engine mounts.
2 Accessory drive gearbox mount flanges.
3 Accessory mount flanges.
4 Inlet, compressor, or combustor housings.
Page 623
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
G. inlet Blockage Inspection
NOTE: Any time the aircraft is flown tn a loose grass/foliage environment or it it

is suspected that rags, paper or other debris could have been ingested,
the engine shall be inspected for blockage around the inlet guide
vanes. Failure to perform this inspection could result in loss oí power.
(1) Inlet blockage inspection:
(a) Remove the partióle separator (both halves) and aircraft inlet screen (if installed) and
inspect the engine inlet area
(b) Inspect the inlet housing struts and each inlet guide vane lor rags, paper, grass, foliage or
other foreign material blockage or partial blockage.
(c) Compieteiy remove any foreign material that may be lodged on the inlet strut or guide
vanes. Special attention should be given to the lower (4 thru 8 o’clock) portion of the
vane assembiy.
(d) If blockage or partial blockage is evident or suspected, remove and scrap all the first and
second stage compressor blades and replace with new blades. {See 75-20-01.)
(e) Reinstali particle separator and aircraft inlet screen.
(f) Perform standard engine vibration check with the engine installed in the aircraft. (See
71- 00-00, paragraph 11.E.)
Gl- Unanticipated Inspection Requirements
Engines that have experienced an incident not addressed elsewhere under Special Inspections, such
as immersion in water, etc. should be handied in the following manner. Incidents of this type will be
handied on a case by case basis. Inspection recommendations may currently be specified within the
Special Inspection Section or can be modified to meet a unique inspection requirements.
(1) Contact HoneyweII T53 Customer Support Engineering for inspection recommendations.
(2) Provide as much detailed information as possible describing the incident and current condition
of the engine.
H. Oil Sample Analysis
The oil sample analysis program provides a procedure for taking samples, testing, and spectrometric
analysis of engine lubricating oil. This program will minimize engine deterioration due to oil contami-
nation, maximize time between oil changes and can provide an advance warning of an excessive
wear condition of an engine component or components.
(1) Take oil sample as follows:
(a) On newly installed engines or modules, after engine has run approximately 1 hour.
(b) On engines which have bad oil changed, after engine has run 15 minutes minimum.
Page 624
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENA_NCE^MANUAL
NOTE: Sample must be taken within 15 minutes of shut down and before
addition of any new oil. Do not allow sample to become contami-
nated.
{c) Shut down engine and using a olean dry sample bottie, immediately take oil sample from
oil tank to 1 to 1 -1/2 inches (25.3 to 38.1 mm) from bottom of tank. Be carefui not to
touch stdes or bottom of tank to prevent contamination.
(2) Perform oil sample test as follows:
NOTE: If Gerin test kit or equivalent is not available, analysis by a

reputabie oil laboratory is acceptable.
When an oil change has been completed, the engine shall be run
for 15 minutes minimum and an oil sample shall be taken for anal-
ysis. Analysis results will establish baseline acidity, viscosity and
flash point data for oil sample analysis program.
(a) Using Gerin Turbo-Lube test kit V-3A or equivalent, test oil sample using procedure
provided by oil analysis equipment manufacturer.
(b) Change oil if limits are exceeded. Limils are as follows:
NOTE: If oil viscosity decreased by 2 centistokes or 10 percent of

new oil valué, check for fuel in oil by determining oil flash
poínt.
1 Kinematic viscosity or Gerin viscosity at lOO^F {38”C) shall be -i-25 percent to -10
percent that of new oil value.
2 Total Acid Number (TAN) shall be 1.0 milligram potassium hydroxide per gram (KOH/
mg/g) of oil máximum.
3 Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cup (COC) shall be 400°F (205°C) minimum for Type I
oil or 475^F (245^C) minimum for Type II oil.
(3) Perform spectrometric oil analysis as follows:
NOTE: To avoid analysis variations due to test equipment and technique

differences, oniy one laboratory should be used.
(a) Send oil sample to a laboratory capable of emission or atomic absorption testing for parts
per million (ppm) of Silicon (Si) and the following wear metáis: Aluminum (Al), Chromium
(Cr), Copper (Cu), Iron (Fe), Magnesium (Mg). Nickel (Ni), Silver (Ag) and Titanium (Ti).
Page 625
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CAUTION: WEAR METAL IS NORMALLY GENERATED AT A SLOW STEADY

RATE. SUCCESSIVE OIL SAMELES SHOULD SHOW A TRENO OF
INCREASING WEAR METAL CONTENT. A SUDDEN JUMP OR
INCREASE IN WEAR METAL CONTENT BETWEEN SUCCESSIVE
OIL SAMPLES INDICATES AN ACCELERATED WEAR RATE.
AFTER
CONFIRMATION OF AN ACCELERATED WEAR RATE, THE
CAUSE
SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY ÍDENTIFIED AND CORRECTED.
ALLOWING ACCELERATED WEAR TO CONTINUE MAY RESULT
IN
FAILURE OF AN ENGINE COMPONENT.
(b) Evalúate laboratory reporte for wear metal buildup trends from one sample to another.
{See Figure 602.)
(c) If an abnormal increase in wear metal is noted, immediately take another oil sample and
forward to laboratory for verification of increase.
NOTE: If possible, do not add oil, as addition of new oil will mask wear
metal increase and confuse the sampling program.
(d) If increase is verified. change oil sample interval to every 10 operating hours. (see step
(h) for probable source areas)
(e) Immediately inspect filters and chip detector. Send any debris to laboratory for analysis of
material. (See Table 601 for probable source areas.)
(f) Use borescope, if avalladle, to detect oil wetted part distress. For aid in determining loca-
tion of distress, contad the following, giving as many details as possible.

Honeywell Engines
RO, Box 52181
Page 626
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NORMAL TRENO
PPM
SAMPL E INT ERVALS/O PERATING HO URS
XA 738-422
Wear Metal Trend (Example)

Figure 602
Page 627
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(g) If wear metal shows no increase during two 10 hour intervals, and does not greatly ex-
ceed the guidelines, sampiing intervat may be increased back to 100 hours. Guidelines
are as follows:
NOTE: Wear metal guidelines in general are not go no go criteria. They are
established just below the level of wear metal content determined to be
abnormai based on past experience. The wear metal guideline is that
level of wear metal content at which an engine is considerad suspect
and must be checked. It is not the absolute point at which the engine
or module must be removed. These wear metal guidelines have been
established based upon experience with a limited number of engines.
Each operator is asked to assist in vaiidating these guidelines by for-
warding a copy of each laboratory report to:

HoneyweII Engines
RO. Box 52181
Attention; Manager, Customer Support Engineering
Please inciude any maintenance actions performed to corred excessive

wear metal content.
Normal Wear Range Guideline
Wear Metal Parts per million foom! bv weiaht
Aluminum (Al) 0-10
Chromium (Cr) 0-5
Copper (Cu) 0-8
Iron (Fe) 0-13
Magnesium (Mg) 0-10
Nickel (Ni) ir
Silicon (Si) «
Silver (Ag) 0-3
Titanium (Ti)
•Report oniy - no guideline established.
(h) Wear metal sources for use on determinmg maintenance action requirements or checks
are as follows:
1 Aluminum - oil pump.
2 Chromium - power turbine shaft (Refer to Iron).
3 Copper - bearing cages or oil pump.
4 Iron - gears, bearings, bearing liners, oil pump.
5 Magnesium - Gearbox, paint.
Page 628
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
6 Nickel - (Refer to Iron).
7 Silver - bearing cages.
S Tltanium - support structures, paint, No. 2 bearing housing.

NOTE: Wear metal guidelines in general are not go no go criteria. They
are established just below the level of wear metal content deter-
mined to be abnormal based on past experience. The wear metal
guideline is that leve! oí wear metal content at which an engine is
considered suspect and must be checked. It is not the absolute
point at which the engine or module must be removed. These
wear metal guidelines have been established based upon
experience with a limited number oí engines. Each operator is
asked to assist in validating these guidelines by lorwarding a copy
oí each laboratory report to;
HoneyweII Engines
PO. Box 52181 Box 34-77
Please inelude any maintenance actions performed to correct excessive

wear metal content.
(i) Inspection oí the Fuel Control (Every 1000 Hours}
1 Disconnect aft end of P1 pressure sense Une 1 -300-135-XX from unión

AN815-4D on luel regutator.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE MEASURING STiCK IS CLEAN SO THE

SILICONE OIL DOES NOT BECOME CONTAMINATED.
2 Use a deán measuring stick to determine if the süicone oil level is no lower than 3.5
inches below the P1 fitíing boss.
3 If oil level is lower than 3.5 inches, refer to Servicing the fuel control lor instructions
on adding süicone oil to the proper level.
4 Reconnect aft end oí P1 pressure sense line 1 -300-135-XX to unión AN815-4D

on fuel regulator.
(j) Starter Gear Orive Spiine Inspection (Every 300 Hours)
Page 629
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
WARNING: AVOID PROLONGED INHALATION OF SOLVENT

VAPORS. WEAR RUBBER GLOVES AND USE HAND
CREAM TO PREVEN! CONTACT WITH SKIN. DO NO!
HEAT SOLUTION.
1 Remove oíd lubricant from spiines using df7 cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table
203).
2 Inspect gearbox (female) spiine for excessive wear. It wear (indicated by step)
exceeds one half the spiine width, replace the starter drive gear and bearings
(72-60-01).
NOTE: Whenever the starter generator drive gear is replaced, both

bearings must be replaced.
Radial movement can be detected by placing the starter

generator vertically on a work surface and tapping the spiine
with a mallet.
3 Inspect for radial freedom of starter generator spiine. The total radial movement of
the spiine shall be a minimum of 0.1875 inch (0.4763 cm). Reject the starter when
the spiine is frozen or fails to move the required distance.
4 Lubrícate spiines with Plastilube Moly No. 3 or ML7 plus 2 spiine lubricant
(72-00-00, 45, Table 203).
(k) Fuel Manifolds Inspection (Every 600 ±25 Hours).
1 Remove fuel manifolds (73-10-02).
2 Olean fuel manifolds (73-10-02).
3 Inspect fuel manifolds (73-10-02).

4 Perform flow check in accordance with Overhaul Manual Report No. 290.3.
73- 10-02.
NOTE: If manifoid is repaired. perform flow check.
5 Repair as necessary.
Page 630
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
Table 601- Basic Engine Diagnostics For Oí! Wetted Components
Material Application Parts
SAE52100 Bearings Positions: 1,4, 5-21,25, 26, 29-38, 44

M-50 Bearings Positions: 2, 3. 40, 43, 45
SAE9310 Gears
Overspeed governor dnve, tachometer dnve,
AGB tachometer drive, air/oil separator, oil
pump drive, fuel control dnve, output reduc-
tion, lower overspeed governor, accessory
drive. sun, planet, output shaft, tachometer
drive
Nitralloy 135 Mod Gearshaft Output
SAE4130 Steel Retainer Bearing
SAE4140 Steel Gearshaft Tachometer drive
Faceplate Ring gear support
Retainer Power shaft bearing
Liner Bearing
SAE4340 Steel Carriers Reduction gear

321 Stainless Oil Tubes
Drain diffuser, inlet supply, compressor front
bearing transfer.
SAE1010 Steel Bearing Cages Positions: 11, 12, 14, 15, 29, 30, 35-38
AMS4616 Bearing Cages Positions: 1 -4, 44
M3900 Bearing Cages Positions, 7, 9, 10, 40, 42, 43, 45
M3905 Bearing Cages Positions: 8, 13, 16-18, 25, 26, 31-34
Page 631/632
72-00 UU sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ENGINE - CLEANING
1. Cieaning - Introduction
A. General
This section contains instructions for appropriate cieaning of engine installed in the aircraft. Included
are procedures for cieaning and presen/ing the compressor blades and vanes.
2. Cieaning and Preservation of Compressor
A. General
NOTE: Engines removed from an aircraft which has Peen involved in an accident in
which engine failure or malfunction is known or suspected to have been a
factor, should not be preserved until all investigations have been performed.
(1) Compressor shait be cleaned if buildup of dirt, oil or grease is found on engine mlet or com-
pressor rotor blades whenever engine performance decreases excessively; to remove dirt and
oíl (see paragraph 2.D.j: daiíy wên operafing within 200 miles downwínd of voicanic activity or
in a salt laden atmosphere (10 miles inland from or within 1000 feet above surface of a body of
sait water) (see paragraph 2.E.); or when bromochioromethane (CB) has been used as a fire
extinguishing agent (see paragraph 2.F.).
(2) Compressor shall be preserved after cieaning and whenever engine is to be idle for three or
more days.
B. Precautions
(1) The following precautions shall be observad;
(a) Following engine shutdown, wait 45 minutes or allow the EGT to decrease to 400'T
(204=C)- Spraying cieaning fluid in the compressor while the metal temperatura is too
high will cause clearances to decrease with a possibílity of metal to metal interference.
EGT cooling may be assisted by motoring the engine. Starter limits are to be obsen/ed
during engine motoring.
(al) The following procedure may be applied when internal cieaning is desired during a
mission or at the completion of a mission and a 1 hour cool down period is not possíbíe.
1 Opérate engine at idle for a mínimum of 2 minutes to allow EGT to stabilize.
2 Shut down engine.

NOTE: The engine may have to be motored several times, within
starter limitations to make sure that engine temperature has
stabilized at 400'’F (204°C) or iower.
3 Motor engine after coasldown with starter motor to Iower temperature indication to a
stable 400°F (204''C) or Iower.
Page 701
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(b) At an ambient temperature below 35"’F (2^C), use anti detonating injection (ADI) fluid
(72-00-00, 6, Table 203) or a 40 percent methanol (72-00-00, 48, Table 203) Grade A
or B, and 60 percent water mixture, in lieu of fresh water, to prevent freezing.
(c) When using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203), perform the followlng;
1 Place a heat resistan! nonconducttve sheet between starter generator and bleed
band ports to preelude possibility of Igniting solvent that may drip from air bleed
ports onto starter generator.
2 Cover alr bleed actuator wlth a plástic bag or sultable substitute to prevent contami-
nation of bleed band actuator O-rings.
(d) Aliow water soluble cleaner (72-00-00, 12, Table 203) cleaning compound (72-00-00,
17, Table 203) or dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) lo stand in engine for
no more than 1-1/2 hours prior to spraying with fresh water.
C. Precleaning Procedures
(1) Prior to compressor cleaning operations, perform the following:
(a) Remove all air intake components, including upper and lower halves of particle separator,
if installed,
(b) Disconnect P3 tiñe at air diffuser and install a cap on fitting.
(c) If a source of olean compressed air is avalladle, engine bleed band can be closed to
permit more thorough cleaning of centnfugal compressor stage and to preelude cleaning
solution from spraying out air bleed ports.
1 Disconnect fuel control to interstage bleed actuator air pressure hose (2, Figure 12)
from fuel control to interstage bleed actuator (3) at unión. Cap unión with cap
AN929-4.
2 Connect a source of metered (5 to 15 psig) compressed air diffuser to interstage

bleed actuator air pressure hose (4) from air diffuser to interstage bleed actuator (3)
using unión AN815-6 or similar attachment.
NOTE: When air pressure is applied, actuator should cióse bleed

band. Leave bleed band closed and proceed with engine
cleaning,
2 Supply 30 to 40 psi pressure to cióse bleed band.
4 Cover Ti port In Inlet housing with masking tape.
(d) Disconnect Pi pressure sensing iine to fuel control at inlet housing and cap iine fitting.
(e) Prior to motoring engine, perform the following:
1 Pulí Ignltlon/start fuel Circuit breaker.
2 Use external power if available: if not, use aircraft battery.
Page 702
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
l■OllCywVdl T53-L-703
3 Make sure that fuel valve is in OFF position,
NOTE: DC Power must remain on to opérate anti-icing solenoid

during cleaning and preservation of engine. Do not exceed
starter limits.
4 Make sure that anti-icing switch is in OFF position.
D. Cleaning Compressor to Remove Dirt and Oil
(1) Clean compressor or dirt and oil as follows:
(a) Using a soft cloth moistened with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62,Table 203) swab
air inlet area and ¡niet guide vanes.
NOTE: Use of anything but a fiber brush could cause damage to the
compressor blades that would require biade replacement.
(b) Use a stiff fiber (not wire) brush to loosen hard packed or caked dirt.
(c) Repeat previous step (a).
(d) Rinse air inlet area and inlet guide vanes with water and reinspect, If signs of
contaminants are present, repeat previous steps (a) and (b) and rerinse.
(e) Clean temperatura sensing element on inlet housing using dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203). {Refer to SPM 70-15-03, SP C203.)
NOTE: Dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) may be more
effective for removing certain contaminants. Use approximately 2
pints in lieu of cleaning solution while motoring engine.
(f) Using pressure spray equipment, apply cleaning solution comphsed of ene part water
soluble cleaner (72-00-00, 12,Table 203) or cleaning compound (72-00-00, 17, Table
203) and four parts olear, fresh water as follows:
NOTE: Water used to clean engine should approximate the followmg

criteria (portable water);
Appearance Free of visible impurities

Total Solids 175 PPM máximum
PH Valué 6.0 to 8.0
Chlorides 200 PPM máximum
Sulfates 200 PPM máximum
Bromine 0.2 PPM máximum
1 Adjust spray nozzle to discharge a flow of 2-1/2 gallons of cleaning solution per
minute.
Page 703
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
NOTE: The 40 second moloring time will allow one half o< the 2-1/2
gallons of cleaning solution to be sprayed into engine without
exceeding starter limitation.
2 With ignition off, motor engine (see 71-00-00, paragraph 5.) for 40 seconds while
sprayrng cíeaning solc/tion evenly into inlet housing. Direc! spray completely around
engine inlet housing to make sure of uniform application to ali compressor vanes and
blades.
3 Allow solution to stand for a mínimum of 15 minutes to loosen dirt.
NOTE: Several spray applications may be required to use up

remaíning cleaning solution with drying out rate govemmg
exact time intervat between applications.
4 With engine static, spray inlet housing struts and areas leading to compressor
section with remaining cleaning solution.
(g) Using pressure spray equipment, apply deán, fresh water as follows:
1 Adjust spray nozzle to discharge a flow of 2-1/2 gallons of water in 40 seconds.
NOTE: The 40 second motoring time will allow a minimum of 2-1/2

gallons of water to be sprayed into engine without exceeding
starter límitations,
2 With ign/t/on off, motor engine for 40 seconds while spraying water evenly around
engine inlet area.
(h) Inspect compressor for deanliness, repeat cleaning procedure if necessary.
(i) Run engine at Fiight Idle with Antt-lcing switch ON for a period of 2 to 5 minutes to dry.
CAUTION: PRESERVE COMPRESSOR BY APPLYiNG RUST INHIBlTOR

AND PRESERVATIVE. MAKE SURE ENGINE IS COOL
BE-
FORE APPLYING.
0) Remove protective caps and covers, olean ports and reconnect Unes and hoses.
(k) Clean and reinstall air intake components.
E. Clean Compressor to Remove Sait Deposits
(1) Clean compressor of saIt deposits as follows:

(a) With ignition off, motor engine for 40 seconds while directing a stream of clean, fresh
water evenly into inlet housing at a máximum rate of 5 gallons per minute. Direct stream
completely around engine inlet housing to make sure of uniform application to all
compressor vanes and blades.
Page 704
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII M"N™NCEMANUA.
NOTE: Water used to clean engine should approximate the following
criteria (portable water):
Appearance Free of visible Impuritles

Total Sollds 175 PPM máximum
PH Valué 6.0 to 8-0
Chiorides 200 PPM máximum
Sutlates 200 PPM máximum
Bromine 0.2 PPM máximum
(b) Using clean, fresh water, wash exterior of engine.
(c) Inspect compressor tor cleanliness; repeat cleaning procedure if necessary.
(d) Run engine at Flight Idle with Anti-lcing switch ON for a period of 2 to 5 minutes to dry.
(e) Remove protective caps and covers. clean ports and reconnect Unes and hoses.
(f) Clean and reinstall air intake components.
F- Cleaning Compressor After Use of Bromochloromethane (CB) Fire Extinguishing Agent

WARNING: AVOID INHALTvTlON OF CB FUMES. IF CB CONTACTS SKIN OR EYES,
IMMEDIATELY FLUSH WITH RUNNING WATER; THEN WASH THOR-
OUGHLY WITH SOAP AND WATER.
CAUTÍON: FIRE EXTINGUISHING AGENT BROMOCHLOROMETHANE (CB) IS A

TOXIC. CORROSIVE AGENT AND DILUTION WITH WATER INCREASES
ITS CORROSIVE EFFECT ON METAL. IF ENGINE HAS BEEN SUB-
JECTED TO CB, ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL TO AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE
AND PURGE EXPOSED ENGINE AND AIRCRAFT SURFACES WITH
CLEAN, DRY AIR AND WASH WITH DRY CLEANING SOLVENT
(72-00-00. 62, TABLE 203),
(1) Clean compressor of fire extinguishing agent as foliows:
CAUTION: A CLOGGED COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVE/LINE MAY

CAUSE PUDDLING OF SOLVENT IN COMBUSTION CHAMBER,
CAUSING HOT STARTS.
(a) Motor engine with starter, and spray a minimum of 1 pint of dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203) evenly through all sections of inlet housing.
(b) Let engine stand for 1 hour mínimum to permit solvent to neutraliza CB agent.
(c) Preserve compressor. (See paragraph 2.G.)
(d) Remove protective caps and covers, clean ports and reconnect Unes and hoses.
(e) Clean and reinstall air intake componente.
Page 705
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII M"NT«MANUAL
G. Preservation of Compressor
(1) Preserve compressor on motorable engines as follows:
CAUTION: MAKE SUPE ENGINE IS COOL ENOUGH, BELOW 204 F (95X), TO

PREVEN! AUTOIGNITION.
(a) Motor engine while appiying rust inhibitor and preservative (72-00-00, 59, Table 203) for
10 seconds. Direct spray through inlet housing onto rotating compressor blades. Spray
from base to típ of blades to ensure material covers entire blade on both sides.
(b) Remove caps from P3 line, air diffuser and inlet housing connections. Reconnect hoses
previously disconnected.
(c) Disconnect external power from aircraft, if used.
(d) Reengage ignition/start fuel Circuit breaker.
(2) Preserve compressor on nonmotorable engines as follows:

NOTE: Every effort should be made to apply preservative while motoring
engine; this ensures deeper penetration of mist.
(a) Apply preser^íative compound for 30 seconds.
(b) Direct spray into all areas between inlet housing struts and evenly onto all compressor
blades.
Page 706
72-00-00 Sept 30/02
I
HoneyweII -«NT^MANUAL
OUTPUT REOUCTíQN CARRÍER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY AND SUN GEARSHAFT -
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1- Description and Operation
The ouíput reduction carrier and gear assembly is mounted al Ihe front of the iniei housing. It consista of
the support housing, carrier assembly, three planet reduction gear assemblies, a torquemeter, and power
output gearshatt- The assembly is dnven by the sun gearshaft spiined to the power shaft, The sun gear-
shatt drives the three helical planet reduction gears mounted in the carrier and gear assembly. The reduc
tion gears drive the power output gearshaft. The rear píate of the torquemeter (the pistón) is attached to
the carrier.
Page 1/2
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII «AiNiENmANUAL
OUTPUT REDUCTION CARRIER AND GFAR ARSFMRLY AND SUN GEARSHAFT -
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Reolacement of OutDul Gearshaft Seal
A. Replace Output Gearshaft Seal Whenever Seal Damage is Suspected (See 72-00-00 ENGINE -
TROUBLE SHOOTING. 26, 101.)
(1) Cut and remove lockwire from bolts {1, Figure 201). Remove bolts.
(2) Using three bolts as pullers, remove seal housing assembly (2),
(3) Remove spacer (7) and packing (6). Discard packing and retain spacer lor reassembiy.
(4) Using fiber drift and soft faced mallet or suitable sieeve and arbor press, remove seal (5) from
retainer (3).
(5) Remove packing (4). Discard packing and seal (5).
(6) Install new packing (4) in retainer (3),
NOTE: Use care. Do not scrafch or depress seal (5). Make sure seal is deán.
(7) Using an arbor press and instaliation and removal tool LTCT3638, install new seal (5) in relamer (3).
(8) Remove faceplate (8) and packing (9) from output gearshaft. Discard packing and faceplate.
NOTE: Use care. Do not scratch faceplate.
(9) Install new packing (9) and new faceplate (8). Position faceplate on output gearshaft.
NOTE: If original seal housing {2) is used, proceed as indicated in step (11). 11
seal housing is replaced, proceed as indicated in stops (12) and (13).
(10) Position new packing (6) on seal housmg assembly (2).
(11) Position original spacer (7) removed in step (3) in output reduction carrier and gear assembly
(10) .
Page 201
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. BOLT 7, SPACER
2. SEAL HOUSING ASSEMBLY 8. FACEPLATE
3. RETAINER 9. PACKING
4. PACKING 10. OUTPUT REDUCTION
5. SEAL CARRIER
AND GEAR ASSEMBLY
Output Gearshaft Seal Replacement

Figure 201
Page 202
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
(12) Calcúlate thickness ot spacer (7) (see Figures 201 and 202) as follows;
CAUTIQN: MAKE SURE BEARING OUTER RACE (2) IS BOTTOMED IN

LINER (3).
(a) Using a depth micrometer, measure from face of bearing liner (3) to bearing cúter race (2)
to determine Dimensión A.
(b) Using a depth micrometer, measure from !ip of seal retainer (1) to rear surface of seal
retainer flange to determine Dimensión B.
(c) Subtract Dimensión B from Dimensión A, and add 0.0045 inch. Result will be thickness of
spacer required. Select proper spacer part number from Table 201.
Table 201. Spacer Thickness
Part Number Shim Thickness
1-030-212-01 0.035 ío 0.037 inch
1-030-212-02 0.038 to 0.040 inch
1-030-212-03 0.041 to 0.043 inch
1-030-212-04 0.044 to 0.046 inch
(13) Position spacer (7, Figure 201) of thickness determinad in proceeding step (12) (c), in output
reduction carrier and gear assembly (10).
(14) Position seal housing assembly (2) on output reduction carrier and gear assembly (10) and
secure with bolts (1). Lockwire bolts.
2. Removal/Installation Outout Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly and Sun Gearshaft
A. Remove Output Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly and Sun Gearshaft
(1) Straighten tabwashers (2, Figure 203) and remove bolts (1) and tabwashers from each oil
transfer tube (3).
(2) Insert bolt with 1/4-28 thread into One oil transfer tube (3) at a time and pulí oil transfer tube
from output reduction carrier and gear assembly. Remove two remaining oil transfer tubes.
Remove strainer (4) and packings (5, 6) from each oil transfer tube (3).
Page 203
72-10-01 Sept
30/0
2
HoneyweII
1(A-1338-172
1. SEALRETAINER 3. LINER
2. BEARING
Determining Bearing Finch Fit and Spacer Thickness

Figure 202
Page 204
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
Honejiweil MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
Cl X
CC
til
Output Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly, Sun Gearshaft

Figure 203
Page 205
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 203
1. BOLT 10. OUTPUT REDUCTION

2. TAB WASHER CARRIER
AND GEAR ASSEMBLY
3. OIL TRANSFER TUBE 11. PACKING
4. STRAINER 12. SEAL RING
5. PACKING 13. SEAL RING
6. PACKING 14. PACKING
7. NUT 15. SUN GEARSHAFT
8. WASHER 16. WASHER
9. SPACER 17. BOLT RETAINER
18. BOLT
Page 206
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(3) Remove 24 nuts (7), washers (8) and spacers (9).
(4) Thread lifting 1i)dure LTCT4182 into plug.
(5) Thread puller screws (part of LTCT4182) into housing and tighten screws evenly.
(6) Using overhead hoist attached to lifting fixlure LTCT4182, remove output reduction carrier and
gear assembly (10). Remove packing (11) and seal rings (12, 13).
(7) Remove lifting fixture.
(8) Position sun gear holding fixture LTCT2075 on studs of inlet housing with splines meshed with
sun gearshaft (15). Secure with four nuts.
(9) Using tool set LTCT509, hand tighten center rod of tool set into sun gear bolt. Back otf one
quarter turn and inserí alien wrench into center rod and hold. Align and engage tool set tabs in
Slot of bolt. Turn handie clockwise to straighten tabs of bolt retainer (17).
NOTE: When removing wrench, the bolt and retainer will be attached.
(10) Using driver wrench LTCT258, remove bolt (18), bolt retainer (17) and convex washer (16).
(11) Hold sun gearshaft (15) and remove sun gear holding fixture from inlet housing.
(12) Remove sun gearshaft and packing (14).
B- Instan Output Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly and Sun Gearshaft
(1) Instan packing (14, Figure 203) on OD of spur gear on power shaft.
(2) Place sun gearshaft carefully over power shaft and press end of sun gearshaft over packing
(14) .
(3) Position sun gear holding fixture LTCT2075 on studs of inlet housing with splines meshed with
sun gearshaft.
NOTE: Make sure washer 1 -030-138-04 is instailed. Make sure conical
surface of washer faces forward end of engine.
(4) Instan washer (16) through sun gearshaft into power shaft.
Page 207
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Do not lubrícate bolt. Make sure tangs on bolt retainer engage Slot in
power shaft.
(5) Using guide LTCT4602, install bolt retainer (17) through sun gearshaft into power shaft. Secure
bolt retainer and washer (16) to power shaft with bolt (18).
(6) Using driver wrench LTCT250, tighten bolt (18) 600 to 720 inch-pounds torque. Do not lock
bolt at this time.
NOTE: Push forward on power turbine through exhaust diffuser whi/e taking
reading to make sure that movement measured does not incluOe move-
ment of power turbine bearing.
(7) Using dial indicator, check end play of sun gearshaft. End play shall be 0.020 to 0.046 inch.
(8) If axial movement is not within limits, check tang engagement or install new bolt retainer or
washer. Recheck axial movement.
CAUTIQN: DO NOT SHEAR BOLT RETAINER.
(9) Using tool set LTCT509, hand tighten center rod of tool set into sun gear bolt. Back off one
quarter turn and insert Alien wrench into center rod and hold. Align and engage tool set tabs in
Slot of bolt. Turn handie clockwise to deform tabs of bolt retainer.
(10) Remove sun gear holding fixture from inlet housing.
(11) Install Seal rings (12, 13) into torquemeter cyfinder. Check for 0.004 inch mínimum end gap on
Seal rings (12, 13) in the installed position in torquemeter cylinder. Remove seal rings.
(12) Install new packing (11) on output reduction carrier and gear assembly (10).
(13) Install seal rings (12, 13) in appropriate grooves of rear torquemeter píate.
(14) Thread Irfting fixture LTCT4182 into plug.

CAUTIQN: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO GEAR TEETH, MESH GEARS
CAREFULLY
(15) Attach overhead hoist to lifting fixture and position output reduction carrier and gear assembly
(10) onto inlet housing.
NOTE: Do not lubrícate nuts or studs. Position end of spacer with chamfered
ID against housing.
(16) Secure output reduction carrier and gear assembly with 24 spacers (9), washers (8) and nuts
(7) . Tighten nuts 70 to 80 inch-pounds torque.
(17) Remove installation tool.
(18) Install strainer (4) and packings (5, 6) on each oil transfer tube (3) and install tubes into output
reduction carrier and gear assembly. Secure each oil transfer tube with tab washer (2) and
bolts (1). Tghten bolts as required and secure by bending one tab against fíat of bolt and one
tab into hole provided in oil transfer tube.
Page 208
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
Honeyivell MA,NTENANCEMANUAL
3. Insoection/Check Outout Reduction Carrier and Gear Assemblv and Sun Gearshaft
NOTE: Do not disassemble output reduction carrier and gear assembiy to perform
visual inspection of gears. Do not olean gears prior to inspection. Rotate
gears to make sure complete inspection of all teeth. Use a 3 power magnify-
ing glass, pencil flashiight and a mechanics mirror.
A. Inspect Output Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly and Sun Gearsbatt
(1) Inspect all parts for nicks, burrs and scratches.
(2) Inspect all threaded parts for damaged threads.
(3) Visually inspect all parts for cracks, distortion and excessive wear.
(4) Inspect housing assembly for damaged screw thread inserts.
(5) Inspect strainers in oil transfer tubes (3, Figure 203) for clogging, cuts and dents.
CAUTION: IF A PLANET OR OUTPUT GEAR IS FOUND UNACCEPTABLE
BECAUSE OF A SURFACE CONDITION, REDUCTION
GEAR
ASSEMBLY SHALL BE REPLACED.
NOTE: A break-in coating of silver plating was introduced to the Output Gear
Part No. 1-030-191-14 and Planet Gear Parí No. 1-030-193-05. The
coating may wear away in a very short time and/or be displaced to non-
contact areas of the output and planet gears. such as the tips of the
gear teeth. This is normal and such not be cause for rejection.
(6) Visually Inspect sun gearshaft (19), three planet gearshafts and output gearshaft for conditions
listed in Table 202. (See Figure 204.)
Page 209
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Table 202. Gear Inspection of Output Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly
Nomenclature Scoring Frosting Pitting Spalling Cracking
Light pitting All

Heiical Light and All frosting Spalling is
is acceptable. cracking
Planet médium scoring is acceptable. unacceptable.
Médium and is
Gearshafl is acceptable. (See Figure (See Figure
heavy pitting is unaccept-
(Primary) Heavy scoring 204.) 204.)
unacceptable. able.
is unacceptable.
(See Figure 204.)
Helical All frosting is Light pitting Spalling is All cracking
Planet Light and acceptable. is acceptable. unacceptable. IS
Gearshaft médium scoring (See Figure Médium and (See Figure unaccept-
(Secondary) is acceptable. 204.) heavy pitting is 204.) able.
Heavy scoring unacceptable.
is unacceptable.
{See Figure 204.)
Helical Light and All frosting is Spalling is All
Output médium scoring acceptable. Light pitting is cracking
unacceptable.
Gearshafl is acceptable. (See Figure acceptable. is
Heavy scoring 204.) (See Figure unaccept-
is unacceptable. 204.) Médium able.
(See Figure 204.) and heavy pit-
ting is unac-
ceptable.
Helical Light and All frosting Light pitting is Spalling is un- Al!
Sun médium scoring is acceptable. acceptable. cracking
acceptable.
Gearshafl is acceptable. (See Figure is
(See Figure
Heavy scoring 204.) unaccept-
204.) Médium
is unacceptable. able-
and heavy
(See Figure 204.) pitting is
unacceptable.
Page 210
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -Â'^TENANCE^^MANUAL
H: AV > MED' U M bCORlN C, LIG- IT SCOBiNf i
LIGHT PlTTl NG
XA-738-201B
Gear Inspection
Figure 204
Page2l1
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
4. Inspection and Renair Torauemeter Cvlinder and Valve
A. Inspect and Repair Torquemeter Cylinder and Valve

(1) Visually inspect torquemeter valve plunger {1, Figure 204A) torquemeter valve body (2) and oil
supply power takeotf nozzle assembly (3) for nicks, burrs and wear. Blend repair as outlined in
SPM, 70-25-01.
(2) Inspect torquemeter cylinder (4) for scoring and scratching on ID’s. Blend repair if sconng or
scratching is 0.015 inch deep or less. Replace cylinder If defect exceeds 0.015 inch deep.
5. Aporoved Repairs Outout Reduction Carrier and Gear Assemblv and Sun Gearshaft
A. Repair Output Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly and Sun Gearshaft
(1) Repair all threaded parts stripped or crossed threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP P409.}
Replace parts having threads damaged beyond repair.
(2) Blend repair nicks, burrs and scratches. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.)
(3) Replace all damaged parts.
CAUTIQN: IF A PLANET OR OUTPUT GEAR IS FOUND UNACCEPTABLE

BECAUSE OF A SURFACE CONDITiON, REDUCTION
GEAR
ASSEMBLY SHALL BE REPLACED.
(4) Replace reduction gear assembly and sun gearshaft that have unacceptable conditions.
B. Replace Forward Power Shaft Bearing
CAUTIQN: THIS PROCEDURE SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH ENGINE

INSTALLED IN A MAINTENANCE STAND CAPABLE OF
POSITIONING
ENGINE IN A VERTICAL NOSE DOWN ATTITUDE.
(1) Remove output reduction carrier and gear assembly and sun gear shaft. (See paragraph 2.)
(2) Remove olí transfer support assembly (1. Figure 205) as follows:
(a) Remove 12 bolts (7) and washers (6).
Page 212
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. TORQUEMETER VALVE 3. OIL SUPPLY POWER

PLUNGER TAKEOFF
2. TORQUEMETER VALVE BODY NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
4. TORQUEMETER CYLINDER
Torquemeter Parts
Figure 204A
Page 213
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NT«MANUAL
1. OIL TRANSFER SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 5. PACKIN

2. PACKING 6. G
WASHE
3. PACKING 7. R
BOLT
4. PACKING
Oil Transter Support Assembly and Attaching Parts

Figure 205
Page 214
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
(b) Instan three 1/4-20 thread puller screws, 3 inches long, into oil Iransfer support assembly
(1) and tighien screws evenly.
(c) Remove oil transfer support assembly (1) and packings (2, 3, 4, 5),
(d) Remove puller screws.
(3) Remove accessory drive gearbox assembly. (See 72-60-01.)
(4) Remove overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly. (See 72-60-02.)
(5) Remove accessory drive carrier assembly (1, Figure 206) as follows:
(a) Instan three machine bolts LTCT1429 or LTCT109 in face ot accessory drive carrier
assembly (1). Tighten machine boits evenly and remove accessory drive carrier
assembly.
(b) Remove machine bolts.
(c) Remove oil transfer tube (2) and packings (3).
(d) Remove packings (4, 5).
(6) Remove power shaft bearíng retainer {see Figure 207} as foílows:
(a) Using cup remover LTCT2021, remove gear (1).
(b) Remove ring (2).
(c) Straighten two tabwashers (4),

CAUTION: ENGINE SHALL BE POSITIONED IN VERTICAL, NOSE DOWN
ATTITUDE AND REMAIN THAT WAV UNTIL BOLTS (3, 5)
ARE
REINSTALLED.
(d) Remove bolts (3, 5) and tabwashers, and remove power shaft bearing retainer (6).
(7) Disassembíe power shaft bearing retainer (see Figure 208} as follows;
(a) Remove bolts (1} that secure píate (2} to retainer assembly (4). Remove píate.
Page 2i5
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Ki
XÁ.73S-
1. ACCESSORY ORIVE CARRiER ASSEMBLY 4. PACKING

2. OIL TRANSFER TUBE 5. PACKING
3. PACKING
Accessory Orive Carrier Assembly

Figure 206
Page216
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1, GEAR 5. BOLT
2, RING 6. POWER SHAFT BEARING
RETAINER
3. BOLT 7. POWER SHAFT
4. TABWASHER
Power Shatt Bearing Retainer

Figure 207
Page 217
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. BOLT 3. ROLLER BEARING

2. CLAMPING PLATE 4, RETAINER
ASSEMBLY
Power Shaft Bearing Retainer

Figure 208
Page 218
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
(b) Using suitable sieeve and arbor press, press bearing (3) from retainer assembly (4).
(8) Reassemble power shaft bearing retainer as follows;
(a) Place retamer assembly (4) on a bench, large end down.
(b) Press bearing (3) inio bearing retainer assembly and seat firmiy.
(c) Measure from edge of bearing retainer assembly down to bearing outer race and record
depth measurement.
(d) Select píate (2) with hub height that will provide 0.001 to 0.0035 inch pinch on bearing.
(e) Instan píate and secure with three bolts (1). Tighten bolts 40 to 45 inch-pounds torque
and lockwire.
(9} Instan power shaft bearing retainer (see Figure 207) as foílows.-
(a) Prior to bearing retainer installation, inspect bearing journal of powershaft for indenting,
wear track or corrosión pitting. Limits are as follows:
1 Indenting and wear track are unacceptable it they can be detectad with a 0.040 inch
radius scribe.
2 Corrosión pitting is unacceptable if it can be detected with a 0.020 inch radius scribe.
3 If limits are exceeded, forward engine to an Honeyweil approved Service Center.
(b) Prior to bearing retainer installation apply shortening (72-00-00, 38, Table 203) to
bearing and using installation tool LTCT14773, slide power shaft bearing retainer (6) onto
power shaft (7). Using a mallet, position retainer in inlet housing with cutouts for
accessory dnve driven gears in corred position,
NOTE: Do not lubrícate bolts.
(c) Instan four bolts (3) and two tabwashers (4) with two bolts (5). Tighten bolts 70 to 95
inch-pounds torque.
(d) Lock tabwashers on two bolts. Lockwire four bolts.
(e) Instan retaining ring (2) in groove on power shaft.
WARNING- TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL. TEMPERATURE

RESISTANT GLOVES MUST BE WORN.
(f) Heat gear in oven for 30 minutes at 300 to 400^F (149 to 204^C). Place gear on
installation tool LTCT4576. Remove gear from oven and quickiy install on power shaft
spiine, seating it firmiy over retaining ring. If combustor turbine assembly ís not instaded,
power shaft must be pressed forward from aft end of engine.
(g) After installation of gear (1), measure from forward face of power shaft (7) to fonward face
ofgear(l). Dimensión shall be 2.020 to 2.040 inches. (See Figure 209.)
Page 219
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Gearto Power Shaft - Installation Dimensión

Figure 209
Page 220
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ^-AINTENANCEMANUAL
(10) Instan accessory drive carrier assembly (see Figure 206) as follows:
(a) Instan two packings (4) and one packing (5) on inlet housing.
(b) Install two packings (3) on oil transfertube (2) and install tube in accessory drive carrier
assembly.
NOTE: If accessory drive carrier assembly meets sudden resistance, do

not torce installation; remove carrier. inspect oil transfer tube for
damage, replace packing and repeat step (c). If pilot interterence
is encountered, dimensionally measure diameters and rework
carrier mounting flange if necessary.
During and after installation. use an inspection mirror and light

and check that spur gears are properly meshed and that tachom-
eter drive gear is in proper axial relationship wlth spur gear.
(c) Position accessory drive carrier assembly in inlet housing using care to assure oi) transfer
tube atignment and proper meshing of spur gear (1. Figure 207) and its mating tachome-
ter drive spur gear in the accessory Orive carrier assembly.
(11) Install overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly. (See 72-60-02.)
(12) Install accessory drive gearbox assembly. (See 72-60-01.)
(13) Install oil transfer support assembly (see Figure 205) as follows:
(a) Install packings (2, 3, 4, 5) on rim of accessory drive carrier assembly and on hm of oil
transfer support assembly.
(b) Position oil transfer support assembly (1) on flange of accessory drive carrier assembly
and secure wlth 12 bolts (7) and washers (6), Torque bolts as required. Lockwire bolts.
(14) Install output reduction carrier and gear assembly and sun gearshaft. (See paragraph 3.)
Page 221/222
72-10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAINT^MANUAL
TQRQUE METER CYLINDER AND TOROUEMETER VALVE ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
1. Description and Qoeration
The torquemeter valve assembly is Installed on the torquemeter cylinder. The assembly is used to check
pressure from accessory gearbox.
Page 1/2
72-10-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ‘Â.NTENAN^MANUAL
TORQUEMETER CYLINDER AND TORQUEMETER VAIVF ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/InstallatiQn Cvlinder and Torauemeter Valve Assemblv
A. Remove Torquemeter Cylinder and Torquemeter Valve Assembly
(1) Using installer and remover LTCT519 or socket (preferably 6 point), remove torquemeter valve
assembly (1, Figure 201) shim (2) from torquemeter cylinder (4).
(2) Remove 12 bolts (3) that secure torquemeter cylinder (4). Remove cylinder from miel housing
assembly.
B. Instan Torquemeter Cylinder and Torquemeter Valve Assembly
CAUTIDN: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN AS TRIS WILL CAUSE DISTORTION.

TORQUE TO PROPER SPECIFICATION.
(1) Instan torquemeter cylinder (4) and secure with bolts (3).
(2) Instan shim (2) on torquemeter valve assembly (1).

(3) Usmg installer and remover LTCT519 or socket (preferably 6 point) install torquemeter valve as-
sembly (1) into torquemeter cylinder. Tighten valve 150 to 200 inch pounds torque.
(4) Using depth micrometer or depth gage, measure dimensión from end of torquemeter cylinder
to forward face of mounting fiange (see Figure 202). If not within 0.265 to 0.275 inch, replace
cylinder.
(5) Using depth micrometer or depth gage, measure distance (Dimensión A, Figure 203) from for-
ward end of inlet housing torquemeter valve plunger and distance (Dimensión B) from forward
end of inlet housing to inner fiange of torquemeter cylinder.
NOTE: Dimensión C shall be within 0.030 to 0.034 inch. If this dimensión is not
within limits, remove torquemeter valve, shim as required and reinstall
valve and shim.
Subtract Dimensión A from Dimensión B to obtain Dimensión C.
(6) Lockwire torquemeter valve assembly.
Page 201
72-10-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
VA
1. TORQUEMETER VALVE ASSEMBLY 3. BOLT

2. SHIM 4. TORQUEMETER
CYLINDER
Torquemeter Cylinder and Torquemeter Valve Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
72-10-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII *Â,NTENANCEMANUAL
Torquemeter Cylinder Measurement

Figure 202
Page 203
72-10-02 Sept 30/02
r
T53-L-703
1. TORQUEMETER CYLINDER 3, TORQUEMETER VALVE

2. SHIM
Torquemeter Valve Location and Adjustment Diagram

Figure 203
Page 204
72-10-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
COMPRESSOR AND IMPELLER HQUSING ASSEMBLIES - DESCRIPTIQN AND OPERATION
Compressor and impeller housings each consist of two halves. Housings endose five-stage axial
compressor and single-stage centrifuga! compressor impeller of compressor rotor assembiy. Axial
compressor stator vane assemblies are bolted to compressor housing halves. An air-bleed actuator is
mounted on the right side of the impeller housing. An air-bleed connecting manifold and adapter
assembiy ducts bleed air from the diffuser housing to the inlet housing for anti-icing. Customer air is
available from this adapter assembiy.
Page 1/2
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MMNTENANCEMANUAL
COMPRESSOR AND IMPELLER HOUSING ASSFMBLIES - MAINTFNANCE PRACTICFS
1. Removal/lnstallation Compressor and Imoeller Housino Assemblies

CAUTION: ONLY ONE HALF OF COMPRESSOR AND IMPELLER HOUSING MAY BE
REMOVED ATA TIME.
A. Remove Compressor and Impeller Housing Assemblies
NOTE: When a bracket is released by removal of a bolt, secure boit, washer and nut
to bracket until ready for installation. To tacllitate installation of housings,
identify and mark position of all removed ítems.
(1) Remove Unes, hoses and accessories as necessary.
(2) Remove nuts (27, Figure 201) washers (26) and bolts (2) from four locating doweis (1) on
compressor housing assembly flanges.
(3) Using mechanical puller LTCT1218 remove four doweis (1).
(4) Remove 12 nuts (25), washers (24). bolts (4) and washers (3) that secure compressor housing
assembly upper half (8) to lower half (23).
(5) Remove 10 bolts (6) and washers (5) that secure compressor housing assembly half (8 or 23)
to inlet housing assembly.
(6) Remove one bolt (7) and eight bolts (18) and washers (17) or nine bolts (18) and nine washers
(17) that secure compressor housing assembly half (8 or 23) to impeller housing assembly hall
(11 or 22).
CAUTION: IMPELLER HOUSING ASSEMBLIES HAVE PILOT FLANGES THAT

FIT INTO COMPRESSOR AND DIFFUSER HOUSING ASSEMBLIES.
TO PREVENT DAMAGING THESE FLANGES DURING DISASSEM-
BLY, ALWAYS REMOVE COMPRESSOR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
HALF
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE IMPELLER HOUSING AS-
SEMBLY HALF.
(7) Using four 1/4-28 bolts, AN-4 or equivalent, as jackscrews, remove compressor housing
assembly half (8 or 23).
(8) Remove nuts (20), washers (21) and bolts (12) from two locating doweis (13) on impeller
housing assembly flanges.
(9) Using adapten LTCT6740 and mechanical puller LTCT1218, remove two doweis (13).
Page 201
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
Compressor and Impeller Housing Assemblies

Figure 201
Page 202
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. DOWEL 15, WASHER

2. BOLT 16, BOLT
3. WASHER 17, WASHER
4. BOLT 18, BOLT
5. WASHER 19. NUT
6. BOLT 20. NUT
7. BOLT 21. WASHER
8. COMPRESSOR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
UPPER HALF 22. IMPELLER HOUSING ASSEMBLY
9. BOLT LOWER HALF
10. WASHER 23. COMPRESSOR HOUSING
11. IMPELLER HOUSING ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
LOWER HALF
UPPER HALF 24. WASHER
12. BOLT 25. NUT
13. DOWEL 26, WASHER
14. BOLT 27. NUT
(10) Remove two nuts (19) and bolts (14) that secure impelier housing assembly upper hall (11)
lovver half (22).
(11) Remove two bolts (9), two washers (10), 10 bolts (16) and 10 washers (15) or 12 bolts (16) and
12 washers (15) that secure impelier housing assembly half (11 or 22} to diffuser housing
assembly.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW IMPELLER HOUSING ASSEMBLY HALF TO

STRIKE IMPELLER OR COMPRESSOR BLADES. SUCH
CONTACT
MAY DAMAGE BLADES OR INNER SURFACE OF HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
(12) Move impelier housing assembly half (11 or 22) toward inlet housing assembly; then lift and
remove.
B. Instan Compressor and Impelier Housing Assemblies
(1) Instan impelier housing assembly upper half (11, Figure 201) or lower half (22).
(2) Make sure that a gap of 0.010 inch minimum will exist between shroud ends of mating vane
assemblies after compressor housing installation. File shroud end. as required, to obtain clear-
ance and install compressor housing.
(3) Coat mating surfaces of compressor housing and impelier housing with non drying zinc chro-
mate seaiant (72-00-00, 75, Table 203). Install compressor housing assembly upper half (8)
or lower half (23). Install hollow doweis (1. 13) and secure upper and lower halves of impelier
and compressor housings with nuts (20, 27). washers (21,26) and bolts (2, 12). Tighten nuts
to 70 to 95 inch-pounds torque.
Page 203
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(4) Apply non drying sealant (refer to SPM, PJ26, SP P526) under bolts and install bolts (6) and
washers (5) ihat secura compressor housmg assembly half (8 or 23) to inlet housing assembiy.
(5) Position clips for air bieed band on proper bolts. Apply sealant under heads of bolts and nuts,
on both taces of washers and in bolt cavities. Install bolts (7, 18} and washers (17) that secure
compressor housing half (8 or 23} to impeller housing half (11 or 22). Tighten botts to proper
torque and lockwire. Atter assembly is completed, wipe off excess sealant with deán cloth
dampened in toluene (72-00-00, 66, Table 203).
NOTE: Position bracket for ignition unit under three bolts (16) at approximately
10 o’clock position.
(6) Install 12 bolts (9, 16) and washers (10, 15) that secure impeller housing assembly half (11 or
22) to air diffuser housing assembly (see Figure 202). Tghten bolts (9, 16, Figure 201} and
lockwire.
(7) Install bolts (14) and nuts (19) that secure upper and lower halves of impeller housing
assembly. Tighten bolts and lockwire.
(8) install bolts (4), washers (3, 24) and nuts (25) that secure upper and lower halves of
compressor housing assembly. Tighten bolts and lockwire.
(9) Make sure that all removed brackets have been reinstalled and install all removed lines, hoses
and accessories.
2. Disassembiv./Reassemblv Compressor Housing Assembly
NOTE: The procedure applies to either half of compressor housing assembly.
A. Disassemble Compressor Housing Assembly
(1) Place compressor housing assembly half on bench and secure to bench to prevent movement.
(2) Remove bolts (4, 5,14,16, Figure 203) and washers (3. 6, 15, 17) that secure first through
fourth stage compressor vane assemblies (8, 10. 11, 12). Remove vane assemblies.
(3) Remove two bolts (1) and bolt retainers (2) and three bolts and washers (19) that secure exit
guide vane assembly (13). Remove vane assembly.
B- Reassemble Compressor Housing Assembly
NOTE: Rematched stator vane assemblies shall meet all assembly requirements.
Halves of rematched stator shall have approximately the same degree of
foreign object damage or erosión, within established limits; an eroded stator
half shall not be rematched with a noneroded half.
(1) With removed half of compressor housing assembly on bench, reinsert first through fourth
stage compressor vane assemblies (8, 10, 11, 12, Figure 203) and exit guide vane assembly
(13) into their appropriate slots.
Page 204
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
INSTALL BOLTS ( MS9530 -13I

ANO W ASHERS (AN960 -416L)
IN TW O LOCATIONS MARKED A
Impeller Housing Bo!t Locations

Figure 202
Page 205
72-30-01 Sep! 30/02
T53-L-703
Compressor Housing Assembly

Figure 203
Page 206
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
KEY TO FIGURE 203
1. BOLT 11. THIRD STAGE COMPRESSOR VANE

2. BOLT RETAINER ASSEMBLY
3. WASHER 12. FOURTH STAGE COMPRESSOR
4, BOLT VANE
ASSEMBLY
5, BOLT 13. EXIT GUIDE VANE ASSEMBLY
6, WASHER 14. BOLT
7. UPPER COMPRESSOR HOUSING 15. WASHER
8. FIRST STAGE COMPRESSOR VANE 16. BOLT
ASSEMBLY 17. WASHER
9. LOWER COMPRESSOR HOUSING 18. BOLT
SECOND STAGE COMPRESSOR VANE 19. WASHER
10.
ASSEMBLY
Page 207
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(2) Secure compressor vanes to compressor housing half as follows:
(a) Tighten first through fourth stage vanes with bolts (4, 5, 14, 16), washers (3. 6, 15, 17).
Tighten center bolts 44 to 46 inch pounds torque. Tighten outside bolts 14 to 16 inch
pounds torque. (See Figure 204.)
(b) Tighten exit guide vane with bolts (18, 1, Figure 203), washers (19) and bolt retalners (2).
Tighten center bolts 44 to 46 inch pounds torque. Tighten outside bolts 14 to 16 inch
pounds torque. Tighten bolts (1) 30 to 40 pound inches torque (see Figure 204). Make
sure that a gap of 0.000 to 0.010 inch exists between the exit guide vane and the fifth
stage inserí. (See Figure 205.)
(3) Lockwire bolts and deform retainers into slot in cap screw and Slot in housing.
3. Insoection/Check Compressor and Imoeller Housino Assemblies
A. Inspect Compressor and Impeller Housing Assemblies
(1) Inspect compressor housing assembiy.
(a) Visually inspect for nicks and burrs. Repair.
(b) Visually inspect for foreign material deposite,
(c) Visually inspect for cracks. (Refer to SPM, 70-20-04, SP 1304.)

(d) Visually inspect housing halves for broken alignment ears. Replace Housing Return en-
gine to Honeyweil approved Service Center.
NOTE: If corrosión is present on the aft flange of the axial housing.

Return engine to authorized Service center or facility capadle of
installing the stainless Steel shim. (Refer to 72-09-30, Repair
Manual.)
(e) Visually inspect for corrosión. Repair,
(2) Inspect vane assemblies.
(a) Visually inspect for cracks. Cracks are not allowed other than in the vane to shroud
brazement; any number up to 1/8 inch ¡n length are acceptable.
(b) Visually inspect stator vanes for deformatlon. Repair.
Page 208
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
VERTICAL
CENTERLINE
OF ENGINE
FORWA
RO
üghtening Compressor Housing Vane Assembly Boits

Figure 204
Page
72-30-01 209
Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Exit Guide Vane Assembly Gap

Figure 205
Page 210
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(c) Visually inspect vanes lor nicks, burrs, pits and dents. Repair.
(3) Inspect impeller housing assembiy.
(a) Inspect for nicks, dents and rubs. Small scatlered nicks and dents up to 0.010 inch in
depth allowed. Blend repair {refer to SPM, 70-00-29, SP R401)- Slight rubs up to 0.005
inch in depth are allowed.
(b) Inspect for corrosión. (See Figure 206.)
NOTE: Repair corrosión in steps 1 through 4 which are within limits.
1 Corrosión pitting on ID/OD contour wall thickness shall not exceed 0.010 inch deep.
Replace if limits are exceeded.
2 Mínimum ID/OD contour wall thickness must exceed 0.070 inch. Replace if limits are
not met.
3 Corrosión on forward/aft mounting flange shall not exceed 0.030 inch. Replace if
limits are exceeded.
4 Corrosión on axial ribs shall not exceed 0.030 inch deep. Replace if limits are
exceeded.
4. Aporoved Repairs Comoressor and Impeller Housina Assemblies
A. Repair Compressor Housing Assembiy

CAUTION: DELETED.
(1) Blend repair nicks and burrs from compressor housing. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.)
(2) Deleted.
(3) Deleted.
(4) Deleted.
Page 211
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA!NTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
OO CONTOUH
XA 1333-117
Housing Repair Limits

Figure 206
Page 212
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NT„MANUAL
B. Repair Stator Vane Assembly
NOTE: If damage on only one half of a compressor vane assembly exceeds the máxi-
mum permissible limits, only that affected assembly haif shatl be replaced.
Stator vane halves remaining after other halves have been rejected can be
matched with another serviceable half provided the replacement half has
approximately the same amount of erosión or FOD. Rematched stator vane
assemblies shall meet all assembly requirements.
(1) Blend repair stator vane assembly as follows:
NOTE: Blend repair shall be made with small diesinker type files and India or
carborundum stones. Abrasive crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table
203) shall be used for final polishing. Power tools shall not be used.
All repairs shall be blended and finished smoothly. The finish strokes of
all repair work shall be parallel to the leading edge of the vane,
The aggregate repair length on any one vane leading or trailing edge
Shall not exceed 40 percent of its length.
(a) Dents with smooth contours are acceptable without rework provided that they do not
exceed repair limits. (See Figure 207.)
(b) Nicks, burrs, pits and rough dents on the airfoil shall be blend repaired provided that
damage after repair does not exceed limits given.
(c) Nicks and dents up to 0.080 inch deep after repair are permitted on the leading and trail-
ing edge. Length of repair shall be at least twice and not more than four times, the depfh.
(d) Nicks and dents on vanes in inaccessible areas of repair are acceptable without rework
provided that they do not exceed máximum permissible limits.
(e) Bent vanes shall be straightened, usmg padded pliers or equivalent. If the straightenmg
causes a crack in the vane, the assembly half shall be replaced.
(f) All stator vane halves remaining after other halves have been rejected can be rematched
with another serviceable half. Rematched stator vane assemblies sha)) meet al) assembly
requirements and shatl have approximately the same degree of foreign object damage or
erosion. An eroded stator half shall not be rematched with a non eroded half.
Page 213
72-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Compressor Stator Vane Repair Límits

Figure 207
72-30-01 Se730/Í2
I
T53-L-703
COMPRESSOR ROTOR AND IMPELLER ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
1. Descriotion and Operation

The compressor rotor assembly consists of a stainless Steel front shaft assembiy. stainless Steel compres-
sor rear shaft and a one piece titanium impelier, ai! of which are bolted to an electrón beam welded axial
compressor spool consisting of the second through fifth stages of the axial compressor. The gas producer
rotor assemblies are mounted on the rear compressor shaft of the compressor rotor assembly. The com-
pressor rotor assembly endoses, but is not connected to, the power shaft.
Page 1/2
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L~703
COMPRESSOR ROTOR AND IMPELLFR ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES
1. Inspection/Check Comoressor Rotor and Impeller Assemblv
A. Inspeci Compressor Rotor Biades
(1) Visually inspect biades for bends or distortion.

CAUTION; IF CRACKS ARE FOUND ON ANY FiRST STAGE BLADE, SCRAP
ALL FIRST AND SECOND STAGE BLADES. REPLACE WITH
NEW
BLADES.
(2) Using a strong light source and 7 10 power magnifier, visually and if crack indications are
noted, fluorescent penetrant inspect biades for cracks (refer to SPM. 70-20-05. SP 1305). No
cracks allowed. Replace detective biades.
(3) Visually inspect biades for nicks, burrs, dents and other foreign object damage.
NOTE: To facilítate rework, all damage or defects shall be identified and

marked with an approved marking pencil (72-00-00, 47, Table 203).
(4) Inspect all compressor biades for corrosión and pitting. Pitting is allowed provided.
(a) The major diameter of any pit does not exceed 0.015 inch (0.38 mm).
(b) The distance between pits is a minimum of five times the major diameter.
(c) Confirm that pits are corrosión and not erosión or impact damage using magnification as
required. Replace all detective biades.
NOTE: Varnish will appear as dark film, consisting of oil and dirt deposits that
have hardened on biade surfaces.
(5) Visually inspect biades for varnish buildup.
(6) Inspect first stage biades for inlet blockage. (See 72-00-00, ENGINE - INSPECTION.)
NOTE: Rolled over effect can be detectad by running a fingernail along airfoil
on convex side until leading edge is contacted.
(7) Using standard inspection equipment, inspect leading edge of biades for undercufting, erosión
roughness and slight rolled over effect. (See Figure 201.)
Page 201
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Blade Repair Limits for Undercutting, Erosión and Rolled Over Affect
Figure 201
Page 202
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
nori©ywVdi T 53- L -703
(a) Using a straight edge (6 inch scale or equivaient) placed slightiy above platform radios,
and a 0.0156 inch wire gage used as a GO or NO GO device, determine degree of under-
cutting (see Figure 202). A máximum of 0.0156 inch is permissible along leading edge
area between platform radius and tip. A wavy pattern (more than one undercut area) is
unacceptable. If within limits, repair by stoning blades on leading edge oniy (from blade
tip to critical area) to remove Sharp projections and roll over burrs. Strokes shall be
parallel to leading edge.
(b) Erosión roughness and roll over etfect is acceptable provided previous requirements and
requirements in following step (8) are met.
(8) Measure chordal width at midpoint of blades. Blades is acceptable for further use if chordal
width is 0.962 inch or greater (see Figure 202). If limit cannot be met, replace defectiva blades.
B. Inspect Centrifugal Compressor Impeller Assembly
(1) Visually inspect blades for nicks, cracks or bending in the critical area (see Figure 203). No
repair allowed. Smooth dents are acceptable provided they do not exceed 0.040 inch in
diameter and 0.010 inch in deplh.
(2) Visually inspect blades for cracks or bending in noncritical areas. No repair allowed. Minor
dents and nicks are permitted and should be reworked provided a 0.025 inch blade thickness
remains. Repair centrifugal compressor impeller assembly or replace, as required.
(3) Inspect leading edge of blades for erosión. Using a straightedge placed across the forward lip
of the centrifugal impeller, determine size of gap between straightedge and impeller blade (see
Figure 204). A máximum gap of 0.093 inch is permissible. Measure all blades. Reject impeller
if a rejected blade is found.
(4) Deleted.
C. inspect Compressor Rotor Assembly
(1) Inspect rotor areas between blades (spacer area). Minor nicks and dents are permitted without
repair.
Page 203
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
MEASURE CHORDAU WIDTH

HERE (0.962 INCH OR
GREATER) AT 6LADE MtDPOINT
XA-1338-173
Blade Limits for Undercutting

Figure 202
Page 204
^2-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
AIRFOIL (SIDES)
0.025 IN. TH1CKNE5S
MUST REMAIN AFTER
REPAIR
■ 13J8 IKA
Centrrfugal Impeller Repair Limits

Figure 203
Page 205
72-30 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
IMPELLER VANE
XA 1338-126
Centrifugal Impelier Btade Erosión Limits

Figure 204
Page 206
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
(2) Inspect blade retention areas. Damage other than minor well spaced nicks and dents is not
allowed. Blend repair (refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401) oí nicks only to e>ctent of removing
Sharp protrusions is permitted where access permits.
D. Inspect Clearance Of Compressor Rotor and Centrifugal Impeller
(1) Inspect for proper clearance as íollows:
NOTE: When taking blade tip clearances, insert feeler gage 1/4 to 1/2
inch below the compressor housing flange line.
(a) Using 12 inch feeler gage, take radial blade tip clearances of five compressor stages.
Take two clearance readings, 180 degrees apart, for each rotor stage. Take clearance
readings from compressor rotor blade tips to compressor housing. Rotate compressor
rotor one full turn while taking clearance at each of the ten checkpoints. (See Figure 205.)
1 Radial tip clearance for compressor rotor blades:
a First stage 0.018 mínimum.
b Second stage 0.018 minimum.
c Third stage 0.024 minimum.
d Fourth stage 0.024 minimum.
e Fifth stage 0.024 minimum.
(b) Using a 12 inch feeler gage, check radial clearance of four compressor vane assemblies
and exit guide vane assembiy. Take clearance readings from compressor stator vane to
compressor rotor spacers as follows:
1 Take two clearance readings, 180 degrees apart from front of first stage compressor
vane assembiy to first stage compressor rotor spacer. Rotate compressor rotor one
full turn while taking clearance readings at each of these two checkpoints.
2 Take two clearance readings, 180 degrees apart from rear of first stage compressor
vane assembiy to first stage compressor rotor spacer. Rotate compressor rotor one
full turn while taking clearance readings at each of these two checkpoints.
Page 207
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Radial Tip Clearances

Figure 205
Page 208
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
3 Take two ciearance reaOings, 180 degrees apart, at front and rear oí each compres-
sor vane assembly ío each compressor rotor spacer lor the seoond through lifth rotor
stages. The exit guide vane assembly requires oniy one ciearance readlng at the
front. Roíate compressor rotor one (ull turn while taking ciearance readings at each
of these two cheokpoints. (See Figure 206.)
4 Radial clearances between compressor vane assemblies and compressor rotor

spacers are as follows;
a First through fitth stage 0.026 minimum ciearance.
(c) Using 12 inch feeler gage, take axial ciearance of compressor rotor disc assemblies lo
compressor vane assemblies for first through fitth stages. Take two ciearance reaOings,
180 degrees apart, for each compressor rotor stage. Roíate compressor rotor one tuil
turn while taking ciearance readings at each of the 18 cheokpoints. (See Figure 206.)
NOTE: If clearances are not within limits. release torque and

relorque bolts.
1 Axial clearances between compressor rotor disc assemblies and compressor vane
assemblies are as follows:
a First rotor to first vane 0.040 inch minimum.
b First vane to second rotor 0.040 inch minimum.
c Second rotor to second vane 0.040 inch minimum.
d Second vane to third rotor 0.040 inch minimum.
e Third rotor to third vane 0.040 inch minimum.
f Third vane to fourth rotor 0.040 inch minimum.
g Fourth rotor to fourth vane 0.040 inch minimum.
h Fourth vane to fifth rotor 0.040 inch minimum.
i Fitth rotor to exit guide vane 0.029 inch minimum.

(d) Using 12 inch feeler gage, take two axial ciearance readings, 180 degrees apart, between
impeller assembly and exit guide vane assembly. Roíate compressor rotor one full turn
while taking ciearance readings at each of the remaining cheokpoints.
Page 209
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Axial Clearance of Compressor Rotor Disc Assembly

Figure 206
Page 210
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1 Axial clearance between impeller assembly and exit guide vane assembly is exrt
guide vane assembly to impeller assembly 0.048 inch mimmum clearance.
(e) Using 12 inch feeler gage, take radial tip clearance from centrifugal compressor impeller
assembly blades to impeller housing assembly. Rotate compressor rotor one full turn
while taking clearance readings at each of the six checkpoints.
1 Tip clearance between impeller blades and Impeller housing assembly are as lollows:
Housing
Impeller Blades Clearance
Impeller Housing (Inches)
Assembly Direction Mínimum
NOTE: All clearances are mea-

sured with bearing end play taken
up in a forward direction.
Centrifugal Compressor Impeller Radial 0.023

Assembly to Impeller Housing
Assembly (Forward End of Impeller
Blade)
Centrifugal Compressor Impeller Radial Axial 0.037

Assembly (Midpoint) of Impeller
Blade)
Centrifugal Compressor Impeller Axial 0.052

Assembly to Impeller Housing
Assembly (Rear of Impeller Blade)
Exit guide Vane to Impeller Axial

Housing
inleí Guide Vane to First Rotor Axial
Impeller Blades to Diffuser Housing Axial
Page 211
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
FIRST AND SECOND STAGE THIRO, FOURTH ANOFIFTH

BLAOES STAGE BLADES
GREATER THAN
3/32 INCHOR LESS
3/32 INCH
REPAIRED
75 PERCENT OF ORIGINAL MINIMUM Of 1/2 TIP

CHORDAL WIDTH MUST
BLAOE TMICKNESS MUST COMPRESSOR BLADE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
REMAIN AFTER REPAIR
3/32 INCH REUAIN AFTER REPAIR
DEPTH S AFTER BLAOE REPAIR
BLENO LEADING
TRAILINO EDOES
75 PERCEHT OF ORIGINAL
3/32 INCH BLADE THICKNES5 MUST
REMAIK AFTER REPAIR
ORLESS
SECTION A-A
♦
SECTION C-C
1.7MI73A
Compressor Rotor Blade Damage Before and After Repair (All Stages)
Figure 207
Page 213
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
Honeywell -—-NUAL
(d) Repairs to damage within 1/8 inch of blade tip shail be continued to tip. (See Figure 207.)
(e) If distance between two damaged areas is less than 3/32 inch, make one blend repair. If
distance is greater than 3/32 inch, make sepárate repairs.
(2) Finished repairs on blade tip edges (see Figure 207) shall be limited as tollows:
(a) Máximum allowable repair depth is 3/32 inch.
(b) Minimum allowable repair length is three times repair depth.

NOTE: A minimum of 1/2 of blade tip chordal width musí remain after
blend repairs. (See Figure 207.)
(c) If damage is closer to tip edge than 1/16 inch. blend repair to leading or trailing edge,
whicbever applies.
(3) Finished repairs to blade airfoil surfaces shall be limited as follows;
(a) Minimum airfoil thickness after repair shall be three fourths original thickness.
(b) If distance between two damaged areas is less than 3/32 inch. make one blend repair. If
distance is greater than 3/32 mch, make sepárate repairs.
(c) Máximum allowable repair length on blade airloil areas shall be 13/32 inch.
(d) Remove scratches or lines in airloil areas. Repairs shall be within limits.
(e) No more than 20 percent of total blade material may be removed during repairs.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO STRAIGHTEN BENT OR DISTORTED
BLADES.
(4) If damage or repair dimensions exceed allowable limits. replace blade.
(5) Replace bent or distorted blades.
(6) Remove varnish on airfoil surfaces as follows:

NOTE: Lapping compound is prepared by mixing 1 part aluminum oxide,
Grade 400 (72-00-00, 5. Table 203) by volume with 3 parts
cutting oil (72-00-00, 22, Table 203).
(a) Place lapping compound on soft cotton cloth.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT BLADES ARE RUBBED ONLY IN A RADIAL

DIRECTION (PARALLELTO LEADING EDGE).
(b) Using thin piece of wood or plástic to suppon the cloth. rub blades to remove varnish
buildup.
(c) Reinspect all blades to make sure that varnish buildup has been compietely removed.
Repeaf preceding steps (a) and (b), if necessary.
Page 214
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(d) Remove all traces of lapping compound with soft cotton cloth moistened with dry cieaning
sotvem (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
B. Removal of Compressor Rotor Blades
NOTE: First stage rotor blades are removed rearward. Second through fifth
stage rotor blades of compressor rotor subassembly are removed in a
forward direction,
(1) Remove upper compressor and impeller housings. (See 72-30-01.)
CAIJTION: MAKE SURE TO HOLD LOCKING PLATE AND BLADES SECURELY

TO AVOID DROPPING THEM BETWEEN INLET GUIDE VANE
AND
FIRST STAGE COMPRESSOR ROTOR DISC OR INTO LOWER
COMPRESSOR ROTOR HOUSING.
DO NOT ALLOW TOOLS TO CONTACT COMPRESSOR DISC

AREA.
(2) Inserí drift LTCT1643 through front of inlet housing and through inlet guide vane to contact base
of damaged first stage rotor blade. Inlet guide vane may be moved as necessary to facilítate
blade removal. Gently tap remover to remove blade from disc. Remove and discard locking
píate after blade removal. Remove pin if damaged.
CAUTION: WHEN A DAMAGED FIRST STAGE ROTOR BLADE IS TO BE

REPLACED, THE 16TH BLADE LOCATED
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
FROM DAMAGED BLADE LOCATION AS VIEWED FROM REAR
OF
FIRST STAGE ROTOR DISC MUST ALSO BE REMOVED TO
MAINTAIN PROPER ROTOR BALANCE,
(3) Using procedures in preceding step (2), remove the 16th blade located counterclockwise from
damaged blade location as viewed from rear of first stage rotor disc.
NOTE: Up to ten sets of blades may be replaced if damage Is limited to ten

sets or less. If more than ten blade sets are damaged, replace all
blades.
(4) Repeat procedures In step (2) until all blades that are to be replaced have been removed from
first stage rotor assembiy.
(5) On second through fifth stage rotor blades of compressor rotor subassembly, use drift
LTCT1644 and gently tap blade out of disc. Remove and discard locking píate after blade
removal. Remove pin if damaged. (See Figure 208.)
CAUTION: WHEN A DAMAGED SECOND THROUGH FIFTH STAGE ROTOR

BLADE IS TO BE REPLACED BY A FIELO REPLACEMENT BLADE,
THE BLADE LOCATED 180 DEGREES DIAMETRICALLY
OPPOSITE
TO DAMAGED BLADE MUST ALSO BE REPUCED TO MAINTAIN
PROPER ROTOR BALANCE.
Page 215
(6)
72-30-02
Using procedures in preceding step (5), remove rotor blade located 180 degrees diametrically
opposite from damaged blade.
Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
NOTE: There is no limit to the number of blade sets that may be replaced- If
more than six sets of blades are replaced, an engine vibration check
shall be performed. (See 71 -00- 00, paragraph 11 .E.)
Return to supply all serviceable blades that have been removed in

order that they may be made into replacement sets.
(7) Repeat the procedures in steps (5) and (6) until all blades that are to be replaced have been
removed from second, third, fourth or fitth stage compressor rotor subassembiy.
Page 216
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Removing Compressor Rotor Blade

Figure 208
72-30-02 Sept30/Í2
T53-L-703
C- Inspeclion oí Blade Root Coating
NOTE: 11 íacilities are not avaüable to apply graphite varnish coating to blade roots,
then new blades that have coated blade roots shal! be installed.
(1) II coating is not present or is damaged on allected blade root surtaces, graphite varnish coat
compressor rotor blade roots.
(2) Prepare blade roots lor coating as tollows:
(a) Olean blades by vapor degreasing or dry cleaning solvent method. (Reíer to SPM
70-15-01, SP 0201 and SPM, 70-15-03, SP 0203.)
(b) Mask airloil surfaces oí blades using two stainless Steel plates 1.75 inches wide by 20
inches long by 0.060 inch thick and two pieces oí rubber 1.75 Inches wide by 18 inches
long by 0.125 inch thick. {See Figure 209.)
NOTE: Slurry shall be agitated or circulated in such a manner to prevent

settiing oí abrasivo.
(c) Prepare wet abrasive slurry, 40 percent liquid abrasiva (72 - 00 - 00, 39, Table 203) by
volume, balance water and vapor blast blades. (Reíer to SPM, 70-15-05. SP 0205.)
(d) Remove masking and rinse; lirst with coid water, then with hot water heated to 160-F
{71°C) mínimum. Dry in oven lor 10 minutes at 335°F (168"C).
(3) Prepare and apply graphite varnish coating as follows:
(a) Using cardboard masks 2 inches wide by 20 inches long, mask airloil suríaces. (See
Figure 210.)
(b) Mix 1 part corrosión preventiva synthetic resin varnish (72-00-00, 69. Table 203) with 2
parts graphite suspensión (colloidal) in "dag" dispersión (72-00-00, 23, Table 203).
(c) Apply graphite varnish (see Figure 211) as follows:
1 Using a Binks spray gun equipped with noz2le 66SD (Binks Company) or equivalent,
at an air pressure of 30 psig. make passes at a modérate speed approximately 8
inches from blades.
2 Make One pass in each direction on each side.
Page 218
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAfNTENANCE MANUAL
153-1-703
STAINLESS
ST
PLATES
Masking Airfoil Surfaces in Preparation for Vapor Blasting of Blade Roots

Figure 209
Page 219
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Masking Shieid Preparation Prior to Spraying Blade Roots

Figure 210
Page 220
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
X A-7Se*SS7A
Coating of Blade Roots

Figure 211
Page 221
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
3 Wait 3 to 4 minutes for solvent to evapórate.
I 4 Make a second pass in each direction on each side.
5 Air dry for at least 15 minutes or until dry to touch.
(d) Remove blades from cardboard mask and arrange in oven rack.
(e) Cure by heating in a hot air circulated oven to 325 to 345'^F (163 to 174"’C) for 50 minutes
or 300'F (149^C) for 1 to 2 hours.
(f) Remove blades from oven and air cool.
D. Installation of Compressor Rotor Blades
NOTE: Prior to installation of compressor rotor blades in any stage, make sure that
affected surfaces of roots (see Figure 211) are coated with graphite varnish If
coating is not present or is damaged, blade roots must be coated with graph-
ite varnish. (See paragraph 2.C.)
All blades replaced in ihe fleid shall be replaced in pairs, using specia/ fieid (shoríer) bíade sefs.
Following is a list of fieid replacement blade sets:
STAGE PART NUMBER

First 1-100-361-05
Second 1-100-286-08
Third 1-100-383-04
Fourth 1-100-384-04
Fifth 1-100-385-04
NOTE: First stage compressor rotor blades are installed from the rear in a forward
direction. Blades of second through fifth stages are installed from the front in
a rearward direction. Fieid replacement blades will carry the symbol '‘0” vibro-
peened on rear face of blade root. In the event of subsequent damage to one
of these blades, it may again be replaced wlthout viotating the máximum ai-
lowabie llmits. If a blade carnes Symbol “0" with an “X’’ through it. that blade
has been a fleid maintenance replacement at one time, but has since been
through overhaul and may now be considered as having no symbol. If re-
placement blades do not have an “O" on the blade root, they shall be so
marked, using a vibropeen marking tool, before they are installed.
On the third. fourth, and fifth stage rotor disc, six blade sets per rotor disc
may be replaced. If this number is exceeded, ship engine to Overhaul facility.
Page 222
72-30-02 Sepl 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
■ IOri©y*Vdl T53-L-703
NOTE: The compressor front shatt assembly has a compliment oí 31 blades

and requires a special assembly procedure. The followtng steps musí
be performed for blade instailation of the first stage compressor disc
only.
Blade weight to the nearest 0.1 gram is stamped on the convex side oí
each blade. Two blades marked with equal weights are a set and are
to be kept together,
(1) Pertorm the lollowing steps tor blade instailation oí compressor front shaft assembly (lirst stage
disc).
NOTE: As blade set No. 8 requires three blades, take one blade from set
No. 9 and place it in set No. 8. Retain other blade No. 9 as a
spare. Set No. 10 becomes set No. 9, set No. 11 becomes 10,
etc., as only 15 sets are required tor instailation.
(a) Blade sets are to be arranged in a row according to ascending weights.
STEPI
EXAMPLE
Set 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8*-9-10-11-12-13-14-15
Grams 16.6 16.8 ----------- 17.6 17.8
(b) Starting with set No. 2 remove every other set and with these sets make a second row
keeping sets in order of descending weights.
STEP II
EXAMPLE
Rowl 1-3-5-7-9-11-13-15
Row II 14-12-10-8*-6-4-2
*3 blade set wíthin 0.2 gram of each other.
(c) Reposition row II to the nght of row I to form a single row of blade sets that are in
assembly order.
Final Row 1-3-5-7-9-11-13-15-14-12-10-8*-6-4-2
*3 blade set within 0.2 gram of each other.
Page 223
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IlOílCyi/Vdl T53-L-703
CAUTIQN: IF FOR ANY REASON A BLADE MUSI BE REPLACED,

REPLACEMENT MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED USING A
MATCHED SET; USING ONE BLADE OF A SET TO
REPLACE
THE DAMAGED BLADE AND THE OTHER BLADE OF THE
SET TO REPLACE A BLADE ONE PLACE FARTHER, IN
THE
DIRECTION OF ROTATION, THAN THE THEORETICAL 180
DEGREES OPPOSITE BLADE.
(d) Assemble blades into disc as shown. (See Figure 212.)
(2) Using pin installer LTCT256, install new pins (color coded elther red or green), i( required.
NOTE: When Installing blades, press íhumb against blade root untíl blade is
seated against pin. If blades cannot be installed by hand, use installing
tool LTCT4179 and torque wrench. Installation forcé should not exceed
30 inch-pounds torque.
(3) Instan locking píate 1-100-505-02 on pin in root of disc.
CAUTIQN: DO NOT ALLOW TOOL TO CONTACT COMPRESSOR DISC AREA.
(4) Using a soft faced mallet and a suitable brass or nylon drlft, bend tab of looking píate agamst
blade root.
(5) Perlorm the following steps for blade installation oí the second through fifth stage of the com-
pressor rotor subassembiy.
NOTE: Blade sets for each stage are to be selected from random order. No
systematic grouping is required.
CAUTIQN: IF, FOR ANY REASON. A BLADE MUST BE REPLACED, THtS

REPLACEMENT MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED USING
MATCHED
BLADE SETS.
(6) Assemble blade sets for each stage into proper disc so that each blade in a set is 180 degrees
from its mate.
(7) Using pin installer LTCT256, install new pins (color coded either red or green), if required.
NOTE: When installing blades. press thumb against blade root until blade is
seated against pin. If blades cannot be installed by hand, use installing
tool LTCT4179 and torque wrench. Installation forcé should not exceed
30 inch-pounds torque.
(8) install locking píate 1-100-505-02 on pin in root of disc.
Page 224
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
INDEX MARKS
First Stage Disc Blade Arrangement

Figure 212
Page 225
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ‘Â,NTENANCEMANUAL
CAÜTION: DO NOT ALLOW TOOL TO CONTACT COMPRESSOR DISC AREA.
(9) Using a soft faced mailet and a suitable brass or nylon drift, bend lab of locking píate against
blade root.
(10) Check compressor rotor blade tip clearances. (See Paragraph l.D.(1)(a}.)
(11) Instan compressor and Impeller housings. (See 72-30-01.)
E. Repair Ceniriíugai Compressor (mpeller Blades

NOTE: Repairs shall be made wlth small diesinker type files and India or carborun-
dum stones. Abrasivo crocos cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table 203) shall be used
for final polishing. Power tools shall not be used. All repairs shall be made by
removing oniy as much material as necessary to permit a smooth repair.
Minor dents and nicks in noncritical areas should not be reworked provided
0-025 inch blade thickness remains. Repair in critical area is not allowed
except as shown. (See Figure 213.)
NOTE: A vibration check (see 71 -00-00) of engine must be made if steps (1)
or (2) have been accomplished.
(1) One blade leading edge may be repaired by removing up to 0.130 inch of material. Should
more than one blade require 0.075 to 0.130 inch of material removal, proceed as outlined in
following step (2).
NOTE: If more than five blades are atfected, forward engine to Overhaul facility
for replacement of centhfugal compressor impeller assembiy.
(2) Up to five blades requiring removal of 0.075 to 0.130 inch of material may be repaired as
follows:
NOTE: The 10 total blades inelude any blades previously repaired to the
0.130 inch limit. Total of 10 blades is defined as total number of
reworked blades on the impeller assembly.
(a) Blend repair leading edge of blade (see Figure 209) using care not to exceed 0.130 inch
of material removal.
(b) Remove same amount of material from blade 180 degrees away (directly across assem-
bly) from repaired blade.
(3) All other repairs to impeller blades shall be accomplished in accordance with limits shown.
(See Figure 213.)
Page 226
72-30-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -.«EMAMUA.
COMBUSTOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Comfaustor Turbina Assemblv
A. Remove Combustor Turbine Assembly

NOTE: The combustor turbine assembly may be removed while the engme is
installed in the aircraft.
(1) Remove damps that secure ignition coil and iead assembly to combustor turbine assembly.
Disconnect ignition coil and lead assembly from four igniter plugs and oil pressure and
scavenge hoses.
(2) Remove damps that secure main fuel hose assembly to combustor turbme assembly. Remove
bolt and nuts that secure fuel solenoid valve to combustor turbine. Disconnect mam fuel hose
assembly from fuel control and flow divider assembly. Remove hose assembly. Cap all open
ports.
(3) Remove damps that secure starting fuel hose assembly to combustor turbine assembly.
Disconnect starting fuel hose assembly from starting fuel solenoid valve and tee between
halves of starting fue) manifolds.
(4) Remove bolt (12, Figure 201) and tablock (11} that secure exhaust diffuser cover (10) to rear
cover (8). Remove exhaust diffuser cover (10).
(5) Using suitable tapered feeler gages, measure gap between rear beanng cover (8) and exhaust
diffuser in eight equally spaced places. The optimum gap would be 0.005 inch at all locations,
but up to 0-007 inch is allowable at any point if the direct opposite measurement does not ex-
ceed 0.003 inch. !f limit is exceeded, proceed as follows:
(a) inspect ID of exhaust diffuser. If average diameter in eight places exceeds 6.066 inches,
remove and replace exhaust diffuser.
(b) Inspect OD of rear beanng cover. If average diameter in eight places is less than 6.056
inches, replace cover.
Page 201
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
aoic 6ti ■
©> -J
Combustor Turbine Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
TRAILING EDGE
REPAIR DEPTH
0 050 IN. MAX.
RADIUSASSHOWN. DOTTEDLINE
INDICATESBLENDINQ. BLENDSURFACE
SIMILARTO UNAFFECTED BLADE.
T53L7O3144R0
Centrifugal Compressor Impeller BlacJe Repair Limits

Figure 213
"70 Page 227/228

— oO — Sept30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. NUT 7. SEAL
2. BOLT 8. REAR BEARING COVER
3. COMBUSTOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY 9. BOLT
4. SHIM 10. EXHAUST DIFFUSER
5. POWER SHAFT BOLT 11. COVER
TABLOCK
6, NUT 12. BOLT
Page 203
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(6) Remove bolts (9) that secure rear cover (8) to exhaust ditfuser.
(7) Instan three 1/4-28 threaded pusher screws in rear cover (8) at approximately 1,4 and 9
o'clock positions. Tighten screws evenly and remove rear bearing cover (8) and seal (7).
(8) Straighten deformad rim of power shaft internal wrenching nut (6) at four places.
(9) Instan torque adjustment fixture LTCT962 inio rear of combusíor turbina assembly and engage
tangs of locking píate assembly with slots in beanng retainer nut. Secure píate assembly with
three bolts.
(10) Using Socket wrench LTCT505, remove and retaín internaí wrenching nut (6) for reuse in foKow-
ing step (20). (See Figure 202.)
(11) Using Socket wrench LTCT506, remove power shaft bolt (5, Figure 201) and shims (4).
(12) Record shim thickness and attach shims, nut, and bolt to air diffuser.
(13) Position combustión lifting sling LTCT14668-01 or equivalent, around flange of ditfuser support
cone. (See Figure 203.)
(14) Attach suitable hoist to lifting eye of adapten
(15) Mark relationship of combustor turbine assembly to air diffuser using approved marker
(72-00-00, 47. Table 203).
(16) Using Socket wrench LTCT393, remove bolts (2, Figure 201) and nuts (1) that secure
combustor turbine assembly (3) to diffuser housing.
(17) Using an approved marking pencil, identify and mark all bolt holes at which brackets were
secured.
CAUTIQN: WHILE REMOVING COMBUSTOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY, INSURE

THE POWER SHAFT DOES NOT MOVE AFT, MOVEMENT OF THE
POWER SHAFT COULD CAUSE THE SUN GEARSHAFT TO
IMPACT
AND DAMAGE THE TACH DRIVE SPUR GEAR.
NOTE: Marking is required for proper reinstallation of same combustor turbine

assembly. Do not rotate engine, combustor turbine assembly or power
turbine until marking is accomplished.
(18) Remove combustor turbine assembly sutficiently to mark relationship of power shaft to power
turbine shaft using approved marker.
Page 204
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Removing Power Shaft Intemal Wrenching Nut

Figure 202
72 “ 40 * 00 Sepf30/02
r
T53-L-703
X 7JS 21 Je
Removing Combustor Turbine Assembly

Figure 203
Page 206
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
Honeywell —ÂNCEMANUAL
(19) Lower the combustor turbine assembly and place il on a suitabie work surtace.
NOTE: The original power shaft bolt flange depth must be measured and
recorded for reference during reassembiy. Ftange depth measurement
governs size or number of shims (4) placed under head ot power shaft
bolt (5) to lócate power shaft within engine correctiy.
(20) Instan original shims (4), power shaft bolt (5) and internal wrenching nut (6). Tighten nut
snugly, using socket wrench LTCT505. Remove torque adjustment fixture LTCT962. Position
exhaust diffuser down and place locating bution bar LTCT153 on combustor flange and install
measuring tool 1X016124 (replaces LTCT3039) in power turbine splines.
(21) With vernier depth gage. measure from lop of bar to top of measuring tool. (See Dimensión A,
Figure 204.)
(22) Subtract distance from top of locating bar to top of flange (Dimensión B from Dimensión A).
Resulting dimensión, plus length of tool (Dimensión C), is the flange depth. Record and retain
this measurement for reference during assembiy.
(23) Install torque adjustment fixture LTCT962.
(24) Remqve internal wrenching nut (6, Figure 201), bolt (5) and shims (4). Attach shims to bolt with
lockwtre.
(25) Remove torque adjustment fixture.
(26) Deleted.
72-40-00 sis
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Measuring Power Shaft Bott Flange Depth

Figure 204
Page 208
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
Figure 205. Deleled
Figure 206. Deleted
Figure 207. Deleted
NOTE: Perform an engine vibralion test upon reinstallation of combustor turbine
assembly (hot end) or whenever excessive engine vibration is suspected.
{See 71-00-00, paragraph 11.E.)
B. Install Combustor Turbine Assembly
NOTE: Lubrication of power shaft bolt and instailation of shims is not

necessary at this time.
(1) Install power shaft bolt (5, Figure 201) into power shaft. FInger tighten to check for cleanliness
and condition of threads. )f any íightness or failure of shoulder to bottom on power shaft exists,
olean or repair threads. Clean mating spiines of power turbine and power shaft. Do not lubri-
cate.
(2) If combustor turbine assembly or major subassembly has Peen replaced, it is necessary to
establish a new power shaft bolt flange depth. Compare original and new flange depth
measurements (see paragraph 1 .A.(22) through (25)). If they differ by more than 0.010 mch,
add or remove shims lo maintain original flange depth measurement. (See Figure 204.) A
máximum of three shims may be installed. (If original measurements cannot be determined,
see Figure 204, paragraph l.C.)
(3) Establish clearance between second stage gas producer cylinder and first stage power turbine
nozzle. (See Dimensión B. Figure 9.) (See 80-00-04.)
NOTE: If punch marks do not exist on power shaft and/or power turbine rotor
shaft spIines, the power shaft may be installed tn any position relativo to
the power turbine rotor shaft spiines.
(4) Position mating marks as recordad when combustor turbine was removed. If mating marks
were not made at removal, or if a new combustor section or a new power turbine rotor is
installed, accomplish following steps (5) and (6).
NOTE: If a new combustor section or a new power turbine rotor is installed,

position mating marks in steps (5) and (6) 180 degrees apart during
instailation,
(5) Check position of mating mark center punchad on face of male spiine of power shaft. Using an
approved marker, mark position on outside diameter of power shaft spiine.
NOTE: Overhauted power turbine rotor may have spiines center punched two
or more times, dependíng on the number of times the rotor has been
rebladed- Use the mating mark with the greatest number of center
punch marks.
(6) Check position of mating mark center punched on face of female spiine on second stage power
turbine rotor. If not accomplished during assembly. mark position on outside diameter of shaft
using an approved marker.
Page 209
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
(7) Center afl end of power shaft within the compressor shatt.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT TABS ON FIRST STAGE GAS PRODUCER

NOZZLE LINER ARE PROPERLY ENGAGED BY THE CHANNEL
ON
THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER.
NOTE: |{ installing combustor turbina assembly whiie engine is in vertical

position, position litting eye of adapter to boles nearest attaching points
of adapter.
(8) Position combustor lifting sling LTCT14668-01 around flange of diffuser support cone. (See
Figure 203)
(9} Attach suitable hoist to tiftmg eye of adapter and install combustor turbine assembly on diffuser
housing assembly with combustión chamber drain valve located at 6 o’clock position.
(a) Before installalion, inspect as follows; Dimples on ID of combustión chamber imer must
contact OD of first stage gas producer nozzie deflector. This may be accomplished by
appiying iron blue pigment (72- 00 -00, 54, Table 203) to the liner dimples and mating
the nozzie and liner to simúlate hot end installation. If contact is not evident through 360
degrees, carefully bend liner tab(s) inward as required.
(10) Using Socket vi/rench LTCT393. install bolts (2, Figure 201) and nuts (1) that secure combustor
turbine assembly (3) to diffuser housing.
CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING COMBUSTOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY, THE

POSStBILlTY OF GEAR (N2 ORIVE) TRAIN DISENGAGEMENT
EXISTS WHEN POWER SHAFT IS PUSHED FORWARD. FOLLOW
PROCEDURES VERY CAREFULLY
(11) Install all brackets at areas where indicated during removal.
Page 210
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
noriGywVdi T53-L-703
CAUTIQN: NUMBER OF SHIMS SHALL NOT EXCEED THREE. USEOFAN

EXCESSIVE NUMBER OF SHIMS CAN RESULT IN A COCKED
BOLT
AND CAUSE EXCESSIVE POWER TURBINE VIBRATION. MAKE
SURE SHIMS ARE FLAT AGAINST SHOULDER WITHIN ROTOR
SHAFT BEFORE INSTALLING POWER SHAFT BOLT SHIMS MUST
BE HELD IN PLACE WITH SHORTENING COMPOUND OR ASSEM-
BLY FLUID (TABLE 1102 #179, IF ENGINE IS HORIZONTAL.
(12) Instan shims (4) oí thickness recorded during removal or as corrected in the preceding steps (1)
and (2).
(13) Remove N2 tachometer (if instalied) from overspeed governor and tachometer drive gearbox
and engage 1/4 inch drive extensión and handle in tachometer dríve gear.
CAUTIQN: FAILURE TO MAKE SURE ENGAGEMENT MAY RESULT IN

DAMAGE TO DRlVEN GEAR. A FIRM RESISTANCE
MUST
BE FELTAT HANDLE.
(14) Apply light coating of anti seize compound (72-00-00, 15. Table 203) to threads of power
shaft bolt (5) and install bolt by hand. While installing bolt, roíate the 1/4 inch drive handle
slightiy to make sure that the driven (N2 dríve) gear and the spur gear are engaged properiy.
CAUTIQN: MAKE SURE BOLT AND SHAFT THREADS ARE CLEAN. MAKE
SURE BOLT HAS TURNED AT LEAST SIX TURNS BY HAND PRIOR
TO TORQUING.
(15) Instan torque adjustment fixture LTCT962 into rear of combustor turbine assembly and engage
tangs of locking píate assembly with slots in bearing retainer nut. Secure píate assembly with
three bolts.
(16) Using socket wrench LTCT506, tighten power shaft bolt 195 to 200 inch pounds torque.
(17) Apply light coating of antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Table 203) to threads of a new nut
(6) and power turbine rotor shaft.
(18) Using socket wrench LTCT505, install new nut (6). Tighten nut to 100 foot pounds torque.
Loosen and remove nut. Retighten power shaft bolt 195 to 200 inch pounds torque. Install nut
(6) and tighten to 50 foot pounds torque. Remove torque fixture LTCT962.
(19) Using end of suitably rounded punch or the side of a tapered drift punch, deform collar of nut to
extend into three slots of power turbine rotor shaft.
72-40-00 seS
HoneyweII M™TEM™ANUAL
(20) Visually inspect nut for cracks that may have occurred as result of deformations. It nut is
cracked, it must be replaced. Remove torque adjustment fi>cture.
NOTE: Before installing seal (7), the sea! shall be inspected for cuts, nicks,
tears, cracks, distortion, pliability and wear. If damage is noted, replace
seal.
Make sure groove in rear bearing cover (8) is deán. Coat groove in
rear cover with shortening compound (72-00-00, 38, Table 203) or
assembly fluid (72-00-00, 7, Table 203) to facilítate hoiding seal
during assembly.
(21) Instan seal (7) or packing in groove of rear cover (8).
(22) Prior to installing the rear bearing cover (8), inspect screw (21, Figure 209) to make sure screw
head does not protrude. Take correctiva action if screw head does protrude.
NOTE: Prior to installation of bolts (9), apply a light coat of antiseize compound
(72-00-00, 15, Table 203) to threads of bolt.
(23) Instan rear bearing cover (8) and secure with botts (9). Torque 70 to 95 inch-pounds and lock-
wire (72-00-00, 40, Table 203).
(24) Using suitable tapered feeler gage, measure gap between rear bearing cover (8) and exhaust
diffuser in eight equally spaced places. The optimum gap would be 0.005 inch on all eight
locations, but up to 0.007 inch allowable at any point if the direct opposite measurement does
not exceed 0.003 inch. If limit is exceeded, proceed as follows;
(a) Inspect ID of exhaust diffuser. if average diameter in eight places exceeds 6.066 inches,
remove and replace exhaust diffuser.
(b) Inspect OD of rear cover. If average diameter in eight places is less than 6.056 inches,
replace rear cover.
CAUTION: SHORT TAB MUST GO THROUGH HOLE IN EXHAUST DIFFUSER

COVER AND INTO CUTOUT IN REAR COVER. MAKE SURE
TAB
RÉMAINS ENGAGED IN BOTH COVERS AFTER TIGHTENING
BOLT.
NOTE: Prior to installation of bolt (12) apply a light coat of antiseize compound
(72-00-00, 15. Table 203).
(25) Position exhaust diffuser cover (10) over rear bearing cover (8) and align tablock holes. Secure
exhaust diffuser cover (10) with tablock (11) and bolt (12). Tighten bolt as required and lock-
wire bolt to tablock.
(26) If N2 tachometer was removed, lubrícate spiines with spiine lubricant (72-00-00, 45, Table
203) and install.
(27) Apply light coat of thread lubricant (72-00-00, 15, Table 203) to the igniter plugs.
Page2l2
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
Honeyi/vell MAINTENANCE^MANUAL
{28) Instan tour starting fuel nozzles and four igniter plugs. Tighten igniter plugs 85 to 95 inch-
pounds torque.
(29) Reconnect ignition leads, main fuel hose assembly, fuel solenoid valve and starting fuel hose
assembiy. Secure with clamps as necessary.
NOTE: Perform the following procedure if original flange depth measurements have
been lost. flange shims have been lost or major assemblies in combustor
turbina assembly have been replaced.
Combustor turbine (hot end) must be installed on the engine.
C. Power Shaft Bolt Flange Depth Measurement
(1) If installed, remove power shaft bolt (5, Figure 201) and locating shim (4).
CAUTION: IF POWER SHAFT IS NOT IN EXTREME FORWARD POSITION
ENGINE FAILURE CAN RESULT.
(2) Using a deán rod (wood or phenolic dowel), gently but firmiy push power shaft to extreme for-
ward position.
(3) Place locating button bar LTCT153 across back of exhaust diffuser and note dimensión from
bar to aft end of power shaft. This is Dimensión A. {See Figure 208.)
(4) With bar in the same position, note dimensión from bar to power shaft bolt seating shoulder in
second stage power turbine rotor assembly. This is Dimensión B.
(5) Subtract Dimensión B from Dimensión A to obtain Dimensión C.
(6) Subtract 0.230 inch from Dimensión C to obtain Dimensión D.
Page 213
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeyfvell T53-L-703
Measuring Power Shaft Bolt Flange Depth

Figure 208
Page 214
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
(7) Subtract Dimensión D from the power shaft bolt length (5.400 inches) to obtain the required
thickness oí shim.
(8) Install shims of corred thickness and bolt. (See steps 1.B(9) through (26).)
2. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Combustor Turbine Assemblv
A. Disassemble Combustor Turbine Assembly (See Figure 209.)
(1) Remove V-band coupling assembly (7 or 7A) by one of the following methods.
(a) For V-band assembly (7), disconnect nuts (1) from bolts (3) and remove spacers (2, 4).
(b) For V-band assembly (7A), disconnect nuts (1A) from bolts {3A).
(2) Remove two screws (39, 40) and nuts (41) from connector (38). Open connector and remove
lead of thermocouple harneas (42).
(3) Remove diffuser support cone assembly (8). Remove connector (38).
(4) Remove oil stralner housing adapter (9) from power turbine olí tube (20) at top of fire shieid
(19) . Remove packing (11) and strainer (10).
(5) Remove connector (12) from tube (20) at bottom of fire shieid (19). Remove packing (13).
CAUTION- USE CARE WHEN REMOVING MANIFOLD TO PREVENT DAMAGE

TO FUEL NOZZLES.
(6) Remove start fuel nozzles. (See 73-10-03.)
(7) Remove bolts (14) that secure fuel manifolds (18) to rear of combustión chamber assembly
(59). Carefully remove manifolds from combustión chamber housing and remove seáis (15)
from fuel nozzles. Remove screw (16) that secures sealing gasket (17) to main fuel manifold.
Remove gaskets. Cap open parts and package or set in dust free area. If manifold is to be
replaced, endose manifold in barrier material (72-00-00, 9, Table 203) or in a transparent
flexible bag (72-00-00, 8, Table 203) and secure in reusable container. The container shouid
be enclosed ín a waterproof cardboard box and identified for shipment.
(8) Remove two screws (44) that secure cover assembly (43) lo fire shieid (19). Remove cover
assembly from fire shieid and from lead of thermocouple harness (42).
(9) Remove fire shieid (19) from around exhaust diffuser (22).
Page 215
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Combustor Turbine Assembly

Figure 209
72-40-00 sS
t
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 209
1. NUT 30. TURBINE ROTOR AND BEARING HOUSING

1A. NUT 31. PACKING
2. SPACER 32. BOLT
3. BOLT 33. LOCKING PLATE
3A. BOLT 34. LOCKING PLATE
4. SPACER 35. BOLT
5. V-BAND TRUNNION 36. BOLT
6. END, LOOP 37. MOUNTING PLATE
7. V-BAND ASSEMBLY 38. CONNECTOR
7A. V-BAND ASSEMBLY 39. SCREW
8. CONE ASSEMBLY 40. SCREW
9. ADAPTER 41. NUT
10. OIL STRAINER 42. HARNESS ASSEMBLY
11. PACKING 43. COVER ASSEMBLY
12. CONNECTOR 44. SCREW
13. PACKING 45. FIRST TURBINE NOZZLE
14. BOLT 46. BOLT
15. SEAL 47. LOCKING PLATE
16. SCREW 48. SEALING FLANGE
17. GASKET 48 A. FIRST STAGE POWER TURBINE ROTOR
18. MANtFOLD ASSEMBLY 49. PIN
19. FIRE SHIELD 50. BLADE
20. POWER TURBINE OIL TUBE 51. BLADE
21. SCREW 52. FIRST STAGE POWER TURBINE DISC
22, DIFFUSER ASSEMBLY 53. SPACER
23, NUT 54. PIN
24. PIN 55, SPACER
25. STUD 56. SECOND TURBINE NOZZLE
26. PLATE 57. RING
27. DIFFUSER 58. SPACER
28. NUT 59. COMBUSTION CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
29. SEAL
Page 217
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
Honeyweil ^««NTE^MNCE^MANUAL
(10 ) Rernove two power turbíne oil tubes (20) from exhaust diffuser struts.
(11) Turn combustor assembly over, set it on the aft llange of the exhaust diffuser and straighten
locking plates (33, 34) and rernove 20 bolts (32). Rernove locking plates.
CAUTIQN: USE CARE WHEN REMOViNG THERMOCOUPLE HARNESS FROM

FLANGES TO AVOID DAMAGING ELECTRICAL CONTACTS.
(12 ) Cut lockwire and rernove two bolts (35) securing thermocoupie harness (42) to flanges of first
stage power turbine nozzle assembly (45) and exhaust diffuser (22),
(13) Rernove first stage power turbine nozzle from power turbine rotor and rernove spacer (55).
Record thickness of spacer for reassembiy.
(14) If thermocoupie harness or nozzle is to be replaced, cut lockwire and rernove 12 bolts (36) and
plates (37) securing thermocoupie harness probes to first stage power turbine nozzle assembly
(45). Carefully withdraw probes from nozzle and rernove thermocoupie harness (42).
NQTE: Be sure to matchmark all rotating components, induding bolts (46),

with white opaque ink (72-00-00, Table 203, item 73A) to make sure
that they are reinsfalled in same location.
(15) Straighten tabs of locktng plates (47); then rernove bolts (46) and locking plates (47).
(16) Rernove seallng flange (48) from face of first stage power turbine rotor assembly (48A).
(17) Using mechanical puller LTCT4682 (detall of LTCT46S0) extended and hooks counterdockwlse
as viewed from handle end, rernove first stage power turbine rotor (52) and spacer (53) as a
unit. Rernove packing (31).
(18) Remove pins (54) and spacer (55). Record thickness,
(19) Turn rotor and spacer over and, using puller LTCT4680, with arms retracted and hooks clock-
wise. rernove spacer (53) from turbine rotor (52).
(20) Rernove second stage power turbine nozzle (56), ring (57) and spacer (58). Record thickness
of spacer for reassembiy.
(21) Sepárate combustión chamber assembly (59) from exhaust diffuser assembly (22).
(22)
Position exhaust diffuser, with second stage power turbine rotor assembly down, in holding
fixture LTCT4553.
(23)
Rernove screws (21) that secure power turbine rotor and bearing housing assembly (30) to
exhaust diffuser (22).
(24)
Raise assembly slightly from hotdmg fixture. Using mechanical puller LTCT4700, sepárate
turbine rotor assembly from exhaust diffuser.
(25)
Rernove and discard seal (29).
Page 218
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
B. Reassemble Combustor Turbina Assembly
NOTE: Inspect power turbina rotor spiined shaft Jor canter punch. This mark
will coincide with yellow "H" on disc face indicating the heavy point. If
punch mark is not evident, mark position on outside diameter of spiined
shaft using an approved marker.
Make sure groove in housing is olean. If packing (31) is to be installed.

coat groove with shortening compound (72-00-00, 38, Tabíe 203} or
assembly fluid (72-00-00, 7, Table 203) to facilitate holding seal in
groove during assembly.
(1) Place power turbine rotor and bearing housing assembly (30, Figure 209) forward face down
into holding fixture LTCT4553. Install packing (31) in groove on aft end of bearing housing.
(2) Place exhaust diffuser assembly (22) over bearing housing and align screw holes.
(3) Temporarily install 1/4-28 bolts and fíat washers through exhaust diffuser assembly and into
bearing housing. Turn bolts evenly and pulí exhaust diffuser over bearing housing.
(4) Secure bearing housing to exhaust diffuser with screws (21). Tighten screws 20 to 30 inch
pounds torque.
(5) Using bent 0.070 inch diameter wire, check for 0.070 inch minimum clearance between second
stage power turbine rotor and forward face of inner diffuser cone.
NOTE: if installed, combustión chamber iiner should be removed to facilitate

reassembiy. (See 72-40-03.)
(6) Position exhaust diffuser and bearing housing on bench with exhaust diffuser rear face down.
Position combustión chamber assembly (59) on flange of exhaust diffuser and align match-
marks on mating flanges.
(7) Establish tip clearance between second stage power turbine rotor and second stage power
turbine nozzle (see paragraph 2.D.). Check axial clearance between second stage power
turbine nozzle and rotor.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT BOLTS DO NOT BOTTOM AGAINST SEAL

HOUSING.
(8) Install power turbine spacer (53) over end of power turbine rotor and align bolt holes and
matchmarks that were printed at disassembiy. Secure spacer with three equally spaced
5/16-24 bolts and washers.
(9) Position second stage power turbine nozzle (56) and using feeler gage, check clearance be-
tween power turbine spacer (53) and second stage power turbine nozzle (56). If clearance is
less than 0.005 inch, rework nozzle using half round file to obtain 0.010 inch clearance.
(10) Establish clearance between first stage power turbine rotor and second stage power turbine
nozzle ustng wire gages as follows;
(a) Remove bolts and washers installed in preceding step (3).
Page 219
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENAN«MANUAL
(b) Instail tonque adjustment fixture LTCT962 into rear of exhaust ditfuser assembly and
engage tangs of (ocking píate assembíy with slots in beanng retainer nut. Secure piafe
assembly with three bolts. Replace combustor turbine assembly on bench with exhaust
ditfuser rear face down.
(c) Instail packing (31) over end of power turbine rotor shatt.
(d) Position first stage power turbine rotor (48A. Figure 209) over end oí power turbine rotor
shaft. Lócate yellow “H" on disc face. 180 degrees from punch mark (or other mark) on
power turbine shaft. Align bolt holes.
NOTE: Prior to installation, apply antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15,

Table 203) to bolts (46).
Make sure that locking piafes do not cover the three small air
bleed holes in the sealing flange.
(e) Secure rotor with sealing flange (48), locking platas (47) and bolts (46). Tighten bolts 140
to 160 inch pounds torque. Do not bend locking píate tabs at this time. Remove torque
ad/ustmení fixture LTCJ962.
(f) Using wire gage LTCT14807 measure between first power turbine aft blade root and sec-
ond power turbine forward nozzle inner shroud. Clearance shall be 0.065 to 0.130 inch.
(g) Using wire gage LTCT14807 measure between first power turbine blade tip and second
power turbine nozzle outer shroud. Clearance shall be 0.062 to 0.077 inch.
(h) If clearances in steps (f) and (g) are not within limits, remove first power turbine wheel
(see 72-40-00, paragraph 2.A.(17)). Seleot approphate spacer (58) from Table 201.
When this spacer is changed second stage power turbine rotor tip and axial clearances
must be rechecked. (See paragraph 2.D.)
(11) Altérnate to (8A): Establish clearance between first stage power turbme rotor and seoond stage
power turbine nozzle (see Dimensión G, Figure 210) as follows:
(a) Plaoe locating button bar LTCT153 on flange of combustión chamber housing.
(b) Using a vernier depth gage, measure from bar to outer shroud of second power turbine
nozzle (Dimensión A).
(c) Using a vernier depth gage, measure from bar to power turbine spacer (53, Figure 209).
(See Dimensión B, Figure 210.)
(d) Subtract Dimensión B from Dimensión A. Result is Dimensión C.
(e) Place first stage power turbine rotor (48A, Figure 209) on bench with forward face down.
Position locating button bar LTCT153 on blade disc.
(f) Using a vernier depth gage, measure from bar to spacer surface. (See Dimensión D,
Figure 210.)
Page 220
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
XA-73S*J39
Determining Clearance Between First Stage Power Turbine Rotor Assembly

and Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle Assembly
Figure 210
Page 221
72-40-00 Sepl 30/02
(g) Using a vernier depth gage, measure from bar to shrouded tip of highest blade (Dimen-
sión E).
(h) Subtract Dimensión E from Dimensión D. Result is Dimensión F.
(i) Subtract Dimensión F from Dimensión C. Result is Dimensión G.
(j) Dimensión G musí be within 0.062 inch mínimum to 0.077 inch máximum. If desired
Dimensión is not obtained, spacer is required to position second stage power turbine
nozzle.
NOTE: Spacer is selected in paragraph 2-D. Refer to that size before

replacing spacer.
Shimming of the second stage power turbine nozzle will affect the
axial clearance between the second stage power turbine nozzle
and the first stage power turbine wheel, the axiaí clearance
between the second power turbine rotor and second power
turbine nozzle, and second power turbine rotor tip clearance.
(k) Select and instan necessary spacer (58, Figure 209). (See Table 201.). Instan ring (57).
second stage power turbine nozzle (56) and temporarily secure with four 1/4 x 28 UNF
bolts in same position from which removed and pins (54). Space bolts equally. Jorque as
required.
Table 201. Spacer Thickness
Parí Number Thickness
1-140-303-T)1 0.022 to 0.028 inch
1-140-303-02 0-029 lo 0.035 inch
1-140-303-03 0.036 to 0.044 inch
(12) Remove bolts and washers installed in preceding step (3).
(13) Instan torque adjustment fixture LTCT962 into rear of exhaust diffuser assembly and engage
tangs of locking píate assembly with slots m bearing retainer nut. Secure píate assembly with
three bolts. Replace combustor turbine assembly on bench with exhaust diffuser rear face
down.
(14) Instan packing (31) over end of power turbine rotor shaft.
72-40-00 sS
HoneyweII “,NTE.ANCE^MANUAL
(15) Position (irst stage power turbina rotor (48A, Figure 209) over end of power turbine rotor shaft.
Lócate yellow “H" on dtsc face, 180 degrees from punch mark (or other mark) on power turbine
shaft. Align bolt holes.
NOTE; Prior to msta/lation, apply arttiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Table

203) to bolts (46).
Make sure Ihaf (ocking plates do not cover ttie three small air bleed
holes in the sealing flange.
To instan first stage power turbine nozzle, checking axial clearances

using wire gages LTCT14807, see step (26).
(16) Secure rotor with sealing flange (48). locking plates (47) and bolts (46). Tighten bolts 140 to
160 inch pounds torque. Do not bend locking píate tabs at this time. Remove torque aOjust-
ment fixture LTCT962.
(17) Establish clearance between first stage power turbine nozzle and shrouded tip of first stage
power turbine rotor blades (see Dimensión D. Figure 211) as follows:
(a) Place locating button bar LTCT153 on flange of combustión chamber housing.
(b) Using a vernier deptfi gage, measure from bar to ring (57, Figure 209) installed on
combustión housing flange. (See Dimensión A. Figure 211,)
(c) Using a vernier depfh gage, measure from bar to shrouded tip of highest first stage power
turbine blades (Dimensión B).
(d) Subtract Dimensión B from Dimensión A. Resulí is Dimensión C.
(e) Place first stage power turbine nozzle (45, Figure 209) on bench with forward face down.
Position locating button bar LTCT153 on aft flange of nozzle.
(f) Using a vernier depth gage, measure from bar to outer shroud. (See Dimensión E, Figure
211.)
(g) Subtract thickness of locating bar from Dimensión E.
(h) Subtract Dimensión C from dimensión arrived at in precedíng step (g). Resulf ís
Dimensión D.
Page 223
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Determining Clearance Between First Stage Power Turbine Nozzle and í%?tor Assemblies
Figure 211
Page 224
72-40-00 Sepl 30/02
HoneyweII ÂINT^MANUAL
(i) Dimensión D must be within 0.063 inch mínimum lo 0.078 inch máximum. (í desired di-
mensión is not obtained, spacer is required lo position first stage power turbme nozzle.
Selecí necessafy space: (55. Figure209). (SeeTable 201.)
(18) Establish tip clearance between first stage power turbine rotor and first stage power turbme
nozzle. (See paragraph. 2.C.)
NOTE: Bolts (32) may not extend through retaining nuts on exhaust diffuser.
(19) Position spacer (55, Figure 209), selected in preceding step (15), ring (57). Iristall four equally
spaced bolts (32) through spacer (55), ring (57) and into exhaust diffuser.
(20) Position combustor turbine assembly at 45 degree angle and support it in this position.
(21) Position dial mdioator against a point just inboard of first stage power turbine blade roots.
Roíate power turbine assembly and record runout. Runout must be within 0.004 inch TIR.
Record runout.
(22) If runout is not within limits, loosen and re-torque bolts (46).
(23) Reposition combustor turbine assembly on bench.
(24) Bend locking píate (47) tabs against bolts (46).

(25) Make sure that proper spacer (55), selected in preceding step (15) is installed. Remove bolts
(32) installed in step (17).
(26) Instan first stage power turbine nozzle as follows:
(a) Position combustor turbine assembíy at 45 degree angle and support it in this position.
(b) Position dial indicator against a point just inboard of first stage power turbine blade roots.
Rotate power turbine assembly and record runout. Runout musí be within 0.004 inch TIR.
Record runout.
(c) If runout is not within limits, loosen and re-torque bolts (46).
(d) Reposition combustor turbine assembly on bench.
(e) Bend locking píate (47) tabs against bolts (46).
(f) Remove four bolts and three pins installed in step (1l)(k).
(g) Seiect nominal size spacer (55, Figure 209, Table 201). Install spacer with three pins
removed in preceding step.
(h) Install first power turbine nozzle over first power turbine rotor into ring (57). Secure in
place with four equally spaced bolts (32). Torque bolts.
(i) Using wire gages LTCT14807, check clearance D and F (see Figure 211). Clearance shall
be as folJows;
Page 225
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAÍNTENANCEMANUAL
D Limits: 0.063 to 0.075 mch.
F Limits: 0.095 to 0.150 inch.
If clearance D and F are not within limits, select new spacer and repeat preceding.
(27) Instan first stage power turbine nozzle (45) over power turbme rotor and align bolt boles.
(28) Apply antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Tabie 203) to bolts (32).
(29) Secure first stage power turbine nozzle with bolts (32) and locking plates (33, 34).
(30) Insert thermocouple harness assembly lead through exit hole in flanges of first stage power
turbine nozzle assembly (45) and exhaust diffuser (22). Secure lead to flanges with two bolts
(35). Tighten, as required, and lockwire.
(31) Pótate combustor turbine assembly to horizontal position with combustión chamber drain valve
at 6 o'clock position. Using feeler gage, check clearance between first stage power turbine
nozzle and seating flange. tf clearance is tess than 0.005 inch, rework nozzle using hall round
file to obtain 0.015 inch minimum clearance.
(32) Bend tabs of locking plates (33, 34) against bolts (32) and stake securely.
CAUTIQN: TO PREVEN! OlL LEAKS, POWER TURBINE OiL TUBES MUST

SEAT PERFECTLY. IF SEATING IS STILL NOT PERFECT
REPLACE
TUBES AND REPEAT FOLLOWING STEP
NOTE: A perfect seal will be indicated by an unbroken ring on the tapered seat
of the power turbine tube.
Do not lubrícate threads on power turbine oil tubes (20).
(33) Lightiy coat tapered seats of two power turbine tubes (20) with iron blue pigment (72-00-00,
54, Table 203). Install tubes into top and bottom struts of exhaust diffuser and thread finger
tight. Remove tubes and inspect seats.
(34) If seating is imperfect, check tubes for deán connectors. Interchange tubes and repeat
preceding step (33).
(35) Tighten each power turbine oil tube to 100 to 110 inch pounds torque and lockwire.
(36) Reinstall combustión chamber liner. (See 72-40-03.)
(37) Position combustor turbine assembly on work bench with exhaust diffuser side up and remove
bolts and washers installed in step (3).
(38) Position fire shieid (19) on combustión chamber housing rear flange and align pin in combus-
tión chamber housing with hole in fire shieid assembly. If oil tubes are not concentric with holes
in fire shieid, remove fire shieid and file as required.
(39) Push thermocouple harness lead through firo shieid access hole.
Page 226
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “"NT„MANUAL
(40) To make sure of proper alignment of combustión chamber liner with firesbieid and combustión
chamber housing, position combustión chamber alignment fixture LTCT4174 through these
components. Remove fixture.
CAUTION: USE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS.
(41) Instan seáis (15) on fuel nozzles. Install sealing gasket (17) on mam fuel manifold. Carefully
position two fuel manifoid assemblies (18) over fire shieid and align fuel nozzles with port holes.
Install fuel manifoid assemblies and secure with boits (14). Tighten bolts as required and lock-
wire.
(42) Install starting fuel nozzles. (See 73-10-03.)
(43) Apply Molykote Type Z (72-00-00, 15, Table 203) to oil stralner housing adapter (9).
(44) Install strainer (10) into adapter (9) at 12 o'clock position and tighten finger tight. Install oii
strainer housing adapter (9) and packing (11 ¡ into oil tube. Tighten adapter 80 to 90 pound
inches torque and lockwire.
(45) Apply Molykote Type Z (72-00-00, 15, Table 203) to connector (12).
(46) Install connector (12) and packing (13) into power turbine tube at 6 o'clock position. Tghten
connector 80 to 90 inch pounds torque and lockwire.
(47) Insert lead of thermooouple harness (42) through cover assembly (43); then install cover
assembly onto fire shieid (19). Secure cover assembly with two screws (44).
(48) Install support cone assembly (8) over fire shieid and exhaust diffuser. Position starting fueiing
manifoid bracket at 12 o'clock position.
(49) Deleted.
(50) Deleted.
NOTE: Lead shall bottom in oonnector.
(51) Open cover of conneotor (38) and install lead of thermocouple harness (42).
NOTE: To make sure proper seating of the support cone on the combustión
chamber, tap the V-band coupling assemblies starting at the middie
and moving toward the bolts at the ends. Tighten the nuts. Repeat
tapping and tightening until the nuts cannot be easily drawn up further.
(52) Position V-band assembly over support cone and combustión chamber housing flange with
attaching ends at approximately 4 and 10 o'clock positions as viewed from rear. Secure V-
band assembly by one of the following methods. (See Figure 209.)
(a) For V-band assembly (7), secure with bolts (3), spacers (2, 4j and nuts (t).
(b) For V-band assemblies (7A), secure with bolts {3A} and nuts (lA).
Page 227
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
(53) Tighten V-band coupling nuts to 200 inch pounds torque. Seat clamps by tapping with a sott
faced mallet. Release torque to zero inch pounds torque. Retighten 145 to 155 inch pounds
torque. Make sure an equal gap, plus or minus 3/32 inch, exists between V-band coupling
assembly ends. Lockwire nuts and bolts.
C. Establish First Stage Power Turbine Rotor Tip Clearance
(1) Using 0-020 inch copper wire and tape (72-00-00, 64, Table 203). determine actual tip
clearances:
(a) Measure thickness of tape.
NOTE: Apply enough thickness of tape on bfade tips so fhat the

thickness of wire plus a single layer of tape on top of the wire
equals the mimmum tip clearance of 0.025 inch.
(b) Secure short length of copper wire on tips of power turbine blades at three locations 120
degrees apart. Place one short length of wire on forward tip of blade and one on aft tip of
the same blade.
(2) Paint tape with iron blue pigment (72-00-00, 54, Table 203).
(3) Remove four bolts (32, Figure 209) and three pins (54) installed in ring (57).
(4) Instan spacer (55) (thickness determined in paragraph 2.B.(17)) on combustión chamber flange
and align bolt holes. Install three pins (54). Pins shall be selectively fit to obtain 0.0005 to
0-01OL inch loose fit. Use three pins of same dash number. (See Table 202.)
NOTE: Use care not to rub against tape.
(5) Carefully position first stage power turbine nozzle (45, Figure 209) over first stage power turbine
rotor (7). Align bolt holes.
(6) Secure nozzle to exhaust diffuser with four equally spaced bolts. Tighten bolts eveníy to proper
torque.
(7) Roíate power turbine rotor one revolution, using hand crank LTCT4650 fitted into spiine of
second power turbine rotor.
Table 202. Selective Pin Diameters
Part Number Shank Diameter
1-190-121-01 0.2495 to 0.2505
1-190-121-02 0.2510 to 0.2515
1-190-121-03 0.2520 to 0.2525
1-190-121-04 0.2530 to 0.2535
72-40-00 Page 228

Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(8) Remove bolts that secure first stage power turbina nozzle and carefully remove nozzle.
(9) Check tape for signs of rubbing. If rubb/ng is not evident, tip clearance is accepíabie. If
rubbing is noteú, proceed to step (10).
(10) If rubbing is evident, determine tip clearance as follows:
(a) Select tape from each diameter which has greatest rub.
(b) H iron blue pigment has been removed but tape has not been cut, tip clearance is equal
to diameter of wire plus total thickness of tape used at that position.
(c) If tape has been cut completely through but wire has not been damaged, tip clearance is
equaí to diameter of wire plus thickness of tape under wire.
(d) If tape has been cut completely through and wire appears damaged, measure diameter of
wire. The tip clearance is equal to mínimum wire diameter plus thickness of tape under
wire.
(11) Tip clearance determined in preceding step (10) shal! be 0.025 inch minimum. If desired clear-
ance is not obtained, recheck alignmení and íorquing of bearing housing to exhaust diffuser or
replace nozzle.
(12) Remove all installed tapes and wires.
D. Establish Second Stage Power Turbine Rotor Tip Clearance
NOTE: Altérnate method using wire gages is in step (8).

(1) Using 0.020 inch copper wire and tape (72-00 - 00, 64. Table 203) determine actual tip
clearance:
(a) Measure thickness of tape.
NOTE: Apply enough thicknesses of tape on blade tips so that the

thickness of the wire plus a single layer of tape on top oi the wire
equals the minimum tip clearance of 0.025 inch.
(b) Secure short length of copper wire on tips of power turbine blades at three locations 120
degrees apart. Place one short length of wire on forward tip of blade and one on aft tip of
the same blade.
(2) Painí tape wiíh iron blue pigment (72-00-00, 54, Table 203).
(3) Place spacer of 0.032 inch nominal thickness (58, Figure 209 and Table 201) and ring (57,
Figure 209) on combustión chamber flange and aügn bott holes. Install three pins (54), Select
pins to obtain 0.0005 to 0.001 inch loose fit. Píns shall be the same dash number. Record
thickness for use in paragraph 2.B.(11)(k).
(4) Apply antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Table 203) to bolts (25).
(5) Secure ring and spacer with four equally spaced bolts (14). Tighten bolts evenly to proper
torque.
Page 229
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Use care not to rub against tape.
(6) Carefully position second stage power turbine nozzle (56) over power turbine rotor and into ring
(57).
(7) While maintaining downward pressure on nozzle rotate power turbine rotor one revolution,
using hand crank LTCT4650 installed in second stage power turbine rotor.
(8) Using wire gages LTCT14807, check axial clearance between inner shroud ot second power
turbine nozzle and second power turbine rotor blade root. ümits are 0.063 to 0.153 inch.
Check clearance between second power turbine blade tips and outer shroud of second power
turbine nozzle. Limits are 0.060 to 0.186 inch. II limits are not met, replace spacer selected in
step (3). Repeat steps (5) through (8).
(9) Carefully remove nozzle and check tape for signs of rubbing. If rubbing is not evident, tip clear-
ance is acceptable. If rubbing is noted, proceed to step (10).
(10) If rubbing is evident, determine tip clearance as follows:
(a) Select tape from each diameter which has greatest rub.
(b) If iron blue pigment has been removed, but tape has not been cut, tip clearance is equal
lo diameter of wire plus totai thickness of tape used at that position.
(c) If tape has been cut completely through, but wire has not been damaged, tip clearance is
equal to diameter of wire plus thickness of tape under wire.
(d) If tape has been cut completely through and wire appears damaged, measure diameter of
wire. Tip clearance is equal to mínimum wire diameter plus. Thickness of tape under the
wire.
(11) Tip clearance determmed in preceding step (10) shall be 0.025 inch mimmum. If desired clear-
ance is not obtained, recheck aiignment and torquing of bearing housing to exhaust diffuser or
replace nozzle.
(12) Remove all installed tapes and wires.
3. Inspection/Chnck Combustor Turbine Assemblv
A. Inspect Combustor Turbine Assembly
(1) Visually inspect the combustor turbine assembly.
(2) Perform a power shaft bolt flange measurement. (See paragraph I.A. (18) through (20)).
(3) Using a 0.020 inch feeler gage, perform a tip clearance of the second stage gas producen
(4) Using a 0.025 inch diameter wire. perform a tip clearance check of the second stage power
turbine rotors.
Page 230
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
4. Cleanina/Paintina Combustor Turbine Assemblv
A. Clean Combustor Turbine Assembly
(1) Referió SPM. 70-00-00.
Page 231/232
72-40-00 Sept 30/02
Honeywell MA,NTENAN«MANUAL
V--BAND CQUPLING ASSEMBLY. QIL STRAINER HOURING ADAPTER. CONNECTOR,
POWER TURBINE TUBES AND FIRF SHIELD ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1- Insoection/Check V-Band Couplinq Assembiv. Oil Strainer Housina Adaoter, Connector, Power Turbine
Tubes and Pire Shieid Assembly
A. Inspect All Parts
(1) Visually inspect threaded parts for crossed or damaged threads.
(2) Visually inspect parís for cracks or distortion. (See Figure 201.)
(3) Visually inspect fire shieid for cracks originafing from the lockplate areas. Límits are as follows:
NOTE: Circumferential cracks appearing on both sides in forward area of
lockplate indícate cracking beneath surface. These cracks shall
be considered as affecting the wlOth (one side) of lockplate.
(a) Cracks extending along any two sides of either lockplate are acceptable. Cracks extend-
ing along more than two sides are not aliowed.
(b) Cracks up to 1 inch in length are acceptable without repair provided limit of preceding
step (a) is not exceeded.
NOTE: Cracks emanating from below forward area of íockplate need not
be stop drilled unless visible portion is greaterthan 1 inch in
length-
(c) Cracks between 1 and 3 inches in length are acceptable provided íhey are stop drilled
and limit of proceeding step (a) is not exceeded.
2. Cleanina/Painting V-Band Coupling Assembly Oil Strainer Housina Adapten Connector. Power Turbine
Tubes and Fire Shieid Assembly
A. Clean All Parts
(1) Clean all parts using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203).
(2) Clean attaching hardware using vapor degreasing method (refer to SPM, 70-15-01, SP C201)
or dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
Page 20i
72-40-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ------
XA-133B 129
Pire Shieid Crack Limits

Figure 201
Page 202
72-40-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII --«MANUAL
3- Aporoved Recairs V-Band Couolina Assemblv, Oii Strainer Housing Adaoter Connector, Power Turbine
Tubes and Fire Shieid Assemblv
A. Repair All Parts
Refer to Repair Manual. 72-09-30 for all repairs.
TO Af\ Page 203/204

7 2 “ 4 0 “ ü l Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ‘Â.NTENANCE^MANUAL
EXHAl JST DIFFUSER SUPPORT CONE ASSEMBi Y - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Exhaust Diffiiser SuPDort Cone Ass^mblv
NOTE: Disassemble the exhaust difíuser support cone assembly oniy as required to
correct visible damage.
A. Disassemble Support Cone Assembly
(1) Cut and remove lockwire trom botts (3. Figure 201).
(2) Remove bolts that secure retainers (1,2). Remove retainers.

NQTE: Support assembly must be tagged and flanges indexed for support
location. Supports are not interchangeable.
(3) Remove pins (9) from support assemblies (4). Remove support assembües from flanges
( 10 . 11 ) .
(4) Remove connector (72-40-00, 38, Figure 209).
(5) Repeat preceding steps (1) through (3) for remaíning support assemblies (5, 6, 7. 8, Figure
201) .
B. Assemble Support Cone Assembly
NOTE: Refer to tags for support assembly locations.
(1) Position support assembly (6, Figure 201) on flanges (10, 11).
(2) Instali pins (9) into support assembly.
(3) Position retainers (1, 2) on support assembly (4) and secure with bolts (3).
(4) Lockwire bolts.

(5) If removed, instali connector (72-40-00, 38, Figure 209) on bracket on difíuser support cone
(8) and secure with screws (39) and (40) and nuts (41).
(6) Connect thermocouple lead assembly (42) to connector (38).
(7) Repeat preceding steps (1) through (3) for remaining support assemblies (5. 6, 7. 8, Figure
201) .
Page 201
72-40-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Exhaust Diffuser Support Cone Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
72-40-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. RETAINER 7. SUPPORT
2. RETAINER 8. ASSEMBLY
SUPPORT
3. BOLT 9. ASSEMBLY
PIN
4. SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 10. REAR FLANGE
5. SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 11. FRONT FLANGE
6. SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
Page 203
72-40-02 Sept 30/02
Honeyfvell MA,NTENAN™
2. Inspection/Check Exhaust Diffuser SuDDort Cone Assemblv
A. Inspect Support Cone Assembiy
(1) Visually inspect all parts for cracks and distortion.
(2) Inspect all threaded parts for crossed or damaged threads.
3- Cleaning/Painting Exhaust Diffuser Support Cone Assemblv
A. Clean Support Cone Assembiy
(1) Clean all parts using dry cleaning solvent {72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
4. Approved Reoairs Exhaust Diffuser Supoort Cone Assemblv
A. Repair Support Cone Assembiy
(1) Repair damaged threads (refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409).
(2) Replace a damaged or distorted cone.
Page 204
72-40-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
COMBUSTION CHAMRFR ASSFMRLY - MAINTFNANCE PRACTICES
1. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Combustión Chamber Assemhly
A. Disassemble Combustión Chamber Assembly

(1) Straighten tabs on keywashers (4, Figure 201), and remove nuts (5) and keywashers that
secure combustión chamber liner assembly (1) to combustión chamber housmg assembly (3).
Remove liner assembly.
(2) Remove springs (2) from six liner assembly studs.
(3) Remove starting íuel hose assemblies and check filfer valve. (See 73- 10-07.)
B. Reassemble Combustión Chamber Assembly
(1) Instan starting fuel hose assemblies and check tilter valve.
(2) Place springs 1 -300-278-01 on six studs of combustión chamber liner assembly (1) and
retain with petrolatum (72- 00-00, 53, Tab/e 203).
CAUTION: DO NOT FORCE LINER INTO HOUSING. CHECK AND
REPOSITION STUDS IF REQUIRED.
(3) Roíate all studs to face keyways inward and install liner assembly mto combustión chamber
housing assembly (3) so that TOP index on housing and TOP index on liner are aligned. Make
sure that stud keyways engage with tabs in housing.
(4) Instan keywashers (4) and nuts (5) on liner assembly studs. Do not tighten nuts.
{5} To make sure proper alignment of combustión chamber liner assembly (1) with housing
assembly (3), Install two alignment fixtures LTCT4174 on housing assembly.
NOTE: Protrusion of stud threads beyond nut is not required.
(6) Tighten nuts on studs 20 to 30 inch pounds torque. Bend tabs of keywashers to secure nuts.
(7) Remove alignment fixtures LTCT4174.

HoneyweII
1. COMBUSTION CHAMBER LINER 3. COMBUSTION CHAMBER HOUSING

ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
2, SPRING 4. KEYWASHER
5. NUT
Combustión Chamber Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
72-40-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
COMBUSTION CHAMRFR IINFR ASSFMRIY - MAINTFNANCE PRACTICES
1. Inspection/Check Combustión Chamber Liner Assemblv
A. Inspect Líner Assembly
(1) Inspect iiner assembly for cracks in all areas. (See 72-40-03, Figure 201.)
(a) Any number of 1/8 inch long cracks are allowed in liner at conical section lüuvers.
(b) Any number of cracks progressing to a louver are acceptable in each fuel nozzle area
provided that each cracked louver is separated from the nejct cracked louver by an
unaffected louver. (See Figure 201.)
(c) One of four weldments may be cracked on each fuel nozzle seal guide.
(2) Inspect inner and outer liner for cracks.
(a) Cracks between two holes are acceptable without repair except in areas shown. Ten non-
adjacent cracks per assembly are allowed. (See Figure 202, Sheet 2.)
CAUTION: DO NOT STOP DRILL CRACKS.
(b) Divergent cracks originating at the base of the slots on the inner and outer iiners are
acceptable up to 3/4 inch on all slots. Oniy one crack shall be allowed per slot.
(c) A total of Uve cracks up to l inch in lengtb are acceptable on both inner and outer Iiners,
provided they are nonconvergent, tight lipped, and there is no possibility of material fall-
out.
(d) Cracks in up to 30 resistance welds are acceptable without repair in each liner to liner or
liner to flange weidment provided no more than four adjacent tabs are affecled.
Page 201
72-40-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
ACCEPTABLE CRAC<S
Combustión Chamber Liner Acceptable Crack Limits

Figure 201
Page 202
72-40-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Figure 202 (Sheet 1 of 2) Deleted
Page 203
72-40-04 Sept 30/02
ôneywell
MANUAL
ib3~L~7Q3
LíN'Eft
Ñor
E£HM(TT
£O
' 'M3 ij.
72-40^04
^Page204
êpf 30/02
HoneyweII
CAUTION: BURNING, OISTORTION, OR UNEVEN CARBON BUILDUP IS AN
INDICATION OF MALFUNCTION OR CLOGGING OF FUEL
SYSTEM
COMPONENTS. INVESTIGATE AND REPLACE
MALFUNCTiONING
OR CLOGGED COMPONENTS.
NOTE: Hot spots, indicated by metal discoloration, are acceptable provided

buckiing is not evident.
(3) Inspect inner and outer liners for burned and distorted areas. Burn through shail not exceed
1/2 square inch per assembly,
(4) Inspect inner and outer liners for warpage or buckiing. Modérate warpage or buckiing is
acceptable provided no interference of mating parís occurs.
(5) Inspect inner dimpies for wear. Wear on any number of dímples is permitted.
(6) Inspect liner brackets and studs for wear; studs for thread damage.
(7) Inspect aír gaps and hoíes for clogging and clearance. (See Figure 203.)
(8) Seal guides for damage or wear. Worn or damaged seal guides are not acceptable. Replace.
(9) Spot welds between deflector and outer wa(( for cracks.
(a) No more than six broken welds per row.
(b) Each defect area musí be separated by three unbroken welds.
(c) No more than 30 broken spot welds per liner are allowed.
2. Cleaning/Painting Combustión Chamber Liner Assembly
A. Ciean Liner Assembly

(1) Ciean liner assembly (see 72-40-03, 1, Figure 201) using dry cleaning solvení. (See
72- 00-00, 62, Table 203).
(2) If necessary, use solvent immersion method. (Refer to SPM, 70-15-02, SP C202-)
(3) If further cleaning is required, use vapor blasting (liquid honing) method. (Refer to SPM,
70-15-05, SP C205.)
Page 205
72-40-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L~703
SECTlON
NOTE 1
A I R G AP
NOTES >TyPlCAL !8 PLACES'
I 0 07S
o.oso
2
3 0. !00
ALL OIMfNSIONS ARE IN INCHEb
VigW ^
XA-1338-133
Combustión Chamber Liner Air Gap Limits

Figure 203
Page 206
72-40-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
3. Approved Repairs Combustión Chamber Liner Assemblv
A. Repair Liner Assembly
(1) Replace liner assembly if burn through exceeds 1/2 square inch or crack progression will cause
material fallou!.
{2} Replace liner if cracks exceed limits.
(3) Replace liner assembly if buckiing and distortion exceed 0.100 inch from original profile.
(4) Reclean liner assembly if air gaps or boles are clogged. Adjust clearances if requíred. (See
Figure 203.)
(5) Replace liner bracket or stud if wear exceeds one quarter of original thickness.
(6) Using gapping and inspection tool LTCT13022, LTCT13023, or LTCT13024 {detaíís of
LTCT13020) adjust air gap as required.
(7) Repair damaged threads on studs. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.) If threads are
darnaged beyond repair, replace studs as follows:
(a) Remove retainer clip (1, Figure 204) that secures stud (2) to bracket.
(b) Remove damaged stud and replace with new stud having a like part number. Install
retainer clip.
(8) Deleted.
(9) Deleted,
72-40-04 sZfloZ
T53-L-703
Figure 204. DeleteQ
Page 208
72-40-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Seal Guide Assembly 1-130-790-01

Figure 205
Page 209
72-40-04 Sepí 30/02
T53-L-703
Figure 206. Deleted
Page 210
72-40-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
COMBUSTION CHAMBER HOLJSING ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Inspection/Check Combustión Chamber Housina Assembly
A. Inspect Combustión Chamber Housing
(1) Inspect housing assembly (see 72-40-03, Figure 201) for nicks, burrs and scratches. Nicks.
burra and scratches are not allowed. Repair such defects.
(2) Inspect housing assembly for damaged threads. Damaged threads are not allowed. Repair
threads.
(3) Inspect housing assembly for cracks and distortion. Cracks or distortion are not allowed.
Replace housing assembly if either such defect is evidení.
(4) Inspect for missing or damaged liner supports. Missing or damaged liner supports are not
allowed.
(5) Inspect combustión chamber drain valve mounting boss for cracks or damage. Replace
housing assembly if cracked or warped.
2. Cleaning/Painting Combustión Chamber Housina Assembly
A. Ciean Combustión Chamber Housing
(1) Ciean housing assembly (see 72-40-03, Figure 201) using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00,
62, Table 203).
(2) If necessary, ciean housing assembly using solvent immersion method. (Refer to SPM,
70-15-02, SP C202.)
3. Aporoved Reoairs Combustión Chamber Housina Assembly
A. Repair Combustión Chamber Housing
(1) Blend repair nicks. burrs and scratches. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.)
(2) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.) If threads are beyond repair.
repiace housing assembly.
(3) Deleted.
(4) Replace housing assembly, if cracked or distorted or if threads are damaged beyond repair.
Figure 201. Deleted

Figure 202. Deleted
Figure 203. Deleted
72-40-05
HoneyweII
EXHAUST DIFRiSFR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Insoection/Check Exhaust Diffuser
A- Inspect exhaust diffuser

(1) Inspect all areas (see Figure 201) for nicks, dents and distortion. Minor nicks, dents and distor-
tion are acceptable without repair provided no interlerence of mating parts occur. (See Figure
202.)
(2) Inspect for major distortion. Damage associated with distortion is cause for rejection of exhaust
diffuser.
(3) Using an approved marking pencil (72-00-00, 47, Table 203) mark ali cracks that exceed
máximum allowable limits. Repair.
(4) Inspect outer cone for cracks. No cracks allowed. (See Figure 202.)
(5) inspect mid and inner cones for cracks. Any number of tight lipped nonconvergent cracks up
to t/2 inch in (ength, which do not affect weldments, are acceptable. Circumferential cracks
adjacent to mounting flange are not permitted.
(6) Inspect mid and inner cones for burning. No burn through is permitted. Replace exhaust
diffuser.
(7) Inspect bearing housing support for cracks. Two tight lipped, nonconvergent cracks up to 1/2
inch in length, which do not affect weldments, are acceptable without repair,
(8) Inspect outer struts and outer strut fairings for nicks, dents, cracks and burning,
NOTE: Dents that deform an outer strut and produce a gap greater than 1/6
inch between outer strut and outer strut fairing shall be inspected
further for cracks.
(a) Repair nicks and dents which could prevent expansión movemenf of struts and fairings
(b) One crack per strut fairing is allowed up ío 1-1/2 inches in length wilhout repair. If limits
are exceeded, replace exhaust diffuser.
(c) No burn throughs are permitted. Replace diffuser.
Page 201
72-40-06 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Exhausl Dtffuser
Figure 201
Page 202
40-06 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
o
J
XS!®5-
kim
oSiigg
> UJ < S ^
^ CJ T O “
<
s
<
Exhaust Diffuser- Damaged and Repaired

Figure 202
Page 203
72-40-06 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Ends of cracks shall be stop drilled except those in outer strut fairings.
(See Figure 202.}
(9) Inspecí inner strut flanges for cracks. Two cracks, 1/2 inch in length, are acceptabie without
repair on each inner strut outer flange.
(10) Inspect inner struts (or cracks. No cracks allowed.
(11) Inspect mounting flange for damaged or missing nuts. Replace damaged or missing nuts.
2. Cleanina/Painting Exhaust Diffuser
Olean exhaust diffuser using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
3. Aporoved Recairs Exhaust Diffuser
A. Deleted
Figure 203. Deleted

T53-L-703
COMBUSTION CHAMBER DFFLFCTOR ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Insoection/Check Combustión Chamber Deflector Assemblv
A. Inspect Combustión Chamber Dellector Assembly
(1) Inspect for circumferential cracks at seam weid of suppori to deflector. Cracks totaling 180
degrees or less are acceptable.
(2) Support for circumferential cracks: Cracks totaling 90 degrees or less are acceptable. For
cracks in bolt hole circle: Cracks emanating from bott boles lo the center of the deflector are
acceptable. For radial cracks in the deflector (Area 1): Five cracks, 1 inch or less. Converging
cracks not allowed.
2. Cleanina/Paintinn Combustión Chamber Deflector Assemblv
A. Clean Combustión Chamber Deflector Using Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203)
3. Approved Reoairs Combustión Chamber Deflector Assemblv
A. Deleted
Figure 201. Deleted

Table 201. Deleted
Page 201/202
72-40-07 Sept 30/02
Hone>iiêll MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
EXHAUST THERMOCQUPI F HARNESS - DESCRIPTIDN AND QPERATION
1- Description and Qoeration
An exhaust thermocouple harness, consisting of alumel contacts. Chromel and alumel contacta are set in
moulded fluorosificone. The thermocouple harness assembly is secured to the first stage turbine nozzle.
The thermocouple connecting lead is inserted through the exhaust diffuser and attached to The connector
on the cone support assembly. This transmita exhaust gas temperaturas to the cockpit.
Page 1/2
72-40-08 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ‘Â'N™AN„UAL
EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLE HARNFRR ASSFMRIY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICFS
1. Removal/Installation Exhaust Thermocouple Harnes!=;
A. Remove Exhaust Thermocouple Harness (See 72-40-00, Paragraph 2.)
2- Inspection/Check Exhaust Thermocouple Harness

CAUTION: EXTREME CAUTION SHALL BE TAKEN WHEN HANDLING THE
THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY EXCESSIVE FLEXING OF THE
ASSEMBLY,
SPECIFICALLYATTHE PROBE LOCATIONS, CAN RESULT |N INTERNAL
BREAKAGE AND SHORTJNG, NEVER USE PLIERS OR SHARP
OBJECTS
ON PROBES OR ADJACENT HARNESS.
A. Inspect Measured Gas Thermocouple Harness (See Figure 201.)
(1) Inspect thermocouple ends for bends or breaks.
(2) Inspect harness for wear, fraying.

(3) Inspect mating end for corrosión. Remove corrosión using crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table
201) and dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
NOTE: A thermocouple assembly that fulfills requirements of the functional

check but has chafe damage (not exceeding limits shown in Figure
202) may be repaired as instructed (see paragraph 4.) Assemblies hav-
ing damage exceeding such limits must be replaced.
(4) Perform a functional test of the assembly (see paragraph 2.B.) to make sure of absence of
shorting and internal damage.
B- Check Exhaust Thermocouple Harness
(1) Using Jet Cal tester BH7454 and heaters BH7454AHO, BY7454BH-40, check the accuracy of
the harness by appiying heat to the probes at a temperatura of 1454 to 1490'=F (790 to SIO'C).
(a) Readout tolerance will be ± 10“C from set point on used harneases. Check accuracy
from 1094 to 950^F (590 to GIO'^C).
(b) Using a potential of 250 VDC, megohmmeter, check insulation resistance between all four
circuits and thermocouple sheaíh. and between circuits and connector shell. Mínimum
allowabie insulation resistance shall be 25,000 ohms. If harness fails insulation check,
oven drying is allowed.
Page 201
72-40-08 Sepl 30/02
T53-L-703
ThermocoLiple Hamess Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
72-40-08 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
M-138-S42
Exhaust Thermocouple Assembly - Chafing and Fraying Inspection

Figure 202
Page 203
72-40-08 Sept 30/02
(c) Perform the following checks:
1 Perform individual thermocouple heat check by attaching suitable millivolt readout to

appropriate output connections and appiying heat to the individual probes. All
heated probes should atfect readout of indicator.
2 (ntíividuai Circuit resistance between the chramel terminal and alumel terminal of Cir-
cuit A, B and C shall be 2.1 ohms and 2.4 ohms when measured at 65 to 75T (18.3
to 24^C).
(2) Inspect thermocouple for air leakage.
Flange and tube assembly must pass air leakage test of 1000 cc/minute máximum at room
temperatura with a pressure of 20 psi.
(3) Reject thermocouple harness assembly that does not meet requirements.
3. Cleaning/Painting Exhaust Thermocouple Harness
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE HARNESS IN SOLVENT. SOLVENT MAY CAUSE

MALFUNCTION OF THERMOCOUPLE PROBES AND DETERIORATION
OF
INTERNAD WIRING INSULATION.
A. Clean Exhaust Thermocouple Harness
Wipe harness clean, usmg a clean lint free cloth dampened with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62,
Table 203). After cfeaning, wipe with a clean. dry, (int free cloth to remove residual solvent.
4. Reoair of Exhaust Thermocouple Harness
CAUTION: EXTREME CAUTION SHALL BE TAKEN WHEN HANDLING THE

THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY EXCESSIYE FLEXING OF
THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY. SPECIFICALLY AT PROBE LOCATIONS
CAN RESULT IN INTERNAL BREAKAGE AND SHORTING. NEVER USE
PLIERS OR SHARP OBJECTS ON PROBES OR ADJACENT HARNESS.
A. Repair Exhaust Thermocouple Harness
(1) Remove projecting wire strands of braid at damaged area.
(2) Using lockwire (72-00-00, 40, Table 203) apply and wind around damaged cable as shown
(see Figure 203). Wrappings should extend 3/8 ínch beyond extremities of tíamage but should
not exceed máximum wrap limit shown.
NOTE: Use care when pulling end C. Pulí oniy far enough to firmly anchor end
A beneath severa! wraps of the wire.
(3) Finish wrap with whip finish technique by inserting wire end A through loop B. Hold A taut
while pulling C to cióse loop. Pelease A and carefuily pulí C until end A is anchored beneath
wrapping. Remove excess wire ends. (See Figure 203.)
(4) Functional test exhaust thermocouple assembly. (See paragraph 2.B.)
Page 204
72-40-08 Sept
30/0
2
T53-L-703
B C
AFTER WINOING, PUT END -A” THROUGH LOOP "B’* PULL END "C”.
Exhaust Thermocoupte Assembly - Repair of Chafad or Frayed Cable Braid

Figure 203
72-40-08
T53-L-703
FIRST RTAGF POWER TURBINE NOZZLE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1- Inspecíion/Check First Staoe Power Turbine Nozzle
A. Inspect First Stage Power Turbine Nozzle

NOTE: The leaOing and trailing edge areas of nozzle vanes (1-190-050-06)
may have been blend repaired by the manufacturer. Blend repairs are
finished to allow no Sharp edges in rework area. Up to three blend re-
pair areas on any one vane may be evident. These blends are on all
new nozzles. Inspection limits shall be applied oniy to those defects
causad by engine operation. Defect limits shaíl be measured, usíng
vane edge as a reference point. Do not measure from any portion of
the factory blend areas.
(1) Visually inspect first stage power turbine nozzle for cracks. Replace nozzle if inspection limits
are exceeded.
(a) Any number of 3/16 inch cracks are acceptable on trailing edge of vanes.
(b) Any number oí 1/8 inch cracks are acceptable on leading edge of vanes.
(c) No inspection is required on inner and outer shroud to vane brazements (see Figure 201).
Cracks are allowed.
(d) Circumferential cracks at inner shroud/seal ring joint up to 1 inch in length (cumulative) at
joint or adjacent to joint are permitted (see Figure 202). In addition, defects at joint or
adjacent to joint, associated with cracks that travel through the inner shroud and into the
Seal ring area, are acceptable up to 5/8 inch in length (either síde) as measured from
radial portion of crack.
(e) A máximum of six inner shroud cracks extending into the seal ring area are allowed up to
2 inches in length provided no turbine rub occurs. (See Figure 203.)
(f) On outer shroud ID and OD, a máximum of eight cracks are allowed that progress axially
and then radially provfded no crack progresses into ilange or seaiing area as shown in
illustration. Three additional cracks exclusive of those that travel to the att seaiing flange
are allowed to progress from vane leading edge areas to the forward flange.
Page 201
72-50-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
AXIAL CRACKS 1/MNCH LONG FROM

TRAILING EDGE ACCEPTABLE
(MAX 10 V ANES)
Inner and Outer Shroud Crack Limits

Figure 201
Page 202
72-50-01 Sept 30/02
Honeyweil MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
Circumferential (nner Shroud Crack Limits

Figure 202
72 — ^0 — 01
OU — UI Sept 30/02
Honeyfvell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
!nner Shroud Crack Limits

Figure 203
72-50-01 sS
HoneyweII
NOTE; Cracks noted in foDowing sleps (g) and (h) are allowed lo be
either parí of or sepárate from preceding step (f) cracking
conditions. When inspecting, consider all possible combinations.
(g) On outer shroud leading edge, six 1/4 inch cracks are allowed. (See Figure 201.)
(h) On outer shroud trailmg edge. ten 1/4 inch cracks are aífowed. (See Figure 201.)
(i) Circumlerential (vane to vane) cracks in outer shroud between three adjacent vanes (máx-
imum of nine vanes) are allowed. (See Figure 201.)
(j) Radial cracks at bolt holes are permitted.
(k) Cracks in seal brazement are not acceptable.
(2) Visually inspect first stage power turbine nozzle for rubs. Axial rubs resulting from contad with
turbine rotor are not permitted.
(3) Visually inspect nozzle sealing area for grooves caused by the sealing rings. Grooves up to
0.020 inch in depth are acceptable for use provided that sharp edges are blended to form a
smooth contour. (See Figure 204.)
(4) Visually inspect vanes for dents, mcks and burrs. Blend repair as required.
(a) A máximum of three nicks or dents are allowed on vane leading edge provided that after
blend repair, depth oí any defect does not exceed 3/32 inch and length does not exceed
1 /8 inch. Separation of defects shall be at least twice the length of the shortest defect af-
ter blend repair. Smooth dents within limits are acceptable without blend repair.
(b) A máximum of three nicks or dents are allowed on vane trailing edge provided that depth
of any defect does not exceed 3/32 inch and length does not exceed 1/8 inch after blend
repair. Separation of defects shall be at least twice the length of the shortest defect after
blend repair. Smooth dents within limits are acceptable without blend repair.
(c) Random nicks and dents on vane airfoil surfaces are acceptable on ali vanes. Blend
repair to remove nicks.
(d) Burrs are acceptable on vane leading and trailing edges. Blend repair to remove burrs.
Page 205
72-50-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
POINTS OF MAXIMUM ALLOWEO CRACK PROGRESSION (B MAX)
Outer Shroud Crack Limits

Figure 204
72-50-01 seS
HoneyweII
(5) Visually inspect nozzle vanes for burns. Burned vanes are not allowed.
2. Cleanina/Paintina First Stage Power Turbine Nozzle
Clean First Stage Power Turbine Nozzle Using Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203)
3. Approved Repairs oí First Stage Power Turbine Nozzle
A. Repair First Stage Power Turbine Nozzle. Replace if inspection limits are exceeded.
Blend repair dents, nicks and burrs. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.)
CA Page 207/208
— 5Ü * U I Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
■ ■OliGy wlrdl T53-L-703
FIRST STAGE POWER TURBINE ROTOR SFALING FLANQE AND SPACER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Inspection/Check First Staae Power Turbme Rotor. Sealina Flanae and Soacer
NOTE: Conduct visual inspection of the first stage power turbina rotor, using 7 power
magnifying glass.
A. Inspect First Stage Power Turbine Rotor, Sealing Flange and Spacer
(1) inspect leading and trailing edges of biade for nicks, dents, cracks and burns.
(a) Máximum permissible finished repair depth is 0.062 inch from leading edge and 0.045
inch from trailing edge. Aliowable depths decrease as distance between damage and
point A on leading edge or point 8 on trailing edge decreases. (See Figure 201.)
(b) No cracks are allowed.
(c) No dents are allowed wlfhin 0.500 inch of biade platform.
(d) No burns are allowed.
(2) Inspect biade surfaces nicks, dents, cracks and burns.
(a) No dents are allowed within 0.500 inch of biade platform.
(b) No cracks or burns are allowed.

(3) Inspect trailing edge of blades for erosión occurring immediately under biade shrouds. A notch
visible without magnification is not allowed. (See Figure 202.)
(4} Inspect biade tip (shroud end) for cracks and scoring.
(a) Cracks are not permitted.
(b) Scoring shall not exceed 0.030 inch depth.
(5) Inspect biade platform, root areas and turbine disc for cracks. Cracks are not permitted.
(6) Inspect forward and aft face of disc for rubs.

(a) Rubs 0.006 inch deep by 0.100 inch wide are accepíable provided íhere is no indication
of extreme heat.
Page 201
72-50-02 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
ALL OIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
First Stage Power Turbine Repair Location

Figure 201
Page 202
72-50-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
LO SSO F MAT ERI AL

OCCURS IN THIS
AREA
HA ijja 1*0
Máximum Repair Depth

Figure 202
Page 203
72-50-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(7) Blade tips for evidence of rubbing.
(a) Evidence of tip rub is acceptable without repair of damage provided that limits specified
for cracks, nicks or dents are no! exceeded and minimum tip clearance of 0.025 mch is
maintained,
NOTE: This dimensional inspection is not required unless power turbine has
been compietely djsassembjed.
If desired clearance is not obtained, rework nozzle cylinder to obtain

mínimum clearance. The minimum acceptable clearance is 0.025 inch.
(8) Inspect blade tip to first stage nozzle clearance (radlal).
(9) Inspect sealing flange for local rubbing. Rub depth shall not exceed 0.015 inch for a circumfer-
eníial length of 3 inches.
(10) Inspect spacer for evidence of scoring. Scoring shall not exceed 0.012 inch in depth.
(11) Inspect spacer for evidence of cracks or distortion. Cracks or distortion are not allowed.
(12) Inspect afl side of rotor disc for blades recessed below disc.
NOTE: If blades are damaged beyond limits, forward rotor to Overhaul
facility for blade replacement.
If one or more blades are recessed more than 0.025 inch, remove rotor and reseat blades.
(See paragraph 3.A.(5).)
2. Cleaning/Paintinq First Staoe Power Turbine Rotor. Sealing Flange and Soacer
A- Clean First Stage Power Turbine Rotor. Sealing Flange and Spacer
Clean first stage power turbine rotor (see 72-40-00, 48A, Figure 209) power turbine spacer (53) and
sealing flange (48) using dry cleaning sotvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
3. AoDroved Renaírs oí First Stage Power Turbine Rotor. Sealing Flange and Soacer
A. Repair First Stage Power Turbine Rotor, Sealing Flange and Spacer
Page 204
72-50-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAINT^MANUAL
(1) Replace power turbine spacer (see 72-40-00, 53, Figure 209) or sealing flange (48) if scoring
exceeds inspection limits or if cracks or distortion is noted.
(2) Observe foHowing rules during first stage power turbine rotor blade repair.
(a) Use portable power drill or rotary file equipped with Carbide burr. If these are not
available, small diesinker type file, India or carborundum stone may be substifufed.
(b) Finish strokes are parallel to leading and trailing edges of blades.
(c) Final polishing of area is with crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table 203). Alí repairs are
blended and finished smoothly.
(d) Leading or trailing edge repairs are blended to smooth radius as part of repair. (See
Figure 203.)
(e) Finish repair length is blended ío mínimum of three times Oepth of damage.
(3) Repair leading and/or trailing edges of first stage power turbine blades as follows:
(a) Round bottom dents, 0.010 inch deep or less, require removal of sharp edges oniy.
(b) If distance between damage and shroud end of blade is less than twice depth of damage,
e>ftend repair to inelude shroud end.
(c) If distance between two damaged areas is less than twice depth of deeper damage, make
One repair area. If distance between two damaged areas is greater than iwice depth of
deeper damage. make sepárate repair areas. (See Figure 203.)
(d) Damage that cannot be completely eliminated by allowabíe blade repairs are cause for
rotor replacement. (See step (6).)
(4) Repair blade surface as follows;
(a) Máximum permissible decrease in thickness at any point on blade shall be 0.010 inch.
(b) Máximum permissible finished single repair on blade surface shall be 0.200 square inch
on either concave or convex side.
(c) Repairs shall be blended to a minimum of twice depth of damage.
(d) Total repaired surface area shall not exceed 10 percent of blade surface.
Page 205
72-50-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
>*HEN THE DISTANCE BETwEEN THE D AMAGE IS

CREATER THAN TWICE THE DEPTH OF THE OEEPER
OAMAGE, M AKE SEP ARATE REPAIRS
WHEN THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE O AMAGE

15
LES5 TH AN TWICE THE OEPTH OF THE OEEPER
DAMAGE MAKE O NE REPAIR AREA
Power Turbine Blade Damage Before and After Repair

Figure 203
Page 206
72-50-02 Sept 30/02
(e) If distance between two damaged areas is less than twice depth of deeper damage. make
one repair area. if distance between two damaged areas is greater than twice depth ot
deeper damage, make sepárate repair areas. (See Figure 203.)
(f) Damage that cannot be completely eliminated by allowable blade repairs is cause for
rotor replacement-
(5) Reseat blades recessed more than 0.025 inch below aft face of disc as follows:
NOTE: No. 1 blade is first blade counterclockwise from balancing

0-mark on forward face of disc.
(a) Lócate and mark No. 1 blade on both sides using yellow marking pencíí (72 - 00 - 00, 47.
Table 203).
(b) Place rotor, forward face up, in fixture assembly LTCT2072.
NOTE: Make sure that blade being tapped is not positioned over slot in
fixture assembly.
(c) Starting with No. 1 blade, tap ali blades flush with aft face of disc using a hammer and a
suitable dnft from punch and drift kit LTCT552.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT TOOL DOES NOT CONTACT DISC OR

BLADES DURING DRIVING OPERATION.
(d) Using a hammer and a drive punch, redrive all pins.
(e) Remove staking tool (if used),
NOTE: If both first and second stage power turbine rotors are replaced, the
new rotors shall be initially installed with yellow “H" markings (if
presen!) which denote the heavy balance point 180 degrees apart.
(6) Replace first stage turbine rotor if disc is cracked or if rubs on blade tips exceed inspection
limits.
(7) Blades damaged beyond established limits shall be replaced. Forward rotor to Overhaul for
blade replacement and balancing.
Page 207/208
72-50-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “A,NTENANC_E^MANUAL
SECOND STAGF POWFR TURBINE Nn77l F - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Insoection/Check Second Staae Power Turbine Nozzle
A. Inspect Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle
(1) Inspect nozzle assembly for cracks, dents, nicks, burns and burrs.
(a) Any number ot 1/8 inch cracks are acceptable in trailing edge oí all vanes. (See Figure
201.)
(b) Any number of 1/16 inch cracks on leading edge of all vanes or any number oí 1/8 inch
cracks are acceptable on leading edge oí 15 vanes.
(c) Any number of cracks are acceptable on vane to shroud brazements, including overhang.
NOTE; The 10 inner shroud cracks (see step (d)) may origínate at aft
edge of inner shroud and progress forward through the vane
brazement or parent metal and connect with the cracks in the seal
support-
(d) A máximum of ten cracks which travel from shroud trailing edge completely around vane
brazements to leading edge are acceptable provided each crack is separated by a míni-
mum of five vanes. These cracks are nof allowed to extend into the support sheet metal
(see figure 203). Cracks up to 3/8 inch are allowed on trailing edges of inner shroud,
máximum of three adjacent vanes. Máximum of 12 vanes total. {See Figure 201.)
CAUTION: ANY EVIDENCE OF TURBINE WHEEL RUBBING ON

SUPPORT IS UNACCEPTABLE.
(e) Circumferential cracks at or adjacent to Inner shroud to support joint or in support parent
metal is unacceptable.
(f) Deleted
Page 201
72-50-03 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CIRCUMFERENTIAL CRACKS
NOT ACCEPTA6LE
i3je
1A2
Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle Crack Limits

Figure 201
72-50-03 Sepf30 02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
15 AXIAL CRACKS 1/2 INCH LONG

ACCEPTABLE 5 OF 15 UP TO 3/4
INCH ALLOWED
Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle CIrcumferential Crack LImits

Figure 202
Page 203
72-50-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L'-703
10 CRACKS RUNNING
AXIALLY
ACROSS ENTIRE INNER
SHROUD SEPARATED BY
FIVE-
INNER SHROUD
VANES BETWEEN CRACKS
VANE PEQ
CRACKS IN SEAL SUPPORT NOT ALLOWED

SEAL SUPPORT
(FLAT)
XA 1338 U4
Secontí Stage Power Turbine Nozzle Inner Shroud Crack Limits

Figure 203
Page 204
72-50-03 Sept 30/02
¡lyweil MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
CAUTiON: ANY EVIDENCE OF TURBINE ROTOR RUBBING ON

SUPPORT IS UNACCEPTABLE, REGARDLESS OF
CiRCUMFERENTIAL CRACKS LENGTH.
(g) Circumferential cracks in the parent metal on inner shroud are not permitted.
NOTE: Most oí the cracking will occur in the trailing edge of vane areas of
shroud.
(h) On outer shroud trailing edge, fitteen axial cracks are allowed provided length of each
crack does not exceed í/2 inch. Five of the fifteen are allowed to be cracked up to 3/4
inch and one is permitted which progresses from the shroud edge, traveis adjacent to
vane and terminales at cylinder radius. (See Figures 202 and 204.)
(i) Circumferential cracks in outer shroud are not permitted.
(j) A máximum of four nicks or dents are allowed on vane leading edge provided that depth
of any defect does not exceed 3/32 inch and length does not exceed 3/16 inch after blend
repair (see Figure 205). Separation of deíects shall be at least twice the length of the
shortest defect after blend repair. Smooth dents within limits are acceptable without blend
repair.
(k) A máximum of four nicks or dents are allowed on vane trailing edge provided that depth of
any defect does not exceed 3/32 mch and length does not exceed 3/16 inch after blend
repair. Separation of defects shall be least twice the length oí the shortest defect with
blend repair. Smooth dents within limits are acceptable without blend repair.
(l) Nicks and dents on vane airfoil surfaces are acceptable on all vanes with blend repair.
Replace nozzle if limits specified in steps (j), (k) and (I) are exceeded.
(m) Burns in leading and trailing edges of vanes are not allowed.
(n) Cracks in seai brazement are not acceptable.
(o) Burrs are acceptable on vane leading and trailing edges after blend repair.
tnspect nozzle assembly for rubs. Axial rubs resulting from contad with turbine rotor are
not permitted regardtess of circumferential crack length.
Page 205
72-50-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CVLINOER RADIUS
Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle Outer Shroud Crack Limits

Figure 204
Page 206
72-50-03 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle Repair ümits

Figure 205
Page 207
72-50-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,NT«MANUAL
2. Cleanina/Painting Second Staae Power Turbine Nozzie
Clean Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle (72-40-00. 56, Figure 209) Using Dry Cleaning Solvent
{72-00-00, 62, Table 203)
3. Aporoved Reoairs Second Staae Power Turbine Nozzle
Clean Second Stage Power Turbine Nozzle Replace if inspection limils are exceeded.
Page 208
72-50-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
POWER TURBINE ROTOR AND BEARING HODSING ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Power Turbine Rotor and Bearing Housina Assemblv
A. Disassemble Power Turbine Rotor And Bearing Housing Assembly
(1) Place power turbine rotor and bearing housing assembly in holding tixture LTCT4553-
(2) Straighten lock cup (17, Figure 201), Using wrench assembly LTCT915, remove nut (16).
Remove lock cup.
(3) Remove screws (18) and cover (19),
(4) Remove impeller (20) and ring (21).
(5) Remove screws (22) and retaining ring (23).

(6) Install bearing housing mechanical puller LTCT4800 on bearing housing (26). Pulí bearing
housing from turbine rotor (2).
(7) Using hammer and suitable brass Orift, tap bearing (24) out of bearing housing. Re-
move shim (25).
(8) Cut lockwire and remove bolts (4) and deflector support (5).
(9) Remove seal housing (10) and impeller (12). Remove retaining ring (6) from seal housing as-
sembly. Using arbor press or bushing and base assembly LTCT4947, press seal (8) out of seal
housing. Remove packing (9) from seal housing.
(10) Remove tube (30) and packing (29). Remove packing (31) from bearing housing.
(11) Remove screws (14) and ring assembly (15). Remove seal (11) from bearing housing (26) and
from ring assembly (15). Discard packing.
(12) Remove bearing (28) and spacer (27) from bearing housing.
(13) Using mechanical puller LTCT4846, remove seal ring (7) and ring (13).
(14) Remove bolts (1) and píate (3) from turbine rotor disc.
Page 20i
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
MAiNTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Power Turbine Rotor and Bearing Housing Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1, BOLT 17. LOCK CUP

2. TURBINE ROTOR 18. SCREW
3. PLATE 19. COVER
4. BOLT 20. IMPELLER
5, DEFLECTOR SUPPORT 21. RING
6. RETAINING RING 22. SCREW
7. SEAL RING 23. RETAINING RING
8. SEAL 24. BEARING
9. PACKING 25. SHIM
10. SEAL HOUSING
11 SFAI 26. BEARING
12. IMPELLER 27. HOUSING
SPACER
13. RING 28. BEARING
14. SCREW 29. PACKING
15. RING ASSEMBLY 30. TUBE
16. NUT 31. PACKING
Page 203
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
B. Reassemble Power Turbine Rotor and Beanng Housing Assembly
(1) Select shim {25, Figure 201) to maintain 0.003 to 0.006 inch axial pinch on outer race of bearing
(24) as íollows:
(a) Using vernier depth gage, measure depth oí beanng housing (Dimensión A. Rgure 202).
(b) Using micrometer. determine axial dimensión of bearing outer race (Dimensión B. Figure
202) .
(c) Subtract Dimensión B from Dimensión A.
(d) Add nominal 0.005 inch to result of preceding step (3) to determine thickness of shim.
CAUTION: TO PREVEN! POSSIBLE AXIAL SEAL MOVEMENT, MAKE SURE

THAT RETAINING RING IS SEATED PROPERLY
(2) Instan packing (9, Figure 201) into seal housing (10). Lubrícate recess in seal housing and seal
(8) with shortening compound (72-00-00, 38, Table 203). Usmg arbor press or bushing and
base assembiy LTCT4947, press seal with part numbers facing up, into seal housing (10).
Install retaining ring (6) into seal housing assembiy.
(3) instan packing (31) on tube (30). Install tube in bearing housing (26).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT PIN IN OUTER RACE OF ROLLER BEARING

ENGAGES SLOT IN BEARING HOUSING.
(4) Using arbor press and suitable brass bushing, press bearing outer race (28) into bearing
housing (26).
NOTE: Before instaliing seal (11), seal shall be inspected for cuts, nicks, tears,
cracks, distortion, pliability and wear. If damage is noted, replace seal.
If seal (11) is lo be instalied, make sure groove in bearing housing (26)

is olean. Coat groove with shortening compound (72-00-00, 38,
Table 203) or assembiy fluid (72-00-00, 7, Table 203) to facilítate
holding seal in housing.
(5) Align screw holes in ring assembiy (15) with screw holes in bearing housing (26) and inserí ring
assembiy into bearing housing. Secure ring assembiy to beanng housing with screws (14).
Tighten screws (14) finger-tight (not to exceed 10 inch-pounds), then back off 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
Make sure ring is not cocked. install seal (11) in íorward groove of bearing housing (26) and on
ring assembiy (15).
Page 204
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
BEARiNG HOUSING
NO J BALL BEARINO
>iA-;38-238
Establishing Shim Thickness

Figure 202
Page 205
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ---A™
(6) Instan packing (29) on end oí tube (30).
(7) Place impeller (12) in ring assembly (15). Install sea! housing (10) over impeller. Make sure
that tube (30) is properly seated in seal housing.
(8) Position deflector support (5) on seal housing (10) so that cut out in deflector is aligned with
boss on seal housing.
(9) Coat threads of botts (4) with antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Table 203). Thread bolts
into bearing housing (26) and tighten 70 to 75 inch pounds torque. Lockwire bolts. (See
Figure 202A.)
(10) Position píate (3, Figure 201) on turbine rotor (2) and secure píate with bolts (1). Tighten bolts
25 lo 30 inch pounds torque.
(11) Using arbor press and suitable brass bushing, press seal ring (7) onto turbine rotor shaft.
(12) Using arbor press and suitable brass bushing, press ring (13) onto power turbine shaft. Make
sure that tangs on rings are aligned with slots in impeller (12) when performing step (13).
CAUTIQN: MAKE SURE SEAL RIDES ONTO SEAL RING WITHOUT DAMAGING
THE SEAL. MAKE SURE SEAL IS LUBRICATED BEFORE INSTAL-
ÜNG THE BEARING HOUSING,
(13) Instan power turbine rotor in suitable holding fíxture. Instad bearing housing assembly on
turbine rotor.
CAUTIQN: PACK ROLLERS WITH SHORTENING COMPOUND SO THAT

ROLLERS RETRACT INTO THE BEARING CAGE. MAKE SURE
ROLLERS REMAIN IN CAGE WHILE BEARING !S BEING
PRESSED
ON TO SHAFT. INSTALL BEARING WITH PART NUMBER DOWN.
(14) Using arbor press and sieeve bushing LTCT3493, press bearing (inner race and rollers) (28)
onto power turbine shaft.
(15) Place spacer (27) on power turbine shaft.
NOTE: Use shim having corred thickness as determinad in preceding step (1),
(16) Instad shim (25) inte bearing housing (26).
Page 206
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeywell T53-L-703
Lockwiring of Boits
Figure 202A
Page 207
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(17) Using arbor press and sieeve bushing LTCT3493, press bearing (24) onto power turbina shatt
and into bearing housing.
(18) Instan retaining ring (23) mío bearing housing and aíign screw holes. Secure ring assembly (o
bearing housing with screws (22). Tighten screws (22) finger tight (not to exceed 10 inch
pounds), then back off 1/4 to 1/2 turn. Make sure ring is not cocked.
(19) Using arbor press and suítable brass bushing, press ring (21) onto power turbine shaft. Install
impeller (20) and align slots in impeller with tangs on ring (21).
(20) Instan cover (19). Secure cover to retaining ring (23) with screws (18).
NOTE: Do not lubricate nut.
(21) Instan power turbine rotor in holding fixture LTCT4553. Install lock cup (17) and nut (16). Usmg
wrench LTCT915, tighten nut 225 lo 250 foot pounds torque.
(22) Secure nut (16) by deforming lock cup (17) into Slot in nut at two locations.
2- Insoection/Check Power Turbine Rotor and Bearing Housing Assemblv
A. Inspect Power Turbine Rotor and Bearing Housing Assembly

NOTE: Conduct a visual inspection of the second stage power turbine rotor using a 7
power magnífyíng glass.
(1) Inspect leading and trailing edges of blade for nicks, dents, cracks ano burns.
(a) Máximum permissible finished repair depth is 0.047 inch from leading edge and 0.034
inch from trailing edge. (See Figure 203.) Allowable Oepths decrease as distance
between damage and point A on leading edge or point B on trailing edge decreases.
(See Figure 203.)
(b) No dents are allowed within 0.500 inch of blade platform.
(c) No burns or cracks are allowed.
Page 208
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ALL DiMENSiONS ARE IN INCriES

«A
1
^8
Second Stage Power Turbine Blade Repair Limits

Figure 203
Page 209
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII --“--A.
(2) Inspect trailing edge ol blades for erosión occurring immediately under blade shrouds. A notch
visible withou; magnification is nol allowed. (See Figure 204.)
(3) Inspect blade surfaces for nicks, denls, cracks and burns.
(a) No dents are allowed within 0.500 inch of blade platform.
(b) No burns or cracks are allowed.
(4) Inspect blade tip (shroud end) for cracks and scoring.
(a) Cracks in shroud are not permitted.

(b) Tip rubs shall not exceed 0.030 inch in depth. Indications of tip rub are acceptable
provided tip clearance can be obtained at assembiy.
(5) Inspect blade platform and root areas and turbine disc for cracks. No cracks are allowed.
(6) Inspect aft side of rotor disc for blades recessed below disc.
(a) If one or more blades are recessed more than 0.025 inch, remove rotor and reseat blades.
(7) Inspect oil passages in ring assemblies and bearing housing for cloggmg. Use deán, dry air to
inspect for dogging. Ciogging is not acceptable.
(8) Inspect impetlers for galling, scoring and loss of protective finish.
(a) Galling or deep scoring which penetrales into parent metal Is unacceptable.
(b) Replace if any degree of surface finish loss is evident.
(9) inspect internal spline for wear. Wear up to 0.005 inch depth is acceptable.
3. Cleanina/Paintina Power Turbine Rotor and Bearina Housina Assemblv
Clean All Parts Using Dry Cleaning Solvent (Refer to SPM, 70-15-03, SP C203)
Page 210
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
UOSSOF MAT ERIAL

OCCURS IN
THISAREA
KA 1338 M’
Second Stage Power Turbine Repair Location

Figure 204
MBA A A AJI Page21l
72—50 “04 sept

30/02
HoneyweII
4. Approved Recairs Power Turbine Rotor and Bearing Housing Assemblv
A. Repair Power Turbine Rotor and Bearing Housing Assembl/
(1) Reclean parís if oil passages are clogged.
(2) Observe following rules dunng power turbine rotor blade repair.
(a) Use portable power drill or rotary file equipped with carbide burr. lí these are not
available, small diesinker type file or India or carborundum stone may be substituted.
(b) Fmish strokes shall be parallel to leading and trailing edges of blades.
(c) Final polísh area with crocus doth (72 - 00 - 00, 13, Tabfe 203j. Ai( repairs shail be '
blended and finished smoothly.
(d) Blend leading or trailing edge repairs to smooth radius as part of repair. (See Figure 203.)
(e) Finish repair length shal) be blended to mínimum of three times depth of damage.
(3) Repair leading and/or trailing edges of power turbine rotor blades as follows:
(a) Round bottom dents, 0.010 inch deep or less, require removal oí sharp edges oniy.
(b) If dístance between damage and shroud end of blade is less than twice depth of damage,
extend repair to inelude shroud end.
(c) If dístance between two damaged areas is less than twice depth of deeper damage, make
one repair area. If dístance between two damaged areas is greater than twice depth of
deeper damage, make sepárate repair areas. (See Figure 203.)
(d) Damage that cannot be completely eliminated by allowable blade repair is cause for rotor
replacement. Forward rotor to Overhaul for blade replacement and baiancmg.
¡4) Repair blade surfaces as follows:
(a) Máximum permissible decrease in thickness at any point on blade is 0.010 inch.
(b) Máximum permissible finished single repair on blade surface is 0.200 square inch on
either concave or convex side.
(c) Blend repairs to mínimum oí twice depth of damage.
(d) Total repaired surface area shall not exceed 10 percent oí blade surface.
(e) II dístance between two damaged areas is less than twice depth of deeper damage, make
one repair area. If dístance between two damaged areas ¡s greater than twice depth of
deeper damage, make sepárate repair areas, (See Figure 203.)
(f) Damage that cannot be completely eliminated by allowable blade repairs is cause for
rotor replacement. Forward rotor to Overhaul tor blade replacement and balancing.
Page 2i2
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(5) Reseat blades recessed more than 0.025 inch below att face of disc as follows:
(a) Lócate and mark No. 1 blade on both sides using yellow marking pencil (72-00-00, 47,
Tab)e 203).
NOTE: No. 1 blade is lirst blade counterciockwise from balancing

O-mark on forward face of disc.
(b) Place rotor, forward face up, in staking fixture assembly LTCT2072.
NOTE: Make sure that blade being tapped is not positioned over Slot in
fi>cture assembly.
(c) Starting with No. 1 blade, tap all biabes fiush with att face of disc using a hammer and a
suitabie drift from punch and dnft kit LTCT552.
(d) Using staking tool assembly LTCT3738 on mushroomed pins or a hammer and a drive
punch on recessed pins, redhve all pins.

BLADES DURING DRIVING OPERATION.
(e) Remove staking tool (if used).
(6) Replace power turbine rotor if disc is cracked or if rubs on blade tips exceed inspection limits.
(7) Blades damaged beyond established limits shall be replaced. Forward rotor to Overhaul for
blade replacement and balancing.
Page 213/214
72-50-04 Sept 30/02
Honeyuvell
GAS PRODUCER SYSTFM COMPONENTS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
J. Disassembiy/Reassemblv Gas Producer Svsiem Componants
A. Disassemble Gas Producer System Components

(1) Check second stage gas producer rotor tor minimum tip clearances. Insert leeler gage be-
tweeo second stage gas producer turbina rotor DIade tips (37, Figure 201, Sheet 2) and second
stage gas producer cylinder (44) at the 12 o’clock position.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE LEAD PENCIL TO MARK BLADE.
(2) Roíate lurbine rotor and check and record minimum tip clearance (longest blade). Mark lon-
gest blade with marking pencil (72-00-00, 47, Table 203).
(3) Check clearance between tip of longest blade and fíange al seven additional positions (see
Figure 202). Hold teeler gage stationary at each position and turn rotor one full turn. If tip
clearance ai any position is 0.024 inch or less, rework cylinder.
(4) Engage tangs of Socket wrench LTCT13456 (detail of LTCT13175) with nut (45, Figure 201,
Sheet 2) to prevent compressor rotor shaft from turning.
(5) Be sure to matchmark al) gas producer íurbine parts including bolts with white opaque ink
(72-00-00, 73A. Table 203).
(6) Straighten tabwashers (38) and remove nuts (39) and tabwashers that secure second stage
gas producer turbine rotor (37) to spacer (33).
(7) Using puller LTCT691, carefutly remove second stage gas producer turbine rotor (37) and
spacer (33).
NOTE: Use thumbscrews to position the arms into spacer. When arms are in
position, firmly lock ihem with knurled cup and back otf thumbscrews at
least one half turn to allow puller to opérate freely and prevent binding
of thumbscrews.
(8) Using mechanical puller LTCT4842, remove spacer (33) and sealmg disc (36) from rotor (37).
Page 201
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
TTTTnrr
12
30
Gas Producer System Components

Page 202
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
TV
Gas Producer System Components

Page 203
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. FORWARDSEAL 25. BOLT

2. FORWARD OlL RING 26. FIRST STAGE GAS PRODUCER
3. SPACER TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY
4. RETAINING RING 27. SPACER
5. BEARING INNER RACE AND ROLLERS 28. BOLT
6. SEAL 29. SCREW
7. REAR BEARING HOUSING ASSEMBLY 30. PACKING
8. SCREW 31- RING
9. BEARING OUTER RACE 32. SECOND STAGE TURBINE
10. COMBUSTION CHAMBER DEFLECTOR NOZZLE
11. FIRST STAGE TURBINE N0Z2LE 33. SPACER
ASSEMBLY 34. EXPANSION RING
12. BOLT 35. SEALING RING
13. PACKING 36. SEALING DISC
14. PACKING 37. SECOND STAGE GAS PRODUCER
15. GASKET TURBINE ROTOR
16. RETAINING PLATE 38. TABWASHER
17. GASKET 39. NUT
18. AFT OlL RING 40. BOLT
18A. SEAL AND RETAINER ASSEMBLY 41. SEAL RING
19. RETAINING RING 42. RETAINING PLATE
20. SEAL 43. PIN
21. RETAINER 44. SECOND STAGE GAS PRODUCER
22. SEALING RING CYLINDER
23. SHIM 45. NUT
24. FORWARD CONE 46. LOCKRING
47. REAR CONE
Page 204
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
12:00
Checking Positions - Tip Clearance

Figure 202
Page 205
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII NT~MA.UA.
NOTE: If disassembly will inelude removing the No. 2 bearing, the engme must
be removed from helicopter and positioned vertically.
I (9) Deleted.
(10) Remove two sealing rings (41) from outside diameter of second stage gas producer cylinder
(44),
CAUTIQN: BOLTS (40) ARE NOT TO BE REUSED FOR REASSEMBLY.
(11) Remove 20 bolts (40) that secure second stage gas producer cylinder to first stage turbine
nozzle(ll). Remove three retaining piales (42). Discard bolts (40).
(12) Using locating pin removal tool LTCT4692, remove pins (43). Remove second stage gas
producer cylinder (44).
(13) Remove sealing ring (35) and two expansión springs (34) from outside diameter of second
stage gas producer nozzle. Remove ring (31), spacer (27), and second stage turbine nozzie
(32).
(14) Record thickness of spacer (27) for reassembiy.
(15) Check first stage gas producer rotor for mínimum tip clearances as follows:
(a) Insert feeler gage with 1/4 inch wide tip between first stage gas producer turbine rotor
(26) and first stage turbine nozzfe (11) at 12 o’ctock position.
CAUTIQN: DO NOT USE LEAD PENCIL TO MARK BLADE.
(b) Rotate turbine rotor and check and record minimum tip clearance (tongest blade). Mark
longest blade with yellow pencil (72-00-00, 47, Table 203).
(c) Check clearance between tip of longest blade and flange at seven additional positions
(see Figure 202). Hold feeler gage stationary at each position and turn rotor one full turn.
If tip clearance at any position is 0.020 inch or less, first stage gas producer nozzle must
be reworked or replaced.
(16) Straighten tabs of compressor shaft rear lockring (46, Figure 201, Sheet 2).
NOTE: Make sure that bolts are drawn completely through fixture.
(17) Instan torque fixture LTCT13175 over bolts (25) of first stage gas producer turbine rotor (26),
engaging tangs of socket wrench LTCT13456 (detail of LTCT13175) with slots in nut (45).
Secure fixture with nuts (39).
(18) Using torque wrench PD2501, remove nut (45) and lockring (46).
(19) Remove nuts (39). torque wrench and torque fixture.
(20) Using cone removal tool LTCT6465, remove first stage gas producer turbine rotor (26) and rear
cone (47).
Page 206
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII —
(21) Using white opaque ink {72-00-00, 73A, Table 203) índex botts (25) lo rotor assembly for
corred reassembiy. Remove bolts Irom rotor assembly.
(22) Remove eight bolts (28) that secure sealing ring (22). Remove seahng ring.
(23) Remove three screws (29) that secure seal and retainer assembly (18A). Remove seal and
retainer assembly (18A).
(24) Using adapter and guide LTCT3685 and puller LTCT2121, remove aft oil ring (18), lorward cone
(24) and shim (23).
(25) Remove gasket (17), retaining píate (16), packing (30) and gasket (15).
CAUTION: IN FOLLOWING STER BOLTS (12) SHALL BE DISCAROED.

INSTALLATION OF USED BOLTS DURING REASSEMBLY
MAY
RESULT IN BOLT FRACTURE DURING ENGINE
OPERATION.
(26) Remove eight bolts (12) that secure first stage turbine nozzle (11) and combustión chamber
deflector (10) to rear bearing housing assembly (7). Discard bolts (12).
(27) Remove first stage turbine nozzle (l 1) and combustión chamber deflector (10).
(28) Remove two screws (8). Remove bearing housing assembly (7), packings (13, 14) and seal (6).
Bearing outer race (9) will remain in bearing housing assembly (7).
(29) Using arbor press and suitable sieeve, press bearing outer race (9) from rear bearing housing
assembly (7).
CAUTION: KEEP BEARING INNER RACE AND ROLLERS AND BEARING

OUTER RACE TOGETHER AS A SET.
(30) Using mechanical puller LTCT4809, remove bearing inner race and rollers (5) from compressor
rear shaft. (See Figure 203.)
(31) Using puller LTCT4846 or LTCT4700, remove fonward oil ring (2, Figure 201, Sheet 1).
(32) Remove retaining ring (4) and spacer (3).
(33) Using forward seal puller LTCT4568 with arbor LTCT4571 remove forward seal (1).
NOTE: With No. 2 bearing removed, fhe engine must not be moved from
vertical position.
B. Reassemb/e Gas Producer System Components
NOTE: Seáis 1-300-616-01 and 1-300-173-01/-02/-03 are manufactured with

three spiits in the carbón seáis, 120 degrees apar!. These spiits are not de-
fects and are not cause for seal replacement.
Page 207
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(1) Reassemble components as follows:
NOTE: To prevent too! rotation when using installing tool LTCT13070,

engage tangs of tool with cutouts in seal (1, Figure 201, Sheet 1 ).
(a) Carefully position lorward seal (1. Figure 201, Sheet 1) on forward oil ring
1-100-146-02/-04 (2) and using installing tool LTCT13070, install seal and ring as a
unit on rear compressor shaft. Make sure top marking on seal is located at 12 o’clock
position and that scalloped side oí seal is toward rear oí engine. (See Figure 204 lor
proper seal instailation.)
CAUTION: TO PREVENT POSSIBLE AXIAL SEAL MOVEMENT, MAKE

SURE THAT RETAINING RING IS SEATED PROPERLY.
(b) Install spacer (3) and retaining ring (4).
Page 208
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Removing Compressor Rear Bearing

Figure 203
Page 209
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Proper Installation of Forward Seal

Figure 204
Page 210
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
Honeywell
(c) Using installing tool LTCT791, install bearing inner race rollers (5) on compressor rear
shaft.
CAUHQN: MAKE SURE OIL HOLES )N BEARING OUTER RACE UNE UP

WITH OiL PASSAGE IN REAR BEARING HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
WITH OIL HOLES FORWARD.
MAKE SURE THAT PIN IN OUTER RACE OF BEARING

ENGACES SLOT IN BEARING HOUSING ASSEMBLY.
(d) Using arbor press and suitable sleeve, press bearing outer race (9) into rear bearing
housing assembíy (7) with oil boles forward.
(e) Insta// sea/ (6) and packings (13, 14) in grooves of diffuser housing assembíy. Instan
bearing housing onto air diffuser. Aliñe hole pattern. Secure with two screws (8) hand
tighten screws.
CAUTION: INSTALL NEW BOLTS. INSTALLATION OF USED BOLTS MAY

RESULT IN BOLT FRACTURE DURING ENGINE OPERATION,
(f) Lubrícate eight bolts (12) with antiseize thread compound (72-00-00, 15, Table 203) ano
temporarily install bolls (12) onto bearing housing. Tighten bolts (12) to 150 to 165 inch
pounds and tighten screws (8) 18 to 20 inch pounds.
(g) Lubrícate gasket (15) with shortening (72-00-00. 38, Table 203) and install In groove on
bearing housing.
(h) Lubrícate two packings (30) with shortening (72-00-00, 38, Table 203) and install in
grooves on píate. Install píate, ground side down, onto bearing housing. Aliñe holes.
(i) Lubrícate gasket (17) with shortening (72-00-00. 38, Table 203) and instad in groove on
píate.
(j) Using installer LTCT3685, install aft oil ring (18) into seal and retainer assembíy (18A).
Install Seal assembíy with ring onto píate and aliñe holes. Secure sea! assembíy with
three screws (29) and tighten 18 to 25 inch pounds. Instad eight bolts (28) and torque 95
to 105 inch pounds and retorque screws (29) 18 to 25 inch pounds. Then remove eight
bolts (28).
(k) Remove eight bolts (12) from bearing housing assembíy.
NOTE: Lubrícate bolts with antiseize thread compound (72-00-00, 15,

Table 203).
(() Insta!! deflector assembíy (10) and nozzle assembíy (11) with eight bolls (12). Torque
bolts 150 to 165 inch pounds.
Page 211
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(m)
(m) Lockwire (72-00-00, 40. Table 203) bolts (12).
NOTE: Bolts (28) should be lubricated with antiseize thread compound

(72-00-00, 15, Table 203).
(n)
(n) Instan sealing ring (22) with eight bolts (28) onto bearing housing assembly and seal as-
sembly. Tighten bolts 85 to 95 inch pounds. Wait 5 minutes and retorque bolts (28) to 95
to 105 inch pounds. Lockwire (see Figure 205) making sure that lockwire does not inter-
fere with air slots, and tails of lockwire are inboard of sealing ring.
(o)
(o) Select nominal shim (23) and instan onto rotor shaft. Record shim thickness.
(P)
(P) NOTE: Use spiit cone for easy removal after clearance is established.
Use a 1-110-132-01 cone Ihat has been spiit for measuring purposes on/y to
(q)
(q)
predetermine shim size.
(r)
(r) Instan wheel (26) onto rotor shaft.
Check clearance “F" (see Figure 206) with LTCT14807- Press forward on rotor when
checking clearance. Clearance shall be 0.095 to 0.120 in. Remove first gas producer
rotor assembly. Remove spiit cone. If clearance is unacceptable. change shim (23) to
proper size. Repeat steps (p) and (q) if clearance is acceptable, proceed to next step.
(s)
Using installing tool LTCT4013, install forward cone (24) onto rotor shaft. Make sure cone
(t) is bottomed against aft oil ring (18).
(t)
Insert six bolts (25) onto wheel (26) located by balance marks. Install wheel (26), making
sure balance marks are alined. Lubrícate spiines with antiseize compound (72-00-00,
(u)
(u)
15, Table 203).
Install rear cone (47) onto rotor shaft.
72-51-00 ST3O%¡
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
XA 1333 144
Lockwire Seal Retainer

Figure 205
Page 213
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Determining Clearance Between First Stage Gas Producer Nozzle and Rotor
Figure 206
72-51-00 sS
HoneyweII
(2) Lubrícate threads of nut (45) with antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Tabla 203).
(3) Instan rea: cone (47), lockring (46) and nut (45).
NOTE: Make sure that bolts are drawn compietely through adaptar.
(4) Instan torque tixture LTCT13175 over bolts (25) oí first stage gas producer turbina rotor (26),
engaging tangs oí socket wrench LTCT13456 (detall oí LTCT13175) with slots m nut (45).
Secura fixture with nufs (39).
NOTE: Nut (45) shall not extend more than 0.060 inch beyond aft tace oí
cornpressor rotor rear stub shaft.
(5) Using torque wrench PD2501, tighten nut (45) 320 to 350 loot pounds torque. Remove torque
wrench and torque íixture.
NOTE: Bracket is usad as a base for dial indrcator whiíe taking runouts.
(6) Mount bracket LTCT3955 or LTCT910 on ílange oí air difluser.
(7) 11 engine is in a maintenance stand, position engme in approximately 45 degree nose down
attitude prior to perlorming steps (8) and (9). 11 engine is installed, push (orward at center oí
rotor when turning lor runout measurement.
(8) Position día) indicator against point just inboard of lirst stage gas producer turbina blade roots.
Rotate gas producer turbine rotor and record runout. Runout shall be within 0.004 TIR.
(9) Position dial indicator on rear Ilange of gas producer turbine rotor. Rotate gas producer turbine
rotor and record runout. Runout sha)) be within 0.003 TIR.
(10) Surn oí the runouts in steps (8) and (9) shall not exceed 0.006 TIR.
(11) 11 runouts are not within limits, remove lirst stage gas producer rotor, clean cones (24, 47) and
reposition rotor 180 degrees from removed position. Repeat preceding step (9). II limits are
still exceeded, try 90 degrees or 270 degrees from original position. 11 limits are still exceeded,
replace forward cone (24) and rear cone (47).
(12) Check first stage gas producer turbine rotor for mínimum of 0.020 inch tip clearance.
(13) Bend lockring (46) into slots oí nut (45) in two places, 180 degrees apart. Do not shear lock-
ring.
(14) Remove bracket LTCT3955 or LTCT910 from air difluser.
CADTIQN: SPACER 1-120-029-01 O R- 0 3 (27) MUSI BE INSTALLED

AGAINST THE SECOND STAGE TURBINE NOZZLE FLANGE AT
ALL
TIMES. ADDITIONAL SPACERS 1-120-029-01. -02 OR -03
MAY BE INSTALLED AS NECESSARYTO OBTAIN PROPER
CLEAR-
ANCE.
(15} instan spacer (27) and ring (31) onto first gas producer nozzle. Instaíl second stage turbine
nozzle (32). Align bolt holes and install pins (43). Install four equatly spaced "C” clamps to
ho)d nozzle (32). Tighten clamps.
Page 215
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,N™NCE^MANUAL
(16) Using LTCT14807 wire gage, check axial clearance between aft face of wheel (26) and forward
face of nozzle (32). Clearance shall be 0.080 to 0.105 in. If not, change spacer (27) as re-
quired.
NOTE: When installing sealing ring (35), make sure that pinching or binding
does not exist in the sealing ring groove of second stage turbine
nozzle.
(17) Instan two expansión springs (34) and sealing ring (35) into groove on OD of second stage
turbine nozzle.
CAUTIQN: DO NOT APPLY LUBRICANT TO UNDERSIDE OF BOLT MEAD,

SINCE THIS MAY LEAD TO OVERTORQUING.
EXCESSIVE
TORQUE MAY CAUSE FRACTURE OF THE BOLTS.
(18) Lubrícate threads of new bolts (40) with antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Table 203).
(19) With shims, nozzle, cylinder, alignment pins and retaining piales in place, instan all bolts finger
tight.
(20) Tighten all bolts 35 to 40 inch-pounds torque, using standard torque wrench (0 to 50 inch-
pounds range) and a 1/4 inch universal socket or wrench extensión TMRX-8 (Snap-On Tool
Corp.. Kenosha, Wisconsin or equivalent) mounted at 90 degree angle to the torque wrench
centeriine.
NOTE: Resistance torque shall be a minimum of 3 inch-pounds. If lower than

3 inch-pounds replace swaged nut. (Refer to Repair Manual,
72-09-30.)
(21) Release torque by turning bolt counterclockwise two full turns.
(22) Using torque wrench ( 0 to 50 inch-pounds range) roíate clockwise to estabiish resistance
torque of swaged nut.
(23) Tighten bolt an additional 15 to 20 inch-pounds above this resistance torque.
(24) Lockwire bolts. The bolt heads shall be double wired with 0.032 inch lockwire in groups of two
or three.
(25) Instan two seal rings (41) into grooves on OD of second stage gas producer cylinder.
NOTE: Spacer (33) and sealing disc (36) are a balanced pair.
(26) Align matchmarks of spacer (33) and sealing disc (36). then using an arbor press, install spacer
(33) into sealing disc.
(27) Align matchmarks on spacer (33) and first stage gas producer rotor then position spacer (33)
and sealing disc (36) on first stage gas producer turbine bolts.
(28) Rotate gas producer rotor assembly and check for rubbing between second stage nozzle (32)
and sealing disc (36). Light njb is acceptable. !f heavy rub exists, recheck runouts and inspect
for distortion.
Page 216
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ««N™™
CAUTION: MAKE SURE FORWARD FACE OF ROTOR IS TOWARDS FRONT OF
ENGINE.
(29) Position second stage gas producer turbina rotor (37) on spacer (33). Align all matchmarks.
NOTE: Cap screws (4-40 x 3/4 inch long) may be installed in bolts (25) to fa-
cilítate alignment and installation of nut (39) while securing second
stage gas producer turbine rotor (37).
(30) Lubrícate tbreads of bolts (25) with antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Table 203).
CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING NUTS, MAKE SURE ONLY NONMAGNETIC

0.200 INCHTHICK NUTS 1-100-293-01 ARE USED.
NOTE: Nuts (39) have a machined washer surface. This surface must be
positioned towards the rotor assembiy.
(31) Secure rotor with tabwashers (38) and nuts (39). Engage tangs of socket wrench LTCT13456
(detail of LTCT13175 with nut (45) to prevent compressor rotor shaft from turning. Tighten nuts
evenly 170 to 180 inch pounds torque. Do not bend tabwashers at this time.
(32) Using (LTCT14807) 0.050 inch wire gage, check clearance between aft face of inner shroud oí
second stage turbine nozzle and forward face of second stage gas producer turbine rotor
assembiy. Clearance must be 0.050 inch to 0.128 inch. If desired clearance is not obtamed,
replace spacer (27) as required to obtain clearance.
NOTE: If engine is in maintenance stand, position engine in approximately 45

degree nose down attitude prior to per forming steps (33) and (34). If
engine is installed, push forward on the center of the second gas pro-
ducer rotor when turning for runout measurement.
(33) Position dial indicator against point just inboard of second stage gas producer turbine blade
roots (Figure 207, Sheet 1). Rotate gas producer turbine rotor and record runout. Runout shall
be within 0.004 TIR.
(34) Position dial indicator on step, inboard of bolt circle (Figure 207, Sheet 2). Rotate gas producer
turbine rotor and record runout. Runout shail be within 0.003 TIR.
(35) The sum of runouts in steps (33) and (34) shall not exceed 0.006 TIR.
(36) If runouts are not within limits. loosen then retighten nuts (39, Figure 201, Sheet 2). Bend tangs
of tab washers against fíats of nuts after runouts have been established.
(37) Check second stage gas producer rotor for minimum of 0.020 inch tip clearance.
Page 217
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Checking Runout on Second Stage Gas Producer Turbina Rotor

Page 218
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Checking Runout on Second Stage Gas Producer Turbina Rotor

Paga 219/220
72-51-00 Sept 30/02
Honeywell MA,NTENANCE^MANUAL
SECOND STAGE GAS PRODUCER TURBINF ROTOR ASSEMBLY. SPACER. CYLINDER
AND N077LE ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTtCES
1 • Inspection/Check Second Staae Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assemblv Soacer. Cvlinder and N022le
Assemblv
NOTE: Conduct visual inspection of second stage gas producer rotor, using a 7 pow-
er magnifying glass.
A. Inspect Second Stage Gas Producer Cylinder (See 72-51-00, 44, Figure 201.)
(1) Visually inspect using a 7 power magnifying glass, for cracks. If cracks are evident, replace
cylinder.
(2) Dye penetrant inspect or florescent penetrant inspection. (Refer to SPM, 70-20-04, SP 1304
or SPM, 70-20-05, SP 1305.)
(3) Inspect ID of cylinder for nicks or dents. Blend repair. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.)
(4) Inspect cylinder for loss of dry film lubricant coating. (Refer to 290.3 Overhaul Manual.)
(5) Inspect 12.428 to 12.430 inch diameter of cylinder (see Figure 201) for grooving. If grooving
does not exceed 0.005 inch depth, cylinder is acceptabie. Replace if limits are exceeded.
(6) Inspect 12.194 to 12.208 inch diameter al aft edge of cylinder for chipping. Chipping defects
within 0.125 inch of aft edge of cylinder are acceptabie. Replace if chipping is not withm limits.
(7) Inspect cylinder for stripped, crossed or damaged threads. Replace if damage is evident.
B. Inspect Second Stage Gas Producer Nozzle
(1) Nozzle vanes for cracks, dents, nicks, burrs, burning and spalling. (See Figure 202.)
NOTE: Do not measure cracks from any portion of manufacturer’s blend
repair. When cracks occur in this area, use vane leading or trail-
ing edge as a reference point. (See Figure 203.)
(a) Any number of 1/8 inch cracks are acceptabie on trailing edge of all vanes.
72-51-01 sZfloZ
T53-L-703
XA 1338 -Í70
Second Stage Gas Producer Cylinder Diameter Limits

Figure 201
Page 202
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-7Q3
CRACKS EM ANATING FROM VANE LEADING

EDGE ACCEPTABLE PHOVIOEO THEY 00
NOT EXCEED 5/16 INCH ON A MAXIMUM OP
10
CRACKS IN NOZZLE
Second Síage Gas Producer Nozzle Repair Limits

Figure 202 (Sheet 1 oí 2)
Page 203
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CAUSE MATERI AL FALLCUT

ARE
NOT PERMITTED
tA n33 t62
Second Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Repair Limits

Page 204
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
T53--L-703
SeconO Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Repair Limits

Figure 203
Page 205
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -.TENANCE^
(b) Any number of 1/16 inch cracks are acceptable on leadmg edge of all vanes. Any
number of 1/8 inch cracks are acceptable on leading edge on a máximum of 15 vanes.
(c) Nicks and burrs are acceptable on vane leading and trailing edges after blend repair.
Blending shall be limifed ío removal of Sharp surface projection.
NOTE: Do not inelude manufacturer's blend repair in measurement of

burned area.
(d) Burns on leading edge 1/16 inch in length by 3/8 inch in width on máximum of 10 vanes
are allowed. Burns on trailing edge 1/8 inch in length by 1/4 inch in width on máximum of
10 vanes are allowed.
(e) Any amount of vane spallmg (loss of surface coating) on all vanes is acceptable.
(2) (Part No. 1-120-050-03 Oniy) Inspect feit metal seal for rubs. Rubs in feit metal seal are ac-
ceptable provided penetration to base metal is not evident and some unaffected portion re-
mains for 360 degrees as viewed axially.
(3) Nozzle outer shroud for cracking.
(a) Any number of axial cracks originating at vane leading edge areas and progressing to
edge of shroud are acceptable. Ten of these cracks are allowed to continué radially up to
forward face to flange radius. (See Figure 204.)
(b) Any number of cracks at vane trailing edge and into shroud areas are acceptable up to
1/8 inch in iength.
(c) Circumferential, converging, and vane to vane cracking is not allowed. Cracks in outer
shroud locations, other than those noted in steps (a) and (b) are not acceptable.
(4) Inspect tang areas for bending and mutilation.
(a) Tangs that are bent síightly {5 degrees or less) are acceptable provided they are coid
straightened. After straightening, inspect area for cracks using dye penetrant method.
No cracks are allowed.
(b) Tangs that are nicked, burred or whose edges show a rolled over effect, may be blend
repaired. Cracked or severely mutilated tangs are not acceptable.
(c) Replace nozzle assembly if limits in steps (a) and (b) above are exceeded.
Page 206
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Second Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Repair Limits

Figure 204
Page 207
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(5) Inner shroud for cracking and axial rubs.
(a) Any number of cracks up to 1/8 inch at vane trailing edge and into shroud radius areas
are acceptable. No cracking is allowed in other areas of mner shroud.
{b} Axial rubs are not allowed.
(c) Replace nozzle if limits are exceeded.
(6) Forward and aft supports for radial cracks emanating from the support to inner shroud
functions.
(a) A máximum of four cracks are acceptable in both supports provided the length does not
exceed 3/4 inch and a minimum of five vanes sepárate defects. Circumferential cracks
are not allowed.
(b) Individuafly inspect each support with respect to crack separation. Replace nozzle
assembly if preceding limits are exceeded.
C. Inspect Second Stage Gas Producer Rotor (See 72-51 -00, 37, Figure 201.)
NOTE: Conduct visual mspection of second stage gas producer rotor, using a 7 pow-
er magnifying glass.
(1) inspect blades for nicks and dents, Oniy 20 percent of the blades may have damage to the
limits given. Blade replacement is required if limits are exceeded. (See Figure 205.)
(a) Critical area. (See Figure 205.)
1 Smooth dents and nicks not exceeding 0.030 inch on longest side and 0.010 inch
deep are acceptable without rework. Damage In excess of these limits is cause for
blade replacement. No repair allowed.
(b) Areas A and B. (See Figure 205.)
1 Smooth dents and nicks not exceeding 0.190 inch on longest side and 0.015 inch
deep are acceptable without rework.
(c) Area C. (See Figure 205.)
1 Leading edge: Dents and mcks in an area tapering chordwise from 0.000 inch at the
critical area to 0.025 Inch at the outboard extremity of area C are acceptable with
repair.
•''■703
Se, •conast.
'^9^ Gas
ôúuc
'®SaPair 4
reas
HoneyweII
2 Trailing edge; Dents and nicks in an area tapering chordwise from 0.000 inch al the
critical area to 0.050 inch at the outboard extremity of area C are acceptable with
repair.
3 Sides: Dents or nicks not exceedmg 0.300 inch on the longest side and 0.015 inch
deep atter repair are acceptable provided the origina! material thickness Is not
reduced by more than 20 percent.
(d) Area D. (See Figure 205.)
1 Leading edge: Dents and nicks in an area tapering chordwise form 0.025 inch at
blade tip are acceptable with repair.
2 Trailing edge; Nicks and dents in an area tapering chordwise from 0.050 inch at area
C to 0.100 inch at blade tip are acceptable with repair.
3 Blade lips; Dents and nicks not exceeding 0.250 inch on longest side and 0.125 inch
from the top are acceptable after repair. Blade tip deformation up to 0.050 inch dis-
placement and 0.100 inch in chordal width and/or radial length is permissible.
4 Sides; Dents and nicks not exceeding 0.300 inch on the longest side and 0.015 inch
deep are acceptable after repair provided the original material thickness is not re-
duced by more than 20 percent. No more than four dents or nicks on either the
convex or concave sides, which require blending, are allowable.
NOTE; Burning is indicated by melting or loss of metal. Evidence of burning

usually denotes that other damage exists to the assembly.
(2) Inspect blades for burning, bending or distortion. None allowed.
(3) Inspect all turbine rotor blades and disc for cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
(4) Inspect all turbine rotor blades for tip rubs. Tip rubs shall not exceed 0.030 inch in depth.
Indications of tip rub are acceptable provided tip clearance can be obtamed at assembiy.
(5) Deleted-
(6) Deleted.
(7) Inspect aft face of rotor disc for rubs. Rubs 0.006 inch deep by 0.100 inch wide are aííowed
provided no indications of extreme heat exists.
(8) Inspect disc for fretting in spacer and sealing disc contact area. Fretting is acceptable up to
0.005 inch deep.
(9) Inspect aft side of rotor disc for blades recessed below disc, If one or more blades are re-
cessed more than 0.025 inch, remove rotor and reseat blades. If blades are damaged beyond
limits, ship rotor to Overhaul facility for blade replacement and balance.
(10) Inspect rubs on aft face of rotor disc. Rubs 0.006 inch deep by 0.100 inch witle are allowed
provided no indications of extreme heat exists.
(11) Deleted.
Page 210
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
(12) Inspect sealing disc for nozzle ruós. Rubs on forwarü outer diameter are not acceptable.
NOTE: Spacer and sealing disc are a matched pair. If one is replaced, both
musí be replaced.
(13) Replace sealing disc if cracked or distorted, or i< rubs are beyond limits.
D. Inspect Spacer (See 72-51-00, 33, Figure 201.)
(1) Inspect spacer for evidence of scoring. Scoring shall not exceed 0.005 inch in depth. If limits
are exceeded replace.
must be replaced.
(2) Inspect spacer for cracks or distortion. Cracks or distortion are not allowed.
E- Inspect Sealing Disc (See 72-51-00, 36, Figure 201.)
(1) Inspect sealing disc for cracks or distortion. Cracks or distortion are not allowed.
NOTE: Material loss on labyrinth sea! will not normally be evident unless wear
through of second nozzle felí metal occurs.
(2) Inspect sealing disc for labyrinth seal rubs. Rubs are acceptable provided a mínimum of 0.050
inch and heíght remains.
2. Cleaning/Paintino Second Stage Gas Producer Turbina Rotor Assembiy. Spacer, Cvlinder and Nozzle
Assemblv
A. Olean Second Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembiy, Spacer, Cylinder, Nozzle and Sealing
Disc
Olean, using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62. Table 203),
3. Approved Repairs Second Staoe Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assemblv. Spacer Cylinder and Nozzle
Assemblv
A. Repair Second Stage Gas Producer Cylinder and Second Stage Nozzle
(1) Replace second stage gas producer cylinder or nozzle if inspection limits are exceeded.
NOTE: Spacer and sealing disc are balanced together. If one requires
replacing, the assembiy requires balancing.
(2) Replace sealing disc if cracked or distorted, or if rubs are beyond limits.
B. Repair Second Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembiy
(1) Replace turbine rotor assembiy If blades or disc are cracked or distorted.
(2) Replace spacer if cracked, distorted or if scoring exceeds a depth of 0.005 inch.
(3) Repair second stage gas producer rotor assembiy bíades.
Page21i
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(12) (nspect sealing disc for nozzíe ruDs. Rubs on forward outer diameter are not acceptaWe.
NOTE: Spacer and sealing disc are a matched pair. It one is replaced, both
must be replaced.
(13) Replace sealing disc if cracked or distorted, or i< rubs are beyond limits.
D. Inspect Spacer (See 72-51-00, 33, Figure 201.)
(1) Inspect spacer for evidence of scoring. Scoring shall not exceed 0.005 inch in depth. If limits
are exceeded replace.
must be replaced.
(2) Inspect spacer for cracks or distortion. Cracks or distortion are not allowed.
E- Inspect Sealing Disc (See 72-51-00, 36, Figure 201.)
(1) Inspect sealing disc for cracks or distortion. Cracks or distortion are not allowed.
NOTE: Material loss on labyrinth seal will not normally be evident unless wear
through of second nozzle felí metal occurs.
(2) Inspect sealing disc for labyrinth seal rubs. Rubs are acceptable provided a mínimum of 0.050
inch and height remains.
2. Cleanino/Paintina Second Staae Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembiy. Spacer, Cvlinder and Nozzle
Assemblv
A. Clean Second Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembiy, Spacer, Cylinder, Nozzle and Sealing
Disc
Clean, using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203).
3. Second Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Aasembiv. Soacer. Cvlinder and Nozzle
Assembiy
A. Repair Second Stage Gas Producer Cylinder and Second Stage Nozzle
(1) Replace second stage gas producer cylinder or nozzle if inspection limits are exceeded.
NOTE: Spacer and sealing disc are balanced together. If one requires
replacing, the assembiy requires balancing.
(2) Replace sealing disc if cracked or distorted. or if rubs are beyond limits.
B. Repair Second Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembiy
(1) Replace turbine rotor assembiy if blades or disc are cracked or distorted.
(2) Replace spacer if cracked, distorted or if scoring exceeds a depth of 0.005 inch.
(3) Repair second stage gas producer rotor assembiy blades.
Page 211
72-51-01 Sept 30,/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
riOilCyi/V©ll T53-L-703
(a) Observe the lollowing rules during second stage gas producer rotor assembly blade
repair:
1 Oniy small diesinker type or India or carborundum stone may be used for blend
repair.
2 Finish strokes shall be parallel to leading and trailing edges of blades.
3 Final polishing of area shall be made with crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table 203).
Alt repairs should be blended smoothly.
4 Leading or trailing edge repairs shall be blended to smooth radius as part of repair.
(See Figure 206.)
5 Finish repair of length shall be blended to mínimum of three times depth oí damage.
(b) Repair nicks and dents on second stage gas producer rotor blades as follows;
CAUTION: ONLY 20 PERCENT OF THE BL4DES MAY HAVE DAMAGE TO
THE LIMITS GIVEN. iF BLADES ARE DAMAGED
BEYOND
LIMITS, FORWARD ROTOR TO OVERHAUL FOR BLADE
REPLACEMENT AND BALANCING.
1 Critical area. (See Figure 205.)
a No repair allowed-
b Smooth nicks and dents not exceeding 0.030 inch on the longest síde and 0.010
inch deep are acceptable without rework. Any damage in excess oí these limits
is cause for blade replacement.
2 Area A and B. (See Figure 205.)
a Smooth nicks or dents not exceeding 0.190 inch on the longest side and 0.015
inch deep are acceptable without repair.
b Rework of nicks and dents shall be confined to smoothing and blending of

damage not exceeding 0.190 inch on the longest side and 0.015 inch deep after
repair.
3 Area C. (See Figure 205.)
a On leading edge, nicks or dents in an area tapering chordwise from 0.000 inch
at the critical area to 0.025 inch at the outboard extremity of area C may be re-
paired. Depth of allowable blend repairs shall be 0.000 inch at critical area,
gradually increasing to 0.012 inch at midpoint and 0.025 inch at the extremity of
area C, with a máximum of 0.100 inch in length (see Figure 206.) No more than
two repair blends per edge area allowable in any one area.
Page 212
72-51 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
3, CleaninQ/Painling Accessorv Prive Gearbox Assemblv
A. Clean accessory Orive Gearbox Assembly
(1) Clean using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(2) Clean damaged pamt areas on gearbox assembly. (See paragraph 4.A.(2}.)
4. Aporoved Repairs Accessorv Prive Gearbox Assembly
A. Repair Accessory Orive Gearbox Assembly

(1) Blend repair nicks, burrs and scratches. using small diesinker type files and India or
Carborundum stones. Use crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table 203} for final polishing. All
repairs shall be blended and finished smoothly. Unes, scratches or Sharp edges that might
cause concentration of stress are not permitted.
(2) Refinish painted surfaces. (Refer to SPM, 70-30-18, SP P523-)
(3) Replace studs if threaded portion cannot be repaired.
(4) Replacement of tachometer drive seal. (See Figure 202.)

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove accessory drive gearbox from engine to
replace tachometer drive seal.
(a) Remove nuts (13) and washers (12) that secure tachometer drive flange and seal
assembly (34) to accessory gearbox housing assembly (45).
(b) Using tw/o 10-32 puller screws, withdraw tachometer drive flange and seal assembly from
accessory drive gearbox and remove packing (36).
(c) Using instaliing tool LTCT501 and an arbor press, remove seal (37) from beanng relamer
(35).
NOTE: Seal (37) must be installed with solid side of seal case (side with
parí number) facing tachometer flange drive housing.
(d) Dip new seal (37) in lubricating oil (72-00-00, 41 or 42, Table 203). Using instaliing tool
LTCT501, press seal into bearing relamer (35).
(e) Position packing (36) on outside diameter of bearing retainer (35). Place flange and seal
assembly over mounting stud and install gasket (10) and tachometer generator. Pasten
with nuts (13) and washer (12).
72-60-01 ¿ZoZ
2. Inspection/Check Accessorv Prive Gfiarbox Assemblv
A. Inspect Accessory Orive Gearbox Assembly
(1) inspect a(( parís for nicks, cracks, bufrs, wear and distortion.
(2) Inspect threaded parís for crossed or damaged threads.

(3) Inspect for evidence of leakage at tachometer drive, fuel control dnve and engine accessory
drive seáis. Replace if detective,
(4) Inspect starter generator drive gear spiines for wear as follows:
NOTE: Petlorm the following procedure every 300 hours.
(a) Remove oíd lubricant from spiines using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table
203) .
NOTE: Whenever the starter generator drive gear is replaced, replace

bearings.
(b) Inspect gearbox (female) spiine lor excessive wear. if wear, indicated by step (c), exceeds
one half the spIine wldth, replace the starter drive gear and bearings.
NOTE: Radial movement can be detected by placing the starter generator

vertically on a work surface and tapping the spiine with a mallet.
(c) Inspect lor radial freedom oí starter generator spiine. The total radial movement ol the
spiine shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch. Reject the starter when the spiine is frozen or fails
to move the required distance.
(d) Relubricaíe spiines wifh Plasíilube Moly No. 3 or ML7 plus 2 (72-00-00, 45, Table 203).
Page 207
72-60-01 Sept 30/0"
HoneyweII
(3) Position packing (2) in groove around drive gear.
(4) Instan gearbox support (14, Figure 202) and gasket (33) onto gearbox. Instad two washers (15)
and nuts (16) to hold support (14) in place.
(5) Position packing (3) in recessed area around duct leading to oil filter.
(6) Inserí drive shaft (1) into inlet housing and mesh with internal spiine of accessory drive gear
and support shaft.
(7) Position accessory drive gearbox on engine, making sure that drive shaft meshes with gearbox.
(8) Carefully raise gearbox, until the spiine meshes with accessory drive gear and the gearbox
mates with inlet housing.
(9) Place washer 1-080-051 -01 (7) on shouldered bolí (8). Inserí bott and finger tighten.
(10) Place washer 1-080-051-01 (10) on bolt (9). Inserí bolt and finger tighten.
(11) Place washers (12) on boits (11). Inserí bolts and finger tighten.
(12) Place washers (4) on bolts (5). Inserí bolts and finger tighten.
(13) Using 1/4 inch drive extensión and ratchet, turn gearbox lachometer drive gear. Check
through
inlet housing to make sure that compressor rotor is turning. This indicates proper meshing of
drive shaft.
(14) Tighten bolts (8. 9) 400 to 475 inch pounds torque.
(15) Tighten bolts (11) 250 to 325 inch pounds torque.
(16) Tighten bolts (5) 100 to 120 inch pounds torque.
(17) Lockwire bolts.
(18) Remove two nuts (16) and washers (15) that were installed in step (4).
NOTE: Lubrícate internal splines for fuel control drive shaft with lubricating oil
(72-00-00,41 or42, Tab/e 203).
(19) Insta!) starter generator gasket (18), and N, tachometer generator with gasket (10) 11 removed.
Lubrícate splines using spiine lubricant (72-00-00, 45, Table 203).
(20) Instan fuel control. (See 73-20-01.)
(21) Instad power Priven rotary pump. (See 79-20-01.)
(22) Connect inlet guide vane actualor seal drain hose assembly to adapter fitting on gearbox.
Tighten connector as required.
(23) Reconnect lubrication scavenge hose assemblies to accessory drive gearbox assembly.
Page 206
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA1NTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 202
1. GEARSHAFT AND BEARING ASSEMBLY 36. PACKING

2. ACCESSORY GEARBOX COVER 37. SEAL
ASSEMBLY 38. BOLT
3. GEARBOX COVER ASSEMBLY 39. FUEL CONTROL ORIVE LINER
4. THRUST BEARING LINER ASSEMBLY 40. PACKING
5. THRUST BEARING SHIM 41. SEAL
6. THRUST BEARING LINER 42. SEAL ANO LINER ASSEMBLY
7. THRUST BEARING 43. OILPUMPDRIVEGEARSHAFTASSEMBLY
8. NUT 44. FUEL CONTROL ORIVE GEARSHAFT
9. WASHER ASSEMBLY
10. GASKET 45. ACCESSORY GEARBOX HOUSING
11. COVER ASSEMBLY
12. WASHER 46. COVER GASKET
13. PACKING 47. ROLLER BEARING
14. STRAINER 48. STARTER GENERATOR ORIVE GEAR
15. PACKING ASSEMBLY
16. NUT 49. OIL AIR SEPARATOR ORIVE
17. COVER GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLY
18. GASKET 50. PACKING
19. BOLT 51. PINION GEARSHAFT AND BEARING
20. SEAL AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
21. 0)L SEAL HOUSING 52. BALL BEARING
22. PACKING 53. OUTER PINION GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLY
23. PACKING 54. PINION SHIM
24. SEAL 55. RETAINING RING
25. SPANNER NUT 56. BALL BEARING
26. LOCK CUP 57. OUTER PINION LINER
27. SEAL SPACER 58. BEARING KEY WASHER
28. PACKING 59. PLAIN ROUND NUT
29. RETAINING PLATE 60. PLUG
30. THRUST BEARING SHIM 61. PACKING
31. TABWASHER 62. BAFFLE
32. BOLT 63. BOLT
33. GASKET 64. SCREW
34. TACHOMETER ORIVE FLANGE 65. SCREW
AND SEAL ASSEMBLY 66. SPACER
35. FLANGE TACHOMETER ORIVE 67. PACKING
Page 205
72-60-01 Sept 30/0^
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Page 204
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. ACCESSORY ORIVE SHAFT 9. BOLT

2. PACKING 10. WASHER
3. PACKING 11. BOLT
5. BOLT 13. PACKING
■ 6. ACCESSORY ORIVE GEARBOX 14. STRAINE
7. WASHER 15. R
PACKING
8, SHOULOERED BOLT
Page 203
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
t-ns-13?
Accessory Drive Gearbox Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
FACCES.qORY PRIVE GFARBQX Afi.QFMfit Y - MA/NTENANCF PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Accessorv Prive Gearbox Assemblv
NOTE: If accessory drive gearbox is to be replaced, retain the power driven rotary
(oil) pump, oil filter, screen and iransfer tube (14) and chip detector. Remove
and retain support (see 14, Figure 202) and mounting nuts, bolts and wash-
ers.
A. Remove Accessory Drive Gearbox Assembly
(1) Disconnect lubrication scavenge hose assemblies from accessory drive gearbox assembly.
(See Figure 201.)
(2) Cap all hoses and fittings.
(3) Disconnect and remove inlet guide vane actuator seal drain hose assembly from gearbox
assembly.
(4) Remove power driven rotary oil pump from accessory drive gearbox assembly. (See
79-20-01.)
(5) Remove fue! control. (See 73-20-01.)
(6) Remove starter generator and Ni tachometer generator, if installed.
(7) Remove three bolts (5) and washers (4) that secure gearbox support to rear flange of inlet
housing assembly.
(8) Support accessory drive gearbox assembly (6) and remove shouldered bolt (8), bolt (9). two
bolts (11) (one not illustrated) and washers (7, 10, 12).
(9) Remove accessory drive gearbox assembly (6) and drive shaft (1) from inlet housing.
(10) Remove packings (2, 3) from mounting face of gearbox.
(11) Remove drive shaft (1), packings (13, 15) and strainer (14) from top of accessory drive gearbox.
B. Instan Accessory Drive Gearbox Assembly
(1) Instan packings (13, 15, Figure 201) on strainer (14).
(2) Instal! strainer (14) in accessory drive gearbox assembly (6).
Page 201
72-60-01 Sept 30/0Í
HoneyweII
ACCESSORY PRIVE GFARBOX ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. DescriPtion and Qperation

The accesspry drive gearbox assembiy is mounted at the 6 o’clock posrtion on the exterior of the inlet hou-
sing. It is driven by a shaftgear mated to a driving gear on the compressor rotor. The gearbox provides
the drive for the oil pump, fuel control, compressor rotor tachometer generator, and starter generator (not
part of the engine). A magnetic chip detector drain plug is installed in the bottom of the gearbox.
Pago 1/2
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ««-“-NUA.
3. Aporoved Repairs. Air Diffuser Rear Comoressor Bearina Oil Seal Retainer. Aft Seal. Rear Bearing Housing
Assemblv, Rolier Bearina, Fprward Oil Ring and Forward Seal
A. Repair Air Diffuser, Rear Compressor Bearing Oil Seal Retainer Aft Seal, Rear Bearing Housing As-
sembly, Roiler Bearing, Forward Oil Ring and Forward Seal
(2) Deleted.
(3) Deleted.
(4) Deleted.
NOTE: Seáis 1-300-616-01 and 1-300-173-01/-02/-03 are
manufactured with three spiits in the carbón seáis, 120
degrees apart. These spiits are not defects and are not
cause for seal replacement.
(5) Repiace damaged aft sea! (see 72-51 -00, 20, Figure 201) as follows;
(a) Remove retaining ring (see 72-51 -00, 19, Figure 201) from seal retainer assembly (18A).
(b) Using arbor press and installation and removal tool LTCT3825, press aft seal (see
72-51 -00, 20, Figure 201) from oü seal retainer (see 72-51-00, 21, Figure 201) or using
arbor press and installation tool LTCT382S, remove aft seal (see 72-51 -00, 20, Figure
201) .
(c) Instan new seal on base LTCT3826 (detall of LTCT3825) and secure with clamp LTCT3875
(detall of LTCT3825). Place seal with base and clamp in arbor press.
(d) Heat oil seal retainer (see 72-51 -00, 21, Figure 201) to 300 to 380°F (140 to 193^C) for
20 to 30 minutes.
(e) Remove retainer from oven and place onto seat. Position anvil LTCT3827 (detall of
LTCT3825) onto retainer and seat firmfy with arbor press.
CAUTIQN: TO PREVEN! POSSIBLE AXIAL SEAL MOVEMENT, MAKE

SURE THAT RETAINING RING IS SEATED PROPERLY
(f) Reinstali retaining ring. (See 72-51 -00. 19, Figure 201.)
(6) Deleted.
T53-L-703
AIR DIFFUSER. REAR nOMPRESSQR BEARING OIL REAL RETAINER. AFT SEAL.
REAR RFARING HOURINfi ASSEMBLY. ROLLFR BFARING. FORWARD OIL RING
AND FORWARD SEAL - MAINTENANHE PRACTICES
1. Insoection/Check Air Diffuser. Rear Comoressor Bearing Oil Seal Retainer, Aft Seal, Rear Bearina Housing
Assembiv. Rotler Bearino. Forward Qil Ring and Forward Seal
NOTE: Seáis 1-300-616-01 and 1-300-173-01/-02/-03 are manufactured with

ihree spiits in the carbón seáis, 120 degrees apart. These spiits are not de-
fects, and are not cause for seal replacement.
A. Inspect all Parts
(1) Inspect all parts for nicks. burrs and scratches.
(2) Inspect rear bearing housing assembly (see 72-51 -00, 7, Figure 201) for damaged threads.
(3) Visually inspect all parts for cracks, distortion and excessive wear.
(4) Inspect bearing retaining píate (see 72-51 -00, 16, Figure 201) for restricted oil passages.
(5) Inspect aft seal (see 72-51 -00, 20, Figure 201) for damage. Replace damaged aft seal.
(6) Inspect all accessible vanes for minor nicks, dents and burrs. Minor nicks. dents and burrs are
acceptable for repair provided mutiiation has not occurred.
(7) Inspect third row vanes for punctures. Minor punctures are acceptable provided engine perfor-
mance has not been affected.
2. Cleanina/Paintino Air Diffuser. Rear Comoressor Bearina Qil Seal Retainer. Aft Seal. Rear Beanno Housing
Assembly Roller Bearino. Forward Oil Riña and Forward Seal
C/ean all París using Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00 -00. 82, Table 203.)
T53-L-703
ACCEPTABLE
XA-1333 163
I First Stage Gas Producen Nozzle (CurI) Assembly Repair Limits

Figure 206
Page 210
72-51-04 Sept 30/02
(7) Inspect nozzle curi for hot spots and contact gouges (Figure 206). Local hot spots and minor
gouging caused by contact with the combustión chamber liner area acceptable.
(8) Inspect swaged nuts on fonward side of cylmder tlange for damage. Replace damaged nuts.
(9) Inspect cylinder for cracks. Any number of axial cracks, not exceeding 1/4 inch In length
extending forward from back face of flange, are acceptable. No circumferential cracks are
allowed.
(10) Inspect deflector for cracks. Circumferential cracking is acceptable up to a total length of 7
Inches (cumulative or one crack).
(11) Inspect nozzle curi for cracks. Axial cracks oniy are acceptable in tab area on adjacent tabs
(stots). Replace nozzle if circumferential cracks are present. Missing tabs are not acceptable.
(12) Inspect nozzle curi for missing tabs. One 3/8 inch long crack emanating from sawcut into tab is
acceptable wtthout repair on two nonadjacent tabs.
(13) Inspect nozzle curt tab area for axial and circumferential cracks. Limits are as follows:
(a) No missing tabs are allowed.
(b) Axial cracks are acceptable in liner tab area. Circumferential cracks are not permitted.
2. Cleanino/Paintina First Staoe Gas Producer Nozzle Assembly
A. Clean Rrst Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Assembly (See 72-51-00, 11, Figure 201)
Clean first stage gas producer nozzle assembly using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table
203) .
3. Deleted
Page 209
72-51-04 Sept 30/or
T53-L-703
AXIAL CRACKS PROGRESSING

TO RADIUS (5 ALLOWED)
First Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Assernbly Inner and Outer Shroud Irrsuection Limits
Figure 205
Page 208
72-51-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
BURNED ARE A
NO BURN - THROUGH
TO CORE ALLOWED
XA I33a )63
First Stage Gas Producer Nozzie Assembly Leading Edge - Burn Limits
Figure 204
Page 207
72-51 Sept 30/0?
T53-L-703
NO CORE PENETR ATION
XA 1338 162
First Stage Gas Producer Nozzíe Assembíy Leading

Edge Limiís
Figure 203
Page 206
72-51-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “,NT„MANUAL
CAUTíON: CONVERGING CRACKS WHICH CREATE THE POSSIBILITY
OF MATERIAL FALLOUT ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. IF
CRACKS
ARPEAR TO BE RADIATING TOWARDS ONE ANOTHER,
NOZZLE SHOULD BE REJECTED. THE MINIMUM DISTANCE
ALLOWED BETWEEN CONVERGING CRACKS IS 1/4 INCH.
(d) Burned areas not exceeding 3/8 inch radial length by 1/4 inch axial length per vane are
acceptable pn five vanes.
(2) Inspect leading edge of vanes for cracks and burns. (See Figure 203.)
(a) One 1/2 inch axial crack on the leading edge per vane is acceptable provided the core is
not penetrated.
(b) Any number or size of radial cracks are acceptable provided the core is not affected.
NOTE: Core is considerad affected when crack is breached and core is

visible.
(c) Burning is acceptable provided there is no burn through to the core. (See Figure 204.)
(3) Inspect vanes for warpage and distortlon. Not acceptable. Replace nozzle assembiy.
(4) Inspect vanes for nicks, dents and burrs. Acceptable without repair.
(5) Inspect vanes for spalling (loss of coating), Any amount of spailing is acceptable on all vanes.
(6> Inspect vane inner and outer shroud and cylinder for cracks. (See Figure 205.)
(a) Circumferentia) cracking is not aDowed.

(b) A máximum of five tight lipped axial cracks progressing to the outer shroud cylinder radius
are acceptable provided defects are separated by a mínimum of eight vanes. Any num-
ber of small axial cracks in the radius area up to 1/8 inch length are allowed provided
buckiing is not evident.
NOTE: Vane to vane and circumferential cracking is not allowed.
(c) Vane inner shroud cracks at the vane leading edge to inner shroud junction area are
acceptable up to 1/4 Inch on 20 vanes.
Page 205
72-51-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-U-703
ONE CRAC<
1/2 INCH ACCEPTABLE
Gas Producer Nozzla Assembly, Trailing Edge Umte

First Stage
A ü Pag® 204
72 — 51 —04 Sept30/02
T53-L-703
MULTIPLE CRACKS OR CR AZeS OF CO ATING IN

VANE INNER OR OUTER 5HROUD JUNCTION AREA
ARE ALLOWED TO ANCLE TOWAROS E ACH OTHER
AS THEY DO N OT CONSTITUTE A M ATERI AL
LOSS PROBLEM
XA 1 338 ISO
First Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Assembly Trailing Edge Limits

Figure 202 (Sheet 1 of 2}
Page 203
72-51-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
I '3M
First. Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Assembly, Manufacturer’s Blend Repairs

Figure 201
Page 202
72-51-04 Sept 30/02
FIRST STAGE GAS PRODUCER NQZ2LE ASSFMBLY- MAINTENANCF PRACTICES
1. Insoection/Check First Staae Gas Producer Nozzle Assemblv
A. Inspect First Stage Gas Producer Nozzle Assembiy (See 72-51 -00, 11. Figure 201.)
NOTE: The trailing edge areas of the nozzle vanes have been bíend repaired by the
manutacturer (Figure 201). Blend repairs are finished so as to allow no Sharp
edges in rework area, nozzle coating is applied after blending. Up to three
blend repair areas on any one vane may be evident. These blends are on all
new nozzles. Inspection limits, as specilied in steps (2) through (11), shall be
applied oniy to those defects caused by engine operation. Observe the fol-
lowing inspection procedures.
• Do not apply burned area limits to the factory blend repair areas described above.
Treat them separately. All factory blends are acceptable.
• Crack length limits shall remain as specified in foliowing steps (2) through (11) and be
measured using vane trailing edge as a reference point. Do not measure cracks from
any portion of the factory blend areas.
I • Any amount of vane spalling (loss of surface coating) on all vanes is acceptable.
(1) Inspect trailing edge of vanes for cracks and burns. (See Figure 202.)
(a) Trailing edge cracks that progress diagonally to or from the outer shroud are acceptable
on all vanes.
(b) Any number of cracks are acceptable on each vane up to 1/4 inch in length.
NOTE: Cracks progressing to vane cooling holes are acceptable.
(c) One crack is acceptable on each vane from 1/4 to 1/2 inch in length.
72-51-04 sS
T53-L-703
AFT OlL RING SEALING RING. FnRWARD AND REAR COMES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Insoection/Check Aft Oil Ring. Sealing Ring. Forward and Rear Cones
A. Inspect Oil Ring (See 72-51-00, 18, Figure 201), Sealing Ring (22), Forward Cone (24) And Rear
Cone (47)
(1) inspect oil ring and sealing ring for nicks, burrs or loss of plating.
(2) Inspect sealing ring for cracks, warpage or out of roundness.
(3) inspect cones for nicks, Purrs and excesstve wear.
2. Oeaning/Painting Aft Oil Ring. Sealing Riño. Forward and Rear Cones
A- Olean Oil Ring (See 72- 51-00, 18, Figure 201), Sealing Ring (22). Forward Cone (24) and Rear Cone
(47)
Olean all parts using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
3. Aporoved Reoairs Aft Oil Ring. Sealing Riño. Forward and Rear Cones
A. Repair of Oil Ring (See 72-51 -00, 18, Figure 201), Sealing Ring (22), Forward Cone (24) and Rear
Cone (47)
(1) Blend repair nicks and burrs on oil ring. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.)
(2) Replace oil ring if plating is damaged.
(3) Replace sealing ring if cracks, warpage or out of roundness is noted.
(4) Blend repair nicks and burrs on cones. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.) Replace if worn.
•70 CH AO Page 201/202

i Á — Oí ”UO SeptOO/O""
HoneyweII
3. Approved Repairs First Staae Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assemblv
A. Repair First Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembiy
NOTE: If both first and second stage gas producer turbine rotors are to be
replaced, new rotors shall be initially installed with the yellow “H"
markings (if preseni) which denote the heavy balance points 180
degrees apart.
(1) Replace turbine rotor assembiy if disc is cracked or damaged beyond limits.
(2) If blades are damaged beyond limits, forward rotor to overhaul for blade replacement and
balancing.
72-51-02 sS
T53-L-703
FIRST STAGF GAS PRQDUCFR TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Insoection/Check First Staoe Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assemblv
NOTE: Conduct visual inspection of first stage gas producer turbine rotor using a 7
power magnifying glass.
A. Inspect First Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembly
(1) Inspect turbine rotor blades for nicks and dents. Nicks up to 0.010 inch in depth are
acceptable. Dents are acceptabie i1 blade is not distorted.
(2) Turbine rotor blades and disc tor cracks. Cracks are not allowed.
(3) Inspect turbine rotor blades for tip rub. Tip rubs not exceeding 0.030 inch in depth are
acceptable. Indications of tip rub are acceptable provided tip clearance can be obtained at
assembly.
(4) Inspect rubs on fon/vard and aft face of disc. Rubs 0.006 inch deep by 0.100 inch wide are
allowed provided no indications of extreme heat are evident.
(5) Inspect disc for evidence of fretting. Fretting is spacer contact area up to 0.005 inch deep is
acceptable.
(6) If blades are damaged beyond iimits, ship rotor to Overhaul facility for blade replacement and
I balance.
2. Cleaning/Painting First Staoe Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assemblv
A. Clean First Stage Gas Producer Turbine Rotor Assembly (See 72-51 -00 26, Figure 201.)
Clean first stage gas producer turbine rotor assembly using dry cleaning solveni (72-00-00. 62,
Table 203).
Page 201
72-51-02 Sept 30/or
HoneyweII —
BLADES DURING DRIVING OPERATiON.
NOTE: Make sure that blade being tapped is not posítioned over slot in
fixture assembiy.
(c) Starting wilb No. 1 blade. tap ail blades flush with aft face of disc using a hammer and a
suitable drift from punch and drift kit LTCT552.
(d) Using a hammer and a drive punch, redrive all pins.
Page 215/216
72-51-01 Sept 30/0?
T53-L-703
b On írailing edge, nicks or dents in an area tapenng chordwise from 0.000 inch at
the critical area to 0.050 inch at the outboard e>ctremity of area C may be repai-
red. Depth of allowabie blend repairs shall be 0.000 inch at critical area, gradu-
ally increasing to 0.025 inch at midpoint and 0.050 inch at the extremity of area
C, with a máximum of 0.200 mch in tength {see Figure 206). No more than two
repair blends per edge area allowable in any one area. (See Figure 206.)
c On blade side, nicks or dents not exceeding 0.300 inch on the longest side and
0.015 inch deep after repair are acceptable, provided the original material thick-
ness is not reduced by more than 20 percent. (See Figure 206.)
4 Area D. (See Figure 205.)
a On leading edge, nicks or dents in an area tapering chordwise from 0.025 inch
at area C to 0.050 inch at the blade tip may be repaired. Depth of allowable
blend repairs shall proportionally be 0.025 inch at area C, gradually increasing
to 0.037 inch at the midpoint and 0.050 inch at the tip, with a máximum length of
0.375 inch. No more than two blend repairs are allowable in any one area.
b On trailing edge, nicks or dents in an area tapering chordwise from 0.050 inch at
area C to 0.100 inch at the blade tip may be repaired, Depth of allowable blend
repairs shall proportionally be 0.050 inch at area C, gradually increasing to 0.075
inch at the midpoint and 0.100 inch at the tip, with a máximum length of 0.375
inch. No more than two blend repairs are allowable in any one area.
c On blade tips, nicks or dents not exceeding 0.250 inch on the longest side and
0.125 inch from the top are acceptable. No more than two repairs blends per tip
surface (blend repair on both sides of blade at tip surface counts as two
blends). Blade tip deformation up to 0.050 inch displacement and 0.100 inch in
chorda! width and/or radial length Is permissible.
d On blade sides. nicks or dents not exceeding 0.300 inch on the longest side and
0.015 Inch deep after repair are acceptable provided the original material thick-
ness is not reduced by more than 20 percent. No more than íour dents or nrcks
on eitherthe concave or convex sides, which require blending. are allowable.
(4) If blades are damaged beyond limits, fonward rotor to Overhaul facility for blade replacement
and balancing.
(5) Reseat blades recessed more than 0.025 inch below aft face of disc as follows:
NOTE: No. 1 blade is first blade counterclockwise from balancing

0-mark on forward face of disc.
(a) Lócate and mark No. 1 blade on both sides using yellow marking pencil (72-00-00, 47,
Table 203).
(b) Place rotor, forward face up, in fixture assembiy LTCT2072.
Page 214
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
MAXIMUM LENGTH AREAS C ANO D

(BOTH SIOES) 0.300 INCH
TWICE DEPTH OR LESS

rTWICE DEPTH OR LESS
TWICE DEPTH
oft L Ess r
SECTION B-B
BJ
DAM AGED REP AIRED
MAXIMUM DEPTH
LIMITS FOLLOW NOTE
A T A PBRED
(F DISTANCE BETWEEN DENTS IS L £55 THAN
LINE TWICE THE DEPTH OF THE DEEPEST DENT,
REP AIR AS SHOWN ABOVE. IF DISTANCE
BETWEEN DENTS IS GREATER TH AN TWICE
THE DEPTH OF THE DEEPEST DENT. M A K E
SEP AR ATE BLEND REP AIRS.
DAM AGED REP AIRED
REP AIR THIS WAT
TWICE DEPTH
OR LESS MAXIMUM DEPTH
0.050 INCH ARE A D
/ R ADIUS • 0.020 INCH
/
I
F
TWICE DEPTH
OR LESS
DAM AGED REP AIRED
NOTE
IF DAM AGE IS CLOSER TO THE BLADE

TIP THAN TWICE THE DEPTH OF THE
DENT, REPAIR AS SHOWN AB OVE,
REP AIRED
XA-738 362
Second Stage Gas Producer Rotor Assembly Blade Repair

Figure 206
Page 213
72-51-01 Sept 30/02
(5) Replacement of fuel control drive seal. (See Figure 202.)
NOTE: (t is not necessary to remove accessory drive gearbox Irom engine to

replace fuel control drive seal.
(a) Remove fuel control. (See 73-20-01.)
(b) Remove bolts (38) that secure seal and liner assembly (42) lo accessory gearbox housing
assembly (45).
NOTE: Turn puller screws evenly to preven! oil seal housing from cocking
or jamming in accessory gearbox housing assembly.
(c) Using two 10-32 puller screws, sepárate seal and liner assembly from accessory gearbox
housing assembly and remove packing (40).
(d) Using installing tool LTCT100 and an arbor press, remove seal (41) from fuel control drive
liner (39).
part number) facing oil seal housing.
(e) Dip new seal (41) in iubricating oil (72-00-00, 41 or 42, Table 203). Using installing tool
LTCT100 or surtable drift, press seal into fuel control drive liner (39),
(f) Instan packing (40) into groove in accessory drive gearbox and secure seal and liner
assembly (42) with bolts (38). Lockwire bolts.
(g) Instan fuel control. (See 73-20-02.)
(6) Replacement of starter drive seal. (See Figure 202.)
NOTE: it is not necessary to remove accessory drive gearbox from engine to

replace starter drive seal. If installed remove starter. (Refer to Aircraft
Manual.)
(a) Remove bolts (19) that seoure seal and housing assembly (20).
NOTE: Turn puller screws evenly to preven! oil seal housing from cocking
or jamming in aocessory gearbox housing assembly.
(b) Using two 10-32 puller sorews, remove seal and housing assembly from accessory
gearbox housing assembly and remove packing (22).
(c) Using an arbor press and seal removal tool LTCT3648, press seal (24) from oil seal
housing (21). Remove packing (23).
Page 209
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ""NTENA_™NUAL
NOTE: Using mirror, inspect outside diameter of the seal spacer tor nicks
or scoring. H damaged remove. (See steps (d) through (g).)
(d) Straighten rim of lock cup (26). Position holding device LTCT115 on mounting pad studs.
Instan nuts on studs to hold in place. Make sure that tangs oí holding device engage
slots of spanner nut (25).
(e) Inserí spiined tool (part of holding device) and engage internal spiines of starter generator
drive gear assembly (48). Use suitable wrenches to turn spiined tool clockwise to remove
spanner nut (25). Remove holding device LTCT115.
(f) Remove spanner nut (25) and lock cup (26). Discard lock cup.
(g) Remove seal spacer (27) and packing (28).
CAUTIQN: SHORTENING MUSI BE USED ON SEAL TO AVOID DAMAGE

AND AID IN INSTALLATION.
(h) H seal spacer is being replaced, apply shortening to seal and spacer; then, position
packing (28) on seal spacer (27) and install spacer.
(i) Install lock cup (26) and spanner nut (27).
(i) Position holding device LTCT115 on mounting studs. Make sure that tangs of device
engage slots of spanner nut (25).
(k) Inserí spiined tool (part of holding device) and tighten nut counterclockwise 420 to 540
inch-pounds torque. Remove spiined tool and holding device. Deform locking cup.
part number) facing oil seal housing.
(l) Dip new seal (24) in lubricating oil (72-00-00, Table 203, Ítem 41 or42). Position pack-
ing (23) and sea! (24) inside oil seal housing (21). Using seal installer LTCT270, press
seal into housing.
(m) Place packing (22) on housing. Install seal and housing assembly (20) in accessory drive
gearbox cover. Secure seal and housing assembly with bolts (19), and lockwire bolts.
Torque as required.
(n) Install gasket (18) and install starter generator assembly (48). (Refer to Aircraft Mainte-
nance Manual.)
Page 210
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “A„.TENANCE^J,ANUAL
(7) Replacement of starter generator drive gear. (See Figure 202.)
NOTE: The accessory drive gearbox musí be removed from the engine to
replace the starter generator drive gear.
(a) Removal of gearbox. (See paragraph 1.)
(b) Remove pinion gearshatt and bearing assembly (51) and packing (50).
(c) Remove bolts (19) ihat secure seal and housing assembly (20) to accessory gearbox
cover assembly (2).
NOTE: To prevent the seal and housing assembly from jamming in the
accessory gearbox cover assembly, thread both puller screws
evenly.
(d) Using two 10-32 puller screws, remove seal and housing assembly (20). Turn screws
clockwise until seal and housing assembly sepárales from accessory gearbox cover
assembly.
(e) Remove packing (22) from oi! seal housing (21).
(f) Siraighten rim of lock cup (26). Position holding device LTCT115 on mounting pad studs,
Make sure that tangs of holding device engage slots of spanner nut (25). Use nuts on
studs to hold fixture. Do not secure nuts. Position nuts toward top hatf oi stud to make
sure tool does not come off.
(g) Inserí spiined tool (parí of holding device) and engage internal spiines of starter generator
drive gear assembly (48). Use suitabte wrench to turn spiined tool clockwise to remove
spanner nut (25). Remove holding device LTCT115.
(h) Remove spanner nut (25) and lock cup (26). Discard lock cup .
(i) Remove nuts (13) and washers (12) that secure cover (11) to accessory gearbox cover
assembly (2).
(j) Remove nuts (8) and washers (9) that secure gearbox cover assembly (3) to accessory
gearbox housing assembly (45).
Page 211
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
NOTE: If one side of the cover sticks, tap the high side with a soft faced
mallet. When a gap of one half inch between the cover and hous-
ing is obtained, check to make sure that the oil air separator Orive
gear assembly (49) and fuel control drive gearshaft assembly (44)
are separated from the cover. Lightly tap cover with sott faced
mailet to free stuck gearshaft assemblies.
(k) Secure mechanical puller LTCT142 to studs located at 3 and 9 o’ciock positions on
gearbox cover assembly. Turn handie slowly until cover separatas from housing.
(l) Lift gearbox cover assembly from accessory gearbox housing assembly, and remove
puller. Remove Seal spacer (27) and packing (28). Remove cover gasket (46). Record
thickness of cover gasket.
(m) Remove oil air separator Orive gearshaft assembly (49) w)th bearings installed.
(n) Remove oil pump drive gearshaft assembly (43) with bearings installed.
NOTE: Following steps (o) and (r) are done if bearing (47) is to be
replaced.
When removing starter generator drive gear assembly, outer race

of rolier bearing (47) will remain in accessory gearbox housing
assembly (45). Extract outer race when bearing is to be replaced.
(o) Remove starter generator drive gear assembly (48).
(p) Remove bott (63), screws (64, 65) and spacer (66) that secure baffle (62). Remove pack-
ing (67). Remove baffie (62).
(q) Using puller LTCT916, remove inner race of rolier bearing (47) from starter generator drive
gear assembly (48).
(r) Remove outer race of bearing (47) from gearbox case (45). Discard bearing.
CAUTION: MAKE CERTAIN THAT OUTER RACE IS NOT COCKED

DURING INSTALLATtON.
(s) Using a brass drift and mallet, install new outer race in gearbox case (45).
Page 212
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII «A,™™
NOTE: Posítion twisted ends oí (ockwire ¡n a manner so as to prevent
interference with gear rotation.
(t) Position packing (67) and install baffie (62). Secura baflle with spacer (66), bolt (63) and
screws (64, 65). Lockwire.
(u) To replace bearing (7), which is done when bearing (47) is replaced, perlorm the foHowing
procedure.
1 Straigbten tabs of íabwasher (31), and remove bolts (32) and tabwashers that secure
retaining píate (29) to accessor^ gearbox cover assembly (2).
2 Remove píate and thrust bearing shim (30). Record thickness oí shim, and secure it
to píate. .
NOTE: Turn puller screws evenly to prevent bearing housing from

cocking or jamming in accessory gearbox housing assembly.
3 Using two 10-32 puller screws, remove thrust bearing linar assembly (4). Turn
screws clockwise evenly until Imer assembly sepárales from accessory gearbox
cover (2).
4 Remove and record the thickness of thrust bearing sbav (5). Sepárate bearing (7)
from liner (6).
5 Measure the new bore depth of thrust bearing liner (6). Measure width of outer race
of bearing instalied in liner. Subtract bore depth from bearing width and select shim
(30) to obtain a bearing pinch of 0.002 to 0.004 inch.
(v) Position shim (5) and liner (6) in gearbox cover (2).
(w) Instan bearing (7) into liner (6).
(x) Position shim (30) and píate (29).
(y) Secu.'e with íabwasher (31) and bolts (32). Torque as required. Do not bend tabwashers.
(2) Using arbor press and sieeve bushing LTCT3640, press inner race oí roller bearing (47)
onto journal of new starter generator drive gear assembly (48). Firmiy pack inner race of
roKer bearing (47) with shortening,
(aa) Carefully install starter generator drive gear assembly (46) into outer race of roller bearing
(47).
Page 213
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
r53-L-703
(ab) Appiy a coat iron blue pigment (72-00-00, 54, Table 203) on gearshatt. Install oil air
separator drive gearshatt assembly (49) with bearings installed.
(ac) Instan oil pump drive gearshatt assembly (43) wrth bearings installed.
NOTE: Peiiorm a rotation check. Be sure all gears turn smoothly. Select
a gasket with thickness as cióse fo original cover gasket.
(ad) Instan cover gasket (46) on accessory gearbox housing (45). Position gearbox cover as-
sembly (3) onto accessory gearbox housing assembly (45). Secure with washers (9) and
nuis (8).
(ae) Instan packing (28) into seal spacer (27). Lubrícate with shortening (72-00-00, 38, Table
. 203). Instan onto gearshatt (48). InstalMock cup (26) and spanner nut (25).
(af) Position hofding device LTCTi 15 on gearbox cover assembly (3). Hold in position with
nuts. Make sure that tangs of device engage slots of spanner nut (25).
NOTE: Do not deform locking cup at this time.
(ag) Insert spiined tool (part oí holding device) and tighten nut 420 to 540 inch pounds torque.
Remove holding fixture LTCT115.
NOTE: Make sure that driven gear meshes with starter generator drive
gear befare íapping.
(ah) Coat teeth oí gear (53) with gear marking compound (72-00-00. 34A, Table 203) and
install pinion gearshatt and bearing assembly (51) into accessory gearbox housing as-
sembly (45). Tap gently with sott taced mallet until properly seated.
(ai) Rotate gear severa! times in direction oí normal rotation, making sure gears roíate
smoothly to establish pattern.
(aj) Install holding fixture LTCT4904 on gearbox cover assembly, and in spline of starter
generator drive gear assembly (48).
Page 214
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,NTENANCEMANUAL
NOTE: Inner line on flag of LTCT2099 is used for accessory gearbox
backiash check.
(ak) Instail backiash gage LTCT2099. LTCT311 or LTCT205 in ouíer pinion gearshatt assembiy.
(al) Using dial indicator, check backiash of outer pinion gearshaft assembiy and starter gener-
ator drive gear assembiy (48). Backiash must be 0.006 to 0.012 inch.
(am) Remove pinion gearshatt and bearing assembiy (51) from gearbox housing, and examine
tooth pattern on outer pinion gearshaft and starter generator drive gear assembiy (48) for
acceptable gear tooth pattern. (Refer to SPM, 70-55-01.)
NOTE: If backiash and geartooth pattern are acceptable, proceed as

follows. If either backiash or pattern are not acceptable, proceed
to steps (8), (9).
(an) Remove pinion gear (51, Figure 202) and backiash flag. Varsol wash compound off the
pinion gear (51) and starter generator gear (48),
(ao) Deform (ocking cup (26) onto nut in three places, 120 degrees apart. Bend lockwashers
(31) .
(ap) Secure with washers (9) and nuts (8) using nondrying zinc chromate sealant (72-00-00,
75, Table 203 and refer to SPM, 70-00-36, SP P526).
(aq) Instail seal and housing assembiy (20) using new packing (22) and coat with shortening
(72-00-00, 38, Table 203) before installing. Instail bolts (19). Torque as required. Lock-
wire,
(ar) Instan packing (50) on outer pinion liner (57) and instalí pinion gearshaft and bearing as-
sembly (51) into accessory gearbox housing assembiy,
(as) Reinstall accessory gearbox. (See paragraph I.B.)
(8) If backiash is not acceptable proceed as follows:
(a) Position holding device LTCT115 on mounting pad studs. Hold in place with íwo washers
(15) and nuts (16). Make sure that the tangs of the holding device engage the spanner
nut (25).
(b) insert spiined tool (part of LTCTi 15) and engage internal spiines of starter generator drive
gear assembiy (48), Use suitable wrenches to turn spiine clockwise to loosen spanner
nut (25). Remove holding device LTCT115.
(c) Remove spanner nut (25) and lock cup (26). Remove bolt (32), tabwashers (31), retaining
píate (29) and pinch shim (30).
(d) Using two 10-32 puller screws, remove thrust bearing liner assembiy (4). Turn screws
clockwise evenly until liner assembiy separatas from accessory gearbox cover (2).
page 215
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(e) Adjust shim as follows;
1 if pattem is good buí backiash is too hígh, reduce sbim ¡5), 0.002 inch. Backlash will
decrease by 0.001 inch.
2 11 pattern is good, but backlash is too low, reverse Ihe procedure in step 1-
(f) Reinstall components removed in accordance wíth instructions tn preceding step (7).
(g) Clean the starter drive gear teeth (48) with varso).
(h) Recoat the bevel gear teeth with gear marking compound (72-00-00, 34A. Table 203).
Perlorm backlash pattern check. (See steps (ah) through (ak).)
(9) If pattern ís unacceptable, proceed as íodows:
(a) Remove pinion gearshaft and bearing assembly (51).
(b) Instan gearshaft holder assembly LTCT3833 or LTCT2039 in a bench vise. Position outer
pinion gearshaft assembly in holding tool. Using spanner wrench LTCT107, loosen nuf
(59). Remove outer pinion gearshaft from holding tool.
(c) Remove nut (59) and key washer (58).
(d) Using arbor press and sieeve bushing LTCT3654, press assembled liner out of journal of
outer pinion gearshaft assembly.
(e) Remove and record thickness of shim (54).
(f) To adjust pinion shim (54), proceed as follows;
1 If the pinion gear pattern is high on convex side and low on concave side (not drive
side), add 0.002 inch shim to pinion gear. Shim (54) will decrease backlash 0.001
inch.
2 If the pinion gear pattern is high on concave side and low on convex side (drive
side). Subtract 0.002 inch from the pinion gear. Shim (54) will increase backlash
0.001 inch.
(g) Assembie pinion gearshaft and bearing assembly (51) as follows:
1 Instan pinion shim (54) on outer pinion gearshaft assembly (53).

2 Using arbor press and sieeve bushing LTCT3654, press assembled liner onto journal
of outer pinion gearshaft assembly. Install key washer (58) and nut (59).
Page216
72-60-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Washer (58) is not locked at this time. This will be

accomplished after corred gear pattern and backiash
have been esiabiished.
2 Instan gearshatt holder assembly LTCT3833 or LTCT2039 in a bench vise. Position

outer pinion gearshatt assembly in Holding tool. Using spanner wrench LTCT107,
tighten nut 300 to 360 inch pounds torque. Remove outer pinion gearshatt assembly
trom Holding tool.
(h) Olean starter gear teeth with varsol.
(i) Recoat the bevel gear teeth wrth gear marking compound {72-00-00. 34A, Tabie 203).
Reinstall.
0) Re instan the pinion gearshatt (51) ana packing (50).
(k) Perform backiash and pattern check. (See steps (ag) and (ah).)
72-60-01
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HWÍlCyirVdl T53-L-703
OVERSPFFD GOVERNOR AND TACHQMETER PRIVE ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTIQN AND OPERATION
The overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly is mounted at the 10 o'clock position on fhe exte-
rior of the inlet housing, and is dnven through shafts and gearing from the power shaft. The dnve assem-
bly provides mounts and drives tor the power turbine (Nj) tachometer generator and power driven rotary
(torquemeter booster) pump. The drive assembly aiso drives the tuel control overspeed governor and m-
corporates a strainer and metehng cartridge for lubhcation of the drive gear train. A torquemeter relief
valve, located on the upper portion of the housing, allows for the adjustment of the torquemeter boost oii
pressure.
Page 1/2
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
OVERSPEED GOVERNOR AND TACHOMETER PRIVE ASSEMBLY - MAINTFNANCE PRACTICES
1 - Removal/lnstallatfon Overspeed Govftrnor and Tachometer Prive Assemblv
A. Remove Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly
(1} Remove power driven rotary (booster) pump. {See 79-20-02.)

(2) Using an 8- 32 threaded rod, pufl overspeed governor drive shaft {10, Figure 201) through
overspeed governor and tachometer drive housing.
NOTE: Shims (6, 11) may or may not be installed.
(3) Remove shims (6. 11) and tag as to their respective positions.
(4) Expand and slide retaining rings (7, 9) to center of shaft tube (8). Slide shaft tube aft into over-
speed governor housing.
(5) Dísconnect the fuei control air pressure sensing (ine from bracket under bolt (13).
{6} Remove bolts (5. 13, 15) bracket (4) and washers (14, 16) that secure overspeed governor and
tachometer drive assembly to mounting pad on inlet housmg.
(7) Remove overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly, discard packings (2, 3) and with-
draw shaft (1) from inlet housing.
B. Instan Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly
(1) Insert shaft (1, Figure 201) into inlet housing mounting pad.
NOTE: The fuel control air pressure sensing line mounting bracket is installed
under bolt (13).
(2) Using new packings (2, 3) install overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly (12) on
inlet housing mounting pad and secure with bolts (5, 13, 15) bracket (4) and washers (14, 16).
Lockwire bolts.
(3) Slide shaft tube (8) fonward into overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly. Expand
and slide retaining rings (7, 9) into place.
(4) Instan shim (6), if necessary.

T53-L-703
XA-7M147
Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Orive Assembly and Attaching Parts

Figure 201
Page 202
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. SHAFT 10. OVERSPEED GOVERNOR ORIVE

2. PACKING 11. SHAFT
SHIM
3. PACKING 12. OVERSPEED GOVERNOR AND
4. BRACKET TACHOMETER ORIVE ASSEMBLY
5. BOLT 13. BOLT
6. SHIM 14. WASHER
7. RETAINING RING 15. BOLT
8. SHAFT TUBE 16. WASHER
9. RETAINING RING
Page 203
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
NOTE: If new overspeed governor and tachometer dnve assembly is being
installed. the end lloat of the overspeed governor drive shaft must be
established (paragraph C.), before pertorming step (6).
(5) Insert overspeed governor drive shaft (10). Add shim (11) if necessary.
(6) Instan power driven rotary (booster) pump. (See 79-20-02.)
C. Establishing End Float of Overspeed Governor Drive Shaft

NOTE: When the torquemeter booster pump, engine overspeed governor or fuel
control is to be installed, end float of overspeed governor drive shaft must be
established- Excessive end float can cause wear of the shaft spiines and may
lead to malfunction or failure of the engine overspeed governor. (See Figure
202.)
(1) Remove torquemeter boost pump. (See 79-20-02.)
(2) Remove shims, if any, from forward end of overspeed governor drive shaft. Record thickness of
shims.
(3) Using 8- 32 threaded rod, pulí overspeed governor shaft through drive shaft tube.
(4) Using same rod, remove aft shims, if any, from overspeed governor housing. Record thickness
of shims.
(5) Remstall overspeed governor drive shaft and push as far into overspeed governor housing as
possible.
(6) Measure and note (in thousandths of an inch) the distance designated. (See A. Figure 202.)
(7) Using a depth micrometer, measure and note (in thousandths of an inch) the dimensión desig-
nated- (See B, Figure 202.)
(8) Subtract Dimensión A from B. This will indícate total existing end float.
NOTE: Mínimum end float tolerance is not established: however, it is important

that some end float exist to preelude jamming the overspeed governor
drive shaft against the housing and booster pump spiined shaft.
(9) If end float is less than 0.090 inch, do not shim drive shaft.
(10) If end float is between 0.090 and 0.280 inch, install one shim 1-160-589-02 at fuel control
end of drive shaft.
Page 204
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
POW = R ORIVEN
ROTARY(BOOSTER) PU M P
ROTARY (BOOSTER) PUMP ANO

OVERSPEED GOVEPNOR
AND TAC M O M ETER
ORIVE ASSY
»A-? je 15c
End Float Adjustment of Overspeed Governor Orive Shat

Figure 202
Page 205
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
NOTE: Number of shims to be installed is either none, one or four.
(11) If end íloat is more than 0.280 inch, instan two shims at each end of drive shaft.
2. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Oversoeed Gov^rnor and Tachometer Drive Assemblv
A. Disassemble Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly
(1) Cut lockwire and remove plug (1 or 4, Figure 203). Remove packing (2 or 5) from plug.
(2) Remove filter assembly (3) or filter (6). Remove packing (2) from filter assembly (3).
NOTE: Step (3) is performed if gasket (11) or seal (13) need to be replaced.
(3) Remove bolts (14), washers (15), cover assembly (12) and gasket (11). Press seal (13) out of
cover assembly (12), using arbor press and sieeve bushing LTCT3640.
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY, APPLY FORCE ONLY

TO WRENCH FLATS ON RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: Remove torquemeter relief valve assembly (10) oniy as required during
frouble shooting, (See 72-00-00, ENGINE - TROUBLE SHOOTING.)
(4) Remove torquemeter relief valve assembly (10).
B. Reassemble Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly
CAUTION: HOLD FILTER IN SOFT JAWED VISE TO AVOID DAMAGE TO OUTER

SURFACE
NOTE: If filter (6, Figure 203) is to be installed, perform steps (1) through (3). If filter
assembly (3) is to be installed, perform steps (4) and (5).
(1) Instad filter (6) in plug (4) and tighten 77 to 96 inch pounds torque.
(2) Position new packing (5) on plug (4).
(3) Instad plug in housing and tighten 70 to 85 inch pounds torque. Lockwire plug.
(4) Position new packings (2) on plug (1) and filter assembly (3).
Page 206
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Orive Assembly

Figure 203
Page 207
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII --T™™
KEY TO FIGURE 203
1. PLUG 8. PACKING
2. PACKING 9. PACKING
3. FILTER ASSEMBLY 10. TORQUEMETER RELIEF VALVE
4, PLUG 11. ASSEMBLY
GASKET
5. PACKING 12. COVER ASSEMBLY
6. FILTER 13. SEAL
7. OVERSPEED GOVERNOR AND 14. BOLT
TACHOMETER ORIVE HOUSING 15. WASHER
ASSEMBLY
Page 208
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “AINT^MANUAL
(5) Instan filter assembly and plug in housing (7). Tighten plug (1) 70 to 85 inch pounds torque.
(6) Lubrícate gasket (11) and position gasket on overspeed governor and tachometer drive
housing assembly (7).
(7) Lubrícate seal (13) and, using ínstallíng tool LTCT501, press seal ínto cover assembly (12).
(8) Lubrícate bearíng liner on cover assembly (12) and position cover assembly on housing
assembly. Using soft faced mallet, gently tap cover assembly down until iirmiy seated. Secura
cover assembly to overspeed governor and tachometer drive housing assembly (7) with bolts
(14) and washers (15).
CAUTIQN: IMPROPER INSTALLATION OF TORQUEMETER RELIEF VALVE

ASSEMBLY COULD RESULT IN DAMAGED PACKING. THIS
COULD
CAUSE SECTIONS OF THE PACKING TO ENTER OIL PASSAGES
WHICH WOULD RESULT IN A LOW TORQUEMETER READING.
NOTE: Perform following step (9) if torquemeter relief valve assembly has been
removed.
(9) Lubrícate packings (8, 9) with shortening compound (72-00-00, 38, Table 203) and place on
torquemeter relief valve assembly (10). Instad torquemeter reíief valve assembly Into housíng
(7) and tighten 80 to 100 inch pounds torque.
3. Insoection/Check Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly
A. Inspect Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive assembly
(1) Inspect all parts for nicks, burrs and scratches.
(2) Inspect all threaOed parts for damaged threads.
(3) inspect filter assembly for damage. Replace if detective.
4. Cleanino/Paintinq Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly

Clean Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly Use dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62,
Table 203.)
5. Aoüroved Repairs Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly
A. Repair Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly
(2) Repair minor thread damage. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.)
Page 209/210
72-60-02 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUBJECT RURJECT PAGE
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL 73-00-00
STARTING FUEL MANIFOLD 73-10-01

MAIN FUEL MANIFOLD 73-10-02

STARTING FUEL NQZZLES 73-10-03

FLQW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVF ASSEMBLY 73-10-04

FLQW DIVIDER HOSE ASSEMBLIFS 73-10-05

COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVE 73-10-06


MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUBJECT SUBJECT
PAG
E
STARTING FIJEL HOSES AND CHECK FILTER 73-10-07
VALVE 1
Approved Repairs
STARTING FUEL SOLENQID 73-10-08
VALVE 1
201
Removai/Installation
202
Inspection/Check
202
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repairs
MAIN FUEL ROSE ASSEMBLIES 73-10-09
201
Removal/Installation
201
Inspection/Check
201
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repairs 20
3
FtJFL CONTROL SYSTEM 73-20-00
FUEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY 73-20-01

Servicing 201
Adjust/Test-Fuel Control Assembly 208
214
Disamble/Reassembly Fuel control Assembly
216
Inspection/Check
217
Cleaning/Painting
FUEL CONTROL SOLENQID 73-20-02

VALVE 1
Adjustment/Test 206
Approved Repairs
Page 2
73- CONTENTS Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
FUEL INLET STRAINER. CQVER AND PUMP DISCHARGF 73-20-03

STRAINER. AND RFRVG SUPPLY FILTFR
Removal/installation 201
Page 3/4
T53-L-703
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PACES
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
SüBJFOT PACE DATE SliaiFCT PACE DATE
73 ENGINE 2 Blank
FUEL& 201 Sept 30/02
CONTROL —
Tab 202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
Contents 2 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
4 Blank 73-10-08 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
List of 201 Sept 30/02
Effective 1 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
Pages 2 Sept 30/02 73-10-09 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
73-10-01 1 Sept 30/02 201 Sept 30/02
201 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 204 Blank
203 Sept 30/02 73-20-00 1 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 2 Sept 30/02
73-10-02 1 Sept 30/02 3 Sept 30/02
2 Blank 4 Blank
201 Sept 30/02 73-20-01 1 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 201 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
73-10-03 1 Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
201 Sept 30/02 208 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 209 Sept 30/02
73-10-04 1 Sept 30/02 210 Sept 30/02
201 Sept 30/02 212 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 213 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 214 Sept 30/02
204 Blank 215 Sept 30/02
73-10-05 1 Sept 30/02 216 Sept 30/02
201 Sept 30/02 218 Blank
202 Sept 30/02 73-20-02 1 Sept 30/02
73-10-06 1 Sept 30/02 2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
202 Blank 203 Sept 30/02
73-10-07 1 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
73- EFF
T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
SLJBJECT PAGE DATE SUR.IFCT PACF
DAT
E
205 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02
73-20-03 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02
206 Blank
Page 2
Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
STARTING FUEL MANIFOLD - DESCRIPTION AND
QPERATION
1 - Description and Operation
The starting fue! manifoid is mounted on the aft end of the cpmbustion chamber housing and secured to
Ihe support cone. The manifoid receives fue! from the fuel regulator through the starting fuel solenoid
valve and delivers it to four starting fuel nozzles.
Page 1/2
73- 10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
STARTINQ FUEI MANIFOLD - MAINTFNANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Starting Fuel Manifoid
A. Remove Starting Fuel Manifoid
(1) Remove starting fuel hose, (See 73-10-07.)
(2) Remove screws (1,9, 11, 17, Figure 201) that secure clamps (2. 8, 10, 16) to support cone.
(3) Remove nut (3) and washer (4) that secure tee (6) to support cone bracket.
(4) Pelease torque on connector nuts that hold manifoid to starting fuel nozzles. Remove
manifoid
(7. 15) and tee (6) as a unit. Remove washer (5). Immediately cap all openings.
NOTE: Further disassembly is not normally required unless a manifoid or tee is

to be replaced.
(5) Loosen connector nuts and sepárate left hand starting fuel manifoid (7) and right hand starting
fuel manifoid (15) from tee (6)
B. Instan Starting Fuel Manifoid
NOTE: Do not tighten connector nuts to full torque at this time.
(1) Position starting fuel manifoid (7, 15, Figure 201) on tee (6) and hand tighten connector nuts.
(2) Position washer (5) on tee (6).

(3) Position manifolds over support cone and inserí tee (6) into support cone bracket. Align con-
nector nuts with starting fuel manifolds and hand tighten connector nuts.
(4) Tighten all connector nuts 35 to 50 inch-pounds torque.
(5) Instan washer (4) and nut (3) on tee (6) and tighten 35 to 50 inch-pounds torque.
(6) Secure clamps (8, 10, 16, 2) with screws (9, 11, 17, 1) to support cone. Tighten screws as
required and lockwire.
Page 201
73- 10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
Starting Fuel Manifolds and Starting Fuel Nozzles

Figure 201
Page 202
73-10-01 Sept 30/02
Honeywell -.HTENANCE^MÛAL
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. SCREW 10. CLAMP

2. CLAMP 11. SCREW
3, NUT 12. SCREW
4. WASHER 13. STARTING FUEL NOZZLES
5. WASHER 14. SEALING GASKET
6, TEE 15. RIGHT HAND STARTING FUEL
7. LEFT HAND STARTING FUEL MANIFOLD 16. MANIFOLD
CLAMP
8, CLAMP 17. SCREW
9. SCREW
Page 203
73- 10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
2. Inspection/Check Startina Fuel Manitoid
A. Inspect Starting Fuel Manifoid

(1) Inspect manifoid for breaks, cracks, damaged connectors and other conditions that would
make manifolds unsatisfactory for further use.
(2) Replace manifolds that are damaged or show evidence of clogging.
3- Cleaning/Paintino Startino Fuel Manifoid
Clean starting fuel manifoid completely outside with dry cteaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203). Re-
place if interior is contaminated.
Page 204
73- 10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
MAIN FUEL MANIFOLD - DESCRIPTIQN AND OPERATlON

Two main fuel manifolds are secured to the rear of the combustión chamber housing. They receive fuet
from the flow divider assembiy and deliver it to 22 fuel nozzles through either of two sepárate fuei pas-
sages.
Page 1/2
73- 10-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ‘Â.NTENANC^MANUAL
MAIN FUFL MANIFOLD - MAINTFNANHF PRACTICES
1. Removal/lnstatlation Main Fuel Manilold
A. Remove Main Fuel Manilold

(1) Disconnect ignition leads Irom igniter plugs and clamps that secure leads to support cone.
{See 74-20-02.)
(2) Remove starting fuel manifolds and starting fuel nozzles. (See 73-10-01 and 73-10-03.)
(3) Remove nut (1), spacers (2. 3) and bolt (4) that secure V-band (5). Sepárate from diffuser
support cone (6) and remove.
(4) Remove support cone assembly (6).
(5) Disconnect hose assemblies from main fuel manifoid assemblies (3) and cap all open connec-
tors.
(6) Remove bolts (7) that secure fuel manifoid assembly to rear face of combustión chamber hou-
sing. Carefully withdraw manifoid assembly from combustión chamber to avoid damage to
parts.
(7) Remove seáis (8) from fuel nozzles.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATtON, ENCLOSE MANIFOLD IN A OLEAR

PLASTIC BAO AND SECURE IN REUSABLE CONTAINER.
(8) Remove screws (9) securing sealing gaskets (10) to fuel manifoid. Remove gaskets.
B. Instan Main Fuel Manifoid (See Figure 201.)
NOTE: Manifoid assemblies can be used interchangeably on either right or left side of
engine.
(1) Position sealing gaskets (10) on fuel manifoid at 2, 4, 8 and 10 o'clock positions and secure
with screws (9). Tighten screws as required.
(2) Position seáis (8) on each nozzle.
(3) Remove caps (11, 12) from ports to be used on main fuel manifoid assemblies (13).
Page 201
73- 10-02 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
* 1333 130
Main Fuel Manifoid Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
73-10-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. NUT a. SEAL
2. SPACER 9. SCREW
3, SPACER 10. SEALING GASKET
4. BOLT 11. CAP
5. V-BAND 12. CAP
6. SUPPORT CONE ASSEMBLY 13. MAIN FUEL MANIFOLD
7, BOLT ASSEMBLIES
Page 203
73- 10-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(4) Align primary ports on manifoid (see Figure 202) with primary ports of flow divider and dump
valve on rear face of combustión chamber housing. Secure manifoid assembly to housing with
boils (7, Figure 201). Tighten bolts as required and lockwire.
(5) Connect hose assemblies from flow divider to fue! manifoid. Tighten hose connector 70 to 120
inch pounds torque.
2. InsDection/Check Main Fuel Manifoid
A. Inspect Main Fuel Manifoid
NOTE: Deleted.
(1) Inspect fuel manifoid for leakage. Replace if leakage Is noted.
(2) Inspect fuel manifoid for cracks or damage. Repíace if cracks or damage are noted.
(3) Inspect main fuel nozzies (see Figure 203) for chafing or excessive coke buildup. Limits are as
follows:
(a) Chafing or rub damage in front of air inlet holes is acceptable provided air shroud is not
broken through.
(b) Any evidence of crushing at air inlet holes is unacceptable.
(c) Evidence of heavy coking at the nozzle fuel orifice outlet or at air inlet holes is unaccepta-
ble. Coke buildup on air shroud face is acceptable provided it does not extend into the
shroud.
(d) Inspect nozzle for proper torque (80 to 90 inch pounds).
NOTE: Deleted.
Page 204
73- 10-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
XA- 7 J S- 1 0 <
Main Fuel Manifoid - Primary and Secondary Porís

Figure 202
Page 205
73-10-02 Sept 30/02
Honeêll WAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
- Inspection
Figure 203
73- 10-02 Page 206

Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
STARTINQ FUFI. NOZZLES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATIQN
Four starting fuel nozzles, located at the 2, 4, 8 and 10 o’clock positions in the rear of the combustión
chamber housing, deliver atomized fuel to the combustión chamber during starting. When the engine
comes up to speed, starting fuel flow is stopped and pressurized air from the combustor is directed
through the check filter vatve to purge the starting fuel lines and nozzles.
Page 1/2
73- 10-03 Sept 30/02
Honeyweii
STARTING FUEL NOZZI FS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICFS
1. Rerrioval/lnstaflatíon Starting Fuel Nozzles
A. Remove Starting Fuel Nozzies

(1) Disconnect starting fuel manifolds (see 73-10-02. 13, Figure 201) from four starting fuel
nozzies.
(2) Remove screws (see 73-10-03, 3, Figure 201) and withdraw starting fuel nozzies (2) from
combustión chamber. Remove gaskets (1).
B. Instan Starting Fuel Nozzies
NOTE: The starting fue) nozzies are installed through mounting pads on the main
fuel manifolds at approximately the 2, 4, 8 and 10 o'clock positions.
(1) Place new gasket (see 73-10-03. 1, Figure 201) on starting fuel nozzies (2). Install starting
fuel nozzies (2) into combustión chamber and secure with screws (3). Tighten screws as re-
quired and lockwire.
(2) Connect starting fuel manifolds (see 73-10-02, 13, Figure 201) to nozzies and tighten connec-
tor nuts 35 to 50 inch pounds torque.
2. Insoection/Check Starting Fuel Nozzies
A. inspect Starting Fuel Nozzies

NOTE: Perform inspection of starting fuel hose check filter valve if nozzies are
clogged or heavily coked.
Using pressure source of dry filtered air, inspect nozzies for clogging or damage. Replace nozzle if
damaged or cloggmg cannot be removed.
3. Cleaning/PaintinQ Starting Fuel Nozzies
Clean Starting Fuel Nozzies with Fiber Brush and Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
Page 201
73- 10-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
XA 738-427
1. SEALING GASKET 3. SCREW

2. STARTING FUEL NOZZLE
Starting Fuei Nozzie

Figure 201
Page 202
73-10-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
FLOW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVE ARRFMRLY - DESCRIPTIQN AND
QPERATION
1. Description and Ooeration

The fiow divider and dump valve assemply is mounted under the exhaust diffuser support cone at the 6
o'clock position. The flow divider assembly receives fuel from the fuel regulator, and delivers it to the main
tuel manifoid through two passages. At iow N, speeds, the flow divider sends fuel through the primary
System of the manifoid. As Ni speed increases, fuel pressure increases and the flow divider opens ports
to the secondary system of the main fuel manifoid. The flow divider is equipped with a drain port to drain
fuel from the main fuel manifoid and flow divider during engine shutdown.
Page 1/2
73- 10-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ÜOllG^^lWdl T53-L-703
FLOW DIVIDER AND niJMP VALVE ASSFMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Flow Divider and Pumo Valve Assemblv

A. Remove Flow Divider and Dump Valve Assembly
NOTE: Removal of Ilow divider and dump valve assembly shall not be accomplished
unless replacement is intended.
(1) Dísconnect fue/ in/et Une and hose assemblies (1. 2, 7. 8, 13, Figure 201) from flow divider and
dump valve assembly (6).
CAUTION: IMMEDIATELY CAP HOSE ASSEMBLY PORTS.
(2) Remove support assembly. (See 72-40-02, paragraph 1 .A.(1) through (4).}
(3) Remove screws (3. 4, 5) that secure flow divider and dump valve assembly to exhaust difluser
support cone.
(4) Remove flow divider and dump valve assembly (6) and spacer (9) from support cone.
B. Instan Flow Divider and Dump Valve Assembly
(1) Position spacer (9, Figure 201) and flow divider and dump valve assembly (6) against exhaust
diffuser support cone.
(2) Secure flow divider with screws (3, 4, 5). Tighten screws as required and lockwire.
(3) Reinstall support assembly. (See 72-40-02. paragraph 1.B,(1} through (7).)
(4) Connect hose assemblies (1,2, 7, 8, 13) and fuel inlet line to flow divider. Tighten hose
connectors as required.
2- inspectlon/Check Fiow Divider and Pumo Valve Assemblv
A. Inspect Flow Divider and Dump Valve Assembly
(1) Inspect for nicks, burrs and scratches.
(2) Inspect all threaded parts for damaged threads.
(3) Visualiy inspect for cracks, distortion and excessive wear.
Page 201
73- 10-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Flow Divider and Dump Valve Assembly and

Combustión Chamber Drain Valve Assembly
Figure 201
Page 202
73-10-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1, HOSE ASSEMBLY (SECONDARY) 8. HOSE ASSEMBLY

2. HOSE ASSEMBLY (PRIMARY) 9. (SECONDARY)
SPACER
3, SCREW 10. GASKET
4. SCREW 11. BOLT
5, SCREW 12. COMBUSTION CHAMBER
6. FLOW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVE DRAIN
VALVE ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY 13. HOSE ASSEMBLY
7. HOSE ASSEMBLY (PRIMARY)
3. Cleanina/Painting Fiow Divider and Pumo Valve Assemblv
Olean Flow Divider and Dump Valve Assembly with Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203)
4. Approved Repairs Flow Divider and Pumo Valve Assemblv
A. Repair Flow Divider And Dump Valve Assembly
(1) Blend repair nicks, burrs and scratches. (Reler to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401.)
(2) Repair crossed or damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.) Replace parts
having crossed or damaged threads that cannot be repaired.
73- 10-04
T53-L-703
FLOW DIVIDER HOSE ASSEMBLIES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description and Operation
The flow divider hose assemblies connected to the flow divider and dump valve assembly are located
under the exhaust diffuser support cone between the 5 and 7 o'clock positions,
One line transporta tuel from the fuel control to the flow divider and dump valve assembly. Four lines
transport fuel from the flow divider to the main fuel manifold. One line allows residual fuel to drain from the
flow divider to the overboard drain valve.
Page 1/2
73- 10-05 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
FLOW niVIOFR HQSE ASSEMBLIES - MAINTFNANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Flow Divider Hose Assemblíes
A. Remove Flow Dividen Hose Assemblies

(1) Disconnect primary hose assemblies (see 73-10-04, 2, 7, Figure 201) from primary ports of
fuel manifoid and from primary ports of flow divider and dump valve assembly (6). Remove
hose assemblies.
CAUTiON: IMMEDIATELY CAP FLOW DIVIDER AND FUEL MANIFOLD PORTS.
(2) Disconnect secondary hose assemblies (1,8) from secondary ports of fuel manifoid and from
secondary ports of flow divider and dump valve assembly. Remove hose assemblies.
CAUTION: IMMEDIATELY CAP FLOW DIVIDER AND FUEL MANIFOLD PORTS.
(3) Disconnect hose assembly (13) from flow divider and from combustión chamber drain valve
assembly (12). Remove hose assembly.
CAUTION.- DO NOT REMOVE CAPS FROM PORTS UNTIL THE HOSE ASSEMBLY
FOR THE PORT IS TQ BE CONNECTED.
B. Instan Flow Divider Hose Assemblies
(1) Connect hose assembly (see 73-10-04, 13, Figure 201) to combustión chamber dram valve
assembly (12) and to flow divider and dump valve assembly (6). Tighten hose connectors as
required.
(2) Connect primary hose assemblies (2, 7) to primary ports of fuel manifoid and primary ports of
flow divider and dump valve assembly (6). Tighten hose connectors as required.
(3) Connect secondary hose assemblies (1,8) to secondary ports of fuel manifoid and secondary
ports of flow divider. Tighten hose connectors as required.
2- Insoection/Check Flow Divider Hose Assemblies
A. Inspect Hose Assemblies
(1) Inspect hose assemblies for stripped or damaged fhreads.
(2) Inspect hose assemblies for cuts, fraying and chafing.

T53-L-703
3. Cleanina/PaintinQ Flow Dívider Hose Assemblies
Ciean hose assemblies with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62. Table 203).
4. Aporoved Repairs Fiow Divider Hose Assemblies
A. Repair Hose Assemblies
(1) Blend repair (SPM, 70-25-01, SP R409) damaged threads. Replace hose assemblies when
threads are stripped or cannot be repaired.
(2) Replace hoses that are cut, frayed or chafed.

T53-L-703
COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVF - DESCRIPTION AND QPERATIQN
1. Description and Qperation
The combustión chamber drain valve is at the 6 o'clock position on the combustión chamber housing,
The drain valve is spring loaded open to allow drainage of residual fluids during engine shutdown. Interna
pressure during engine operation keeps the valve closed. A port is at the side of the drain valve housing
to allow unburned fuel to drain from the flow divider assembly through the overboard drain valve dunng
engine shutdown.
Page 1/2
73- 10-06 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/lnstallation Combustión Chamber Drain Valve
A. Remove Combustión Chamber Drain Valve

(1) Disconnect hose assembly (see 73-10-04, 13, Figure 201) from combustión chamber drain
valve assembly (12) and plug hose.
(2) Remove bolts (11) that secure drain valve to combustión chamber housing. Mark position of
drain valve and gasket (72-00-00, 47, Table 203). Remove dram valve assembly (12) and
gasket (10).
B. Instan Combustión Chamber Drain Valve. (See 73-10-04, Figure 201.)
(1) Position new gasket (10) 1-160-045-01 and drain valve assembly (12) on combustión cham-
ber housing.
NOTE: Make sure that bolts do not exceed 3/8 inch in length.
(2) Secure combustión chamber drain valve assembly with bolts (11). Tighten bolts 35 to 40 inch
pounds torque and lockwire.
(3) Connect hose assembly (13) to drain valve assembly. Tighten hose connectors as required .
2. Insoection/Check Combustión Chamber Drain Valve
A. Inspect Combustión Chamber Drain Valve

(1) Inspect mounting flange for warpage and cracks. Replace if warpage or cracks are noted.
(2) Inspect for damaged threads. Replace valve if threads are damaged.
CAUTION: BOLTS MUST NOT EXCEED 3/8 INCH IN LENGTH.

(3) Remove lockwire. Check four bolts, which secure combustión chamber drain valve, for 35 to
40 inch pounds torque. If bolts are loose, drain valve must be removed, íhen reinstalied with
new gasket and secured with bolts. Tighten bolts 35 to 40 inch pounds torque and lockwire.
B. Check Combustión Chamber Drain Valve
Check functioning of valve by depressing píate, tf píate does not return to original position, deán or
replace valve.
3. Cleanina/Paintino Combustión Chamber Drain Valve
Thoroughiy Clean Combustión Chamber Drain Valve Assembly with Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62,
Table 203)
Page 201/202
73- 10-06 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
STARTING FUEL HQSES AND CHECK FILTFR VALVE - DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION

The starting fuel hoses are located on the upper left side of the engine. They direct starting fuei flow from
the fuel control to the starting fuel solenoid valve, and then from the solenoid valve to the starting fuel man-
ifold. A check filter valve, mounted on the combustión chamber housing, opens when compressor rotor
speeO increases to 80 to 87 percent and bleeds pressurized air from the combustión chamber to purge the
starting fuel lines and starting fuel nozzles of fuel.
Page 1/2
73- 10-07 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Starting Fuel Hose Assemblies, Solenoid Valve and Check Filter Valve
Figure 201
Page 202
73-10-07 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
STARTING FUEL HOfiFS AND CHECK FILTER VAtVF - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Staitina Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve
A. Remove Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve
(1) Disconnect hose assembly (1, Figure 201) from fuel control and from solenoid valve assembly
(23) . Remove hose assembly.
(2) Remove screw (20) and nut (17) from clamp (19).
(4) Remove screw (14) from clamp (13) and disconnect hose assembly from check filter valve (7).
(5) Disconnect hose assembly (18) from solenoid valve assembly (21) and from starting fueling
manifold. Remove hose assembly.
(6) Remove bolt (9) and gaskets (10, 11) from boss on combustor housing. Discard gaskets.
(7) Disconnect tube assembly (8) from check filter valve (7). Remove tube assembly.
(8) Loosen screw (6) and nut (5) on bracket and clamp assembly (4) and remove check filter
valve (7).
(9) Remove bolt and nut that secure bracket and clamp assembly to combustor housing.
B- Instan Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve
(1) Apply antiseize compound (72-00-00, 15, Table 203) to threads of bolt (9, Figure 201).
(2) Position tube assembly (8) on combustión chamber housing and secure with bolt (9) and
gaskets (10, 11). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
(3) Secure bracket and clamp assembly (4) to combustor housing with bolt and nut.
NOTE: A filter is located at the air IN side of check filter valve.

KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. HOSE ASSEMBLY 14. SCREW

2. BRACKET 15. SCREW
3. BOLT 16. CLAMP
4. BRACKET AND CLAMP ASSEMBLY 17, NUT
5. NUT 18. HOSE ASSEMBLY
6. SCREW 19. CLAMP
7. CHECK FILTER VALVE 20. SCREW
8, TUBE ASSEMBLY 21. SOLENOID VALVE
9. BOLT 22. ASSEMBLY
SCREW
10. GASKET 23. FILTER
11. GASKET 24. PACKING
12. NUT 25. UNION
13. CL^MP
Page 203
73- 10-07 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(4) Position check filter valve (7) in bracket and clamp assembly (4) with arrow on top of valve
and
pointing away from tube assembly (8). Tighten screw (6) and nut (5) onbracketand clampas-
sembly lightiy.
(5) Connect tube assembly (8) to check filter valve and torque as required.
(6) Connect hose assembly (18) to solenoid valve assembly (21), starting fuel manifoid and check
filter valve (7). Torque connections as required.
(7) Tghten bolt (9) 90 to 120 inch-pounds torque and lockwire.
(8) Tighten screw (6) that securas valve in bracket and clamp assembly (4).
(9} Secure clamp (16) with screw (15) and nut (12).
(10) Secure clamp (19) with screw (20) and nut (17).
(11) Connect hose assembly (1) to solenoid valve assembly (21) and fuel control. Tghten hose con-
nectors 70 to 120 inch-pounds torque.
2. Insoection/Check Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve
A. Inspect Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve

(1) Inspect check filter valve. !f starting fuel nozzles were heavily coked or dogging was evident,
perform the following:
CAUTION: INSTALL CHECK VALVE WITH ARROW POINTING LEFT OVER TOP
OF ENGINE (AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF ENGINE).
Remove check valve and appty light air pressure to the upstream (air) side of the valve. (Mouth
pressure is sufficient to perform test.) Blow in direction of the inscribed flow arrow. If unre-
stricted flow is evident, valve is acceptable for further use provided check valve closes when air
pressure is applied to the opposite end. Replace valve if flow is restricted or check valve fails to
cióse.
(2) Inspect hoses for cuts, fraying or chafing.
(3) Inspect for crossed or damaged threads on connector nuts.
(4) Inspect valve body for damage. Replace valve if damaged.
(5) Inspect tube assembly for cracks.

(6) Visually inspect bracket and clamp assembly (4, Figure 201) for cracking in and adjacent to
welded joints.
Page 204
73- 10-07 Sept 30/02
Hoiieywell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
3. Cleaning/Paintina Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve
A. Ciean Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve
(1) Ciean hose assemblies and check filter valve with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table
203).
(2) Ciean all other parts with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
4, Aporoved Repairs Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve
A. Repair Starting Fuel Hoses and Check Filter Valve

(1) Repair minor thread damage (refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409) using small triangular file.
Replace parts having stripped threads or damaged beyond repair.
(2) Replace hoses that are frayed. chafed or cut.
(3) Replace tube assembly if cracks are noted.
(4) Deleted.
(5) Replace check filter valve if damage other than thread damage is noted.
70 HA A7 Page 205/206
/0 “ IU”“U / Sept30/02
T53-L-703
FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM - DFSCRIPTION AND OPERATION
NOTE: The fuel regulator incorporates an emergency (manual) control system.
The fuel control system (see Figure 1) consists of a primary control forthe gas producer section and an
overspeed governor for the power turbine section. An integral dual fuel pump and an emergency (manual)
control system are incorporated in the primary control unit. The fuel control incorporates acceleration and
deceleration Controls and a droop type governor for steady State speed control. The mam metering valve
of the fuel regulator is the controlling unit by which the main fuel flow is metered to the engine. Its position
is determined by the action of the gas producer speed governor, the power turbine overspeed governor or
the acceleration deceleration control, depending upon engine requirements. In regulating the matn meter-
ing valve, the governor or control that demands the least fuel flow overrides all others, except the
deceleration control, to make sure a mínimum fuel flow rate.
A. Gas Producer Speed Control. The functions of the gas producer speed control are to govern ground
and flight idle operations, to iimit the máximum power of the engine and to maintain steady State con-
ditions through all power regimes. The gas producer speed governor is dhven, Ihrough gears, at a
speed proportional to the gas producer rotor speed. It regulates gas producer rotor speed to the val-
ué selected by the power lever. Acceleration fuel flow limits are scheduled over the entire operating
range by scheduling máximum fuel flow as a function of gas producer rotor speed and compressor
inlet pressure and temperatura. The absoluta máximum fuel flow for acceleration or steady State
operation is determined by the máximum fuel flow stop setting. The deceleration fuel flow limits are
scheduled as a function of gas producer rotor speed and compressor iniet pressure. The absolute
mínimum fuel flow for deceleration or steady State operation is determined by the mínimum fuel flow
stop setting.
B. Power Turbine Overspeed Control. The power turbine rotor is protected agamst overspeed operation
by the power turbine overspeed control (overspeed governor). The power turbine governor is Priven
through gears, at a speed proportional ío power turbine rotor speed. Limits for the power turbine
governor are set by adjustable stops.
73- 20-00 sepSoa

Honeywell
Figure 1
Page 2
73-20-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
C. Automatic Fuel System Operation. Fuel enters the dual fuel pump after passing through the inlet
screen. It is then pumped through the check valves and the outlet screen to the transfer valve. With
the transfer valve in the normal position for automatic operation, fuel flows to the mam metering valve
at a pressure controlled by the main pressure regulating valve. The position of the mam metering
valve and henee the flow of fuel is automatically controlled by the Computer section of the fuel control.
The metered fuel tlows through the open shutoff valve and the fuel discharge port to the engine flow
divider main fuel manifoid atomizing nozzles in combustión chamber. When the transfer valve is in the
emergeney position, fuel flows through and is metered by the emergeney (manual) metering valve.
Fuel pressure is controlled by the emergeney pressure regulating valve, and fuel is delivered through
the open shutoff valve to the fuel discharge port and to the engine. The area of the valve opening and
the resulting flow of fuel are determined by the position of the power lever controlled from the cockpit.
CAUTIQN: THE POWER LEVER SHOULD NOT BE MOVED RAPIDLY WHEN THE
EMERGENCY FUEL SYSTEM IS IN OPERATION. ENGINE
OVERSPEED
OVER TEMPERATURE OR POSSIBLE FLAMEOUT COULD RESULT.
NOTE; The emergeney fuel System does not affect the operation of the starting fuel
System if engine restart is required.
D- Emergeney (Manual) Fuel System Operation (See Figure 1.) If the automatic fuel control system fails,
a changeover to the emergeney (manual) fuel system should be made in accordance with the aircraft
instructions. When the emergeney system is in operation, the main metering valve is bypassed and
fuel is metered to the engine by the manual system metering valve, which is positioned from the pi-
lot’s compartment by the power lever. Acceleration and deceleration control Is not provided in the
emergeney system.
E. Fuel Control Power Lever The power lever on the fuel control modulates the engine from start to take-
off power. Total travel of the lever is 100 degrees. There is a 3 degree dwell at ground idie position
and a 4 degree dwell at flight idle position.
OFF 0 degrees
Ground Idle 23 to 26 degrees
Flight tdle 38 to 42 degrees
Normal 83 degrees
Takeotf 100 degrees
Page 3/4
73- 20-00 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
FUEL CONTROI A<^SFMBLY - DESCRiPTION AND OPERATION
The fuel control assembly consists of an overspeed governor and a fuel regulator. The overspeed gover-
nor maintains a constant power turbine rotor speed as power requirements change. The fuel regulator is s
hydro mechanical device containing a dual element fuel pump, compressor rotor speed governor, accel-
eration and deceleration control, air bleed control signal mechanism. inlet guide vane control signal mech-
anism. fuel shutoff valve and an emergency (manual) control system. Functionally, the fuel regulator is di-
vided into a fiow control section and a Computer section. The flow control section consists of components
that schedule the position of the metering valve of the flow control section as a function of input signáis.
HoneyweII MA,NTEN™A.UA.
FUEL CQNTRni ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Setvicing Fuel Control Assembly
A. Service fuel control assembly as follows.

(1) Disconnect starting fuel hose assembly downstream from solenoid valve. Connect drain line to
end of disconnected hose and place in suitable container.
(2) Disconnect main fuel hose assembly downstream from fuel control- Connect drain line to end
of disconnected hose and place in suitable container.
(3) Disconnect electrical input cable assembly from ignition unit.
(4) Set throttle (Ni) to flight idie.
(5) Turn fuel boost pump ON.

CAUTION: TO PREVEN! DAMAGE TO STARTER DO NOT EXCEED STARTER
LiMITATIONS.
(6) Motor engine with starter.
(7) Energize starting fuel solenoid valve and hold.
(8) Cycle throttle (N,) from flight idie to máximum and back a number of times and continué until
clear fuel is flowing from main and starting fuel hose assemblies.
(9) Engine speed should be at least 12 percent Ni rpm. Denergize starter. Engine should coast
down with no indication of rubbing or unusual noises.
(10) Turn off starting fuel solenoid valve; move throttle to OFF position and turn fuel boost pump
OFF.
(11) Connect 28 vdc power source to ignition unit.
(12) Remove drain lines and connect the main fuel and starting fuel hoses assemblies.
(13) Visually inspect engine for leaks at next start.
B. Service fuel control assembly with silicone oil

(1) Disconnect aft end of P1 pressure sense line 1 -300-135-XX from unión AN815-4D on fuel
regulator. (Refer to IPC 290.4 for parts orientation.)
NOTE: Suitable fillers inelude syringes or medicine droppers.
(2) Using a suitable filler and a deán measuring stick, add silicone oil until fluid level is no lower
than 3.5 inches below the P1 fitting boss.
(3) Reconnect aft end of P1 pressure sense line 1 -300-135-XX to unión AN815-4D on fuel
regulator.
Page 201
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII --«HMANUAL
2, Ramoval/Installation Fuel Control Assemblv
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL POWER IS DISCONNECTED.
A. Remove Fuel Control Assembly
(1) Disconnect and tag all fuel, air, mechanical and electrical connections. Cap a!l open ports.
(2) Remove screw (14, Figure 201), spacer (15) and nut (27) that secure clamp (16) to bracket.
CAUTION: EXERCISE EXTREME CARE IN REMOVING AND HANDLING THE
HOUSINGS (10, 11). WHICH CONTAIN THE TEMPERATURE
SENSING ELEMENT NICKS, OENTS, OR SHARP BENDS MAY
DESTROY THE CAPILLARY ACTION OF THE TUBE. THE
TEMPER-
ATURE SENSING ELEMENT AND CAPILLARY TUBE ARE
CALIBRATED TO THE FUEL CONTROL. DO NOT DISCONNECT
CAPILLARY TUBE FROM THE FUEL CONTROL. THE
TEMPERATURE SENSING ASSEMBLY SHALL BE REMOVED
ALONG WITH THE FUEL CONTROL
(3) Remove bolts (13) and washers (12) that secure upper houstngs (11) and lower housing (10) to
inlet housing. Remove housings and gasket (9).
(4) Remove power driven rotary (booster) pump, (See 79-20-02.)
(5) Using B-32 threaded rod, pulí shaft (2, Figure 201) and spiine nuts (1,3) through overspeed
governor and tachometer drive housing.
(6) Slide snapring (5) att toward center of tube (6) and push tube forward into the overspeed gov-
ernor and tachometer drive housing.
NOTE: Cut lockwire and remove two bolts that secure ignition lead and coil
assembly mounl bracket and move bracket to elimínate interference
with aft movement of fuel control during removal.
(7) Support fuel control assembly and remove nuts (23) and washers (24).
Page 202
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
Fuel Control Assembly

Figure 201
Page 20C
73-20-01 Sepí 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. SPLINE NUT 16. CLAMP

2. SHAFT 17. OVERSPEED
3. SPLINE NUT 18. GOVERNOR
SCREW
5. SNAPRING 20. PACKING
6, TUBE 21. PACKING
7. SNAPRING 22. FUEL REGULATOR
8. PACKING
23. NUT
9. GASKET
10. LOWER HOUSING 24. WASHER
11. UPPER HOUSING 25. SEAL
12. WASHER 26. GASKET
13. BOLT 27. NUT
14. SCREW 28. SCREW
15. SPACER 29. WASHER
Page 204
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
CAUTION; CARE SHALL BE TAKEN WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALDNG FUEL
CONTROL ASSEMBLY TO PREVEN! DAMAGE TO THE ORIVE
SHAR CARBON SEAL. IF CARBON SEAL IS DAMAGED, SERIOOS
FUEL LEAKAGE COULD OCCUR.
(8) Withdraw fue! control assembly, keeping it as level as possible to prevent damage to drive shaft
carbón seal. Remove gasket (26) and seal (25).
(9) Preserve fuel control assembly if it is to be removed for more than 48 hours.
(10) Remove screws (28, Figure 201) and washers (29) that secure upper housing (11) to lower
housing (10) and sepárate housings. Retain housing for installation of tuel control assembly.
B. Instan Fuel Control Assembly
CAUTION: THE TEMPERATURE SENSING ELEMENT AND CAPILLARY TUBE ARE

CALIBRATED TO THE FUEL CONTROL. MAKE SURE THAT CAPILLARY
TUBE HAS NOT BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE FUEL CONTROL.
THE TEMPERATURE SENSING ASSEMBLY SHALL BE INSTALLED
ALONG
WITH THE FUEL CONTROL. USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID DAMAGE
TO THE TUBE. DO NOT SEPARATE THE TUBE FROM THE FUEL
CONTROL ASSEMBLY
(1) Instan packing (8, Figure 201) in groove of tube (6).
(2) Inserí tube (6) into overspeed governor and tachometer drive housing.
(3) Position gasket (26) on fuel control pad of accessory drive gearbox and install seal (25).
NOTE: Do not lubrícate drive shaft spiines. To mesh the splines of the fuel
regulator with drive gearshaft. remove Ni tachometer generator and,
using 1/4 inch drive extensión and ratchet, turn tachometer drive gear
until fuel regulator drive gearshaft splines mesh with splines on fuel
regulator. Reinstall tachometer generator.
(4) Install fuel control assembly on accessory drive gearbox.
(5) Secure fuel control assembly with washers (24) and nuts (23). Tighten nuts 125 to 140 inch-
pounds torque.
(5A) Reinstall lead and coil assembly and mount bracket and secure with two bolts. Tighten bolts as
required and fockwire.
(6) Slide tube aft into overspeed governor.
(7) Position snaprings (5, 7) into grooves on both ends of tube. Adjust tube to allow snaprings to
position properiy.
Page 205
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -.TEN™
CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGE PACKINGS ON TEMPERATURE SENSING ELEMENT.
NOTE: The word TOP is vibro peened on the milled end of the temperature
sensing element. This marking is to establish proper location of fins
when installing and must face the upper temperature housing cover for
(he element to function properiy. (See Figure 20tA.)
(8) Assemble upper and lower housing (10, 11} and secure with screws (28) and washers (29).
(9) Perform end float check (see 72 - 60 - 02) and install drive shaft.
(10) Position housings (10. 11) and gasket (9) on inlet housing and secure with washers (12) and
bolís (15). Tighíen bolts as required and lockwire.
(11) Secure clamp (16) to bracket with screw (14), spacers (15) and nut (27).
(12) Instan power driven rotary (booster) pump- (See 79-20-02.)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL LINES ARE
NOT REVERSED DURING INSTALLATION. ENGINE
SURGE
COULD RESULT.
NOTE: Make sure that a minimum of five rod end threads are engaged in feed-
back tube ends and the number oí threads exposed on both rod ends
is approximateiy equal. Washer (20) may be omiTted if it causes tube
assembly (16) to contact fuel control.
Make sure that end of blast mark on VIGV control rod aligns with scribe
mark on rigging píate with VIGV actuator in open position (see
75-30-01. Figure 203) and that linkage is free and clear throughout
range of movement.
(13) Connect all fuel, air, mechanical and electrical connections. To secure VIGV feedback tube
assembly lo fue! control arm, inserí boíl (see 75-30-01,23, Figure 201) through washers (22).
rod end bearing (21) and washer (20). Screw bott (23) into fuel control arm, then install one or
more washers (19) and safety with cotter pin (18). Secure jam nuts (15.17) with lockwire.
Page 206
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
UPPER HOUSING
Temperature Sensing Etement Location

Figure 201A
Page 207
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(14) Prime fuel control assembiy. (See 73-20-01, paragraph 1.)
CAUTION: AN IMPROPERLY ADJUSTED AIR BLEED OR VIGV SYSTEM CAN

CAUSE ENGINE SURGE.
(15) After replacement ot a fuel control assembiy or regulator, an adjustmentAest of the fuel control
and the variable inlet guide vane system must be performed to make sure that engine will pro-
duce required power and that air bleed and VIGV system operation is within limits.
3. Adjustment/Test Fuel Control Assemblv
A. Adjust Fuel Control Assembiy
WARNING: ADJUSTMENT TO THE FUEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY MAY AFFECT

SAFETY OF FLIGHT, ONLY DESIGNATED AND QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL WILL BE PERMITTED TO PERFORM THE
ADJUSTMENTS. RECORD ORIGINAL FUEL CONTROL
ASSEMBLY
SETTINGS BEFORE AND WHILE MAKING ANY ADJUSTMENTS.
NOTE: The engine compressor should be deán prior to adjustment/test of fuel

control assembiy (70-00-00) and an adjustment/test check of the vari-
able inlet guide vane system should be performed. (See 75-30-01.)
(1) The fuel control trim (Figure 202) shall be checked and adjusted at installation of a new engine,
often the fuel regulator or overspeed governor are replaced or removed for flow bench adjust-
ment or when incorrect adjustment is suspected. (See Figure 203.) Adjustment to the fuel con-
trol assembiy installed on an engine is limited to bleed band closure point, VIGV and trim ad-
justment.
(2) Power check and trim adjustment. This procedure shall be accomplished after fuel control or
nozzle replacement or if engine Performance appears to deviate from desirable limits.
(a) Make sure that the throttle is hitting both strops and has freedom of travel through the full
art.
(b) Deleted.
(c) Start the engine and stabilize for 5 minutes at Flight Idle. Make sure that the anti-icing
and customer air bleed are off.
Page 208
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Fuel Control Adjustments

Figure 202
Page 209
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
m/vell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
(d) Note the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) to degrees centigrade Irom the cockpit indicator.
Add 3°C to this reading to compénsate for temperature rise through the air inlet duct and
record-
(e) Slowly open the twist grip throttie and note the Ni speed at which the bleed band closes.
(f) See Figure 203 for correct bleed band opening closing limits or for correct bleed band
closure range for the temperature recorded in preceding step (d). If no adjustment is re-
quired, proceed to step (h).
CAUTION: DELETED
NOTE: Deleted
(g) If the closure point (see Figure 204) does not fall within the allowable limits, shut down the
engine and adjust the fuel control as follows:
1 Remove safety wire and seal from locknut.
2 Back out slotted lock screw three quarters of a revolutlon from the center of the ad-
justment screw.
3 Hoid the adjustment screw.
4 Pelease the torque on the locknut.
NOTE: Turning clockwise will shift the bleed band closure point to a
higher Ni speed. Turning counterclockwise will shift the
bleed band closure point to a lower Ni speed.
5 Rotate the adjustment screw as required. (One quarter turn equals approximately 2
percent Ni speed.)
Page 210
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
GAS PRODUCER SPEED (PERCENT NI)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
(Fuel Control P/N 100770A1/A2/A3/A4/A5 and 106500A1/A2) Bleed Band Closure Range
(Ambient Temperatura vs Ni Speed)
Figure 203
Page 211
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Bleed Band Adjustment Provisión of Fuel Control

Figure 204
Page2l2
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
^ywell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
6 Hold adjustment screw and tighten the locknut 30 to 40 inch-pounds torque.
7 Tighten the siotted lock screw 20 to 30 inch-pounds torque.
8 Start the engine and run up to verity the correct adjustment. (Repeat preceding
steps 2 through 7, i1 required.)
9 Lockwire associated components.
(h) Perform the installed máximum power checks as follows:
1 Set one of the aircratt altimeters at 29. 92.

2 Take off and climb with the throttle in the full open position. Establish 50 to 90 knots
airspeed and maintain máximum torque pressure and 100 percent (6800) N2 rpm.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED PUBLiSHED MAXIMUM N,. EGT (SEE

71 -00-00) OR AIRFRAME TORQUE LIMITS.
3 Continué to climb until N2 drops to 97 percent (6400 rpm). The altitude at which 97
percent (6400) N2 rpm is reached is the TEST ALTITUDE.
4 FIy the aircraft at the TEST ALTITUDE at any convenient power setting and allow the
engine and Instruments to stabilize for a mínimum of 3 minutes.
5 At the end of the stabilization period, record the pressure altitude from the altimeter
previously set at 29.92. Note the outside air temperatura in degrees centígrado and
record. Add 37.4“F (3°C) to this reading to compénsate for temperatura rise through
the air inlet duct and record.
NOTE: If torque pressure fluctuation is noted, record the nominal

indication.
6 Allow the aircraft to descend approximately 500 feet below the established TEST
ALTITUDE- AT 100 percent (6600) N2 rpm, increase collective smoothly and climb at
an indicated airspeed of 50 to 90 knots. When N2 drops to 97 percent (6400 rpm) at
or near TEST ALTITUDE, record the torque pressure and Ni rpm.
7 Enter on applicable chart at the temperatura recorded in preceding step 5. Go up to

the pressure altitude aiso recorded in preceding step 5. Proceed to the left until
torque lines intersect. The valué on bottom scale is required torque. The torque
pressure recorded in preceding step 6 must be within 2 percent of the required
torque.
NOTE: If the torque demonstrated at the test altitude was greater

than the required torque without exceeding the máximum NI
or TGT/EGT/MGT limits, fuel control adjustment/recheck is
not required.
S If the torque pressure Is not within the limit, make a normal landing and adjust the
fuel control (see Figure 202) as follows:
Page 213
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -'-—-NUAL
a Cut the lockwire and loosen trim lock bolt
NOTE: One quarter turn of trim screw equals approximateiy 7

percent torque.
b Increase torque pressure by turning the takeoff trim screw counterclockwise.

Decrease by turning the takeoff trim screw ctockwise.
9 Repeat check. After adjustment is completed, tighten lock bolt 26 to 30 inch-

pounds torque and lockwire bolt to trimmer screws.
4. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Fuel Control Assemblv
A. Disassemble Fuel Control Assembly
NOTE: When required, the overspeed governor may be removed follows:
(1) Remove four screws (18, Figure 201) and three washers (19).
NOTE: A clamp that retains the temperature sensing tube is attached to the
overspeed governor by one of the four screws.
(2) Carefully lift off temperature sensing tube. Avoid mashing or sharp bends.
(3) Remove overspeed governor by lifting it up over the locating pins.
(4) Remove packings (20, 21, Figure 201) from recessed areas of the mating surfaces of the
overspeed governor and fuel regulator. Discard packings.
Page 214
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
■ Deleted
Figure 205
Page 215
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
B- Reassemble Fuel Control Assembly
(1) Position packings (20, 21. Figure 201) in recessed areas of mating surfaces of governor and
regulalor.
(2) Position overspeed governor on fuel regulator and in proper relation lo the locating pins.
(3) Place three washers (19) on three screws (18).
(4) Insert screws through the overspeed governor flange and into threaded holes of fuel regulator.
(5) Insert fourth screws through hole in clamp that supports the temperature sensing tube, through
hole in overspeed governor flange and into threaded hole in fuel regulator.
(6) Tighten and lockwire four screws.
NOTE: If new overspeed governor is installed, perform Fuel Control Assembly

Adjustment/Test.
5. Insoection/Check Fuel Control Assembly
A. Inspect Fuel Control Assembly
(1) Inspect all fittings for damaged or crossed threads.
(2) Inspect fuel control dhve shaft for chipped or worn spiines.
(3) Inspect mounting flange for elongated mounting holes and warpage.
(4) Inspect solenoid valve for security of mounting, bent or broken contact pins.
(5) Inspect temperature sensing assembly housing for cracks, warpage and elongation of mount-
ing holes.
(6) Inspect temperature sensing tube and shielding for security of installation, dents and Sharp
bends. Replace fuel control if defectivo.
(7) Inspect temperature sensing tube and shielding for cracks. Crack limits are as foilows:
(a) Cracks that are not a result of the shielding being crushed are allowed.
NOTE: Rupture of the tube will be readily discernible by the odor caused
by leaking fluid contained in the tube. AIso. engine surge prob-
lema will be encountered.
(b) Cracks that do not chafe or cut into the tube, creating the possibility of a rupture, are
allowed.
(c) Cracks that do not result in circumferential separation of the shielding, allowing a twist or
Sharp bend in the tube and possible tube rupture, are allowed.
(8) Replace fuel control if crack limits are exceeded or if temperature sensing tube is leaking.
(9) Inspect overspeed governor for security of installation.
Page 216
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
U MAINTENANCE MANUAL
■ ■OllOyi/Vdl T53-L-703
NOTE: Corrosión is a rust like deposit on surface of internal parts that are
exposed when main fuel regulator and overspeed governor are
separated. (See paragraph 3.) Contamination is any foreign matter
tound in fuel or clinging to surfaces of internal parts.
(10) If overspeed governor is removed, inspect fuel control assembly for corrosión or contamination.
(a) If corrosión is found in overspeed governor or fuel regulator, replace part.
(b) If contamination is found, flush governor as follows:

1 Pour clean fuel (Military Specification MlL-DTL-5624 (JP-4 or JP-5) into engine
overspeed governor through openings in the surface that mates with the fuel
regulator.
2 Shake components by hand for 10 to 15 seconds.
NOTE: Discard contammated fuel and thoroughly clean container

after each flushing.
3 Pour flushing fuel from overspeed governor into clean container. Check for contami-
nation in fuel.
4 Flush governor five times. Replace governor if it cannot be flushed clean in five
attempts.
(11) tf exposed parts are damaged or excessively worn, replace overspeed governor and/or regula-
tor as required.
(12) Replace damaged parts.
6. Cleanino/Paintino Fuel Control Assemblv
A. Clean Fuel Control Assembly

(1) Thoroughly clean drive shaft, mounting flange, overspeed governor drive shaft port and all
threaded areas with dry cíeaning sotvent (72-00- 00, 62, Table 203).
(2) Thoroughly clean drive gearshaft with dry cíeaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
Page 217/218
73-20-01 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeyi/vell T53-L-703
FUEL CONTROL SOLENOiD VALVF - DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
1 - Descriotion and Operation

The fuel control solenoid valve is mounied on the fuel control. It is a two position valve, which when posi-
tioned to automatic, Oirects fuel flow to the main (auíomatic) meteñng valve. When the valve is positioneü
to emergency, it directs fuel to the emergency (manual) metering valve.
Page 1/2
73-20-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MAÍNTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
FUEL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Fuel Control Solenoid Valve
A. Remove Fuel Control Solenoid Valve
(1) Remove screws (11, 12, Figure 201) Ihat secure solenoid support bracket (13) to fuel control.
(2) Loosen nut (10) and screw (14), and slide support bracket írom solenoid (15).
(3) Remove screws (9) that secure solenoid to fuel control.

(4) Remove solenoid and shim (8). Record thickness of shim, then lockwire it to solenoid to facilí-
tate installation.
(5) Withdraw solenoid (15) oniy enough to inserí finger between solenoid and inserí (7). Holding
finger on insen, oontinue to remove solenoid. The inserí shall remain tn the solenoid until sole-
noid is installed.
(6) If either valve and sleeve assembly (6) or inserí (7) is damaged, both parts must be replaced.
Remove valve and sleeve assembly as foHows;
(a) Using sleeve puller STD63557, remove valve and sleeve assembly from fuel control.
(b) Remove and discard all packings (1, 2, 3. 4, 5).
B. Instan Fuel Control Solenoid Valve
CAUTIQN: WHEN REMOVING INSERI, MAKE CERTAIN NOT TO ALLOW

RETAINING BALLS IN THE INSERI TO SPRING FREE.
NOTE: If either the insert (7, Figure 201) or valve and sleeve assembly (6) is
damaged, both parts must be replaced.
(1) Remove insert (7) from solenoid (15).
(2) Remove valve and sleeve assembly. (See paragraph l.A.(5).)
(3) Instan new valve and sleeve assembly, without packings. into fuel control housing.
(4) inserí new msert into solenoid.

T53-L-703
Fuel Control Solenoid Valve

Figure 201
Page 202
73-20-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. PACKiNG 9. SCREW
2. PACKING 10. NUT
3. PACKING 11. SCREW
5. PACKING 13. SOLENOID SUPPORT
6. VALVE AND SLEEVE ASSEMBLY 14. BRACKET
SCREW
7. INSERI 15. SOLENOID
8. SHIM
Page 203
73-20-02 Sept 30/02
Honeywell
(5) Using a depth micrometer, measure distance from fuel control housing to top ot valve and
sieeve assembiy. (See Dimensión A, Figure 202.)
(6) Using depth micrometer, measure boss of solenoití (Dimensión B).
(7) Subtract Dimensión A from Dimensión B. The difference minus 0.0000 to 0.0025 inch, is the
required thickness of shim (Dimensión C).
(8) Using sieeve puller STD63557, remove valve and sieeve assembiy.
(9) Instan new packings (1. 2, 3, 4, 5. Figure 201} onto valve and sieeve assembiy. and coat pack-
ings with petrolatum (72-00-00, 53, Table 203).
(10) insta!) valve and sieeve assembiy inlo fuel regulator housing.
(11) Instan shim (8) of required thickness. (See step (5), (6), (7).)
(12) Instan solenoid (15, Figure 201) and insert (7). Secure with screws (9). Lockwire.
(13) instan support bracket (13) and secure with screws (11, 12).
(14) Secure solenoid to bracket with screw (14) and nut (10).
2. Adiustment/Test Fuel Control Solenoid Valve

NOTE: After installing an engine or a fuel control or during the aircraft intermedíate
inspection, or when a special verification of the proper operation of the
AUTOMATIC/EMERGENCY system is required, perform the following check.
A. Test Fue) Control Solenoid Valve
(1) Startengine. (Refer to Aircraft Manual.)
CAUTION: SELECT MAXIMUM Ng SPEED WITH THE GOV RPM INCR-DECK

“BEEP" SWITCH BEFORE STABILIZING ENGINE AT FLIGHT
IDLE
SPEED.
(2) With fuel control selector switch in AUTO position, retard throttie to flight idle stop (70 to 72 per-
cent Ni speed).
(3) Move fuel control selector switch to EMER position.
(4) Note indicated Ni speed, it should drop.
Page 204
73-20-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
• ^ A
Solenoid Valve Assembly Shim Measurement

Figure 202
Page 205
73-20-02 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(5) Return fuel selector to AUTO position within 5 seconds.
(6) Ni speed should return to flight idie and then stabilize.
3. Insoection/Check Fuel Control Solenoid Valve
A. Inspect Fuel Control Solenoid Valve.

(1) Inspect electrical connector on solenoid valve for corrosión, damaged threads, cracked insula-
tor and bent or broken pins.
(2) Inspect solenoid (15, Figure 201) and support bracket (13) for cracks or breaks.
(3) Inspect inserí (7) and valve and sieeve assembly (6) for damage.
4. Cleaning/Painting Fuel Control Solenoid Valve
Olean Fuel Control Solenoid Valve with Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
5. Aporoved Reoairs Fuel Control Solenoid Valve
A. Repair Fuel Control Solenoid Valve

(1) Remove corrosión with crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table 203) and dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62. Table 203),
(2) Blend repair (refer to SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401) minorthread damage on electrical connector.
(3) Replace solenoid valve If insulator is cracked or pins are bent or broken.
(4) Replace solenoid valve or bracket if evidence of cracks or breaks is noted.
Page 206
73-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
FUEL INLET STRAINER. CQVER AND PllMP DISCHARGE STRAINER AND

SERVO SIJPPLY FILTER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The fuel inlet strainer consists of a 200 mesh screen assembly which incorporates a self relieving feature
that allows fuel to bypass the screen in the event of clogging or icing. The cover and pump discharge
strainer consists of a 100 mesh screen and is incorporated in the fuel control at the pump discharge to
protect internal control passages and components. A 10 micron sen/o supply filter is provided in the fuel
control for the fuel under sen/o supply pressure. A bypass valve Is incorporated to permit fuel to bypass
the servo filter in the event of clogging or icing. On the 1 -170-240-91 and subsequent regulators, the
servo supply fuel is filtered through the wash flow filter assembly. Computer fue! passes through a 10
micron strainer assembly.
Page 1/2
73-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
FüEL INLET STRAINER COVFR AND PUMP DISCHARGE STRAINER AND

SERVO SUPPLY FILTFR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/lnstatlation Fuel Inlet Strainer. Cover and Pumo Discharge Strainer Assemblv and Servo SUDDIV
Filter
NOTE: Steps (1) through (5) are for pre fuel controla 1-170-240-91.
A, Remove Strainers and Filter

(1) Remove screws (1, Figure 201) from cover and pump discharge strainer assembly (2) and with-
draw cover and strainer assembly from fuel control (9).
(2) Remove retainmg ring (8) from cover and strainer assembly.
(3) Using twisting motion, carefully pulí servo supply filter element (4} and housíng (6) from cover
and strainer assembly.
(4) Remove and discard packing (3).
(5) Remove packing (7) from bypass valve housing (6). Pul! element (4) from housíng and remove
packing (5).
(6) Remove screws (15) from fuel inlet fitting (14). Remove fitting from fuel control.
(7) Remove and discard packing (13) from fitting.
(8) Remove retainer (10) from fuel control.
(9) Carefully withdraw inlet strainer (12) and spring (11) from retainer (10).
NOTE: These instructions are for post 1-170-240-91 and later model fuel Controls.
B. Remove Servo Filter and Strainer Assembly
(1) Remove screws (16, Figure 201) from strainer assembly (18) and withdraw assembly from fuel
regulator.
CAUTIQN: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE WASH FLOW SERVO

FILTER ASSEMBLY BE CLEANED. THIS FILTER ASSEMBLY
MUST
BE INSPECTED AND CLEANED AT OVERHAUL ONLY
(2) Remove the flex retainíng ring (19) by rotating the sen/o flfter assembly (20).
Hone>iiêll MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
XA ' ',f> U,Ll.
Fuel Inlet Strainer, Cover and Pump Discharge Strainer and Servo Supply Fitter
Figure 201
Page 202
73-20-03 Sepl 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201

2. COVER AND STRAINER ASSEMBLY 14, FUEL INLET FITTING
4. SERVO SUPPLY FILTER ELEMENT 16. SCREW
5. PACKING 17. FILTER STRAP
6. BYPASS VALVE HOUSING 18. STRAINER ASSEMBLY
7. PACKING 19. FLEX RETAINING RING
8. RETAINING RING 20. WASH FLOW SERVO FILTER
9. FUEL CONTROL 21. ASSEMBLY
PACKING
10. RETAINER 22. PACKING
11. SPRING 23. PACKING
12, INLET STRAINER
Page 203
73-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(3) Sepárale the servo filter assembly (20) from the strainer assembly (18).
(4) Remove packings (21,22. 23) and discard.
(5) Unfasten the filter strap (17) from around the strainer assembly (18) oniy when partióles are
lodged between ID of the filter strap (17) and the OD of the strainer assembly (18).
(6) Inspect strainer assembly (18) and filter strap (17) for cleanliness. Immerse parís in dry clean-
ing solvent (72 - 00-00, 62, Table 203). Dry parís using moisture free compressed air.
C. Install Strainers and Filter
(1) Carefully install spring (11, Figure 201) and inlet strainer (12) into fuel control (9).
CAUTIQN: MAKE SURE THAT INLET STRAINER IS INSTALLED IN THE

PROPER DIRECTION. THE STRAINER CAN BE
INSTALLED
BACKWARDS.
NOTE: When instalüng inlet strainer (12) use a rod to depress spnng (11).
The rod should be approximateíy 6 inches long by 1/4 inch in
diameter and inserted through retainer to compress the spring.
(2) Carefully install spring (11) and inlet strainer (12) into retainer (10). Install retainer into fuel
control (9).
(3) Install packing (13) on fuel iniet fitting (14). Install fuel inlet fitting into fuel control and secure
with screws (15).
(4) Install packing (7) on servo supply filter housing (6), then install packing (5) in new element (4).
Push element over housing (6).
(5) Install new filter element (4) and packing (5) from kit 1-200-030-27.
(6) Install packing (3) on cover and pump discharge strainer (2). Using a twisting motion, install
filter element (4) and housing (6).
(7) Install retaining nng (8) on cover and pump discharge strainer (2).
Page 204
73-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(8) Instan cover and pump discharge strainer mto fuei control. Secure cover and pump dtscharge
strainer with screws (1). Lockwire screws.
D. Instan Sen/o Filter and Strainer Assembly Fuel Control 1-170-240-91 and Later Modeis (See Figure
201.)
(1) Insert the servo filter assembly (20) into the strainer assembly (18).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE ENDS OF THE FLEX RETAINING RING ARE
NOT VISIBLE THROUGH THE ACCESSORY SLOT IN THE
STRAIN-
ER ASSEMBLY HOUSING.
(2) Place the hooked end oí the flex retaining ring (14) into the acceptance hole of the servo filter
assembly (20). Rotate the servo filter assembly (20) with the flex retaining ring (19) inserted
with the ring circumventing the groove.
(3) Coat new packings (21,22, 23) with petrolatum (72-00-00, 53, Table 203) and ¡nstall on
strainer assembly (18).
(4) Carefully install the completad assembly into the fuel reguiator housing.
(5) Tighten the three hold down screws (16) and lockwire.
2. inspection/Check Fuel Inlet Strainer. Cover and Pumo Discharoe Strainer and Servo SUDDIV Filter
A. Inspect Strainers and Filter
(1) Clean all components. (See paragraph 3.)
(2) Check all screens for clogging, cracks and dents. Replace screens if clogging cannot be
removed or if cracked or dented.
(3) Inspect fuel inlet screen for broken, bent or kinked mesh. Straighten kinks with fingers.
Replace strainer or screen oniy if damaged or if cleaning does not compietely remove
contamination.
(4) Replace servo supply filter eiement (4) and packing (5), using kit 1 -200-030-27.
(5) Check cover for cracks and warpage. Replace if defects are noted.
(6) Check fuel inlet fitting for crossed threads, cracks or distortion. Replace if defects are noted.
3. Cleaning/Painting Fuel Inlet Strainer. Cover and Pumo Discharge Strainer and Servo SUDDIV Filter
A. Clean Stramers and Filter
(1) Clean cover and pump discharge strainer (2) with soft fiber brush and hnse with dry cleaning
solvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203). Clean all other components with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(2) Dry all components with moisture free compressed air.

T53-L-703
IGNITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTiON/
IGNITION 74-00-00
IGNITION UNIT 74-20-01

Descr[ption and Operation 1
IGNITION LEAD AND COIL ASSEMBLY 74-20-02

IGNITER PLUGS 74-20-03

74- CONTENT
S
Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeywell T53-L-703
LIST OF EFFECTiVE PACES
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUB.IFCT PACE DATE
74 IGNITION - Tab
Table of
List oí
Eftective
—
Pages Sept 30/02
74-20-01 1 Sept 30/02

2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
74-20-02 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
74-20-03 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
74 -EFF
Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -.NTENANCEM™
IGNITION UNIX - DESCRIPTIQN AND OPERATION

The ignition unit is attached to a bracket located at the 10 o'clock positíon of the impeller housing rear
flange. The ignition unit converts iow voltage through a vibrator transtormer to a high voltage that passes
through the ignition lead and coil assembly. The high voltage that is produced ionizes a gap in each
igniter plug to produce a spark.
Page 1/2
74- 20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
IGNITION LINIT - MAINTENANCE PRACTICFR
1. Removal/Installation laniler Unil
WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN ALL ELECTRICAL POWER IS DISCONNECTED.
A. Remove Ignition Unit
(1) Disconnect electrical connectors and lead and coil lead from ignition unit (35, Figure 201).
(2) Remove screws (41) and nuts (42) that secure ende of the loop clamps (36). Spread loop
clamps until slots in the clamps clear the positioning lugs on both sides of the ignition unit
ends. Slide clamps toward each other. This releases the ignition unit for removal.
(3) If Pracket (34) must be removed, remove bolts (33) and remove bracket from compressor
housing assembiy.
B. Instan Ignition Unit
(1) Place ignition unit (35) on bracket (34). Position loop clamps (36) around unit so that lugs on
unit fit into slots in loop clamps. Position clamps on ignition lead under upper screw and se-
cure loop clamp ends with screws (41) and nuts (42). Lockwire screws.
(2) Connect electrical connector. Lockwire connector.
(3) Connect lead from lead and coll.
2. Insoection/Check lonition Unrt
A. Inspect Ignition Unit

(1) Inspect connector on ignition unit (35) for corroston, damaged threads, cracked insulator and
bent or broken pins.
(2) Replace ignition unit (35) if insulator is cracked, pins are bent or broken or threads are dam-
aged beyond repair.
(3) Inspect mounting bracket (34). Replace If detective.
Page 201
74- 20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Ignition Lead and Coil, Igniter Plugs and Ignition Unit

Figure 201
Page 202
74-20-01 Sept 30/02
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. NUT 22. SPACER

2. CLAMP 23. SCREW
3, NUT 24. CUMP
4. CLAMP 25. NUT
5. SCREW 26. IGNITER PLUG
6. NUT 27. SPACER
7. CLAMP 28. NUT
8. SCREW 29. BRACKET
9. SCREW 30. IGNITION LEAD AND COIL
10. CLAMP 31. ASSEMBLY
BOLT
11. SPACER 32. BOLT
12. IGNITER PLUG 33. BOLT
13. SCREW 34. BRACKET
14. CLAMP 35. IGNITION UNIT
15. SPACER 36. LOOP CLAMP
16. IGNITER PLUG 37. NUT
17. CLAMP 38. CLAMP
18. SCREW 39. SCREW
19. SCREW 40. SCREW
20. CLAMP 41. SCREW
21. IGNITER PLUG 42. NUT
Page 203
74- 20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII •ÂINTENANCE^MANUAL
3. Cleaninq/Painting Ignition Unrt
A. Clean Ignition Unit
(1) Thoroughty clean ignition unit with a clean cloth moistened with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(2) Remove corrosión with crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table 203).
4. Aporoved Repairs Ignition Unit
A. Repair Ignition Unit

Repair minor thread damage. (Reíer to SPM, 70-25-03. SP R409)- Replace ignition unit if ihreads
cannot be repaired.
74 20-01 sZflofot
-
IGNITIQN LEAD AND C.CIL ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION

The ignition lead and coil assembly {see 74-20-01,30. Figure 201) transmite high voltage from the
ignition unit to the igniter plugs in the combustión chamber. The ignition lead and coil assembly, located
below the ignition unit, distributes electrical current to each igniter plug.
Page 1/2
74- 20-02 Sept 30/02
Honeywell
IGNITION LFAH AND COIL ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICFS
1. Removal/Installation lanition Lead and Coil Assemblv
A. Remove Igniíion Lead and Coil Assembly

(1) Disconnect eléctrica! leads at igniter plugs (see 74-20-01, 12, 16, 21,26, Figure 201) and
ignition unit (35).
(2) Remove screws that secure all clamps on ignition lead and coil assembly (30).
(3) Remove bolts (32) that secure ignition lead and coil assembly to engine.
(4) Remove Ignition lead and coil assembly trom engine.

NOTE: Further disassembly is not required unless the ignition lead and coil
assembly is being replaced.
(5) Remove bolts (31) and nuts (28) that secure lead and coil assembly (30) to bracket (29).
Sepárate ignition lead and coil assembly from bracket.
B. Instan Ignition Lead and Coil Assembly
(1) If ignition lead and coil assembly (see 74-20-01.30, Figure 201) and bracket (29) were
separated, secure bracket lo ignition lead and coil assembly with bolts (31) and nuts (28).
(2) Position ignition lead and coil assembly on engine and secure with bolts (32). Lockwire bolts.
(3) Connect two short leads to ignition unit (35). Tighten connectors as required and lockwire.
Connect ignition leads to igniter plugs (12, 16. 21,26). Tighten connectors 40 to 50 inch-
pounds torque and lockwire.
(4) Secure ignition lead and coil assembly clamps to engine with screws and nuts.
2. Inspection/Check Ignition Lead and Coil Assemblv
A. Inspect Ignition Lead and Coil Assembly

(1) Inspect connectors for damaged threads, broken or cracked ceramic insulators and damaged
or missing springs.
(2) Inspect leads for cuts, fraying and chafing. Replace if defectiva.
Page 201
74- 20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(3) Inspect connectors for wear, cracks or damaged lockwire heles. Wear to the extent causing
clearance up to 0.032 inch between ferrule and connector is acceptable. One crack, not
exceeding 0.0937 inch in length in each connector, is acceptable. Replace ignition iead and
coii assembly damaged beyond such limits. AIso repiace ignition Iead and coil assembly it
connector lockwire holes are pulled out.
3. CleaninQ/Paintino Ignition Lead and Coil Assembly
Olean Ignition Lead and Coil Assembly with Dry Cleaning Soivent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
4. Aporoved Reoairs lonition Lead and Coil Assembly
A. Repair Ignition Lead and Coi! Assembly
All parts necessary for repair or replacement of ignition lead and coil assembly may be found in
Repair Parts Kit 10-88584-10.
Honeywell MA,NTENANOE^MANUAL
IGNITER PLLJGS - DESCRIPTIDN AND
QPERATIQN
1. Descriotion and Qoeration

Four igniter plugs (see 74-20-01, Figure 201) are instailed in receptacles in the att end of the combustión
chamber at the 2, 4, 8 and 10 o’clock positions. The igniter plugs produce high voltage sparks to ignite
the fuel/air mixture in the combustión chamber for stading.
Page 1/2
74- 20-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,.™NCEMA.UA.
IGNITFR PLLJGS - MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES
1 • Removal/lnstallation laniter Pluas
A. Remove Ignrter Plugs
(1) Disconnect ignition leads from igniter plugs. (See 74-20-01, 12, 16, 21 26. Figure 201.)
(2} Remove igniter plugs from the igniter mounts and remove spacers (11, 15. 22, 27) from igniter
plugs.
B. Instan Igniter Plugs.
(1) Position spacers (see 74-20-01, 11, 15, 22, 27, Figure 201) with flange toward combustor
housing, on igniter plugs (12, 16, 21,26).
(2) Instan igniter plugs into mounts on rear face of tire shield by hand. If plugs do not bottom,
repair threads by using 7/16-28 NEF tap or die.
(3) Reinsfall igniter plugs and tighten 85 to 95 inch pounds torque.
(4) Reconnect ignition leads to igniter plugs. Tighten connectors 40 to 50 inch pounds torque and
lockwire.
2. Insoection/Check Igniter Plugs
A. Inspect Igniter Plugs

(1) Clean dirty igniter plugs with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) using fiber brush
if electrodo carbón buildup is evident.
(2) Inspect plug gap suríace malerial.
(3) Inspect electrodo tor burning and erosión. Minor burning (discoloration) or slight eroding away
of electrodo is acceptable. Replace plugs that exhibit burned off or heavily eroded electrodes.
(4) Inspect for dirty and carbonized plugs. Replace plug.
NOTE: If there is any evidence that plug is not functioning properly, even
though limits have not been exceeded, it shall be replaced.
(5) Inspect if surface is granular or chipped or if other damage is evident. Replace plug.
(6) Inspect for crossed or stripped threads and broken or chipped ínsulatíon at connector end.
Replace if these conditions are evident.
(7) Inspect plug for chafing or grooving in housing area. If chafing or grooving exceeds depth of
0.020 inch, replace plug. (See Figure 201.)
(8) Inspect shank for fretting condition. Replace plug if fretting is excessive.
Page 201
74- 20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
TYPICAL CHAFING AR6A
XA-1338-167
Igniter Plug Chafing Limits

Figure 201
Page 202
74-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
AIR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
AIR 75-00-00
ELBOW. TUBE AND BLEED AIR ADAPTER ASSEMBLY 75-10-01

Descriplion and Operation 1
Removal/lnstallation 201
Cleaning/Painíing 204
HOT AIR SOLENOID VALVE 75-10-02

VARIABLE INLPT GUIPE VANE ACTUATOR 75-30-01

Descriptíon and Operation 1
Adjustment/Test 204
INLET GUIPE VANE ACTUATOR HOSE ASSEMBLIES 75-30-02

INTERSTAGE BLEED ACTUATOR 75-30-03

ASSEMBLY 1
Servicing 203
Disassembiy/Assembly 209
209
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repairs
Page 1
T53-L-703
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SÜBJECT SUBJECT PAGE
INTFRBTAGF AIR-BLEED HOSE ASSEMBLIES 75-30-04

Removai/Installation 201
BLEED BAND ASSEMBLY 75-30-05

Removai/Installation 201
Adjustment/Test 201
Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeywell T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
SUB.IECT PAGE DATE Rim,IFCT PAGE DATE
75 AIR Tab 207 Sept 30/02

208 Sept 30/02
Contenta 2 Sept 30/02 210 Blank
75-30-04 1 Sept 30/02
List of 2 Blank
Effective 201 Sept 30/02
Pages Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
75-10-01 1 Sept 30/02 204 Blank
2 Blank 75-30-05 1 Sept 30/02
Sept 30/02 2 Blank
201
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 202 Sept 30/02
Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02 203 Sept 30/02
75-10-02 1 Sept 30/02 204 Sept 30/02
Blank 205 Sept 30/02
2
Sept 30/02 206 Sept 30/02
201
207 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 208 Blank
Sept 30/02
204 Blank
75-30-01 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02
207 Sept 30/02
208 Sept 30/02
209 Sept 30/02
210 Sept 30/02
75-30-02 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
75-30-03 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02
75-EFF
Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
ELBOW. TUBE AND BLFFD AIR ADAPTER ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATIQN
An elbow and tube are connected to the external bleed air manifoid and to an adapter on top oí the impel-
ler housing. The tube and elbow pass air to the hot air solenoid valve.
Page 1/2
75- 10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
ELBOW. TUBE AND BLFED AIR ADAPTFR ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Elbow. Tube and Ble0d Air Adaoter Assemblv
A. Remove Elbow, Tube and Bleed Air Adapter Assembly
(1) Remove bolts (12, Figure 201) that secure air bleed adapter elbow (1) to diffuser housing.
(2) Using twisting motion, remove elbow and tube (3) from adapter assembly (5 or 13). Sepárate
elbow and tube and remove gasket ring (2) from elbow.
(3) Remove gasket ring (4) from flange of adapter assembly.
(4) Remove bolt (see 72-30-01, Figure 204) that secures bottom flange of bleed air adapter to
compressor housing.
(5) Remove bolts (9) and washers (10) that secure bleed air adapter to impeller housing.
(6) Remove bolts (11. Figure 201) that secure hot air solenoid valve to bleed air adapter assembly
(5) .
(7) Remove bleed air adapter assembly (5) and gasket (10) from hot air solenoid valve.
(8) When required, remove bolts (8), cover (7) and gasket (6) from adapter assembly.
T53-L-703
Elbow, Tube and Bleed Air Adaptar Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
75-10-01 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Honeywell T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. AIR BLEED ADAPTER ELBOW 8. BOLT

2. GASKET RING 9. INSERT (USED ON
3. AIR BLEED CROSSOVER TUBE STAINLESS
STEEL IMPELLER HOUSING)
4. GASKET RING 10. GASKET
5. BLEED AIR ADAPTER ASSEMBLY 11. BOLT
6. GASKET 12. BOLT
7. COVER
Page 203
75- 10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Position flanged port toward right side of engine.
B. Instan Elbow, Tube and Bleed Air Adaptar Assembly
(1) Position gasket (10} and bleed air adapter assembly (5} on hot air solenoid valve and instan
bolts (11) to hold in place.
(2) Instan bolts (see 72-30-01,9, Figure 201) and washers (10) that secure bleed air adapter
assembly (5) to impeller housing.
(3) Instan bolt (7) that secutes bottom flange of bleed air adapter assembly (5) to compressor
housing.
(4) Tighten bolts (9) and (7) as required and lockwire.
(5) Tighten bolts (11. Figure 201) as required and lockwire.
(6) Position gasket ring (4) on flange port of adapter assembly.
(7) Position gasket ring (2) on flange of elbow (1). Slide tube (3) over elbow (1).
(8) Slide tube (3) over flange port of adapter assembly (5) and position flange of elbow (1) against
diffuser housing mounting port.
(9) Secure elbow with bolts (12). Tighten bolts as required and lockwire.
2. Insoection/Check Elbow. Tube and Bleed Air Adaoter Assembly
A. Inspect Elbow, Tube and Bleed Air Adapter Assembly
(1) Inspect tube, elbow and adapter for cracks.
(2) Inspect adapter assembly for stripped or damaged threads.
3. Cleaning/Paintina Elbow. Tube and Bleed Air Adaoter Assembly
Clean All Parts Using Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
4. Approved Repairs Elbow. Tube and Bleed Air Adaoter Assembly
A. Repair of Bleed Air Adapter Assembly
(1) Repair stripped or damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.)
(2) Replace if cracks are noted in tube, elbow or adapter.
Page 204
75- 10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
HOT AIR SQLFNOID VALVE - DESCRIPTIQN AND QPEHAJJON
The hot air solenpid valve is mounted on top of the compressor and impeller housing assembly. The
solenoid operated valve Controls the flow of anti—icing hot air from the diffuser housing to the iniet housing
to prevent the formation of ice. During engine operation, the hot air solenoid valve is normally energized m
the CLOSED position by manually actuating a swrtch in the cockpit. In the event of electrical power failure,
the fail-safe, spnng loaded valve returns to the OREN position to provide continuous anti-icing air.
Page 1/2
75- 10-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
HQTAIRSOLENOIDVALVE ~ MAINTFNANCE PRACTICES
1- Removal/Installation Hot Air Solenoid Valve
A. Remove Hot Atr Solenoid Valve
(1) Disconnect connector from main wiring harnees at solenoid valve (2, Figure 20t).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL POWER IS DISCONNECTED.
(2) Expand retainmg ring (5) at forward end of tube (4). Slide ring towards rear of tube.
(3) Remove tube from valve by twisting and sliding it toward front oí engine.
(4) Remove bolts (7} that secure flange of solenoid valve lo bleed air adapter assembiy.
(5) Remove hot air solenoid valve (2) and gasket (1). Discard gasket. Remove packing (3) from
valve.
(6) Remove tube and packing (6) from inlet housing. Remove retaining ring (5) from tube (4).
(7) Remove packings (3 and 6) from hot air solenoid valve housing and inlet housing. Discard
packings.
B. Instan Hot Air Solenoid Valve
(1) Slide retaining ring (5, Figure 201) on tube (4).
(2) Place packing (6) in recessed area within inlet housing.

(3) Inserí tube into inlet housing and, using turning motion, push it into inlet housing to allow hot air
solenoid valve (2) to clear tube.
(4) Place packing (3) in recessed area of valve (2).
(5) Position gasket (1) and valve (2) on bleed air adapter assembiy with bolts (7).
(6) Slide tube rearward mto valve and install retaining ring (5) firmly against inlet housing.
Page 201
75- 10-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
*A-ní-TSA
1. GASKET 5. RETAINING
2. HOT AIR SOLENOID VALVE RING
6. PACKING
3, PACKING 7. BOLT
4. AIR REGULATOR TUBE
Hol Air Solenoid Valve

Figure 201
Page 202
75-10-02 Sept 30/02
Honeywell -INTENANCE^MANUAL
(7) Tighten bolts (?) as required and lockwire.
{8) Attach connector from electrical cable assembly on valve connector, Tighten as required and
lockwire.
2. Inspection/Check Hot Air Solenoid Valve
A. Inspect Hot Air Solenoid Valve

(1) Inspect electrical connector on valve for corrosión, damaged threads, cracked insulator and
bent or broken pins.
(2) Inspect air regulator tube for cracks.
3. Cleanina/PaintínQ Hot Air Solenoid Valve
A, Olean Hot Air Solenoid Valve

(1) Wipe exterior of solenoid valve, using a cloth dampened with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00,
62, Table 203).
(2) Slosh air regulator tube in dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203). Air dry.
4. Approved Repairs Hot Air Solenoid Valve
A. Repair Hot Air Solenoid Valve
(1) Repair minor thread damage. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.)

(2) Remove corrosión with crocus cloth (72-00-00. 13, Table 203) and dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62. Table 203).
(3) Replace solenoid valve if msulator is cracked or pins are bent or broken.
A O Page 203/204
/ O ” I U Ufc Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENA_N«MANUAL
VARIABLE INLET GUIDF VANE ACTUATOR - DESCRIPTIQN AND QPERATIQN

The variable iniet guide vane actuatnr is mounted on right side pf compressor housing assembly at the
íront llange. Fuel seal leakage is drained through the hose and out the starter generator drive seal drain
port on the accessory drive gearbox. The actuator is operated by fuel pressure from the fuel control.
75- 30-01 seS

HoneyweII «A'—CE^MANUAL
VARIABLE INLET GUIPE VANF AnTUATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/lnstallation Variable Inlet Guide Vane ActuatOf

A. Remove Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
(1) Remove pin (25, Figure 201), nut (24), bo/ts (11) and washers (12, 14, 26). Remove tute
assembly (16).
(2) Cut tockwire and loosen nut (5). Unscrew bearing (6) from connector.
(3) Tag and disconnect hose assemblies from inlet guide vane actuator assembly.
(4) Remove bolts (1,27, 29). washers (2, 28). support (3), spacer (4) and nuts (7, 9, 10).
(5) Carefully remove inlet guide vane actuator assembly (8) from engine.
B. Instan Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
(1) Position inlet guide vane actuator assembly (8, Figure 201) on flange of mlet housing.
(2) Secure actuator assembly with bolts (1,27, 29), washers (2, 28), support (3), spacer (4) and
nuts (7. 9, 10). Tighten nuts as required and lockwire. If installed, remove covers or lines from
actuator fittings.
(3) Instan washer (2) as required to prevent threaded end of bolt from rubbing against inlet
housing.
(4) Thread bearing (6) onto connector. Hold actuator full open (pistón retractad); adjust bearing
until end of blast mark area on scribed iine on connector aligns with open scribe mark on rig-
ging píate (located on inlet housing). Tighten nut (5) as required and secure with lockwire.
NOTE: Make sure that a mínimum of flve rod end threads are engaged in feed-
back tube ends and the number of threads exposed on both rod ends
is approximately equal.
Use quantity of washers (26) as required to obtam mínimum clearance

between pin (25) and nut (24).
(5) Connect tube assembly (16) to actuator assembly with bolt (11), washers (12, 14, 26), nut (24)
and pin (25).
Page 201
75- 30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Page 202
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. BOLT 15. NUT

2. WASHER 16. TUBE ASSEMBLY
3. SUPPORT 17, NUT
4. SPACER 18. PIN
5. NUT 19. WASHER
6, BEARING 20. WASHER
7. NUT 21. ROD END
8. INLET GUIDE VANE ACTUATOR 22. BEARING
WASHER
ASSEMBLY 23. BOLT
9. NUT 24. NUT
10. NUT 25. PIN
11. BOLT 26. WASHER
12. WASHER 27. BOLT
13. ROD END BEARING 28. WASHER
14. WASHER 29. BOLT
Page 203
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(6) Tighten nuts (15, 17) as reguired and lockwire.
NOTE: II a replacement variable inlet guide vane actualor is installed, an

adjustment/test check is reguired. (See paragraph 2.)
2. Adiustment/Tesi Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
A. Adjustment of Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator. An operational check of the inlet guide vane actua-
tor must be performed whenever fuel control is replaced (see 73-20-01). inlet guide vane actuator is
replaced, or improper operation of the actuator is suspected.
B. Improperly Adjusted Inlet Guide Vanes. Improperly adjusted inlet guide vanes will have an adverse
effect on engine operation. (f the inlet guide vanes fail to reach the "fuK open" posilion, the engine wiíl
exhibit low torque and high Ni speed. If the guide vanes reach the “full open" position at too low an
Ni speed, engine surge may occur.
C. Initial Adjustment at the "Begin to Open” Point
NOTE: The pressure switch should be set to indícate between 70 and 80 psi.
(1) The Ni speed at which the VIGV begins to open may be determinad using switch and coupling
kit LTCT13726 or equivalent, as shown. (See Figure 202.)
NOTE: To preelude damage/distortion to the VIGV components, reiease the

torque on the B nuts to the CYL 1 and CYL 2 lines at the actuator. This
wi(( eíirninate hydraulic resistance when the actuator arm is manua\ly
moved during the rigging check.
(2) If not previously accomplished, check for proper travel of the VIGV control rod and alignment of
the blast mark or schbed iine to the open rigging píate scribe line. (See Detail A, Figure 203.)
(3) Instan switch and coupling assembly LTCT13725 (detail of LTCT 13726) between the VIGV ac-
tuator and CYL 2 line. (It may require repositioning of the CYL 2 line to allow installation of the
assembly.)
CALJTION: POSITION THE ASSEMBLY TO PROVIOE ADECUATE CLEARANCE

WITH THE FEEDBACK ROD AND ARM THROUGH FULL RANGE
OF
MOVEMENT.
(4) Remove the cannon plug from the engine low oil pressure warning light switch and connect it to
the lead from the switch and coupling assembly LTCT13725 (detail of LTCT13726). Tighten all
lines to reguired torque.
75-30-01 sS
T53-L-703
TEE FITTING Í AN834-4; FLEXIBLE HOSE ASSEMBLY
Switch and Coupling Assembly

Figure 202
Page 205
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CYL 1
N BLASTMARK
RIGGING \\ OR SCRI8ED LtNE
PLATE N
(ViEW LCWKING FORWARD)
Variable Inlet Cuide Vane System

Figure 203
Page 206
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENANOE^MANUAU
CAUTION: DURING THIS TEST. THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAGE MUST BE
MONITORED BECAUSE THE WARNING LIGHT ON THE ANNUNCIATOR
PANEL IS USED TO INDICATE VIGV BEGIN TO OREN POSITION.
(5) Start engine and stabilize at flight idle. Check for íuel (eaks.
(6) Make sure that engine anli-icmg is off.
(7) Slowly increase speed above flight ídle. Record Ni speed and outside air temperature
(DAT) when low engine oil pressure warning light actuates. Repeat this check three times to
obtain a mean Ni speed.
(8) Enter graph in Figure 204 at lower band at Ni speed and outside air temperature +37,4T
Í + 3°C) to compénsate for temperature rise through air inlet duct) obtained in preceding step
(7) . Determine that the N, speed falls within this band.
(9) If NI speed does not fall within the allowable band, adjust feedback rod as foliows:
NOTE: Make sure that a mínimum of five rod end threads are engaged in
feedback tube ends. If thread engagement is insutficient, the
feedback lever on the fuel regulator may be reindexed one or two
splines counterclockwise in relation to its shaft.
(a) Shorten feedback rod to decrease Ni speed at which guíde vanes “begin to open."
Lengthen feedback rod to increase “begin to open” Ni speed. Turn both rod ends an
equal number of turns.
NOTE: Adjustments of the inlet guide vanes should be made in increments

of one percent Ni speed.
(b) Two turns on each of the feedback rod ends will result in approximately a 2 percent Ni
speed change.
(c) Repeat preceding steps (5) through (9).
(10) Remove switch and coupling assembly LTCT13725 (detail of LTCT 13726) from CYL 2 line.
Reconneci CYL 2 line to actuator.
(11) Instan switch and coupling assembly LTCT13725 (detail of LTCT 13726) between the VIGV
actuator and the CYL 1 line.
(12) Perform final adjustment at the “full open’’ point.
Page 207
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
G*S PROOUCER SPEEO - Ni - PtRCENT RPU
Gas Producer Speed at Which Inlet Guide Vane Opérales Versus Ambient Temperature
Figure 204
Page 208
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
Honeyi/vell
D. Piñal Adjustment ol the "Full Open" Poinl
(1) If not previously accomplished, instan switch and coupiing assembly LTCT13725 (detail of
LTCT13726) between the VIGV actuator and the CYL 1 line and connect to low oil pressure
warning cannon plug. Pedorm leak check prior to flight.
CAtJTION: DURING THIS TEST, THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE MUST BE

MONITORED BECAUSE THE WARNING LIGHT ON THE
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL IS USED TO INDICATE VIGV FULL
OPEN
POSITION.
(2) Perform power check and trim adjustment, (Refer to 73-20-01.) Record Ni speed and out-
side air temperatura the instant the annunciator panel (ow engine oil pressure Ifght goes out
(VIGV completely open). Repeat this check three times to obtam a VIGV mean "full open" Ni
speed.
CAUTIQN: DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM N,, AIRCRAFT TORQUE OR MGT

LIMITS. (REFER TO CHAP. 71-00-00.)
(3) Land aircraft.
(4) Enter graph in Figure 204 at upper band at Ni speed and outside air temperature +37.4^F
( + 3'C) to compénsate for temperature rise through air inlet duct obtained in preceding step (2).
Determine that the Ni speed fal/s within this band.
(5) If Ni speed does not fall within the allowable band, adjust feedback rod as follows;
NOTE: Make sure that a minimum of five rod end threads are engaged in
feedback tube ends. If thread engagement is insutficient, the
feedback lever on the fue! regulator may be rerndexed one or fwo
spiines counterclockwise in relation to its shaft.
(a) Shorten feedback rod to decrease Ni speed at which guíde vanes are “full open."
Lengthen feedback rod to increase “full open" Ni speed. Turn both rod ends an equal
number of turns.
NOTE: Adiustments of the inlet guide vanes should be made in increments

of one percent Nj speed.
(b) Two turns on each of the feedback rod ends will result in approximately a 2 percent Ni
speed change,
(c) Repeat preceding steps (2) through (5).
Page 209
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -.NTENANCEMANUAL
(6) Remove switch and coupitng assembiy LTCT13725 (detall of LTCT 13726) al completion of
check- fleconnect CYL 1 line to actuator. Reconnect engine low o¡l pressure warning switch
cannon piug. Petlorm a leak check prior to releasing aircraft for flight.
E. Recommended Functional Check of Switch and Coupling Assembiy. A periodic functional check to
ensure proper operation of the switch and coupling assembiy LTCT13725 (detall of LTCT13726) is
recommended using the following method.
(1) Cap otf one end of switch fitting and attach a controllable (pressure) source of filtered air to
other end.
(2) Connect a continuity meter to each pin of pressure switch.
(3) Apply filtered air pressure to switch and observe for continuity Detween pins. Pressure shoutd
indícate 70 to 80 psi. Replace switch if detective.
3- Insoection/Check Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
A. Inspect Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
(1) All parts for nicks, burrs and scratches.
(2) Threaded parts for crossed, stripped or damaged threads.
(3) Visually inspect all parts for cracks, distortion or excessive wear. Replace.
4. CleaninQ/Paintina Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
Thoroughly deán variable inlet guide vane actuator with dry cleaning sotvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203.)
5- Approved Repairs Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
A. Repair Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator
(2) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03. SP R409.)
Page 210
75-30-01 Sept 30/02
Honeywell ^Â,NTENANCE^MANUAL
INLET GUIPE VANE ACTUATOR HOSF ASSEMBLIES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description and Operatlon

The inlet guide vane actuator hose assembly consiste of three hoses. Two hoses are connected lo the ac-
tualor and fuel control assembly. Fuel pressure for the operation of the actuator is obtained through these
hoses. The third hose is connected from the actuator to the accessory drive gearbox. Fuel seal leakage is
drained through this hose and out oí the starter-generator drive seal port on the accessory drive gearbox.
Page 1/2
75-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
INLET GUIPE VANE ACTUATOR HOSE ASSEMBLIES - MAINTENANDF PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Inlet Cuide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
A. Remove Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
(1) Remove screws (15. 16. Figure 201) and nuts (13, 14) that secure clamps (17) to bracket on
accessory drive gearbox assembiy.
(2) Tag hose assembiy (12) to identity port connections from which it will be removed.
(3) Disconnect hose assembiy (12) from reducer (11) and accessory drive gearbox assembiy and
remove hose assembiy. Cap open port on gearbox assembiy.
(4) Remove reducer (11) wilh gasket (10) from inlet guide vane actuator assembiy. Remove gasket
from reducer. Ptug open port on actuator assembiy.
(5) Remove screw (4) and nut (22) that secure clamps (3. 21) to ciamp on bottom rear flange of
compressor housing.
(6) Tag hose assemblies (7, 20) to iOentify port connections from which they will be removed.
(7) Disconnect hose assembiy (7) from unlons (5, 8) and hose assembiy (20) from unions (1,9)
and remove hose assemblies. Cap and plug parts as necessary.
(8) Remove unions (8, 19) with gaskets (9, 18) from inlet guide vane actuator assembiy and unions
(1,5) with gaskets (2, 6) from fuel control. Remove gaskets from unions. Plug all open ports.
B. Instan Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
(1) Position gaskets (9, 18, Figure 201} onto unions (8, 19) and install unions into fuel control.
Tighten unions as required.
(2) Position gaskets (2, 6) onto unions (1,5) and install unions into inlet guide vane actuator
assembiy. Tighten unions as required.
NOTE: Prior to installation of hose assemblies (7, 20), ensure that chafing
sieeve (72-00-00, 11, Table 203) is installed and positioned to
prevent rubbing against adjacent hoses, impeller housing. air bleed
housing or other hoses.
Page 201
75-30 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies and Attaching Parts

Figure 201
Page 202
75-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1, UNION 12. HOSE

2, GASKET 13. ASSEMBLY
NUT
3, CLAMP 14. NUT
4, SCREW 15. SCREW
5, UNION 16. SCREW
6, GASKET 17. CLAMP
7. HOSE ASSEWBLY 18. GASKET
8, UNION 19. UNION
9, GASKET 20. HOSE
10. GASKET 21. ASSEMBLY
CLAMP
11, REDUCER 22. NUT
Page 203
75-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Refer to identification tags installed at removal to ensure hose

assemblies are connected to proper porl.
(3) Connect hose assembly (7) to unions (5, 8) and hose assembiy (20) to untons (1, 19). Tighten
hose connection 70 to 120 inch pounds torque.
(4) Secare clamps (3, 21) to bracket on bottom rear flange of compressor housing with screw (4)
and nut (22),
(5) Position gasket (10) onto reducer (11) and install reducen into inlet guide vane actuator
assembly. Tighten reducer as required.
(6) Connect hose assembly (12) to reducer (11) and accessory Orive gearbox assembly. Tighten
hose connectors 70 to 120 inch pounds torque.
(7) Secure clamps (17) to bracket on accessory drive gearbox assembly with screws (15, 16) and
nuts (13, 14).
2. Inspection/Check Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
A. Inspecl Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
(1) Inspect hose assemblies for fraying, chafing and cuts.
(2) Inspect parts for stripped or damaged threads.
3. Cleaning/Painting Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
Thoroughiy Clean Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies with Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62,
Table 203.)
4. Aoproved Reoairs Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
A. Repair Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Hose Assemblies
(1) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.)
(2) Replace hoses that are frayed. chafed or cut.
Page 204
75-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
INTERSTAGE BLEED ACTUATOR AF^SFMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. DescriPlton and Qoeration

The interstage bleed actuator is mounted on right síde of compressor housing assembiy. Air pressure for
operation of actuator is obtained from a bleed port at right side of diffuser housing. The actuator is con-
trolled by a signal from the fuel control assembiy. The bleed actuator will remain open until the preset clo-
sure speed is reached. (See 73-20-0t, Figure 203.) During acceleration the bleed band will open it
closed, then remain open as directed by the fuel control acceleration schedule.
Page 1/2
75-30-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “-“--AL
INTERSTAGE BLEFD ACTUATQR ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Servicinn Interstaae Bleed Actuator Assemblv
NOTE: The interstage bleed actuator strainer must be cleaned and inspected after
each 100 hours ot engine operation. or sooner if operating in extremely dusty
area.
Replace the interstage bleed actuator relay vaive diaphragm at the next
Service Inspection closest to 3500 hours since engine was new or
overhauied.
A. Remove Strainer Assembly
(1) Disconnect hose from reducer (5. Figure 201),
(2) Remove reducer, packing (4), strainer assembly (3) and spring (2) trom actuator. Discard
packing.
B. Inspect Strainer Assembly
(1) Jnspect stra/ner assembly for foreign matíer and damage. )J damaged or foreign matter cannot
be removed, replace with a new strainer assembly 2-160-500-01.
(2) Visually inspect all threaded parts for damage or crossed threads.
(3) Visually inspect all springs for damage.
(4) Inspect all other parts for damage. Replace any damaged parts.
C. Olean Strainer Assembly

(1) Using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203) deán strainer assembly (3). If
necessary, use a soft bristie brush on strainer. Olean all other parts.
D. Instan Strainer Assembly
(1) Position tapered end of spring (2) on flange of strainer assembly (3).
(2) Instan assembled spring and strainer assembly into actuator.

(3) Lightiy coat new packing (4) with grease (72-00-00, 36, Table 203) and ínstall on
reducer (5).
Page 201
75-30-03 Sept 30/02
Hon
» ;« p^CWMG
4, PEDUCEP
5.
^ ívCTUMO^
- Rieed Acwator
r;r.Se.^ssB.Ba
30^03
\
T53-L-703
(4) Make sure that strainer and spring are properly seated in actuator. Instan reducer and tighten.
(5} Connect hose to reducer (5, Figure 201).
2. Removal/Installation Interstaae Bieed Actuator Assembiv
A. Remove Interstage Bieed Actuator Assembly (See Figure 202.)
(1) Disconnect hose assemblies from diffuser housing and fuel control at actuator assembly. Cap
all ports and identity hose assemblies. Remove screw that secures hose clamp to actuator
housing.
(2) Remove screw and nut that secure lubrication hose assembly clamps to actuator assembly.
(3) Remove bolts (15), nuts (20) and washers (19) that secure actuator assembly (17) to impeller
housing.
(4) Pulí actuator assembly (17) away from compressor housing to expose connections between
rod end (4) and upper band (6) and pistón (18) and lower band (12).
(5) Support actuator assembly and remove two pins (14) that secure actuator assembly to bands.
Remove actuator.
(6) Remove four bushings (5).
(7) Hold screw (13) and remove nut (11) and washer (10) that secure bands (6, 12) together.
Remove screw (13). Slide bands through clips (7) and remove bands.
B. Instan Interstage Bieed Actuator Assembly (See Figure 202.)
NOTE: The shortest bieed band is installed on top of the compressor.
The clips are properly installed when legs are so positioned as not to
cause bieed band binding. Check all legs and reposition as required.
Check assembled bieed band in open and closed position.
(1) Instan upper band (6, Figure 202) through clips (7) on upper half of compressor housing and
lower band (12) through clips on lower half of compressor housing. Make sure clips are prop-
erly Installed.
(2) Place end of upper band (6) over end of lower band (12). Align screw boles and install screw
(13) from inside the bands. Install washer (10) and nut (11) on screw. Hold the screw and
tighten nut as required.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Interstage Bieed Actuator Assembly, Bleed Band

Figure 202
Page 204
75-30-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
KEY TO FIGURE 202
1. NUT 12. LOWER BAND

2. PIN 13. SCREW
3. NUT 14. PINS
4. ROD END 15. BOLT
5. BUSHINGS 16. UNION
6. UPPER BAND 17. INTERSTAGE BLEED
7. CLIP ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
8. WASHER 18. PISTON
9. BOLT 19. WASHER
10. WASHER 20. NUT
11. NUT
Page 205
75-30-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(3) Install four bushings (5).
NOTE: Make sure that spring and strainer element are seated properly before
tightening reducen
(4) Support actuator assembly (17) and attach upper band (6) to rod end (4) with pin (14) and
attach lower band (12) to pistón (18) with pin (14),
(5) Position actuator assembly (17) on impeller housing and secure with bolts (15). washers (19)
and nuts (20). Tighten as required and lockwire bolts.
(6) Connect hose assembly from diffuser housing to actuator assembly and secure clamp with
screw to actuator.
(7) Connect hose assembly from fuel control to actuator assembly.
(8) Connect clamps on lubrication hose assemblies to bracket on actuator assembly with screw
and nut.
(9) Adjust bleed bands. (See 75-30-05, paragraph 2.)
3. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Interstaae Bleed Actuator Assembly
A. Disassemble Interstage Bleed Actuator Relay Vaive (See Figure 202.)

(1) Remove nuts (1,20), washers (2, 19). springs (3, 18), washers (4, 17), screws (12, 14) and
washers (11, 15).
(2) Lift off cap (5). Remove nut (13), bolt (6), washer (7), relay diaphragm (8) and washer (9). Dis-
card relay diaphragm (8).
B. Reassemble Interstage Bleed Actuator Relay Vaive
(1) Posilion washer (9. Figure 203), new relay diaphragm (8), washer (7) and bolt (6) in cover (10).
Align screw holes in diaphragm with holes in cover.
(2) Thread nut (13) onto bolt (6). Tighten nut 10 to 12 inch pounds torque and lockwire.
Page 206
75-30-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Interstage Bleed Actuator Assembly - Relay Vatve Diaphragm Replacement

Figure 203
Page 207
75-30-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII —--NUAL
KEY TO FIGURE 203
1, SELF LOCKING NUT 11. FLAT WASHER

2. FU\T WASHER 12. MACHINE SCREW
3. COMPRESSION SPRING 13. PLAIN HEX NUT
4. FLAT WASHER 14. MACHINE SCREW
5. RELAY VALVE CAP 15. FLAT WASHER
6, SHOULDERED BOLT 16. ACTUATOR HOUSING
7. RECESSED WASHER 17. ASSEMBLY
FLAT WASHER
8, RELAY DIAPHRAGM 18, COMPRESSION SPRING
9. FLAT WASHER 19. FLAT WASHER
10, ACTUATOR COVER 20. SELF LOCKING NUT
Page 208
75-30-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
CAUTiON: ADEQUATELY SUPPORT ACTUATOR COVER (10).
(3) Secure relay valve cap (5) to actuator cover (10) with washers (4, 17), spnngs (3, 18), washers
(2, 19). nuts (1,20), washers (11, 15) and screws (12, 14). Tighten screws 1 1/2 to 1 3/4 turns
after engaging springs.
NOTE: Instan and adjust bleed bands. (See 75-30-03, paragraph 2. and
75 -30-05, paragraph 2.)
4. Inspectlon/Check Interstage Bleed Actuator Assemblv
A. Disassemble Interstage Bleed Actuator Assembly
(1) Inspect parís tor nicks, burrs and scratches.
(2) Inspect threaded parts for stripped or damaged threads.
(3) Inspect parts for cracks, distortion and excessive wear.
(4) Inspect relay diaphragm for damage and/or ruptura.
5- Cleaning/Painting Interstage Bleed Actuator Assemblv

Thoroughly Clean All Parts Of Interstage Bleed Actuator Assembly In Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62,
Tabfe 203.)
6- Aporoved Repairs Interstage Bleed Actuator Assemblv
A. Repair Interstage Bleed Actuator Assembly
(2) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.)
(3) Replace damaged and/or ruptured relay diaphragm. (See paragraph 3.)
TEZ O A AO Page 209/210

í 0“*"%JU’“vlw Sept30/02
T53-L-703
INTERSTAGE AIR-RI FED HOSE ASSFMRI IFS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. DescriPtion and Qoeration
The interstage air-bleed hose assemblies consist of two hoses. One hose is connected from the bleeú
port at right side of diffuser housing to the interstage bleed actuator. Air pressure for operation of the
actuator is obtained through this hose. The second hose. connected between the actuator and the fuel
control, directa the signal that Controls the actuator from the fuel control assembiy.
Page 1/2
75-30-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII —
INTERSTAGE AIR BLEED HQSE ASSEMBLIFS - MAINTENANCE PRACTíCES
1. Removal/lnstaliation Interstage Air Bleed Hose Assemblies
A. Remove Interstage Air bleed Hose Assemblies (See Figure 201.)

(1) Remove screw (8) that secures clamp (9) ío actuator housing assembiy.
(2) Disconnect hose assembiy (1) from diffuser housing and interstage bleed actuator assembiy
and remove hose assembiy. Cap all open ports.
(3) Remove screw (7) and nut (6) that secure clamp (5) to bracket on bottom rearflange oí
compressor housing.
(4) Disconnect hose assembiy (4) from fuel control and interstage bleed actuator assembiy and
remove hose assembiy. Cap all open ports.
(5) Remove unión (3) and packing (2) from actuator assembiy.
B. Instad Interstage Air bleed Hose Assemblies
(1) instan unión {3} and packing (2) into actuator assembiy and tighten as required.
NOTE: Prior to installation of hose (4) ensure that chafing sieeve is installed
and positioned to prevent rubbing against nearby hoses and area of
contact with aircraft generator.
(2) Connect hose assembiy (4) to fuel control and interstage bleed actuator assembiy. Tighten
hose connectors 70 to 120 inch pounds torque.
(3) Secure clamp (5) to bracket on bottom rear flange of compressor housing with screw (7)
and nut (6).
(4) Connect hose assembiy (1) to diffuser housing and interstage bleed actuator assembly.
Tighten hose connectors 100 to 250 tnch pounds torque.
(5) Secure clamp (9) to interstage bleed actuator assembiy with screw (8).
Page 201
75-30-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
XA ;¡a -i57
1. HOSE ASSEMBLY 6, NUT

2. PACKING 7. SCRE
3. UNION 8, W
SCRE
4. HOSE ASSEMBLY 9. W
CLAMP
5. CLAMP
Interstage Air Bteed Hose Assemblies and Attaching Parts

Figure 201
Page 202
75-30-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
2. Insoection/Check Interstaae Air Bleed Hose Assemblies
A. Inspect Interstage Air bleed Hose Assemblies
(1) Inspect hose assemblies for stripped or damaged threads.
(2) Inspect hose assemblies lor fraying. chafing and cuts.
3- Cleaning/Painting Interstaae Air Bleed Hose Assemblies
Ciean Interstage Air bleed Hose Assemblies With Dry Cieaning Soivent (72-00-0, 62, Table 203.)
4, Aporoved Repairs Interstage Air Bleed Hose Assemblies
A. Repair Interstage Air bleed Hose Assemblies
(1) Repair stripped or damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.)
(2) Replace hose assemblies if frayed, chafed or cut.
Page 203/204
75-30-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
BLEED BAND ASSEMBLY - DESr.RIPTION AND QPERATIQN
1. DescriPtion and Qoeration

The bleed band assembly consists of two band halves bolted together. It is positianed around the rear
portion of the axial compressor housing and secured by clips bolted to the compressor housing. The
looped enOs of the bleed band assembly are attached to the air-bleed actuator.
Page 1/2
75-30-05 Sept 30/02
BLEED BAND ASSEMBLY - MAINTFNANCE PRACTICES
1- Removal/Installalion Bieed Band Assemblv
A. Remove Bieed Band Assembly

(1) Remove pin (see 75-30-03, 14, Figure 202) Irom upper band (6) and rod end (4),
(2) Remove pin (14) from lower band (12) and pistón (17),
(3) Remove bolts (9). washers (8) and clips (7) from compressor housing.
CALJTION: DO NOT TWIST OR BEND BLEED BANDS.
(4) Remove upper and lower bieed bands (6. 12).
B. Instan Bieed Band Assembly
CAUTION: DO NOT TWIST OR BEND BLEED BANDS.
NOTE: The shorter bieed band is installed on top of the compressor housing.
(1) Position bieed bands on compressor housing,

NOTE: The clip is properly installed when legs are so positioned as not to cause
bieed band binding. Check all legs and reposition or bend as required.
Check assembled bieed band in open and closed position.
(2) Position clips (see 75-30-03, 7, Figure 202) on compressor housing, and secure with bolts (9)
and washers (8). Make sure clips are properly installed. Tighten and lockwire bolts.
(3) Attach upper band to rod end (4) and lower band to pistón (17) with pins (14). Push rod and
screw assemblies, bands and pins into actuator housing.
2- Adjust/Test Bieed Band Assemblv
NOTE: The bieed band shall be adjusted whenever a new band or actuator assembly is
installed, The travel of the pistón rod and the tightness of the bieed band are ad-
justed, as follows-
A. Adjust Bieed Band Assembly
Page 201
75 -30-05 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Determining Air Bieed Actuator Pistón Rod Travel

Figure 201
Paga 202
75-30-05 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(1) With pistón in retracted position, make a mark on the pistón. (See Figure 201.)
(2) Position a mark on housing in line with mark on pistón. Place another mark on housing exactly
1 inch above first mark. (See Figure 201.)
(3) Disconnect hose assembly from diffuser housing and hose assembly from fuel reguiator at
actuator assembly.
(4) Instan cap assembly AN929-4 on exposed port trom which hose assembly from fuel regulator
was removed.
(5) Cut lockwire that secures nut on each side of pin (see 75-30-03, Figure 202). Back off nut (1)
to end of rod end (4).
(6) Cióse bleed bands by appiying 60 psig air pressure to actuator assembly reducer fitting.
NOTE: At least One thread shall show beyond nut at all times.
(7) Measure travel (throw) of rod.
(8) Tighten nut (3) until bleed band is snug against compressor housmg.
NOTE: The bleed band is properly positioned when torque on the nut
increases.
(9) Pelease pressure and tighten nut (1). Reapply pressure.
(10) If rod travel is withm limits of 1.0 to 1.2 inches, proceed to foilowing step (13).
(11) If rod travel is below 1.0 inch limit, replace band or actuator assembly. whichever is required,
and repeat preceding steps (6) through (10).
(12) tf rod travel is more Ihan 1.2 inches, continué to tighten nut (see 75-30-03. 3, Figure 202) until
travel is within limits.
(13) Apply 60 psig air pressure to actuator assembly.
NOTE: Clearance between compressor housing and bleed band m all bleed
port areas must not exceed 0.002 inch drag fit.
(14) Using feeler gage, check clearance between compressor housing and bleed band at each clip
and at position where two halves of band meet.
(15) Adjust nuts (1,3) to obtain required clearance by either of the foilowing methods:
(a) Tighten band by loosening nut (1) and tightenmg nut (3).
(b) Loosen band by loosening nut (3) and tightenmg nut (1).
(16) When proper clearance has been established, tighten nuts and lockwire both nuts together.
(17) Disconnect air pressure supply and reconnect hose assemblies.
(18) Perform a bleed band closure test. (See paragraph 2.B.)
Page 203
75-30-05 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
B. Test Bleed Band Assembly
{1) A bleed band closure test (see 73-20-01, paragraph 3.A.(2)(a) through (g)) should be
performed forthetolíowing conditions.
(a) When an interstage bleed actuator has been repaired or repfaced,
(b) When a (uel control has been replaced.
(c) When air bleed System malfunction is suspected.
(2) It interstage air bleed system does not function properiy. check tor the following detects:
(a) Leaks or obstructions in hoses or fittings.
(b) Clogged strainer in interstage bleed actuator.
(c) Sticking of pistón in air bleed actuator.
(d) improper adjustment of bleed band.

(e) Deposits of dirt and gum that prevent operation of fuel control air bleed valve on fuel con-
trol. (See Figure 202.}
(3) Proceed as follows to correct the defects listed in preceding step (2).
(a) Disconnect hose between air diffuser and actuator at actuator fitting.
(b) Connect a source of compressed air to hose and blow air through hose to determine that
hose and diffuser housing port are unobstructed.
Page 204
75-30-05 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
XA 738 163A
Fuel Control Air Bleed Valve

Figure 202
Page 205
75-30-05 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(c) If hose and diffuser housing port are ciear, disconnect air bleed hose between fuel control
and actuator and at actuator fitting. Blow air through hose to determine that hose is un-
obstructed.
(d) Connect the source of compressed air to reducer fitting on actuator.
NOTE: When pressure is applied in preceding step (e), actuator shouid

cióse. Closing will be indicated by rise of rod assembiy.
(e) Supply 60 psig máximum metered air pressure to reducer (see 75-30-03, 5, Figure 201)
and block unión.
(f) Uncover unión.
NOTE: When unión is uncovered, actuator shouid open. Opening wilt be

indicated by drop of rod assembiy.
(g) If diffuser housing port is unobstructed, determine cause and remedy. Recheck actuator
for proper operation.
(h) If hoses are obstructed, replace hoses. Recheck actuator for proper operation.
(i) If actuator does not open and cióse as indicated in preceding steps (d) through (f),
replace actuator. Check new actuator for proper operation.
(j) If hoses and port are ciear and actuator opens and closes as indicated in preceding steps
(d) through (f), inspect air bleed valve of fuel control as described in step (c).
(4) Remove dust cover from fuel control air bleed valve. Clean cover with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(5) Connect air bleed hose to the fuel control P3 port. (See Figure 202.)
CAUTION: THE LEAF SPRING, BLOCK. AND VALVE BUTTON ASSEMBLY

MUST BE ROTATED MANUALLY USE OF TOOLS IS
NOT
PERMITTED,
(6) Introduce, in the form of spray, dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) through the
open end of the hose while simultaneously rotating the leaf spring, block and valve button
assembiy. (See Figure 202.)
(7) Spray the exterior area of leaf spring, block and valve button assembiy with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(8) Repeat preceding step (6).
(9) Reconnect air bleed hose to air bleed actuator.
(10) Perform an operational check of Interstate bleed actuator assembiy. Refer to preceding step
(3) . Reinstall dust cover over fuel control trtgger mechanism.
(11) If bleed band still does not function properly, proceed with step (12).
Page 206
75-30-05 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(12) Remove fuel control and place on a suitable workbench.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOOLS TO POTATE THE LEAF SPRING, BLOCK AND
VALVE BUTTON ASSEMBLY
(13) Manually rotate the leaf spring and block assembly to center the valve button over the orífice m
the valve housing. (See Figure 202.)
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING VALVE BUTTON, MAKE SURE THAT THE LEAF
SPRING DOES NOT CONTACT THE SURFACE OF THE
VALVE
HOUSING.
(14) Apply a small amount of liquid soap around the valve button and introduce shop air at 60 psig
to the P3 port (see Figure 202). Observe button for signs of air leakage. Remove and replace
button 76285 if leakage is evident.
(15) Inspect valve housing contact surface for scohng (see Figure 202). If valve housing is scored, it
will create an abrasive action to erode the button contact surface and cause excessive leakage.
Replace fuel control If valve housing is heavily scored.
(16) Reinstall fuel control. (See 73-20-01.)
3. Insoection/Check Bleed Band Assembly
A. Inspect Bleed Band Assembly
(1) Inspect bleed band machine screw that joins upper bleed band to lower bleed band. Make
certain that screw can be installed flush or below the surface of inside diameter of bleed band
assembly.
(2) Inspect upper and lower bands for distortion. Replace If distorted.
4. Cleaning/Painting Bleed Band Assembly
Clean Bleed Band Assembly Thoroughly Using Dry Cleaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
HoneyweII --ENANCEMANUAL
FNfílNF CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
ENGINE CONTROLS 76-00-00
FUEL CONTROL AIR PRESSURE SENSING HOSE 76-10-01

203
Approved Repairs
76- CONTENTS
Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
SUBJFCT SUBJFCT
76 ENGINE
CONTROLS
— Tab
Table of -
Contents
Sept 30/02
List of
Etfective
Pages
Sept 30/02
76-10-01 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Blank
76
Sept 30/02
Honeywell
FUFLCQNTRni AIR PRESSURE SENSING HOSE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The fuel control air pressure sensing hose is located on the upper lett side of the engine between the
compressor inlet and the fuet control assembiy. It provides a means of transferring compressor inlet air
pressure signáis to the fuel control.
Page 1/2
76-10-01 Sept 30/02
FUEL CONTROL AIR PRESSURE SENSING HOSE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/lnstallalion Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensino Hose

A, Remove Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose (See Figure 201.)
(1) Remove screw (5) and nuts (12) from clamp (4).
(3) Disconnect hose assembly (9) from elbow (3) and unión (10).
CALJTION: IMMEDIATELY CAP ALL OPENINGS.

(4) Loosen nut (2) and remove elbow (3) with nut and packing (1) from inlet housing assembly.
Remove packing and nut from elbow.
(5) Remove unión (10) with packing (11) from fuel control. Remove packing from union.
B. Instan Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose (See Figure 201.)
(1) Position packing (11) onto unión (10) and install unión into fuel control. Tighten unión as
required.
(2) Thread nut (2) onto elbow (3) and position packing (1) on elbow. Install elbow with nut and
packing into inlet housing assembly. Tighten nut as required.
NOTE: Prior to installation of hose assembly (9), ensure that chafing sleeve is
positioned where hose may come in contact with overspeed governor
and tachometer drive gearbox.
(3) Connect hose assembly (9) to unión (10) and to elbow (3). Tighten hose connectors 70 to 120
inch pounds torque.
(4) Secure clamp (4) to bracket on overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly with screw
(5) and nut (12).
(5) Secure clamp (7) to bracket on fonward flange of compressor housing with screw (8) and nut (6).
Page 201
76- 10-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. PACKING 7. CLAMP
2. NUT 8. SCREW
3. ELBOW 9. HOSE
4, CLAMP 10. ASSEMBLY
UNION
6. NUT 12. NUT
Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
76-10-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
2. Inspection/Check Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose
A. Inspect Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose
(1) Inspect for stripped or damaged threads.

(2) Inspect hose assembly for fraying, chafing and cuts.
3. Cleaning/Paintina Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose
A. C/ean Fueí Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose
Clean all parís with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
4. Aporoved Repairs Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose
A. Repair Fuel Control Air Pressure Sensing Hose

(1) Blend repair (referió SPM. 70-25-01, SPR401) damaged threads usmgfine store. Replace
parís with stripped threads or threads that cannot be repaired.
(2) Replace hose assembly if cut. frayed or chafed.
"70 HA AH Page203/204
íO— 1 U " “ U I Sept30/02
HoneyweII
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PACES
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
SUBJECT PACE DATE SUBJFCT PACE DATE
77 ENGINE
INDICATING - Tab
Table of
List of
Effective
Pages — Sept 30/02
77-20-01 1 Sept 30/02

2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Blank
77-20-02 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02
206 Blank
77-EFF
Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ------
THFRMOCQUPLE LFAD ASSFMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND QPERATION

Thermocouple lead assembly interfaces between the connector and airframe harness to supply a voltage
reading to the cockpit MGT gage.
Page 1/2
77- 20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
THERMQCOUPLE LEAD ASSFMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removaí/Installation Thermocouple Lead Assemblv
A. Remove Thermocouple Lead Assembly

{1) Disconnect thermocouple lead (1) from connector (2 Figure 201) and airframe harnees
connector.
(2) Remove lead (1).
B. Instan Thermocouple Lead Assembly.
(1) Connect thermocouple lead assembly (1) to connector (2).
2. Inspection/Check Thermocouple Lead Assemblv
A. Inspect Thermocouple Lead Assembly
(1) Inspect for wear, fraytng and loose connectors.
(2) Inspect for cracks.
3. Cleaning/Painting Thermocouple Lead Assembly
A. Clean Thermocouple Lead Assembly

CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE LEAD ASSEMBLY IN SOLVENT. SOLVENT MAY CAUSE
DETERIORATION OF INTERNAL WIRING INSULATION.
(1) Wipe lead assembly clean, using a clean lint free cloth dampened with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62. Table 203). After cleaning, wipe with a clean, dry. lint free cloth to remove
residual solvent.
I 4. Deleted
Page 201
77- 20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. THERMOCOUPLE LEAD ASSEMBLY 2. CONNECTOR
Thermocouple Lead Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
77-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII —
5. Test o< Exhaust Thermocouple Lead Assembly
A. Functional Test Exhaust Thermocouple Lead Assembly
(1) Test resistance of thermocouple lead assembly.

(2) Connect a short length of wire across output connector socket pins A and B at the adapter lead
interface.
(3) Using a Simpson Meter, check resistance between input connector Circuit A and DEF, B and DEF
and C and DEF.
(4) Resistance shall be 0.70 to 0.72 ohms at 65 to 75° F (18 to 24°C).
Page 203/204
i i — ¿\J — U i Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
ELECTRICAI. CARI.F ASSEMRIY - DESCRIPTION AND QPERATIQN
1, Description and Operation

The e/ectrical cable assemb/y contains connections lor Ihe ignihon unil. hot air solenoid valva, starting fue)
solenoid valve, inlet oil temperature bulb, fuel control transfer solenoid valve and power turbine and gas
producer turbine tachometer generators. Quick disconnect plugs are incorporated on the harness.
Page 1/2
77- 20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CABLE ASREMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTiCFS
1. Removal/Installation Eléctrica! Cable Assemblv
A. Remove Electrical Cable Assembíy
Í1) Remove all screws and nuls that secute clamps (4, 7,12,21,22, 27, Figure 201) to the engine.
NOTE: Index each connector to facilítate reassembiy.
(2) Disconnect electrical plug at airframe main connector (15).

WARNING: DISCHARGE ANY ELECTRICAL CHARGE STORED IN SYSTEM BY
GROUNDING IGNITION LEAOS.
(3) Disconnect cable assembíy at each of the foHowing connectors: hot air solenoid valve connector
(9) , compressor rotor tachometer generator connector (1), ignition unít connector (16), power
turbine tachometer generator connector (18), starting fuel solenoid valve connector (17), normal/
emergency fuel transfer solenoid valve connector (24) and oi( temperafure bulb connector (28).
(4) Remove screws and nuts, and remove aircraft main connector (15) from bracket.
(5) Remove cable assembíy. Remove sealing washer from each connector. Discard sealing
washers.
B. Instan Electrical Cable Assembíy
(1) Position cable assembíy on engine so that five connectors are on the left side and two
connectors are on the right of the engine.
(2) Secure aircraft main connector (15, Figure 201) to engine bracket.
(3) Using new sealing washers (see Figure 202), attach the cable assembíy to componente with
each of the following connectors: oil temperature bulb connector (28, Figure 201), normal/
emergency fuel transfer solenoid valve connector (24), power turbine tachometer generator
connector (18). starting fuel solenoid valve connector (17), ignition unit connector (16), hot air
solenoid valve connector (9) and compressor rotor tachometer generator connector (1).
Lockwire all connectors.
Page 20i
77-20-02 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
Electrical Cable Assembly

Figure 201
77-20-02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. COMPRESSOR ROTOR (Ni) TACHOMETER 16. IGNlTiON UNIT CONNECTOR

GENERATOR CONNECTOR 17. STARTING FUEL SOLENOID VALVE
2. NUT CONNECTOR
3. SCREW 18. POWER TURBINE (N2> TACHOMETER
4. CLAMP GENERATOR CONNECTOR
5. NUT 19. NUT
6. SCREW 20. SCREW
21. CLAMP
7. CLAMP
22. CLAMP
8. ELECTRICAL CABLE ASSEMBLY
23. SCREW
9. HOT AIR SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
24. TRANSFER SOLENOID VALVE
10. NUT
CONNECTOR
11. SCREW
25. NUT
12. CLAMP
26. SCREW
13. NUT
27. CLAMP
14. SCREW 28. OILTEMPERATUREBULB CONNECTOR
15. AIRCRAFT MAIN CONNECTOR
Page 203
77-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CONSECTOfl
HOT A.a
SU'.É '•OiD
VAUVÉ
Identification of Electrical Connector Sealing Washers

Figure 202
Page 204
77-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(4) Position clamps (4. 7, 12, 21,22, 27) and secura cable assembly to engme. Lockwire screw
(23)
(5) Conneci electrical plug at aircraft mam connector.
2. Inspection/Check Electrical Cable Assembly
A. Inspect Electrical Cable Assembly
(1) Inspect connectors for corrosión, damaged threads, cracked insulator and bent or broken pins.
(2) Inspect cable assembly for loose connectors, chafing, fraying, cuts and deterioration.
(3) Replace damaged cable assembly.
B. Check Electrical Cable Assembly
(1) Perform a continuity check.
(2) Replace cable if proper continuity is not established.
3. Cleaning/Paintino Electrical Cable Assembly
A. Clean Electrical Cable Assembly
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE CABLE ASSEMBLY IN SOLVENT, SOLVENT MAY

CAUSE DETERIORATION OF INTERNAL WIRING INSULATION.
(1) Wipe cable assembly olean, using a clean, Itnt free cloth dampened with dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62, Table 203). After cleaning, wlpe with a clean, dry, lint free cloth to remove
residual solvent.
(2) Remove corrosión with crocus cloth (72-00-00, 13, Table 203) and dry cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, 62. Table 203).
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
OIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
SUBJECT RUBJECT PAGE
OIL 79-00-00
POWER PRIVEN RQTARY OIL PUMP 79-20-01

AdjustmentyTest 203
Cleaning/Pamting 205
POWER PRIVEN TORQUFMFTFR BOOSTER PUMP 79-20-02

Adjustment/Test 201
LUBE OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY 79-20-03

Disassembiy/Assembly 201
Cleantng/Painting 204
Approved Repairs
207
POWER TURBINF OIL STRAINER
79-20-04
1
201
Inspection/Check
201
Cleaning/Painting
203
REAR BEARING HOUSING OIL STRAINER
79-20-05
1
201

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
POWER TAKEQFF COVER AND POWER TAKEOFF 79-20-06

QIL
SUPPLY NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1
Approved Repairs
l URRIGATION HOSES AND PRESSURE 79-20-07
MANIFQLD 201
206
Cleaning/Painting
Approved Repairs
CHIP DETECTOR 79-30-01
201
Inspection/Check
201
Cleaning/Painting
QIL TEMPERATURE BULB 79-30-02

Page 2
HoneyweII
LIST OF EFFECTiVE PAGES
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
RUR.iFCT PAGE DATE RUBJECT PAGE DATE
79 0IL Tab 202 Sept 30/02

203 Sept 30/02
Table of 1 Sept 30/02 204 Blank
Contents 2 Sept 30/02 79-20-07 201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
Pages —
Sept 30/02 205 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02
79-20-01 1 Sept 30/02 79-30-01 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank 2 Blank
201 Sept 30/022 201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02 202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02 79-30-02 1 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02 201 Sept 30/02
206 Blank 202 Sept 30/02
79-20-02 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
79-20-03 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Sept 30/02
205 Sept 30/02
206 Sept 30/02
207 Sept 30/02
208 Blank
79-20-04 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Sept 30/02
203 Sept 30/02
204 Blank
79-20-05 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
202 Blank
79-20-06 1 Sept 30/02
2 Blank
201 Sept 30/02
79-EFF
Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
POWER PRIVEN ROTARY OIL PUMP - DESCRIPTinN AND OPERATIQN
The power driven rotary oil pump is a dual element pump, One element supplies lubricating oil pressure:
the other element returns scavenge oil to the aircraft mounted oil tank. A common splined drive shaft
Orives both elements. A pressure relief valve in the power driven rotary oil pump is adjusted to deliver 80
to 100 psig oil pressure at normal rated power, and above, measured at the oil lilter discharge port. This
setting is rated for a máximum inlet oil temperature of 200°F (93“C). At pressure below relief valve setting
oil pressure is directly proportionai to compressor rotor speed.
Page 1/2
79-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,NTEMA_NC_E^MANUA.
POWER PRIVEN ROTARY OIL PUMP - MAINTENANCF
PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Power Priven Rotarv Oil Pumo
A. Remove Power Driven Roiary Oil Pump

NOTE: If pump is to be replaced, remove and retam temperatura buib for
installation into new pump.
(1) Disconnect electrical cable assembly connector trom temperatura butb.
(2) Disconnect aircraft oil inlet and outlet hoses from oil pump. Cap and plug parts as necessary.
(3) Support pump (7, Figure 201) and remove bolts (1,9) and washers (2, 8).
(4) Hold pump in position against mounting pad. Slowly pulí pump directly Irom mounting pad.
Use care not to damage drive shaft assembly (3).
(5) Remove drive shaft assembly {3) from accessory drive gearbox assembly. Remove and discard
packings (4. 5, 6).
(6) (Post Service Bulletin T53-L-703-0097) Remove scavenge port filter (10).
B. Instan Power Driven Rotary Oil Pump
(1) Instan dnve shaft assembly (3, Figure 201) into accessory drive gearbox assembly. mating
spiined end of drive shaft assembly with infernal spiines in gearbox. Push dnve shaft assembly
into gearbox until lockring is engaged.
(2) Instan new packings (4, 5, 6) over correct port on mounting face of accessory drive gearbox
assembly.
(2A) (Post Sen/ice Bulletin T53-L-703-0097) install scavenge port filter (10).
(3) Slowly guide shaft of pump (7) into drive shaft assembly and position pump on mounting face
of accessory drive gearbox assembly.
(4) Support pump and secure with bolts (1,9) and washers (2. 8). Tighten bolts as required and
lockwire.
NOTE: If a new oil pump was installed, install oil temperature bulb. (See
79-30-02.)
(5) Connect electrical cable assembly connector to temperature bulb and tighten as required.
Lockwire connector.
Page 201
79-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
T53L703152
1. BOLT 7. POWER DRIVEN ROTARY OIL PUMP

2. WASHER 8. WASHER
3. OIL PUMP ORIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY 9. BOLT
4. PACKING 10. SCAVENGE PORT FILTER
5. PACKING (POST SB T53-L-703-0097)
6. PACKING
Power Driven Rotary Oil Pump and

Attaching Parts
Figure 201
Page 202
79-20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
2. AdiustmenlA'est Power Priven Rotary OH Pump
A. Adjust Power Driven Rotary Oil Pump
(1) Before making any oil pump (see Figure 202) pressure adjustment, thoroughiy check the
aircraft oil pressure System, mcludmg the cockpit gage, for proper operation.
(2) Check the oil filter for cleanliness.
(3) Attach a pressure gage to oil filter pressure tap port.
(4) Opérate engine and check oil pressure. Normal pressures should be 80 to 100 psig at normal
rated power and above 25 psig mínimum at flight idie. The readings should be taken after the
oil pressure and temperature have stabilized.
WARNING: DO NOT MAKE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS DURING ENGINE

OPERATION.
(5) If pressure is not within limits, shut down the engine and make the following adjustments;
(a) Loosen the adjustment screw locknut. {See Figure 202.)
(b) Turn the adjustment screw clockwise to increase pressure or counterclockwise to reduce
pressure. One full turn will change the oil filter discharge pressure approximately 8 psig.
Tighten locknut.
(6) Restar! the engine. Becheck the oil pressure and repeat adjustments in step (5), as necessary.
(7) Tighten the adjustment screw locknut 8 to 10 foot pounds torque. Lockwire.
(8) Remove pressure gage and plug oil filter pressure tap port.
3. Insoection/Check Power Priven Rotary Oil Pumo
A. Inspect Power Driven Rotary Oil Pump
(1) Inspect parís for damaged threads.
(2) Inspect spiined shaft for worn or chipped teeth.
(3) Inspect housing for damage.
Page 203
79-20-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Power Driven Rotary Oil Pump Adjustment

Figure 202
Page 204
79-20-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,MTENA.C_E^MANUAL
4. Cleanina/Painting Power Priven Roiarv Oil Pumo
Thoroughiy Clean Power Dnven Rotary Oil Pump with Dry Cieaning Solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
Page 205/206
79-20-01 Sepl 30/02
HoneyweII
POWER PRIVEN ROTARY BQQSTFR PIIMP - DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
1. Descriplion and Qperation

The torquemeter boost pump. containing the pressure and the scavenge eíemenrs, is mounted on and
driven by the overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembiy. Each element is an individual pumping
unit and draws oil from a sepárate source. The pressure element receives engine lubncating oil at 60 to 80
psig and delivers it. through a filter, to the torquemeter valve at a pressure o( 120 psig mínimum at normal
rated power and above; excess oil flows back to the inlet side of the pump. A relief valve in the overspeed
governor and tachometer drive assembiy sets the pump outlet pressure. The scavenge element receives
oil from the overspeed governor and tachometer drive gear housing and delivers it to the oil retum pas-
sages in inlet housing assembiy.
Page 1/2
79-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
POWER PRIVEN ROTARY BOOSTER PUMP - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Power Priven Rotarv Booster Pump
A. Remove Power Driven Rotary Booster Pump
(1) Remove mounting bolts (1, Figure 201) and washers (2) that secure pump (3) to the overspeed
governor and tachometer drive assembiy.
(2) Remove pump and discard packing (4).
B. Instan Power Driven Rotary Booster Pump,
(1) Establish proper end float of overspeed governor drive shaft. (See 72-60-02.)
(2) Instan shims on overspeed governor drive shaft, as required.
(3) Instan packing (4. Figure 201) in booster pump housing.

(4) Mount pump (3) on overspeed governor and tachometer drive housing, mating its spiined shaft
with internal spiine of overspeed governor drive shaft.
(5) Secure pump with mounting bolts (1) and washers (2). Tighten bolts. Lockwire.
2. Adiustment/Test Power Driven Torquemeter Booster Pumo
A. Adjust Power Driven Torquemeter Booster Pump
NOTE: The readings should be taken after oil pressure and temperatures have
stabilized.
(1) Remove plug from overspeed governor and tachometer drive (see Figure 202), and install a
pressure gage that provides readings from 0 to 200 psig.
(2) Opérate engine and check torquemeter oil pressure. At normal rated power and above, the
required minimum pressure is 120 psig.
(3) If required, shut down the engme, and make the following adjustments:
(a) Straighten tang on key washer.
(b) Loosen adjusting screw locknut, usmg socket wrench LTCT215.
Page 201
79-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1, BOL! 3. POWER DRIVEN TORQUEMETER

2, WASHER (BOOSTER) PUMP
4, PACKING
Power Driven Rotary Torquemeter Pump

Figure 201
Page 202
79-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Torquemeter Oil Pressure Adjustment

Figure 202
Page 203
79-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(c) Turn adjusting screw clockwise to increase pressure or counterciockwise to reduce

pressure. One ful! turn will change pressure approximateiy 10 psig.
(d) Using wrench LTCT215, tighten adjusting screw locknut 70 lo 80 inch pounds lorque.
(e) Restar! engine. Recheck oil pressure and repeat step (3), as necessary.
(f) Deform tangs on key washer.
(g) Deform one tang against locknut and one tang against valve body.
(4) Remove pressure gage and reinstal) plug.
3. Insoection/Check Power Priven Torouemeter Booster Pumo
A. Inspect Power Driven Torquemeter Booster Pump
{1} Inspect housing for damage.
(2) Inspect spiined shaft for worn or chipped teeth.
(3) Replace booster pump if damaged.
4. CleaninQ/Paintina Power Driven Torquemeter Booster Pumo

A. Olean Power Driven Torquemeter Booster Pump Thoroughiy deán booster pump with dry cleaning
solvent (72-00-00, 62. Table 203.)
Page 204
79-20-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
LUBE niL FILTER ASSEMBLY - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Descnption and Operation
The lube oii filter assembly is bolted to Ihe accessory drive gearbox. The lilter contains a bypass valve, set
to open at a 15 to 20 psig diflerential pressure, that allows the oil flow lo bypass the filter elements and
supply oil to the engine if the filter ís clogged. A differential pressure indicator which pops out at 9 to 13
psig differential pressure, indicating impending bypass, is incorporated on lube oii filter assembly
1 -080-460-02. This oii filter contains seven wafer dises which are cleanable.
Page 1/2
79-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
LUBE OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/installation Lube Oil Filter Assemblv
A. Remove Lube Oí! Filter Assemb/y
(1) Straighten tabwashers (4, Figure 201) under two bolts (5).
(2) Support lube oil filter assembly (8) and remove two bolts (5), tabwashers (4), link (3). two botts
(7) and washers (6),
(3) Remove lube oil filter assembly (8) and packings (1,2).
B. Instan Lube Oil Filter Assernbly
(1) Place packings (1,2, Figure 201) on mounling face of accessory dnve gearbox assembly.
(2) Position lube oil filter assembly (8) on mounting face and secure with two bolts (7) and washers
(6) through bottom holes of filter housing.
NOTE: Link (3) shall be perpendicular to centeriine of engine.
(3) Instan one bolt (5) and tabwasher (4) through top forward hole of filter housing and another bolt
(5) , tabwasher (4) and link (3) through remaining hole.
(4) Tighten bolts (5, 7) evenly. Lockwire bolts (7) and lock bolts (5) by bendmg tabwasher (4).
2. Disassembiv/Reassemblv Lube Oil Filter Assemblv
A. Disassemble Lube Oil Filter Assembly

NOTE: Disassemble lube oil filter assembly (see Figure 202) oniy to replace damaged
parís or olean filter element {12} or elements (13).
NOTE: If, upon removal of cover, an excessive amount of metal chips is noted.
perform lubrication system contamination troubleshooting procedure.
(See 72-00-00, ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING. paragraph I .C.)
(1) Loosen bolt (2) that secures cover (7) to filter housing (11) and withdraw cover. Remove
packíng (6).
(2) Remove retaining ring (9) and end píate (8).
Page 201
79-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. PACKING 5. BOLT
3. RIGID CONNECTING LINK 7. BOLT
4. TA8WASHER 8. LUBE OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY
Lube Oil Filter Assembly

Figure 201
Page 202
79-20-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII Â,NTENAN«MANUAL
1. FILTER ASSEMBLY 8. END PIATE

2. BOLT 9. RING
3. WASHER 10. INDICATOR
4. PACKING 11. FILTER HOUSiNG
5. NUT 12. ELEMENT
6. PACKING 13. ELEMENT
7. COVER
Lube Oil Filter Assembly

Componenís
Figure 202
Page 203
79-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(3) Carefully lift filter element (12) or elements (13) from cover (7).
(4) Using two suitable wrenches, hold nut (5) and turn bolt (2) until it is Iree of nut,
(5) Remove bolt (2), washer (3), packing (4) and nut (5).
NOTE: Do not remove the differential pressure indicator on íilter assembly
1 -080-460-02. Removal and functional test are to be accomplished
at Overhaul.
B- Reassemble Lube Oil Filter Assembly
(1) Instan packing (4, Figure 202) in groove on face of cover (7).
(2) Instan washer (3) on bolt (2).

(3) Instan bolt (11) through cover (7) and secure with nut (5). Using two suitable wrenches, tighten
nut until it bottoms.
(4) Carefully instan filter element (12) or elements (13) on cover (7). Install end píate (8) and secure
with retaining ring (9).
(5) Instan packing (6) in groove on OD of cover (7).
(6) Install filter cover assembly into filter housing (11).
(7) Tighten bolt (2) to required torque and lockwire.
3. Insoection/Check Lube Oil Filter Assembly
A- Inspect Lube Oil Filter Assembly
NOTE: Disassemble oil filter only to replace damaged parts or to deán filter cover.
(1) (f upon removal oí cover {7, Figure 202) an excess amount of metal chips or carOon partióles
are noted, perform lubrication system contamination troubleshooting procedure. (See
72-00-00, FNGINE - TROURI FRHOOTING. paragraph I.C.)
(2) Disassemble filter.
(3) Clean housing using dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
Page 204
79-20-03 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII "ÂINTENANCE^MANUAL
(4) Inspect íilter element {12 or 13) for damage. Replace damaged elements.
(5) Inspect bolt (2) and housing (11) for damage. Replace parts if defective.
(6) If filter housing subassembly (1) is disassembled for any reason, measure thickness oí filter
elements (13) at inner ring. Thickness shall be 0.122 to 0.138 inch. If not within limits, replace
elements.
(7) If installed, inspect bypass indicator for pin ejctension in accordance with Daily Inspection pro-
cedures. (See 72-00-00.)
NOTE: If excessive metal contamination is found in the oil, then lubrication

System contamination procedures must be performed. (See
72-00-00, Engine - Troubleshooting.) When excessive metal
contamination is found notify:

HoneyweII Engines
PO. Box 52181
(8) If pin extensión (actuation) recurs during engine run, deán filter assembiy. Actuation below
52°F (11 °C) with no associated oil contamination is generally caused by a malfunction of
indicator’s thermal locknut device.
4. Cleaníng/Paintina Lube Oil Filter Assemblv
A. Clean Lube Oil Filter Assembiy
(1) If filter element (12, Figure 202) or elements (13) were not removed from cover (7), clean filter
elements (Figure 203) asfollows:
NOTE: The fixture prevenís partióles iarger than 40 microns from entering
inside sectlon of filter elements. It shall be installed immedlately
upon removal of cover from housing.
To obtain SPT107, Contact: Fluid Conditioning Products, Kleine

and Warwick St, RO. Box 147, Lititz, PA 17543-0407 (CAGE
94592).
(a) Place the cleaning fixture (1) SPT107 on bolt (2) and turn it down until it fits snugly against
end píate (3). Install plug or cap on pipe nipple of fixture.
Page 205
79-20-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
r - > i . ,
r
1 »*
j k1
X A 719 'T.id
1. CLEANING FIXTURE SPT107 4. FILTER ELEMENT

2. BOLT 5. FILTER ELEMENTS
3. END PLATE 6. (ALTERNATE)
COVER
Lube Oii Filter Assembly - Cleaning Setup

Figure 203
Page 206
79-20-03 Sept 30/02
CAUTIQN: PERFORM THIS CLEANING OPERATION IN A
WELL-VENTILATED AREA.
(b) Immerse and soak cover (6). element (4) or elements (5) wilh cleanmg fixture installed, in
dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203), until contaminant is removed from external
surfaces of filter elements.
(c) Remove cover (6) and element (4) or elements (5) from solvent. Remove cap or plug.
CAUTION: ONLY CLEAN, PRESSURIZED AIR SHALL BE USED TO DRY

FILTER ELEMENTS.
(d) Remove cleaning fixture from bolt (2). Dry cover (6) and element (4) or elements (5) with
compressed air.
(2) If filter elements (12 or 13, Figure 202) were removed from cover (7) deán filter elements as
follows:
(a) Instan filter elements on a shaft having the same diameter as the filter element orífice.
CAUTIQN- PERFORM THIS CLEANING OPERATION IN A

WELL-VENTILATED AREA.
(b) Immerse shaft and elements ín an agítating bath oí compound (72-00-00, 14, Table 203)
at 160 to OOO" F (71 to 93^0) or dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203) until all
contamination is removed.
CAUTIQN: ONLY CLEAN, PRESSURIZED AIR SHALL BE USED TO RINSE

FILTER ELEMENTS.
(c) Blow deán air through filter elements at 100 psig máximum.
(d) Remove filter elements from shaft.
5. Approved Repairs Lube Qii Filter Assemblv
A. Repair Lube Oil Filter Assembly
(1) Blend-repair (referto SPM, 70-25-01, SP R401) nicks, burrs and scratches.
(2) Repair damaged threads (refer lo SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409). Replace parts having threads
damaged beyond repair.
(3) Replace all cracked, distorted or excessively worn parts.
(4) Replace filter elements (13, Figure 202) that do not have inner ring thickness of 0.122 to
0,138 inch.
79-20-03
HoneyweII
POWER TURBINE OIL STRAINFR - DESCRIPTION AND QPERATiON

The power turbine oil strainer located at the 12 o'clock position on the combustión turbine assembly Mters
oil which is directed to the No. 3 and 4 bearings.
Page 1/2
79-20-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
POWER TURBINE QIL STRAINER - MAINTENANCF PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Power Turbine Qil Stramer
A. Remove Power Turbine No. 3 And No. 4 Bearing Oil Strainer

¡1) Disconnect hose assembly connector from oil strainer housing adapter (1, Figure 201). Cap
hose.
(2) Unscrew and remove adapter and strainer (2); remove packing (3).
NOTE: II, upon removal of oil strainer, an excessive amount of metal chips are
noted, perform lubrication system contamination troubleshooting proce-
dure. (See 72-00-00, ENGINE - TROUBLESHOOTING, paragraph
I.C.)
(3) Unscrew strainer from within adapter.
B. Instan Power Turbine No. 3 and No. 4 Bearing Oil Strainer
(1) Position packing (3, Figure 201) on adapter (1).
(2) Screw strainer (2) into adapter (1), finger tight.

(3) Instan packing (3) and thread adapter into tube and tighten 80 to 90 inch pounds torque. Lock-
wire adapter.
(4) Connect hose assembly to oil strainer housing adapter and tighten 50 to 100 inch pounds
torque.
2. Insoection/Check Power Turbine Oil Strainer
A. Inspect Power Turbine (No. 3 and No. 4 Bearing) Oil Strainer
(1) Inspect strainer (2) for contamination and damage. Replace if damaged. (See 72-00-00.)
(2) Inspect adapter (1) for stripped and/or damaged threads. Replace adapter if damage cannot
be repaired.
B. Inspect Rear No. 2 Bearing Housing Oil Strainer (Detail B)
NOTE: Use strainer 1-110-114-08 oniy.
(1) Inspect strainer (4) for contamination and damage. Replace strainer if damaged. (See
70-00-00.)
Page 201
79-20-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
f .735 - Ii6*
1. POWER TURBINE OIL 3. PACKING

STRAINER 4. REAR BEARING HOUSING OIL
HOUSING ADAPTER STRAINER
2. POWER TURBINE OIL STRAINER (NO. 3 (NO. 2 BEARING
AND NO. 4 BEARING) 5. METAL GASKET
Removal of Power Turbine and Rear Bearing Housing Oil Strainers

Figure 201
Page 202
79-20-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
(2) Clean strainer using fiber brush. Rinse with dry cleaning solvent and reinstall.
NOTE: Replace gasket, using kit 1-200-030-27.
3. Cleanina/PaintinQ Power Turbine Oil Strainer
A. Clean Power Turbine Oil Strainer

(1) Clean oil strainer, using a fiber brush and dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
(2) Rinse strainer with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203.)
Page 203/204
79-20-04 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
RFAR BFARING HQUSING OIL STRAINER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The rear bearing housing (No. 2 bearing) oil strainer screws into a fitting at The 4 o'clock position on The
difluser housing and tilters oil directed to The No. 2 bearing.
Page 1/2
79-20-05 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
REAR BEARING HOUSING Olí STRAINER • MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES
1. Removal/Installation Rear Bearina Housina 0[l Strainer
A. Remove Rear Bearing Housing OH Strainer

noted, perform lubrication system contamination troubieshooting proce-
NOTE: If, upon
dure. removal
(See of oilENGINE
72-00-00, strainer, -an excesstve amount of metal
TROUBLESHOOTiNG. chips I.C.)
paragraph are
Note part number ot rear bearing housing oil strainer.
(1) Turn hexagon portion of strainer (see 79-20-04, 4, Figure 201) counterclockwise and lift out
strainer. Cap port.
(2) Remove and discard gasket (5).
B. Instail Rear Bearing Housing Oil Strainer
(1) instan new gasket (see 79-20-04, 5, Figure 201) on strainer (4).
NOTE: Oniy strainer 1-110-114-08 shall be installed.
(2) Screw strainer into diffuser housing. Tighten 80 to 100 inch pounds torque and lockwire.
2. Inspection/Check Rear Bearing Housina Oil Strainer
Inspect Rear Bearing Housing Oil Strainer (See 79-20-04.)
3. CleaninQ/Paíntina Rear Bearina Housina Oil Strainer
A. Clean Rear Bearing Housing Oil Strainer
(1) Clean strainer using a soft fiber brush and dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
(2) Rinse strainer with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
T53-L-703
POWER TAKEQFF CQVER AND POWFR TAKEQFF QIL SUPPLY NOZZLE ASSEMBLY -
DESCRIPTION AND QPERATIQN
1. Description and Ooeration
An Olí Iransfer passage from the main transfer support assembly tíirects oil through internal passages in
the inlet housing to the Power Takeoff mounting flange. This oil, as required, passes through the Power
Takeotf oil supply nozzle assembly where it is íiltered and metered and subsequently supplies engine
driven accessories mounted on the Power Takeoff flange.
T53-L-703
POWER TAKEQFF COVFR AND POWFR TAKFOFF OIL SUPPIY NOZ2LE ASSEMBLY -
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/installation Power Takeoff Cover and Power Takeoff Oil SUDDIV Nozzle Assemblv
A. Remove Power Takeoff Cover and Power Takeoff Oii Supply Nozzle Assembly (See Figure 201.)
(1} Remove bolts (1) and washers (2) that secure cover (3) to inlet housing,
(2) Remove cover and packings (4, 5) from inlet housing.

(3) Remove retaining ring (8) that secures oil supply nozzle in inlet housing. Remove Power Take-
off oil supply nozzle assembly (7) by inserting a 5/16-24 screw into nozzle assembly and with-
drawing from inlet housing assembly.
(4) Remove packing (6) from filter.
B. Instan Power Takeoff Cover and Power Takeoff Cil Supply Nozzle Assembly (See Figure 201.)
(1) Place packing (6) on outside of nozzle assembly (7) and insert nozzle assembly into inlet
housing and secure with retaining ring (8).
(2) Place packings (4, 5) in starter pad and secure cover (3) of inlet housing with bolts (1) and
washers (2). Tighten bolts as required and lockwire.
2. Insoection/Check Power Takeoff Cover and Power Takeoff Oil Suoolv Nozzle Assemblv
A. Inspect Power Takeoff Cover and Power Takeoff Oil Supply Nozzle Assembly (See Figure 201.)
(1) Inspect studs on inlet housing for crossed or damaged threads.
(2) Inspect all parts visually for cracks, wear or other damage.
(3) Inspect Power Takeoff cover (3) for cracks, nicks, burrs and scratches.
(4) Inspect nozzle assembly (7) for cracks, cuts, dents and crossed or damaged threads.
HoneyweII
1. BOLT 5. PACKING
2. WASHER 6. PACKING
3. POWER TAKEOFF COVER 7. NOZZLE
4. PACKING 8. ASSEMBLY RING
RETAINING
Power Takeoff Cover and Power Takeoff OtI Supply Nozzle Assembly/ Removal
Figure 201
Page 202
79-20-06 Sept 30/02
Honeyweil ^Â,NTENANCE^MANUAL
3. Cleaning/PaintinQ Power Takeotf Cnver and Power Takeofí Oil Supply Nozzle Assemblv
Clean Starter Pump Cover and Power Takeoff Oil Supply Nozzle Assembly
Clean all parts with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
4- Approved Repairs Power Takeofí Cover and Power Takeoff Oil SUDDIV Nozzle Assemblv
A. Repair Power Takeoff Cover and Power Takeoff Oil Supply Nozzle Assembly
(1) Replace nozzle assembly if defective or threads are crossed or damaged.
(2) Repair all other damaged threads. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409.)
(3) Replace parts having threads damaged beyond repair.
(5) Replace detective studs on inlet forward housing flange.

CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING STUDS, USE CARE TO
GRiP ONLY FLAT SURFACE OF STUD.
(a) If stud is broken off below surface of flange, drill out damaged stud, using 3/16 inch drill.
This will allow sufficient wall thickness to permit use of bolt e>rlractor.
(b) If stud IS broken off 1/2 inch or more above flange, remove with vise grip.
(c) Remove metal partióles from stud hole using moisture free compressed air.
(d) Coat threads of new stud with zinc chromate primer (72-00-00, 74, Table 203).
(e) Thread stud into housing approximately 1/2 inch. Tighten stud 50 to 110 inch pounds
torque.
(f) If required torque cannot be obtained, use first oversized stud STD3001B121N. If
required torque still cannot be obtained, use a second oversized stud STD3001B12P
(g) After stud has been properly tightened, distance from housing flange to stud shall be
1.5600 to 1.5800 inches.
AC Page 203/204
79-20 UO Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
LUBRICATION HQSES AND PRESSURE MANIFOLD - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Removal/lnstallation Lubrication Hose and Pressure Manifoid
A. Remove Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifoid
(1) Drain engine oil.

(2) Remove screws (2, 4, 6. Figure 201) from clamps (3, 5, 7). Remove screw (8) and nut (10) from
clamp (9).
(3) Disconnect hose assembly (1) from oil strainer housing adapter on top of combustión chamber
assembly and from lubrication pressure manifoid (21) and remove hose assembly. Cap or plug
ports as necessary.
(4) Disconnect hose assembly (20) from No. 2 bearing oil pressure fitting on diffuser housing
assembly and from lubrication pressure manifoid (21) and remove hose assembly. Cap or plug
ports as necessary.
(6) Disconnect hose assembly (13) from adapter (14) and lubrication pressure manifoid (21) and
remove hose assembly. Cap or plug ports as necessary.
(7) Remove connector (16), packings (15) and adapter (14) from inlet housing. Cap or plug ports
as necessary.
NOTE: Because of the inaccessibility of bolt (19), the interstage air bleed
actuator assembly will have to be removed before the lubrication
pressure manifoid (21) can be removed. (See 75-30-03, paragraph
2. A.)
(8) Remove bolts (18, 19) that secure lubrication pressure manifoid (21) to engine and remove
manifoid.
(9) Remove screw (15. Figure 202) from clamp (14). Remove nut (11) and screw (13) from clamp
(12) . Remove nut (2) and screw (10) from clamps (1. 9).
(10) Disconnect hose assembly (8) from connector (16) at bottom of combustor turbine assembly
and from unión (7) on accessory drive gearbox assembly and remove hose assembly. Remove
connector and packing (17) from combustor turbine assembly. Remove packing from connec-
tor.
(11) Disconnect hose assembly (3) from oi! tube connector at diffuser housing assembly and from
unión (4) on accessory drive gearbox assembly and remove hose assembly. Cap or plug ports
as necessary.
Page 201
79-20-07 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
Lubricatlon Pressure Hoses and Oil Manifoid

Figure 201
Page 202
79-20-07 Sept 30/02
Honeyweii MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 201
1. NOSE ASSEMBLY 12. CLAMP

2. SCREW 13. NOSE ASSEMBLY
3. CLAMP 14. ADAPTER
5. CL4MP 16. CONNECTOR
6. SCREW 17. SCREW
7. CU\MP 18. BOLT
8. SCREW 19. BOLT
9. CIJ^MP 20. NOSE ASSEMBLY
10. NUT 21. LUBRICATION PRESSURE MANIFOLD
n. NUT
Page 203
79-20-07 Sept 30/02
Honeywell
(12) Remove unions (4. 7) and gaskets (5. 6) from accessory drive gearbox assembly. Remove
gaskets from unions. Cap or plug ports as necessary.
B. Instan Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifold.
(1) Position lubrication pressure manifold (21, Figure 201) on rear flange of impeller housing
assembly and secura with bolts (18. 19).
(2) Reinstali interstage bleed actuator assembly. (See 75-30-03, paragraph 2.)
(3) Position packings (5, 6, Figure 202) onto unions (4, 7) and install unions into accessory drive
gearbox assembly. Tighten unions as required.
(4) Connect hose assembly (3) to oil tube connector at bottom of diffuser housing assembly and to
unión (4) on accessory drive gearbox. Tighten hose connectors as required.
(5) Position packing (17) onto connector (16) and install connector into bottom of combustor
turbine assembly. Tighten connector as required and lockwire.
(6) Connect hose assembly (8) to connector (16) and lo umon (7) on accessory drive gearbox.
Tighten hose connectors as required.
(7) Position clamps (1.9), one on each side of bracket located at bottom of interstage bleed
actuator assembly and secure with screw (10) and nut (2).
(8) Secure clamp (12) to bracket on forward flange on combustión chamber housing with screw
(13) and nut (11). Secure clamp (14) with screw (15).
NOTE: Do not tighten connector until hose assembly (13) has been installed;
repositioning of adapter may be necessary.
(9) Install packings (15, Figure 201) onto connector (16). Secure adapter (14) to inlet housing with
connector.
(10) Connect hose assembly (13) to lubrication pressure manifold (21) and to adapter (14). Tghten
hose connectors as required.
(11) Secure clamp (12) to bracket on compressor housing with screw (17) and nut (11).
(12) Connect hose assembly (20) to lubrication pressure manifold (21) and to No. 2 bearing oil
pressure fitting to diffuser housing assembly. Tghten hose connectors as required.
Page 204
79-20-07 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. CLAMP 10. SCREW

2. NUT 11. NUT
3. HOSE ASSEMBLY 12. CLAMP
4. UNION 13. SCREW
5. PACKING 14. CLAMP
7. UNION 16. CONNECTO
8. HOSE ASSEMBLY 17. R
PACKING
9. CL4MP
No. 2, 3 and 4 Bearings Scavenge Oil Hoses

Figure 202
Page 205
79-20-07 Sept 30/02
Honeywell
NOTE: When tightening connector on oil strainer housing adaptar, use one
wrench on adapter and one on connector to prevent adapter from
turning.
(13) Connect hose assembly (1) to (ubrication pressure manifoid (21) and to oii strainer housing
adapter on top oí combustión chamber assembly. Tighten hose connector on manifoid and
connector on oil strainer housing adapter as required.
(14) Secure hose assembly (1) to bracket on forward flange of combustión chamber housing with
screw (8) and nut (10).
(15) Secure clamps (3, 5, 7) to combustión chamber housing with screws (2, 4, 6).
2. Inspection/Check Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifoid
A. Inspect Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifoid
(1) Inspect hoses for cuts, fraying or chaling.
(2) Inspect pressure manifoid (21, Figure 201) for cracks. Replace if cracks are evident.
(3) Inspect pressure manifoid for damaged threads on manifoid connectors.
3. Cleanina/Painting Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifoid
A. Clean Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifoid
Clean lubrication hoses and pressure manifoid with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00. 62, Table 203).
4. Approved Repairs Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifoid
A. Repair Lubrication Hoses and Pressure Manifoid
(1) Replace hoses that are cut, frayed or chafed.

(2) Repair damaged threads (refer to SPM, 70-25-03, SP R409) on manifoid connectors or
replace manifoid if threads are damaged beyond repair.
Page 206
79-20-07 Sept 30/02
■ iOílCywVdl T53-L-703
CHIP DFTFCTOR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A chip detector is installed in the lower right side of the accessory drive gearbox. The chip detector will
provide an indication of the presence of metal partióles in the engine lubhcation system when a continuity
check is performed. Provisions exist for aircraft wiring to provide in flight indications of contamination.
Page 1/2
79-30-01 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
CHIP DETECTOR - MAINTENANCF PRACTICES
1 - Removal/Installation Chip Detector
A. Remove Chip Detector (See Figure 201.)
(1) Unscrew and remove chip detector (2) and packing (1).
(2) Discard packing.
NOTE: If contamination is evident upon removal of chip detector, record type

and amount on the engine historical record. Perform lubrication system
contamination troubleshooting procedure. (See 72-00-00, ENGINE
-TROUBLESHOOTING, paragraph í.C.)
B. Instan Chip Detector
(1) Position new packing (1. Figure 201) on chip detector (2).
CAI ITION- JORQUE ON CHIP DETECTOR SHOULD BE 90 TO 100 INCH-

POUNDS. OVER JORQUE WILL CAUSE STRIPPiNG OF
THREADS
LEADING TO OIL LEAKAGE.
(2) Instan chip detector in accessory drive gearbox. Jorque chip detector 90 to 100 inch-pounds
torque.
2. Inspection/Check Chip Detector
A. Inspect Chip Detector
(1) Inspect for metallic particles. A small amount of fine metalíic powder or particles is normal and
acceptable.
(2) Coarse chips are a symptom of possible failure. This condition requires a thorough oil conlami-
nation inspection. (See 72-00-00.)
(3) Inspect chip detector and threaded hole in gearbox for damaged threads. Replace chip detec-
tor if damaged beyond repair.
3. Cleaning/PaíntinQ Chio Detector
A. Clean Chip Detector
(1) Clean chip detector with dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
O
K Á -719 lis*
1. PACKING 2. CHIP DETECTOR
Chip Detector
Figure 201
Page 202
79-30-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
MA,NTENANCE^MANUAL
GIL TEMPERATURF BULR - DESCRIPTIQN AND OPERATION
1- Description and Qoeratíon of Oil Temoerature Bulb
The oil temperature bulb is screwed into the power driven rotary od pump. It senses oil temperature at that
point. The bulb generales an electrical signal which is transmitted to a matched direct readíng tempera-
ture gage.
Page 1/2
79-30-02 Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HOÍlCywVdl T53-L-703
OIL TEMPERATURE BULE - MAINTENANCE PRACTIP.FS
1. Removal/lnstallation Oil Temperature Bulb
A. Remove Oil Temperature Butb (See Figure 201.)
(1) Disconnect electrical connector Irom oil temperature bulb (2).
(2) Remove oil temperature bulb and packing (1) Irom power Priven rotary oil pump. Cap pori.
B. fnstaí! Oil Temperature Bulb (See Figure 201.)
(1) Instan packing (1) on oil temperature bulb (2).
(2) Instan oil temperature bulb into power Priven rotary oil pump anp tighten.
CAUTION: DO NOT TWIST WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR DURING
INSTALLATION.
(3) Connect oil temperature bulb electrical connector and lockwire.
2. ínsoectíon/Check Qií Temperature Bulb
A. Inspect Oil Temperature Bulb
(1) Inspect for damaged threads. Replace if threads are damaged.
(2) Inspect for bent or broken pins or probe. Replace if detects are noted.
(3) Replace probe if damaged.
3. Cleanina/Paintina Oil Temperature Bulb
A. Clean Oil Temperature Bulb
I Wipe bulb using cloth moistened in dry cleaning solvent (72-00-00, 62, Table 203).
79-30-02 Page 201

Sept 30/02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HoneyweII T53-L-703
1. PACKING 2. OIL TEMPERATURE BULE
Oil Temperature Butb

Figure 201
Page 202
79-30-02 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
HEAVY MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/
SECTION/
HEAVY MAINTENANCE 80-00-00

Heavy Maintenance 1
INLET HOUSING AND VARIABLE INLFT GUIPE VANES (VIGV^ 80-00-01

Removal
CQMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY 80-00-02

Removal '^0''
DIFFUSER HOUSING ASSEMBLY 80-00-03

Removal '^0''
FINAL ENGINE ASSEMBLY 80-00-04

Final Engine Assembly 401
80-CONTENTS
Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
LIST OF EFFECTIVE
PAGES
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION/ SECTION/
SDR.IFCT PAGE DATE SUB.)FCT PACE DATE
80HEAVY 409 Sept 30/02

-
MAINTENANCE Tab 410 Sept 30/02
411 Sept 30/02
Table of 412 Sept 30/02
-
Contents Sept 30/02 413 Sept 30/02
414 Sept 30/02
Pages — Sept 30/02 417 Sept 30/02
418 Sept 30/02
80-00-00 1 Sept 30/02 419 Sept 30/02
80-00-01 401 Sept 30/02 421 Sept 30/02
402 Sept 30/02 422 Sept 30/02
403 Sept 30/02 423 Sept 30/02
404 Sept 30/02 424 Sept 30/02
405 Sept 30/02 425 Sept 30/02
406 Sept 30/02 426 Sept 30/02
407 Sept 30/02 427 Sept 30/02
408 Sept 30/02 428 Sept 30/02
409 Sept 30/02 429 Sept 30/02
410 Sept 30/02 430 Sept 30/02
411 Sept 30/02 431 Sept 30/02
412 Sept 30/02 432 Sept 30/02
413 Sept 30/02 433 Sept 30/02
414 Sept 30/02 434 Sept 30/02
415 Sept 30/02 435 Sept 30/02
416 Sept 30/02 436 Sept 30/02
417 Sept 30/02 437 Sept 30/02
418 Sept 30/02 438 Blank
80-00-02 401 Sept 30/02
402 Sept 30/02
80-00-03 401 Sept 30/02
402 Sept 30/02
403 Sept 30/02
404 Sept 30/02
405 Sept 30/02
406 Blank
80-00-04 401 Sept 30/02
402 Sept 30/02
403 Sept 30/02
404 Sept 30/02
405 Sept 30/02
406 Sept 30/02
407 Sept 30/02
408 Sept 30/02
80-EFF
Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
HEAVY MAINTENANCE
1. General
This chapter provides instructions to perform heavy maintenance lor the T53-L-703 engines for operators
whose maintenance capabiiity exceeds that o< the average operator. Included are procederes required to
replace the foltowing components:
Inlet Housing Assembly

Variable Inlet Guide Vane Assembly
•Variable Inlet Guide Vanes (individual replacement)
No. 1 Bearing
No. 1 Seal
Compressor Rotor Assembly
Air Ditfuser Housing Assembly
NOTE: tf the compressor rotor assembly or variable inlet guide vane assembly is replaced,
the engine must be performance tested at an HoneyweII authorized engine Service
center.
Since replacement of major assemblies do not lend themselves to a simple disassembly process, procedures are
broken down into three major sections.
80-00-01 Removal of Inlet Housing and Variable Inlet Guide Vanes
80-00-02 Removal of Compressor Rotor Assembly
80-00-03 Removal of Ditfuser Housing Assembly
80-00-04 Fina) Engine Assembly
NOTE: Final engine assembly is written as one continuous procedure for

assembly of an engine which has undergone a partial teardown,
disregard those steps not appücable to that level of assembly.
•Replacement of individual variable inlet guide vanes is limited to a máximum of 6.
Page 1/2
80 00-00
- Sept 30/02
Honeywell MA,NTENANCEMANUAL
INLET HQUSING AND VARIABLF INLET GUIPE VANES (VIGVi -
REMOVAL
1. Removal of Inlet Houstng and Variable Iniet Guide Vanes (VIGV)

A. Remove Inlet Housing
(1) Instan engine onto work stand LTCT7298-07. Position engine honzontally. (See 72-00-00,
Table 201.)
(2) Drain oil from engine. (See 72-00-00, ENGINE - SERVICING, paragraph 2.C.)
(3) Remove piping and accessories (as required). Refer to appiicable sections.
(4) Remove fuel control assembly, rotary oil pump and accessory drive gearbox. (See 72-60-01.)
(5) Remove torquemeter boost pump and overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly.
(See 72-60-02, 73-20-01 and 79-20-02.)
(6) Remove oil transfer tubes, output reduction carrier and gear assembly, sun gearshaft, oil transfer
support assembly and accessory drive carrier assembly. (See 72-10-01.)
NOTE: Removal of torquemeter cylinder and torquemeter valve are not required
uniess visual inspection indicates damage or inlet housing is to be re-
placed with another serviceable housing.
(7) Remove power shaft bearing retainer. (See Figure 1.)
(a) Using puller LTCT2021, remove gear (2) and packing (1).
(b) Remove packing (1) from gear. Discard packing.
(c) Remove ring (3) and retain for reuse.

(d) Straighten twro tabwashers (5) and remove bolts (4). Discard tabwashers. Remove bolts
(6) . Remove power shaft beahng retainer (7).
NOTE: Perform steps (e) through (i) only if No. 1 bearing or No. 1 sea! is to
be replaced.
Page 401
80 00-01
- Sept 30,/02
HoneyweII
1. PACKING 6. BOLT
2. GEAR 7. POWER SHAFT BEARING
3, RING 8. RETAINER
POWER SHAFT
4. BOLT 9. NUT AND SEAL ASSEMBLY
5. TABWASHER
Power Shaft Bearing Retainer

Figure 1
Page 402
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(e) Open locking cup (2, Figure 2).
(f) Position holder LTCT2048 in inlet housing assembly and align pins of holder with accessory
drive pinion gear (3).
CAUTION: TO MAKE SURE COMPLETE SEATING OF COMPRESSOR

ROTOR. SLAVE BOLTS MUST BE 0.25 iNCH SHORTER
THAN
BOLTS INSTALLED AT FINAL ASSEMBLY.
(g) Secure holder to inlet housing with a minimum of four 1/4-28 UNF slave bolts.
NOTE: Do not remove nut and seal assembly at this time.
(h) Using support LTCT911 with wrench LTCT4002, loosen nut and seal assembly (1).
(i) Remove speciai tooling and securing bolts.
(j) Instan four slave bolts to secure compressor rotor where holder LTCT2048 was removed.
(8) Remove compressor/combustor turbine assemblles from inlet housing.

(a) Position sfing LTCT14668 to flange of exhaust diffuser support cone. Make sure fop
clamping adapter is correctly positioned and secured.
(b) Position lifting eye so as to hold engine in vertical position.
(c) Rotate engine to vertical position.
(d) Remove slave bolts installed In step (7)(j).
(e) Attach suitable hoist to eye of sling LTCT14668.

(0 Using an approved marking pencii, índex 12 o'clock position of compressor housing to m-
let housing flange and location of all brackets mounted on compressor to inlet housing bolt
circle.
NOTE: Prior to removal of inlet guide vane actuator, make sure end of
blast mark area on connector aligns with scribe mark on variable
inlet guide vane rigging píate when actuator is in full open position.
(See 75-30-01, Figure 203.)
Page 403
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
753-1-703
1. NUT AND SEAL ASSEMBLY 9. NUT

2. LOCKING CUP 10. FACE PLATE
3. GEAR 11. No. 1 SEAL HOUSING
4. SHIM 12. ASSEMBLY
SEAL HOUSING
5. No. 1 BEARING HOUSíNG ASSEMBLY 13. SEAL
6. No. 1 BEARING HOUSING 14. SHIM
7. BEARING 15. RETAINING RING
8. LOCKING CUP
No. 1 Bearing and Seai Housing Assemblies

Figure 2
Page 404
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII *Â,NTENANCE^MANUAL
(g) Remove bolts (see 75-30-01, 1.27. 29, Figure 201), washers (2, 28), nuts (7, 9, 10) and
spacer (4) that secure inlet guide vane actuator.
(h) Remove bolts (8, 28, Figure 3), washers (21,24, 29) and nuts (22, 23) that secure
compressor housing to inlet housing,
(i) Lift compressor/combustor turbine assemblies away from inlet housing.
(j) Remove wave washer (4, Figure 4) and shim (5) from inlet housing. Record thickness of
shim.
(k) Using 1/8-28 UNF bolts as pullers, withdraw sieeve (6) from inlet housing assembiy.
(l) Remove and record thickness of shim (7).
(m) Remove and discard packing (8).
(n) Using a sharp pointed instrument, remove and discard packing (14, Figure 7).
NOTE: Perform following paragraph B. oniy if No. 1 bearing and/or No. 1 seal is to be
replaced. Otherwise, proceed to paragraph C.
B. Remove No. 1 Bearing and Seal
(1) Remove nut and seal assembiy (1, Figure 2) and lock cup (2).
(2) Using puller LTCT2027, remove gear (3).
(3) Remove shim (4) and record thickness.
(4) Using puller LTCT483, remove bearing housing assembiy (5) as follows:
(a) Using 1/4-28 UNF bolts, 2.5 Inches long. as pullers, slide No. 1 seal housing assembiy
(11) aft.
(b) Inserí puller legs through channeis of bearing retainer assembiy and position behind face
píate (10). Legs of puller musí be aligned with slots of nut (9) and locking cup (8).
Page 405
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
Compressor and Impeller Housing Assemblies and Bracket Locjations

Page 406
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
38 39 40 41
X U33 147
Compressor and Impeiler Housing Assemblies and Bracket Locations

Figure 3 (Sheet 2)
Page 407
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURES
1. DOWEL 22. NUT

2. BOLT 23. NUT
4. BOLT 25. NUT
6. BRACKET 27. NUT
7. BOLT 28. BOLT
8. BOLT 29. WASHER
9. BOLT 30. NUT
10. DOWEL 31. WASHER
11. BOLT 32. NUT
12. COMPRESSOR AND IMPELLER HOUSINGS 33. WASHER
13. NUT 34. NUT
14. NUT 35. WASHER
15. SPACÉR 36. BRACKE
16. BRACKET 37. T
BRACKE
17. SCREW 38. T
BRACKE
18. BOLT 39. T
BRACKE
19. BRACKET 40. T
BRACKE
20. SCREW 41. T
BRACKE
21. WASHER 42. T
BRACKE
T
Page 408
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
XA-738-429
Compressor Rotor Assembly Removal and Instailation

Figure 4
Page 409
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
ílOllCyi/Vdl T53-L-703
KEYTO FIGURE 4
1. COMPRESSOR ROTOR 6. SLEEVE

2. SEAL HOUSING 7. SHIM
3. DELETED 8. PACKING
4. WAVE WASHER 9. INLET
5. SHIM HOUSING
Page 410
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(c) Pulí beanng housing assembly (5) from compressor shaft.
(d) Remove puller from bearing housing.
(5) Remove No. 1 seal housing assembly (11) from compressor rotor.
(6) Secure bearing housing assembly (5) in holding fixture LTCT4713. forward end down. Straighten
locking cup (8) and using wrench LTCT487, remove nut (9). Remove and discard locking cup.
(7) Using tooling, remove bearing (7) from front bearing housing (6).
(8) Remove retaining ring (15) from No. 1 seal housing assembly (11).
(9) Using suitable adapter and arbor, press out seal (13) with shim (14) if installed. Discard seal and
shim.
C. Remove Variable Inlet Gulde Vane Assembly
CAUTION: MAKE SURE VANES ARE IN OPEN POSITION.
(1) Remove bolt (1, Figure 5), before attempting to remove inlet gulde vane assembly.
(2) Remove outer rear fairing ring (8),
(3) Remove screw (3) and píate (4).
(4) Using puller LTCT4007, remove inlet guide vane assembly (7). (See Figure 6.)
(5) Remove connector rod assembly (6. Figure 5) and guides (5).
D. Replace Individual Variable Inlet Guide Vanes

NOTE: The máximum amount of vanes that can be replaced Is six. Replacing greater
than six vanes requires an engine rating test run in a correlated test cell.
(1) Remove variable Inlet guide vanes (1, Figure 7).
(a) Using tool LTCT4698. remove spring pins (2) on affected vanes from unisón ring (7).
Discard spring pins.
Page4il
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
1. BOLT 5. GUIDES
2. PACKING 6. CONNECTING ROO
3. SCREW 7. ASSEMBLY
INLET GUIDE VANE
4. PLATE 8. ASSEMBLY
REAR FAIRING RING
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Assembly

Figure 5
Page 412
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Variable Intet Guide Vane Assembly Removal

Figure 6
Page 413
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(b) Instan variable inlet guide vane assembly (7, Figure 5) into fixture LTCT3038.
NOTE: Make sure the 0.250 inch Slot on forward rim face is located over
flattened pin fixture.
(c) To lócate variable inlet guide vane assembly, install a bolt through counter bored hole in
wall of fixture and into 0.375 inch diameter hole in raised boss on periphery of outer forward
fairing (8, Figure 7).
(d) Instan fixture clamp and secure.
(e) Turn fixture over and remove screws (11).
(f) Turn fixture over and remove clamp.
(g) üft off inner rear fairing (4).
(h) Rotate vanes counterclockwise and lift vanes (1) free.
(2) Olean variable inlet guide vanes (1 ).
(a) Olean vanes by vapor degreasing method. (Refer to SPM, 70-15-01, SP 0201.)
(3) Inspect variable inlet guide vanes.

(a) Visually inspect each vanes leading edges, trailing edges and airfoil surfaces for minor
nicks, dents, burrs and pits (Figure 8). Blend repair nicks, dents, burrs and pits that are
within limits. (Refer to Repair variable inlet guide vanes.)
(b) Slight distortion is acceptable without repair provided it does not impair the full opening
and closing of the vanes and does not exist on more than ftve vanes. If distortion is less
than 0.125 inch, vanes may be coid straightened repaired. Replace vanes that are dis-
torted in excess of 0.125 inch. (Referió Repair variable inlet guide vanes.)
(c) Major distortion, bowing or mutiiation is not acceptable. Replace vane.
(d) Tears in leading and trailing edges with resultant loss of material are not acceptable and are
cause for vane replacement.
NOTE: Acceptable defects shall be limited to three for leading edge, three
for trailing edge and five per side for airfoil. Replace vanes if limits
are exceeded.
(e) Oracks are acceptable without repair as long as they are tight lipped, nonconvergmg and
with in limits outlined in Figure 8.
(f) Visually inspect and fluorescent penetrant inspect. (Referió SPM, 70-20-05, SP 1305.)
Brazement voids on trailing edge of each vane where upper and lower caps join airfoil hatf
are acceptable provided loss of brazement has not caused a separation of mating surface
and otherwise meets the requirements of the preceding steps.
Page 414
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII 'ÂINTENANCEMANUAL
(4) Repair variable inlet guide vane (1, Figure 7).
(a) Btend repair minor nicks, burrs. pits and dents. (Refer to SPM, 70-25-01. SP R401.)
(b) Coid straighten bowed or distorted vanes.
1 Place vane between two wooden forming blocks contoured to the vane airfoil.
2 Using fluorescent penetrant method, inspectstraightened vanesfor cracks. (Referió
SPM. 70-20-05, SP 1305.) Cracks are not permitted. Replace vane.
(5) Instan variable iniet guide vane (1).
CAUTIQN: GUIDE LEVERS MUST BE ALIGNED WITH THEIR RESPECTIVE

SLOTS IN UNISON RING.
NOTE: The máximum amount of vanes that can be replaced is six.
Position unisón ring (7) so that bearing (6) is in approximate center

of actuator rod slot in the fixture LTCT3038.
(a) Instad vanes (1) into inner rear fairing (4) and outer forward fairing (8).
NOTE: The three dowel pin holes are not equally spaced.
(b) Position inner rear fairing (4) over inner fonward fairing (5) and vane journals. Align dowel
hole in inner forward fairing.
(c) Instad fixture clamping píate (detall of LTCT3038} and secure in place.
(d) Verify that freedom of movement exists in all vanes (1).
(e) Secure inner forward fairing (5) to inner rear fairing (4) with 15 screws (11). Tighten screws
6 to 7 inch-pounds torque.
(f) Pelease clamps and remove guide vane assembly (7, Figure 5) from fixture LTCT3038.
(g) Using tool LTCT4698, instad new spring pins (2, Figure 7) in affected vanes (1).
(h) Lockwire screws (11).
Page 415
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
Variable Iniet Guide Vane Assembly

Figure 7
80 00-01
-
T53-L-703
KEYTO FIGURE?
1. VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE 8. OUTER FORWARD

2. SPRING PIN FAIRING
9. SCREW
3. FAIRING ASSEMBLY 10. UNISON RING ROLLER
4. INNERREAR FAIRING 11. SCREW
5. INNER FORWARD FAIRING 12. NUT
6. BEARING 13. DOWEL PIN
7. UNISON RING 14. PACKING
Page 417
80 00-01
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
0.500 1N. MAX
TYPICAL ALLOWABL6 CRACKS
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Inspection

Figure 8
Page 418
- 00-01 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII “-1™™
COMPRENSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL
1. Removai of Comoressor Housing Assemblv and Comoressor Rotor Assemblv

A, Remove Compressor Housmg Assembly
(1) Instan engine into work stand LTCT7298-07. Position engine horizontally.
(2) Drain oil from engine. (See 70-00-00. ENGINE - SERVICING, paragraph 2.C.)
(3) Remove piping and accessories {as required). Reter to applicable sections.
(4) Remove front end components; Remove inlet housing and variable inlet guide vanes, accessory
dnve gearbox, overspeed governor and tachometer drive assembly, output reduction carrier and
gear assembly, sun gear shaft, oil transfer support assembly, accessory drive carrier assembly
and power shaft bearing retainer. (See 80-00-01.)
NOTE: Do not remove nut and seal assembly at this time.
Untorque nut and seal assembly. (See 80-00-01.)
(5) Remove combustorturbine assembly. (See 72-40-00, paragraph I.A.)
(6) Rotate engine to a front down vertical position.
NOTE: Ditfuser housing can be removed without removing No. 2 forward seal.
(7) Remove gas producer system components: Remove second gas producerturbine rotor, second
gas producer turbine nozzle, first gas producer turbine rotor, first gas producer turbine nozzle,
combustión chamber deflector. No. 2 aft seal, No. 2 bearing and No. 2 forward seal. (See
72-51 -00.)
(8) Index impeller housing to diffuser housing.
(9) Remove diffuser housing. (See 80-00-03, paragraph 1 .A.)
(10) Index compressor housing to inlet housing.

NOTE: Upper and lower housings must be removed. Separation of impeller
housing from axial housing is not required.
(11) Remove compressor housing assembly as follows:
Page 401
80 00-02
- Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(a) Remove variable inlet guide vane actuator. (See 75-30-01.)
(b) Remove bolts (see 80-00-01,2,4, 7,18, Figure 3) and bolts (9,11), washers (3. 5, 26),
washers (31,33, 35) and nuts (25, 27) and nuts (13, 30, 32. 34).
(c) Using puller LTCT1218. remove hollow doweis (1) and (10 or 15).
(d) Remove bolts (see 80-00-01,8, 28, Figure 3), washers (21. 24, 29) and nuts (22, 23) that
secure compressor housing assembly (12) to inlet housing assembiy.
(e) Remove housing halves (12) straight out until compressor rotor blades are cleared.
B. Remove Compressor Rotor Assembly
(1) Position adapter LTCT4558 and suitable üfting hoist on cdmpressor rotor assembly.
CALJTION: DELETED.
(2) Remove compressor rotor assembly from inlet housing; then install compressor rotor in holding
fixture LTCT13001-
(3) Remove wave washer (see 80-00-01,4, Figure 4) and shim (5) trom inlet housing. Record
thickness of shim (5).
(4) Using three 1/4-28 UNF bolts as pullers, withdraw sieeve (6) trom inlet housing assembly (9).
(5) Remove and record thickness of shim (7).
(7) Using sharp pointed instrument, remove and discard packing. (See 80-00-01,14, Figure 7.)
C. Remove No. 1 Bearing and Seal

NOTE: The power shaft, compressor rotor subassembly, centrifugal impeller, assembly
bolts and lockcups and front and rear shafts will remain together as an
assembly for shipment to an HoneyweII Engines approved Service center.
Remove No. 1 bearing and No. 1 seal. (See 80-00-01, paragraph 1 .B.)
Page 402
80 00-02
- Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
DIFFUSER HOiJSINri ASSEMBLY - REMOVAl
Removal oí Difíuser Housina Assemblv
A. Remove Diffuser Housing Assembly
(1) instait engine onto work stand LTCT7298-07. Position engine horizontaliy.
{2} Drain oil from engine. (See 70-00-00, ENGINE - SERVICING, paragraph 2.C.)
(3) Remove piping and accessories (as required). Refer to applicable sections.
Identify and mark all bolt holes at which clamps and brackets are installed. (See Figure 1.)
(4) Remove combustor turbina assembly. (See 72-40-00, paragraph i.A.)

NOTE: Prior to removal oí the No. 2 bearing housing, roíate engine to vertical
position.
(5) Remove gas producer components; remove second gas producer turbine rotor, seconO gas
producer turbine nozzle, first gas producer turbine rotor, first gas producer turbine nozzle,
combustión chamber deflector, No. 2 aft seal. No. 2 bearing and No. 2 fonvard sea). (See
72-51-00.)
(6) Remove diffuser housing assembly as follows;
(a) Remove bolts (2), washers (3). bolts (4) and washers (5).
(b) Instan diffuser lifting sling LTCT2096 on diffuser housing.
(c) Carefully lift diffuser housing off compressor rotor assembly shaft.
(d) íf diffuser housing is to be replaced, remove and transfer external hardware to the
replacement diffuser housing.
Page 401
80-00-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Diffuser Housing, Bracket and Bolt Locations

Page 402
80-00-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703

Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
Page 403
80-00-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
INSTALL BOLTS IMS9630 13l

ANO WASHEHS (AN960.4161)
Impeller Housing Bolt Locations

Figure 1 (Sheet3)
Page 404
80-00-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 1
1. DIFFUSERHOUSING 5. WASHER
2. BOLT 6. BRACKE
3. WASHER T
4. BOLT 7. BRACKE
T
8. BRACKE
T
Page 405/406
80-00-03 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
FINAL ENGINE ARSEMBLY
1 - Final Engine Assemüly
NOTE: Inspect all parís for serviceability. Particular atíention shouid be paid to
mainshaft seáis in orderto elimínate possible air leaks.
A. Instan Inlet Housing Assembly
(1) instan inlet housing on work stand LTCT7298-07 and secure. Roíate to vertical position.
(2) If replacement housing is lo be installed, make sure all hardware ¡s transferred to replacement
housing.
B. Instan Variable inlet Guide Vane Assembly
CAUTfON- MAKE SURE PACKING IS INSTALLED WITHOUT KINKING OR

TWISTING.
(1) Install new packing (see 80-00-01,2, Figure 5) on inlet housing.
(2) Slide two guides (5) onto connector rod assembly (6).
(3) Caretully insert pin of connector rod assembly {6} into ball socket of variable inlet guide vane
assembly (7).
(4) Install both variable inlet guide vane assembly (7) and connector rod assembly (6) into inlet
housing assembly as follows:
(a) insert guides (5) into holes and position shaft oí connector assembly (6) in groove on rear
face of inlet housing assembly.
(b) Align key on inlet housing assembly with keyway m inner fairing of inlet guide vane
assembly (7).
NOTE: In lollowing step (c). install variable inlet guide vane assembly with
pressure by hand only. If some difficulty is encountered, use a
suitable fibre drift and hammer. Lightiy tap until assembly is seated
in inlet housing.
(o) Using suitable drift, align bolt hole in outer fairing of variable Inlet guide vane assembly (7)
with bolt in inlet housing assembly.
(5} Install píate (4) and screw (3). Tighten screw.
Page 401
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,NTENANCEMA.UAL
(6) Instan bolt (1). Tighten 60 to 90 inch-pounds torque.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT VANES MOVE FREELY THROUGH FULL TRAVEL.
REWORK VANES AS REQUIRED FOR FREE MOVEMENT.
(7) Instan rear fairing ring {8).
C. Initially Adjust New Inlet Vane Assembly

NOTE: This procedure will be accomplished oniy it entire variable inlet guide vane
assembly was replaced with a new assembly.
(1) Set protractor LTCT4750 at 6-112 degrees and ¡nstall on inlet housing. (See Figure 1.)
NOTE; Air inlet vanes must be in open position before adjustment is made.
(2) Slide indicator on íool until vane Is flush with arm of protractor.
NOTE: Pencii mark should be lined up within 0.002 inch with end of shot
peened area {see Figure 2) on connector rod. Final adjustment of
connector rod will be performed at an HoneyweII Engines approved
enginetest facility.
(3) Using masking tape, temporarily mask Index píate. Using a pencii, draw a line on masked índex
píate located on flange on inlet housing assembly.
Page 402
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Protractor (LTCT4750) Installed

Figure 1
80-00-04 sSf3ora2
T53-L-703
I
0.665
:Í
V XA-73S.3eO
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Connector

Figure 2
80-00-04 slTsoZ
T53-L-703
Deleted
Figure 3
Page 405
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
D. Instan No. 1 Bearing and Face Type Seal Housing Assemblies
(1) Instad retaining ring into Seal housing. (See Figure4.)
(2) Measure Dimensión A. (See Figure 4.)
(3) Measure width of seal (Dimensión B). (See Figure 4.)
(4) Subtract Dimensión B from Dimensión A.

(5) Select two shims of equal thickness to be placed fore and aft of seal casing to obtain 0.000 to
0.005 inch loose fit.
NOTE: Instad seal so carbón element faces forward (face down).
(6) Instad one shim in housing and using suitable sieeve and arbor press, press seal into housing.
(7) Instad remaining shim and secute seal with retaining ring.
(8) Position No. 1 seal housing assembly (see 80-00-01,11, Figure 2) onto compressor front shaft.
Page 406
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
SHIMS
XA-738 392
Installing No. 1 Face Type Seal

Figure 4
Page 407
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(9) Instan face píate (10) onto compressor shaft, making sure sealing side mates to face seai.
NOTE: V-point on inner race will point forward when installed on engine. Both
inner race halves will have V-mark alined. V-markings are not used on
bearing P/N 1-300-663-01 and laten
(10) Instan bearing housing (6) intofixture LTCT4713.
(11) Using a suitabte sleeve and arbor press, press bearing (7) into bearing housing (6).
(12) Instan new locking cup (8) and nut (9) into bearing housmg.
(13) Using wrench LTCT487, tighten nut 75 to 125 foot-pounds torque. Align slots in nut with slots in
locking cup (8) and lock nut (9) by deforming locking cup (8) into slots 180 degrees apar!. Do
not shear locking cup.
(14) Align bolt boles in No. 1 bearing housing assembly with mating boles in seal housing assembiy
(11) .
(15) Instan two guide pins (1/4-28 UNE threads, 2.5 inches long) into seal housing assembly and
using driver LTCT3706, press bearing housing assembly into seal housing.
E. Instan Gear Nut and Seal Assembly
(1) Instan shim (see 80-00-01,4, Figure 2) of the same thickness asthe one removed during dis-
assembly.
(2) Instan gear (3) on first stage compressor disc assembly.
NOTE: Do not torque and lock nut and seal assembly at this time. This operation will
be performed atter gear pattern and backiash have been established.
(3) Instan new locking cup (2) and nut and seal assembly (1) hand tight.
F. Instan Compressor Rotor Assembly Into Inlet Housing Assembly
CALJTION: MAKE SURE THAT PACKING IS INSTALLED WITHOUT KINKING OR

TWISTING.
(1) Lubrícate new packing (see 80—00—Oí, 8, Figure 4) and install into groove of inlet housing (9).
(2) Record thickness of shim (7) for reference when compressor rotor axial clearances are checked.
Page 408
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
Honeyweil -™TENANCEMANUAt
(3) Instan shim (7) (of same thickness of that recorded during removal) and sieeve (6) on mlet
housing (9) and line up bolt holes.
NOTE: Size of shim (5) will be determmed by thickness of locating shim (7)
within plus or minus 0.002 inch.
(4) Instan shim (5) on inner fairing.
(5) Instan wave washer (4) on shim (5).
(6) Check the two gulde pins Installed in paragraph D. are still installed.
(7) Instan suitable adapter onto compressor assembly and attaoh hoist to litting eye.
(a) If instailing compressor rotor oniy, use adapter LTCT4558.
(b) If instailing compressor/combustorturbine assembly use sling LTCT14668.
(8) Lower compressor rotor assembly Into inlet housing assembly.

CAIJTION: TO MAKE SURE COMPLETE SEATING OF COMPRESSOR ROTOR,
SLAVE BOLTS MUST BE 0.25 INCH SHORTER THAN
BOLTS
INSTALLED AT FINAL ASSEMBLY.
(9) Remove guide pins and install six slave bolts, securing No. 1 bearing housing to mlet housing.
(10) Draw compressor rotor assembly into position with slave bolts until it is seated properiy. Tighten
bolts 70 to 75 inch- pounds torque.
(11) íf inlet housing was separated from engine without spiitting the compressor housing, install bolts
(see 80-00-01,8, 28. Figure 3), washers {21, 24, 29) and nuts (22, 23).
NOTE: Average of the three measured clearances shall be 0.0043 to 0.0047

inch.
(12) With engine in vertical position use feeler gage to measure radial clearance between sieeve (see
80-00-01,6, Figure 4) and No. 1 bearing housing assembly (see 80-00-01,5, Figure 2).
Measure at three places, 120 degrees apart. Clearance shall be between 0.0034 and 0.0056
inch. If mínimum clearances are not obtained, loosen torque on slave bolts and reposition rotor,
then retorque slave bolts.
Page 409
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
G. Inslali Compressor and Impeiier Housing Assemblies
CAUTION: COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY MUST NOT BE ROTATED

DURING INSTALUMION OF COMPRESSOR AND IMPELLER
HOUSING ASSEMBLIES. ROTATION OF COMPRESSOR
ROTOR
ASSEMBLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO IMPELLER
HOUSING
ASSEMBLIES OR TO COMPRESSOR BLADES.
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO COMPRESSOR ROTOR BLADES

OR
COMPRESSOR VANE ASSEMBLIES, GUIDE COMPRESSOR
AND
IMPELLER HOUSING ASSEMBLIES ONTO INLET HOUSING
AS-
SEMBLY IN AS STRAIGHT A UNE AS POSStBLE.
(1) Posilion lower half of compressor and impeiier housing assemblies on inlet housing assembiy.
Align matchmarks on inlet housing assembiy and compressor housing assembiy.
(2) Position upper half of compressor and impeiier housing assemblies on inlet housing assembiy.
NOTE: Do not lubrícate bolts installed m compressor housing halves.

(3) Align and secure upper and lower compressor housing assembiy halves (see 80-00-01, 12,
Figure 3) using four doweis (1), bolts (2), washers (35) and nut (34). Tighten nuts 40 to 45 inch-
pounds torque.
(4) Secure upper and lower compressor housing assembiy halves (12) with four bolts (4). eight
washers (3, 33) and four nuts (32). Tighten nuts 40 to 45 inch-pounds torque.
(5) Secure upper compressor housing half to inlet housing assembiy with four bolts (8), washers
(24) and nuts (23). Secure lower compressor housing half to inlet housing assembiy with four
bolts (28), washers (21,29) and nuts (22). Tighten nuts 70 to 95 inch-pounds torque.
H. fnstall Diffuser Housing
(1) Lower diffuser housing over compressor rotor assembiy to mate to impeiier housing assembly.
Align match marks on diffuser housing and compressor housing.
NOTE: Accomplish steps (2). (3), (4), (5) if air diffuser housing or inlet housing
has been replaced or if Índex markings are illegible.
Page 410
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
NOTE: Use of bolts in mounting pad holes is not necessary.
(2) Instan fixture LTCT526 by aligning fixture pads with 4 and 8 o’clock inlet housing mounting pads
and securing with lock bushings.
(3) Align 4 and 8 o’clock djffuser housing pads within fixture and engage locators (part of LTCT526).
Shitt diffuser housing until locators roíate freely.
(4) Secure diffuser housing to impeller housing with lOeach bolts (see 80-00-03, 2, Figure 1),
washers (3) and 2 each bolts (4) and washers (6). Bolt locations are illustrated (see 80-00-03,
Figure 1, Sheet 3). Tighten 90 to 100 inch-pounds torque.
(5) Remove aügnrnent fixture LTCT526.
I. Instan No. 2 Beanng and Seáis (See 72-51-00.)
J. Compressor Rotor Clearance Check

(1) With engine in vertical position, remove bolts, washers, nuts and hollow doweis, using puller
LTCT1218 and too) LTCT6740, íhat secure upper ha)f of axial compressor housing to lower half,
(2) Remove bolts (see 80-00-01,8, Figure 3), washers (24) and nuts (23) that secure upper half of
compressor housing to inlet housing.
(3) Remove bolts and washers that secure upper half of compressor housing to impeller housing.
(4) Remove upper half of compressor housing straight out until rotor blades are cleared.
(5) Remove bolts and washers that secure upper impeller housing to diffuser housing.
(6) Remove upper impeller housing by lowering impeller housing until free of diffuser housing.
80-00-04 sS
HoneyweII
CAUTIQN: IF CLEARANCES DIFFER FROM THOSE USTED. BUILD UP OF
ENGINE SHALL BE STOPPED AND CONDITION REMEDIED.
THESE
CLEARANCES DEPEND ON THICKNESS OF SHIM. ENGINE MUST
BE DISASSEMBLED TO THAT STAGE OF ASSEMBLY
IMMEDIATELY
BEFORE COMPRESSOR ROTOR INSTALLATION AND SHIM
MUST
BE MODIFIED. IF CLEARANCE SHOWS COMPRESSOR
ASSEMBLY
IS POSITIONED TOO FAR REARWARD. SHIM THICKNESS MUST
BE
REDUCED, IF CLEARANCE SHOWS COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY
IS
POSITIONED TOO FAR FORWARD THICKNESS OF SHIM MUST
BE
INCREASED.
(7) Using feeler gage, check radial and axial clearances between compressor rotor and housings.
(See Tabla 1.)
(8) When clearances have been established, instail and completely secure compressor housing
assemblies. {See 72-30-01.)
K. Accessory Drive Carrier Assembly Gear Pattern and Backiash Check
(1) Rotate engine to a horizontal position.
(2) Remove six slave bolts and instail hotder LTCT2048 on accessory drive pinion gear (see
80-00-01,3, Figure 2). Secure locking píate with six slave bolts. Using support assembly
LTCT911 and Socket wrench LTCT4002, tighten nut and seal assembly (1) to 320 foot- pounds
torque. Do notdeform locking cup (2).
(3) Remove holder LTCT2048 and six slave bolts. Reinstall six slave bolts.
NOTE: The accessory Orive carrier assembly is installed temporarily to establish

gear pattern and backiash.
(4) Coat accessory drive driven gear (12, Figure 6, Sheets 1,2 and 3) with gear marking compound
(72-00-00, 34A, Table 203). Coat gear (see 80-00-01,3, Figure 2) on compressor rotor as-
sembly with ¡ron blue pigment (72-00-00, 54, Table 203).
(5) Instail accessory drive carrier assembly in inlet housing and temporarily secure with bolts.
(6) Turn engine to vertical position.
NOTE: The gear pattern for gear (see 80-00-01,3, Figure 2) and accessory
drive driven gear (12. Figure 6) is governed by thickness of shim behind
gear (see 80-00-01,3, Figure 2). 11 gear pattern is unsatisfactory it
may be necessary to change thickness of shim (4).
(7) Rotate compressor rotor assembly several turns in each direction to obtain gear pattern of pinion
gear (see 80-00-01,3, Figure 2) and accessory drive driven gear (12, Figure 6, Sheets 1, 2 and
3).
Page412
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII ^'A'~_EMANUAL
Table 1, Compressor Rotor Clearances
See
Blueprint Clearance Clearance
Fig. 5
Min Max. Min
Index
TIp Clearances Dir Meas Max.
Radial 0.022 0.037 0.018 0.041 2

First disc biade to
compressor housing
Radial 0.033 0.035 3
Second disc biade to
0.022 0,018
compressor housing
Radial 0.033 0.024 0.034 4
Third disc biade to
0.022
compressor housing
Radia) 0.032 0.024 0.033 5
Fourth disc biade to
0.022
compressor housing
Radial 0.032 0.024 0.032
Fifth disc biade to
0.022 6
compressor housing
Radial 0.023 0.035 0,023 0.035 7
(mpeller to centrifuga!
housing - front (A
clearance)
Radial/Axial 0.037 0.053 0.037 0.053 8
Impeller to cenirifugal
housing - midpoint
(B clearance)
Axiaí 0.052 0.064 0.052 0.064 9
impeller to centrifuga!
housing - rear (C
clearance)
Impeller to diffuser Radial 0.036 0.044 0.036 0.050 10

Axial 0,040 0.151 0.040 0.151
First disc to inlet vane
1
shroud
First disc to first vane Axial 0.040 0.106 0,040 0.106 21

Axial 0.040 0.099 0.040 0.099
First vane to second
20
disc
Axial 0.040 0.098 0.040 0.098 19
Second disc to
second vane
Page413
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Table 1. Compressor Rotor Clearances
See
Fig. 5
Min Max. Min
Index
Tip Clearances Dir Meas Max.
Axial 0.040 0.105 0.040 0.105 18

Second vane to third
disc
Axial 0,040 0.098 0.040 0.098 17
Third disc to third
vane
Axial 0.040 0.107 0.040 0.107
Third vane to tourth
16
disc
Axial 0.040 0.097 0.040 0,097 15
Fourth disc to fourth
vane
Axial 0.040 0.105 0.040 0.105 14
Fourth vane to tifth
disc
Fitth disc to tifth vane Axial 0.040 0.101 0.029 0.101 13
Fifth vane to impeiler Axial 0.063 0.159 0.063 0.1591 11

Axial 0.034 0.074
Centrifugal housing to
0.000 0.000 12
tifth vane
Radial 0.032 0.034
First spacer to tirst
0.026 0,026 22
vane - tront
Radial 0.032 0.034 23
First spacer to tirst
0.026 0.026
vane - rear
Radial 0.032 0.034 24
Second spacer to
0.026 0.026
second vane - tront
Radial 0.032 0.034 25
Second spacer to
0.026 0.026
second vane - rear
Radial 0.032 0.034
Third spacer to third
0.026 0.026 26
vane - tront
Radial 0,032 0.034 27
Third spacer to third
0.026 0.026
vane - rear
Page 414
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Table 1. Compressor Rotor Clearances
See
Fig. 5
Min Max. Min
Index
Tip Clearances Dir Meas Max.
Radial 0.026 0.032 0.026 0.034 28

Fourth spacer to fourth
vane - front
Radial 0.032 0.034 29
Fourth spacer to fourth
0.026 0.026
vane - rear
Radial 0.032 0.034 30
Fifth spacer to fifth vane
0.026 0.026
- front
Radial 0.032 0.034 31
Fifth spacer to fifth vane
0.026 0.026
- rear
Page 415
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
XA'738-3S3
Compressor Rotor Clearance Locations

Figure 5
Page 416
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
T53L703122R0
(Pre SB T53-L-703-0093) Accessory Orive Carrier Assembíy

Figure 6 {Sheet 1 of 3)
Page 417
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII
(Post SB T53-L-703-0093, Pre SB T53-L-703-0110) Accessoty Orive Carrier Assembly

Figure 6 {Sheet 2)
Page 418
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
28 27
\ 54
53 25A
Vu/ / 24 23
A /,
Mé
T53L703143R1
(Post SB T53-L-703-0110) Accessory Orive Carrier Assembly

Figure 6 (Sheet 3)
80-00-04 sllfZl
T53-L-703
KEY TO FIGURE 6
2. RETAINING RING 21. PACKING

3. PACKING 22. STRAINER
4. OIL TRANSFER SEAL SLEEVE 23. NUT
5. OIL TRANSFER SUPPORT 24. NUT AND BOLT RETAINER
7. NUT (PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 25. GEAR (PRE SB T53-L-703-0102)
7A. NUT {POST SB T53-L-703-0093) 25A. GEAR (POST SB T53-L-703-0102)
8. KEYWASHER (PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 26. SPUR RING
8A. KEYWASHER 27. LOCK SPUR PIN
(POST SB T53-L-703-0093) 28. LOCK SPUR GEARSHAFT
9. ACCESSORY ORIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY 29. BALL BEARING
(POST SB T53-L-703-0110) 30. SPACER (PRE SB T53-L-703-0110)
10. RETAINING RING 31. NUT
(PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 32. NUT AND BOLT RETAINER
10A. RETAINING RING 33. GEAR
(POST SB T53-L-703-0093) 34. PIN
11. ACCESSORY ORIVE GEAR SHAFT STOP 35. SHAFT
(PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 36. BALLBEARING
11 A. ACCESSORY ORIVE GEAR SHAFT STOP 37. SPACER
(POST SB T53-L-703-0093) 39. CAP (PRE SB T53-L-703-0110)
12. ACCESSORY ORIVE GEAR 40. BOLT (PRE SB T53-L-703-0110)
(PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 41. TABWASHER (PRE SB T53-L-703-0110)
12A. ACCESSORY ORIVE GEAR 42. INSERT (PRE SB T53-L-703-0110)
(POST SB T53-L-703-0093) 42A. INSERT (POST SB T53-L-703-0110)
13. BALLBEARING 43. INSERT
(PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 44. PIN
13B. BALL BEARING (ALTN FOR ITEM 13) 45. PIN (PRE SB T53-L-703-0110)
(PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 46. PIN (PRESBT53-L-703-0110)
13C. BALLBEARING 46A. PIN (POSTSBT53-L-703-0110)
(POST SB T53-L~703-0093) 47. BUSHING
14. RING (PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 48. BUSHING (PRE SB T53-L-703-0110)
15. SPACER (PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 49. PLUG
16. BOLT (PRE SBT53-L-703-0093) 50. ACCESSORY GEAR CARRIER
16A. BOLT (POST SBT53-L-703-0093) 52. ACCESSORY GEAR CARRIER
17. BEARING LINER (POST SB T53-L-703-0110)
(PRE SB T53-L-703-0093) 53. DUPLEX BEARING
18. SHIM (PRE SB T53'L-703-0093) (POST SB T53-L-703-0110)
18A. SHIM (POST SB T53-L-703-0093) 54. SHIM (POST SBT53-L-703-0110)
19. COVER 55. BOLT (POST SBT53-L-703-0110)
20. SCREW 56. WASHER (POST SB T53-L-703-0110)
Page 420
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
Honeyivell MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T53-L-703
NOTE: Ouíer Une on llag of LTCT2099 is used íor accessory drive carrier
backiash check.
(8) Instan backiash gage LTCT2099 into accessory drive driven gear through shaft opening of inlet
housing assembiy. Set up dial indicator with magnetic base to contad flag of backiash gage.
(See Figure 7.)
(9) With backiash gage flag set at minimum end of backiash stroke, position dial indicafor to zero.
Using fingers, rotate flag back and forth. Amount of flag travel indicated on dial indicator is
backiash between gears. Backiash shall be between 0.006 and 0.012 inch.
(10 ) Remove backiash gage flag.

(11)
Turn engineto horizontal position.
(12 )
Remove accessory drive carrier assembiy from inlet housing assembiy and inspect gear pattern.
Use puller screws, if necessary.
(a) If pattern shows gear (see 80-00-01,3, Figure 2) is too far from accessory drive driven
gear (marks on toe of gear teeth) increase íhickness oí shim,
(b) If pattern shows gear (3) is too cióse to accessory drive driven gear (marks on heel of
gear), decrease thickness oí shim.
(13) If proper backiash is not obtained, remove and disassemble accessory drive carrier assembiy
and adjust shims. (See paragraph L.)
(14) Reassemble accessory drive carrier assembiy and reinstall into inlet housing assembiy.
(15) Repeat gear pattern and backiash check.
(16) Repeal preceding steps (1) through (15) for diagonally positioned accessory drive driven gear
(12, Figure 6).
(17) Remove accessory drive gear carrier assembiy from inlet housing assembiy. Use puller screws if
necessary.
T53-L-703
Accessory Orive Carrier Assembly Gear Backiash Check

Figure 7
Page 422
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
Honeywell
(18) Wash coloring from gears.
(19) Bend tabs of washers (8) into slots of nuts (7), lockwire bolts (16) and bend tabwashers (41),
(20) Using socket wrench LTCT4002 and support assembly LTCT911, tighten nut and seal assembly
(see 80-00-01, 1, Figure 2) 320 foot-pounds torque, Remove support assembly and wrench.
(21) Stake locking cup (2) to nut and seal assembly (1) at two places 180 degrees apart. Do not
shear cup.
L- Reshim Accessory Drive Carrier Assembly
(1) Remove bolts (16, Figure 6) that secure gear and bearing assemblies to carrier.
(2) Straighten tabwashers (41) and remove bolts (40) and tabwashers.
NOTE: Mark gear (12) to make sure it is reassembled in the same positionfrom
which it was removed.
(3) Remove gear and bearing assembly from carrier and place in holding fixture LTCT4996.
(4) Straighten washer (8). Using wrench LTCT2133 remove nut (7) and washer (8).
(5) Instan puller LTCT2028 on gear (12) and remove bearing and liner assembly. Remove puller.
(7) Position carrier with remainíng gear installed in holding fijcfure LTCT4996.
(8) Straighten tabs of washer (8). Using wrench LTCT2133, remove nut (7) and washer (8).
(9) Remove carrier from fixture.
(10) Remove three bolts (16) that secure bearing and liner assembly to the carrier.
(11) Mark gear (12) to make sure it is reassembled in the same position from which it was removed.
(12) Insta)) puller LTCT2028 on gear (12). Turn handle of puller and remove gear, Using soft faced
mallet, tap beanng and tiner assembly from carrier,
(14) Adjust thickness of shims (18) as required.
NOTE: Shims are made in 0.002 inch thick laminations.

(15) Using proper thickness of shim (18), install shim on bearing and liner assembly and install into
carrier. Secure with bolts (16). Tighten bolts 40 to 45 inch-pounds torque. Do not lockwire
bolts at this time.
(16) Using installing tool LTCT108 and arbor press, press gear (12), bearing (13) and spacer (15) into
beanng and liner assembly.
(17) Mount carrier in holding fixture LTCT4996.
Page 423
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MMNTENANCEMANUAL
(18) Instan washer (8) and nut (7). Tighten nut 275 to 300 inch-pounds torque, using wrench
LTCT2133.
NOTE: Do not bend tockwasher at this time.
(19) Using proper thickness shim (18), instail shim on bearing and liner assembiy.
(20) Using installing tool and arbor press, press gear (12), bearing (13) and spacer (15) into bearing
and liner assembly.
(21) instan gear and bearing assembiy into holding lixture LTCT4996, Instail keywasher (8) and nut
(7) . Tighten nut 275 to 300 inch-pounds torque. using wrench LTCT2133. Do not bend lock-
washer at this time. Remove from fixture.
(22) Position gear and bearing assembiy on carrier. Align boles in liner and shim with tapped holes in
carrier. Instail cap (39) and secure with tabwasher (41) and bolts (40). Tighten bolts 70 to 95
inch-pounds torque. Do not bend tabwashers at this time.
(23) Secure gear and bearing assembiy to carrier with bolts (16). Tighten bolts 40 to 45 inch-
pounds torque. Do not lockwire bolts at this time.
M. (Post SBT53-L-703-0110) Disassemble the Accessory Drive Carrier Assembiy
(1) Disassemble accessory drive carrier assembiy.
NOTE: Not all parts removed will required inspection. Oniy those parts used
during reassembly of the improved accessory drive carrier assembiy
require inspection. All parts required for assembiy are identified by part
number (Figure 6, Sheet 3.) Discard removed parts that are not
required.
(a) Establish pattern and backiash in accordance with Overhaul Manual procedures with the
exception of using shim (54) to position the N2 spur gear (25A) and using LTCT30966
backiash flag to check backiash.
NOTE: Gear face surtace variation should not exceed 0.005 inch TIR, must
be checked after assembiy is completed, and with gears loaded in
the backiash position.
(b) Check face runout of N2 spur gear (25A). Runout shall not exceed 0.005 inch. (See Figure
7A.)
(c) After backiash and pattern is estabiished, remove gear marking compound from gears us-
ing approved cleaning solution. Torque and lockwire bolts. (Refer to SPM, 286.2.)
(2) Instan NI drive gear assembiy (9) and flanged dúplex bearing (13C).
Page 424
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,^0^
NOTE: Shim (18A) may be spiit in one place between any two boit boles
for ease of assembiy. Shim thickness to be determined upon
installalion into engine.
(a) Using three bolts {16A), install flanged dúplex bearing (13C) and shim (18A) into carrier
housing (52). Jorque bolts.
NOTE: The flanged dúplex bearing (13C) for the NI dnve gear assembiy
(9) introduced by Service Bulletin T53-L-703-0093 must be
incorporated.
(b) Using LTCT30741 installation tool, press Ni drive gear assembiy (9) into flanged dúplex
bearing (13C).
(c) Mount accessory drive carrier assembiy into LTCT4996 holding fixture.
NOTE: Do not bend tabs of washer at this time.
(d) Instan washer (8A) and nut (7A). Jorque 275 to 300 inch-pounds.
(e) Establish pattern and backiash in accordance with Overhaul Manual procedures at the
engine build. (Referió Overhaul Manual, 290.3.)
(f) After backiash and pattern is established, remove gear marking compound from gears us-
ing approved cleaning solution. Jorque and lockwire bolts (16A). (Refer to SPM, 286.2.)
(3) Secure strainer (22), packing (21) and cover (19) with screws (20) and lockwire. (Referió SPM,
286.2.)
N. Test the gas turbine engine in accordance with overhaul manual. (Refer to Overhaul Manual, 290.3.)
Page425
80-00-04 Sept 30,/02
T53-L-703
Check Runout and Pin Installation (PostSB T53-L-703-0110)

Figure 7A
Page 426
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
o. Determine Mean PosiTion of Power Shaft
NOTE: This procedure must be accomplished when the compressor rotor is replaced,
or if original shim is lost.
(1) Instan locating bar LTCT153 across forward face of inlet housing.
(2) Pulí power shaft forward.
(3) Using vernier depth gage. measure distance from locating bar to forward end of power shaft.
Reoord dimensión.
(4) Push power shaft toward rear of engine. Repeat precedmg step (3).
(5) Add two dimensions obtained, then divide by two to obtam mean position.
NOTE: This dimensión is used during engine assembly to lócate power shaft
0. 020 to 0.025 inch forward of mean position.
(6) Reoord mean dimensión.
(7) Remove locating bar.
P. Instan Power Shaft Bearing Retainer

NOTE: Establish gear pattern and amount of backiash of accessory drive driven gears
before installation of power shaft bearing retainer. (See paragraph L.)
(1) Remove previously installed slave boits.
(2) Prior to bearing retainer installation apply shortening (72-00-00, 38, Table 203) to bearing.
Instan retainer onto LTCT14773- Position bearing retainer (see 80-00-01,7, Figure 1) onto
power shaft (8) and position in inlet housing with cutouts for accessory drive driven gears in
corred position. Tap end of LTCT14773 using a soft mallet to install retainer onto power shaft.
NOTE: Do not lubricate boits.
(3) Instan boits (4) and tabwashers (5) at the 6 o'olock position. Install boits (6). Tighten all boits 70
to 90 inch-pounds torque.
(4) Lock tabwashers on boits. Lockwire boits.
(5) Install ring (3) in groove on power shaft.
Page 427
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HOÍlGyi/Vdl T53-L-703
WARNING- TO PREVEN! INJURY TO PERSONNEL, HEAT PROTECTIVE

GLOVES MUSI BE WORN.
NOTE: 1{ combustor/turbine is installed. power turbine rotor must be pushed

forward while installing gear. If not installed, push forward on power
shaft while installing gear (2).
(6) Instan gear (2) mto installation too! LTCT4576, then heat gear in oven for 30 minutes at 300 to
400-'F (149 to 204°C). Remove gearfrom oven and quickiy install gear on power shaft splme,
seating it firmiy over ring.
(7) Allow gear to cooi and install new packing (1) in groove on gear (2).
(8) Atter installation oí gear (2), measure Irom forward face of power shaft to forward face oí gear.
Dimensión shall be 2.020 to 2.040 inches. (See Figure 8.)
(9) Install combustión chamber deflector, first gas producen turbine nozzle, first gas producen turbine
rotor, second gas producer turbine nozzle and second gas producen turbine rotor. (See
72-51-00.)
O. Install Combustor Turbine Assembiy
NOTE; If compressor rotor assembiy was not replaced, install combustor turbine
assembiy (see 72-40-00). 11 compressor assembiy was replaced, proceed as
follows.
Lubrication of power shaft bolt and installation of shims is not necessary at this
time.
(1) Install power shaft bolt into power shaft fingen tight to check cleanliness and condition of threads.
If any tightness or failure of shoulder to bottom on power shaft exists, deán or repair threads.
(2) Establish clearance between second stage gas producer cylinder and first stage power turbine
nozzle (Dimensión B, Figure 9) as follows:
(a) Rotate engine to vertical posttion.
Page 428
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
Gear to Power Shaft - Installation Dimensión

Figure 8
Page 429
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
X-73S-399
Determining Clearance Between Combustor Turbina Assembly and

Second Stage Gas Producer Turbina Rotor Assembly
Figure 9
Paga 430
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA,NTENANCEM*
NOTE: Position a pjece of 0.750 inch ground stock or parallel bar on
combustión chamber bolt hole flange, under each end of locating
bar, to prevent barfrom contacting inner lip of combustión
chamber Itner.
(b) Position locating bar LTCT153 over combustión chamber housing flange.
(c) Using depth micrometer, measure from bar io step at outer shroud of first stage power
turbine nozzle. (See Dimensión A, Figure 9.)
(d) Position location bar LTCT153 over second stage gas producer turbme rotor hub.
(e) Using depth micrometer, measure from bar to flange of diffuser housing. (See Dimensión
E, Figure 9.)
(0 Using depth micrometer, measure from bar to second stage gas producer cylinder. (See
Dimensión C, Figure 9.)
(g) Subtract Dimensión C from Dimensión E; result will be Dimensión D.
(h) Subtract Dimensión D from Dimensión A; result will be Dimensión B.
(i) Dimensión B shall be within 0.015 inch minimum to 0.0238 inch máximum.
(3) Establish clearance between second stage gas producer rotor and first stage power turbine
nozzie (Dimensión I, Figure 9) as follows:
NOTE: Position a piece of 0.750 inch ground stock or parallel bar on

combustión chamber bolt hole flange, under each end of locating
bar, to prevent bar from contacting inner lip of combustión
chamber liner.
(a) Position locating bar LTCT153 over combustión chamber housing flange.
(b) Using depth micrometer, measure from bar to inner shroud of first stage power turbine
nozzle. (See Dimensión F, Figure 9.)
(c) Position locating bar LTCT153 over second stage gas producer rotor hub.
(d) Using depth micrometer, measure trom bar to flange of diffuser housing. (See Dimensión
E, Figure 9.)
(e) Using depth micrometer, measure from bar to highest second stage gas producer blade
root. (See Dimensión G, Figure 9.)
(f) Subtract Dimensión G from Dimensión E; result will be Dimensión H. (See Figure 9.)
(g) Subtract Dimensión H from Dimensión F; result will be Dimensión 1. (See Figure 9.)
(h) Dimensión I shall be within 0.080 inch minimum to 0.225 inch máximum.
(4) Position combustor sling LTCT14668 to flange of diffuser support cone.
Page 431
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII -,NTENANCEMA«UAL
NOTE: If installing combustor turbine assembly while engine is in vertical
position, use lifting eye in center of adapter.
(5) Attach suitable hoist to lifting eye of adapter and mstall combustor turbine assembly on diffuser
housing assembly, with combustión chamber drain vaive located in the 6 o'clock position.
CAUTIQN: DELETED,
NOTE: Prior to mating, visually inspect to ensure power shaft aft spiines and
power turbine wheel internal spiines are deán and free of foreign
material. Do not lubrícate.
(6) Position mating marks as recorded when combustor turbine was removed. If mating marks were
not made at removal or if a new combustor section or a new power turbine rotor is installed, ac-
complishfollowing steps (7) and (8).
NOTE: Overhauled power turbine rotor may have spiines center punched two or
more times, depending on the number of times the rotor has been rebla-
ded. Use the mating mark with the greatest number of center punched
marks.
If a new combustor section or a new power turbine rotor is installed,

position mating marks in steps (7) and (8) 180 degrees apart during
mstallation.
(7) Check posilion of mating mark center punched on face of male spiine of power shaft. Using an
approved marker. mark position on outside diameter of power shaft spIine.
(8) Check position of mating mark center punched on face of female spiine on second stage power
turbine rotor. If not accomplished during assembly, mark position on outside diameter of shaft
using an approved marker.
NOTE: Reinstall all brackets at areas where indicated during removal.
(9) Using Socket wrench or equivalent, instal! bolts (2, Figure 10) and nuts (1) that secure combustor
turbine assembly (3) to diffuser housing. Remove combustor sling LTCT14668.
(10) Instan fixture LTCT962 into rear of combustor turbine assembly and engage tangs of locking
píate assembly with slots in bearing retainer nut. Secure píate assembly with three bolts.
(11) Apply light coating of anti-seize compound (72- 00-00, 15, Table 203) to threads of power
shaft bolt (5). Instan power shaft bolt (5) with shims into rear of turbine rotor and power shaft.
(12) Using wrench LTCT506, tighten bolt 195 to 200 inch-pounds torque.
Page 432
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
333-
1ft4
X-1
CombustorTurbine Assembly and Bracket Locations

Page 433
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
19
Combustor Turbine Assembly and Bracket Locations

Figure 10 (Sheet2)
80-00-04 sSS
HoneyweII -.„EMANU
KEY ro FIGURE 10
1. NUT 11. TABWASHE

2. BOLT 12. R
BOLT
3. COMBUSTOR TURBINE ASSEMBLY 13. BRACKET
4. SHIM 14. BRACKET
5. POWER SHAFT BOLT 15. BRACKET
6. NUT 16. BRACKET
7. SEAL 17. BRACKET
8. COVER 18. BRACKET
9. BOLT 19. BRACKET
10. COVER
Page 435
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
T53-L-703
(13) Apply light coating of anti-seize compound (72-00-00,15, Table 203) to nut (6). Using Socket
wrench LTCT505, install and lighten nut lOOfoot-poundstorque.
(14) Turn engine to horizontal position and install locating bar LTCT153 across forward face of inlet
housing.
(15) Using vernier depth gage, measure distance from locating bar to forward end of power shatt.
Compute thickness of shim (4) required to position power shaft 0.020 to 0.025 inch fon^vard of its
mean position within compressor rotor assembiy. (See paragraph O. to determine mean position
of power shatt)
CAUTIQN: NUMBER OF SHIMS SHALL NOT EXCEED THREE. USE OF AN

EXCESSIVE NUMBER OF SHIMS CAN RESULT IN A COCKED BOLT
AND CAUSE EXCESSIVE POV\/ER TURBINE VIBRATION. MAKE
SURE SHIMS ARE FLAT AGAINST SHOULDER WITHIN ROTOR
SHAFT BEFORE INSTALLING POWER SHAFT BOLT. SHIMS MAY BE
HELO IN PLACE WITH SHORTENING COMPOUND.
(16) Remove nut (6) and power shaft bolt (5) and install shims (4) of proper thickness in the second
power turbine rotor shaft.
(17) Apply light coating of anti-seize compound to threads of power shaft bolt (5).
(18) Using wrench LTCT506, tighten bolt 195 to 200 inch-pounds torque.
(19) Apply light coating of anti-seize compound to threads of internal wrenching nut (6).
Using wrench LTCT505, install nut (6). Tighten nut to 100 foot-pounds torque. Loosen and
(20) remove nut. Retighten power shaft bolt (5) 195to 200 inch-pounds torque. Install nut (6) and
tighten to 50 foot-pounds torque.
Recheck to assure proper location of power shaft. (See step (15).)

(21)
Remove fi)rture LTCT962.
(22))
Using end of suitably rounded punch, or the side of tapered dhft punch, deform collar of nut (6)
(23) Into power turbine shaft in three places, 120 degrees apart.
Visually inspect nut for cracks that may have occurred as a result of deformation. If nut is
(24) cracked, it must be replaced.
Make sure groove in cover (8) is deán. Coat groove of cover with shortening compound to
(25) facilitate holding seal in groove during assembiy.
Install new seal (7) in groove of cover (8) and install cover. Apply light coating of anti-seize
(26) compound to threads of bolts. Install botts (9) and tighten as required. Lockwire bolts using
lockwire.
Check clearance cover to exhaust diffuser. (See 72-40-00, paragraph 1 .A. (5).)
(27)
Position cover (10) over cover (8), aligning slots in both covers.
(28)
Page 436
80-00-04 Sept 30/02
HoneyweII MA'NTENANCEMANUAL
NOTE: Tab with lockwire hole must tace aft.
(29) Instan tabwasher (11) into slots of covers. Ittab does not til into stots, file cover (10) to obtain a
snug fit.
(30) Instan bolt (12) while hotding tablock in ahgnment, Tighten bott 70 to 95 inch-pounds torque,
CAUTION: AFTER TIGHTENING BOLT INSPECT TABLOCK TO WAKE SURE

PROPER ENGAGEMENT IN SLOTS OF COVERS (8) AND (10).
(31) Lockwire tablock to bolt.
R. Instan Accessory Orive Carrier Assembly
(1) Establish gear pattern and amount of backiash of accessory drive driven gears before installmg
accessory drive carrier. (See paragraph K.) Install accessory drive carrier assembly. (See
72-10-01.)
S. Instan Oil Transfer Support Assembly (See 72-10-01.)
T. Insta)) Oulput Reduction Carrier and Gear Assembly and Sun Gearshatt (See 72-10-01.)
U. Instan Overspeed Governor and Tachometer Drive Assembly (See 72-60-02.)
V. Instail Accessory Drive Gearbox (See 72-60-01.)
W. Instan All Piping and Accessories Use procedures contained in applicable sections.
X. Engine Test Requirements: If compressor rotor assembly or variable inlet guide vane assembly was
replaced, engine must be forwarded to an HoneyweII Engines authorized engtne test facitity for
performance testing.
Y. Fuel Control Test Requirement: Adjustment/Test Fuel Control Assembly and Variable Inlet Guide Vane
Assembly (See 73-20-01 and 75-30-01.)
Page 437/438
80-00-04 Sept 30/02

T53-L-703 MM

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

T53-L-703 MM

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

HoneyweII

ENGINE PART NO ENGINE MODELNQ. AIRCRAFT APPLICATION

1-000-060-23 T53-L-703 Bell AH-1 Series

REVtSION NO. 2 DATED SEPTEMBER 30. 2002

Inquires regarding distribution of this publication should be directed to:

Inquires of a technical nature regarding this publication should be directed to:

All figure keys revised from single column to double column.

All list of effective pages revised to reflect changed pages.

All consumables were checked and updated as required.

Chaoter/Section/Pages Descriotion of Chanae

Record of Revisions Updated to reflect current revisión.

Record of Temporary Revisions Updated to reflect current temporary revisions.

Chaoter/Section/Panes Descriníion nf Ohanae

Service Bulletin List Updated to reflect current builetins.

Pages 7 and 8 incorporated TR 19 and 20.

Page 10 Incorporated TR 61.

Added NOTE, changed tool kit part number and con-

Page 16 Revised step (5).

Pages 26 through 40 Added new procedures.

Page 18 Revised Figure 8.

Page 117 Editorial changeto step D.(2)(b).

Page 201 Deleted tool number in Table 201.

Page 217 Incorporated TR 26 altérnate cleaning Solutions.

Page 305 Revised part number is step (3)(a)-

REPORT NO. 290.2-HIGHLIGHTS

Chanter/Sfirtinn/PaoRs Descriotion of Channe

Editorial changes to step l.(1)(e) and added altérnate

Page 401 Revised Item reference in NOTE.

Page 405 Editorial changes to steps (15) and (19).

Page 411 Revised torque valué in step (12).

Pages 601 through 614 and 616 Incorporated TR 3.

Pages 618, 619 and 620 Incorporated TR 9.

Page 621 Added reference to step (6)(a).

Pages 623 and 624 Incorporated TR 44,

Pages 629 and 630 Incorporated TR 63.

Page 701 Incorporated TR 45.

Page 702 Incorporated TR 46.

Page 703 Incorporated TR 47.

Page 705 Incorporated TR 48.

Revised step (7)(b). Incorporated correct type of

Page 208 Incorporated 3.A-(1)(d) revised step procedures.

Chaoter/Sertinn/Paofis Desr.rinlinn of Channe

Page 211 Incorporated TR 59 and revised step (e).

Page 216 Incorporated TR 24.

Page 222 Revised step (c)4.

Page 224 Revised step (4),

Page 226 Revised step (9).

Page 227 Revised blade limits in Figure 213.

Pages 207 and 209 Incorporated TR 23 and deleted associated figures.

Page 211 Revised text within first and third CAUTION.

Page 213 Revised step B.(28).

Page 216 Incorporated TR 4.

Page 217 Incorporated TR 5 to reflect changes to Figure 209.

Page 218 Incorporated TR 5.

Page 220 Revised step (I0)(f).

Page 226 Revised text in CAUTION.

Page 227 Deleted steps (49) and (50). Incorporated TR 7.

Page 230 Revised step (8).

Chaoter/Section/Panes Descriotion of Chanae

Page 202 Revised Fjgure 201.

Page 208 Deleted Figure 204.

Page 209 Revised Figure 205 tille part number.

Page 210 Deleted Figure 206.

Page 204 Deleted Figure 203 and paragraph 3.A.